Proper help support for EIEIO classes and methods.
[bpt/emacs.git] / doc / lispintro / emacs-lisp-intro.texi
1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
2 @comment %**start of header
3 @setfilename ../../info/eintr
4 @c setfilename emacs-lisp-intro.info
5 @c sethtmlfilename emacs-lisp-intro.html
6 @settitle Programming in Emacs Lisp
7 @documentencoding UTF-8
8 @syncodeindex vr cp
9 @syncodeindex fn cp
10 @finalout
11
12 @include emacsver.texi
13
14 @c ================ How to Print a Book in Various Sizes ================
15
16 @c This book can be printed in any of three different sizes.
17 @c Set the following @-commands appropriately.
18
19 @c 7 by 9.25 inches:
20 @c @smallbook
21 @c @clear largebook
22
23 @c 8.5 by 11 inches:
24 @c @c smallbook
25 @c @set largebook
26
27 @c European A4 size paper:
28 @c @c smallbook
29 @c @afourpaper
30 @c @set largebook
31
32 @c (Note: if you edit the book so as to change the length of the
33 @c table of contents, you may have to change the value of `pageno' below.)
34
35 @c <<<< For hard copy printing, this file is now
36 @c set for smallbook, which works for all sizes
37 @c of paper, and with PostScript figures >>>>
38
39 @set smallbook
40 @ifset smallbook
41 @smallbook
42 @clear largebook
43 @end ifset
44
45 @c ================ Included Figures ================
46
47 @c If you clear this, the figures will be printed as ASCII diagrams
48 @c rather than PostScript/PDF.
49 @c (This is not relevant to Info, since Info only handles ASCII.)
50 @set print-postscript-figures
51 @c clear print-postscript-figures
52
53 @comment %**end of header
54
55 @c per rms and peterb, use 10pt fonts for the main text, mostly to
56 @c save on paper cost.
57 @c Do this inside @tex for now, so current makeinfo does not complain.
58 @tex
59 @ifset smallbook
60 @fonttextsize 10
61
62 @end ifset
63 \global\hbadness=6666 % don't worry about not-too-underfull boxes
64 @end tex
65
66 @c These refer to the printed book sold by the FSF.
67 @set edition-number 3.10
68 @set update-date 28 October 2009
69
70 @c For next or subsequent edition:
71 @c create function using with-output-to-temp-buffer
72 @c create a major mode, with keymaps
73 @c run an asynchronous process, like grep or diff
74
75 @c For 8.5 by 11 inch format: do not use such a small amount of
76 @c whitespace between paragraphs as smallbook format
77 @ifset largebook
78 @tex
79 \global\parskip 6pt plus 1pt
80 @end tex
81 @end ifset
82
83 @c For all sized formats: print within-book cross
84 @c reference with ``...'' rather than [...]
85
86 @c This works with the texinfo.tex file, version 2003-05-04.08,
87 @c in the Texinfo version 4.6 of the 2003 Jun 13 distribution.
88
89 @tex
90 \if \xrefprintnodename
91 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{\unskip, ``#1''}
92 \else
93 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{ ``#1''}
94 \fi
95 % \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{, ``#1''}
96 @end tex
97
98 @c ----------------------------------------------------
99
100 @dircategory Emacs lisp
101 @direntry
102 * Emacs Lisp Intro: (eintr). A simple introduction to Emacs Lisp programming.
103 @end direntry
104
105 @copying
106 This is an @cite{Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp}, for
107 people who are not programmers.
108 @sp 1
109 @iftex
110 Edition @value{edition-number}, @value{update-date}
111 @end iftex
112 @ifnottex
113 Distributed with Emacs version @value{EMACSVER}.
114 @end ifnottex
115 @sp 1
116 Copyright @copyright{} 1990--1995, 1997, 2001--2014 Free Software
117 Foundation, Inc.
118 @sp 1
119
120 @iftex
121 Published by the:@*
122
123 GNU Press, @hfill @uref{http://www.fsf.org/licensing/gnu-press/}@*
124 a division of the @hfill email: @email{sales@@fsf.org}@*
125 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @hfill Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942@*
126 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor @hfill Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652@*
127 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
128 @end iftex
129
130 @ifnottex
131 Printed copies available from @uref{http://shop.fsf.org/}. Published by:
132
133 @example
134 GNU Press, http://www.fsf.org/licensing/gnu-press/
135 a division of the email: sales@@fsf.org
136 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942
137 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652
138 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
139 @end example
140 @end ifnottex
141
142 @sp 1
143 ISBN 1-882114-43-4
144
145 @quotation
146 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
147 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
148 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; there
149 being no Invariant Section, with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU
150 Manual'', and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of
151 the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free
152 Documentation License''.
153
154 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have the freedom to
155 copy and modify this GNU manual. Buying copies from the FSF
156 supports it in developing GNU and promoting software freedom.''
157 @end quotation
158 @end copying
159
160 @c half title; two lines here, so do not use `shorttitlepage'
161 @tex
162 {\begingroup%
163 \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{An Introduction to}%
164 \endgroup}%
165 {\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 0.25in \chaprm%
166 \centerline{Programming in Emacs Lisp}%
167 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
168 @end tex
169
170 @titlepage
171 @sp 6
172 @center @titlefont{An Introduction to}
173 @sp 2
174 @center @titlefont{Programming in Emacs Lisp}
175 @sp 2
176 @center Revised Third Edition
177 @sp 4
178 @center by Robert J. Chassell
179
180 @page
181 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
182 @insertcopying
183 @end titlepage
184
185 @iftex
186 @headings off
187 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
188 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
189 @end iftex
190
191 @ifnothtml
192 @c Keep T.O.C. short by tightening up for largebook
193 @ifset largebook
194 @tex
195 \global\parskip 2pt plus 1pt
196 \global\advance\baselineskip by -1pt
197 @end tex
198 @end ifset
199 @end ifnothtml
200
201 @shortcontents
202 @contents
203
204 @ifnottex
205 @node Top
206 @top An Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp
207
208 @ifset WWW_GNU_ORG
209 @html
210 <p>The homepage for GNU Emacs is at
211 <a href="/software/emacs/">http://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/</a>.<br>
212 To view this manual in other formats, click
213 <a href="/software/emacs/manual/eintr.html">here</a>.
214 @end html
215 @end ifset
216
217 @insertcopying
218
219 This master menu first lists each chapter and index; then it lists
220 every node in every chapter.
221 @end ifnottex
222
223 @c >>>> Set pageno appropriately <<<<
224
225 @c The first page of the Preface is a roman numeral; it is the first
226 @c right handed page after the Table of Contents; hence the following
227 @c setting must be for an odd negative number.
228
229 @c iftex
230 @c global@pageno = -11
231 @c end iftex
232
233 @set COUNT-WORDS count-words-example
234 @c Length of variable name chosen so that things still line up when expanded.
235
236 @menu
237 * Preface:: What to look for.
238 * List Processing:: What is Lisp?
239 * Practicing Evaluation:: Running several programs.
240 * Writing Defuns:: How to write function definitions.
241 * Buffer Walk Through:: Exploring a few buffer-related functions.
242 * More Complex:: A few, even more complex functions.
243 * Narrowing & Widening:: Restricting your and Emacs attention to
244 a region.
245 * car cdr & cons:: Fundamental functions in Lisp.
246 * Cutting & Storing Text:: Removing text and saving it.
247 * List Implementation:: How lists are implemented in the computer.
248 * Yanking:: Pasting stored text.
249 * Loops & Recursion:: How to repeat a process.
250 * Regexp Search:: Regular expression searches.
251 * Counting Words:: A review of repetition and regexps.
252 * Words in a defun:: Counting words in a @code{defun}.
253 * Readying a Graph:: A prototype graph printing function.
254 * Emacs Initialization:: How to write a @file{.emacs} file.
255 * Debugging:: How to run the Emacs Lisp debuggers.
256 * Conclusion:: Now you have the basics.
257 * the-the:: An appendix: how to find reduplicated words.
258 * Kill Ring:: An appendix: how the kill ring works.
259 * Full Graph:: How to create a graph with labeled axes.
260 * Free Software and Free Manuals::
261 * GNU Free Documentation License::
262 * Index::
263 * About the Author::
264
265 @detailmenu
266 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
267
268 Preface
269
270 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
271 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
272 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
273 * Lisp History::
274 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
275 * Thank You::
276
277 List Processing
278
279 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
280 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
281 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
282 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
283 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
284 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
285 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
286 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
287 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
288 * Summary:: The major points.
289 * Error Message Exercises::
290
291 Lisp Lists
292
293 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
294 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
295 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
296 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
297
298 The Lisp Interpreter
299
300 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
301 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
302
303 Evaluation
304
305 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
306 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
307
308 Variables
309
310 * fill-column Example::
311 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
312 without a function.
313 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
314
315 Arguments
316
317 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
318 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
319 of a variable or list.
320 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
321 variable number of arguments.
322 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
323 to a function.
324 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
325
326 Setting the Value of a Variable
327
328 * Using set:: Setting values.
329 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
330 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
331
332 Practicing Evaluation
333
334 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
335 causes evaluation.
336 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
337 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
338 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
339 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
340 the buffer.
341 * Evaluation Exercise::
342
343 How To Write Function Definitions
344
345 * Primitive Functions::
346 * defun:: The @code{defun} macro.
347 * Install:: Install a function definition.
348 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
349 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
350 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
351 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
352 * if:: What if?
353 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
354 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
355 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point, mark, and buffer.
356 * Review::
357 * defun Exercises::
358
359 Install a Function Definition
360
361 * Effect of installation::
362 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
363
364 Make a Function Interactive
365
366 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
367 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
368
369 @code{let}
370
371 * Prevent confusion::
372 * Parts of let Expression::
373 * Sample let Expression::
374 * Uninitialized let Variables::
375
376 The @code{if} Special Form
377
378 * if in more detail::
379 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
380
381 Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
382
383 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
384
385 @code{save-excursion}
386
387 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
388 * Template for save-excursion::
389
390 A Few Buffer--Related Functions
391
392 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
393 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
394 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
395 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
396 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
397 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
398 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
399 * Buffer Exercises::
400
401 The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
402
403 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
404 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
405
406 The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
407
408 * append-to-buffer overview::
409 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
410 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
411 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
412
413 A Few More Complex Functions
414
415 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
416 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
417 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
418 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
419 * Second Buffer Related Review::
420 * optional Exercise::
421
422 The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
423
424 * insert-buffer code::
425 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
426 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
427 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
428 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
429 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
430 * New insert-buffer::
431
432 The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
433
434 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
435 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
436
437 Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
438
439 * Optional Arguments::
440 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
441 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
442
443 @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
444
445 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
446 * Large buffer case::
447 * Small buffer case::
448
449 Narrowing and Widening
450
451 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
452 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
453 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
454 * narrow Exercise::
455
456 @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
457
458 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
459 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
460 * cons:: Constructing a list.
461 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
462 * nth::
463 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
464 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
465 * cons Exercise::
466
467 @code{cons}
468
469 * Build a list::
470 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
471
472 Cutting and Storing Text
473
474 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
475 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
476 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
477 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
478 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
479 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
480 * cons & search-fwd Review::
481 * search Exercises::
482
483 @code{zap-to-char}
484
485 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
486 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
487 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
488 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
489 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
490 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
491
492 @code{kill-region}
493
494 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
495 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
496 * Lisp macro::
497
498 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
499
500 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
501 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
502
503 The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
504
505 * last-command & this-command::
506 * kill-append function::
507 * kill-new function::
508
509 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
510
511 * See variable current value::
512 * defvar and asterisk::
513
514 How Lists are Implemented
515
516 * Lists diagrammed::
517 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
518 * List Exercise::
519
520 Yanking Text Back
521
522 * Kill Ring Overview::
523 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
524 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
525
526 Loops and Recursion
527
528 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
529 * dolist dotimes::
530 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
531 * Looping exercise::
532
533 @code{while}
534
535 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
536 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
537 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
538 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
539 * Incrementing Loop Details::
540 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
541
542 Details of an Incrementing Loop
543
544 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
545 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
546 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
547
548 Loop with a Decrementing Counter
549
550 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
551 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
552 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
553
554 Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
555
556 * dolist::
557 * dotimes::
558
559 Recursion
560
561 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
562 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
563 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
564 * Recursive triangle function::
565 * Recursion with cond::
566 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
567 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
568 * No deferment solution::
569
570 Recursion in Place of a Counter
571
572 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
573 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
574
575 Recursive Patterns
576
577 * Every::
578 * Accumulate::
579 * Keep::
580
581 Regular Expression Searches
582
583 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
584 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
585 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
586 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
587 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
588 * Regexp Review::
589 * re-search Exercises::
590
591 @code{forward-sentence}
592
593 * Complete forward-sentence::
594 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
595 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
596
597 @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
598
599 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
600 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
601 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
602
603 Counting: Repetition and Regexps
604
605 * Why Count Words::
606 * @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
607 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
608 * Counting Exercise::
609
610 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} Function
611
612 * Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
613 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
614
615 Counting Words in a @code{defun}
616
617 * Divide and Conquer::
618 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
619 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
620 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
621 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
622 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
623 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
624 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
625 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
626 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
627
628 Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
629
630 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
631 * append:: Attach one list to another.
632
633 Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
634
635 * Data for Display in Detail::
636 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
637 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
638 * Counting function definitions::
639
640 Readying a Graph
641
642 * Columns of a graph::
643 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
644 * recursive-graph-body-print::
645 * Printed Axes::
646 * Line Graph Exercise::
647
648 Your @file{.emacs} File
649
650 * Default Configuration::
651 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
652 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
653 * Beginning init File:: How to write a @file{.emacs} init file.
654 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
655 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
656 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
657 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
658 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
659 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
660 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
661 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
662 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
663 * Miscellaneous::
664 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
665
666 Debugging
667
668 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
669 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
670 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
671 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
672 * Debugging Exercises::
673
674 Handling the Kill Ring
675
676 * What the Kill Ring Does::
677 * current-kill::
678 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
679 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
680 * ring file::
681
682 The @code{current-kill} Function
683
684 * Code for current-kill::
685 * Understanding current-kill::
686
687 @code{current-kill} in Outline
688
689 * Body of current-kill::
690 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
691 * Determining the Element::
692
693 A Graph with Labeled Axes
694
695 * Labeled Example::
696 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
697 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
698 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
699 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
700
701 The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
702
703 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
704 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
705 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
706 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
707 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
708 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
709
710 The @code{print-X-axis} Function
711
712 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
713 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
714
715 Printing the Whole Graph
716
717 * The final version:: A few changes.
718 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
719 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
720 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
721 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
722 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
723 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
724
725 @end detailmenu
726 @end menu
727
728 @node Preface
729 @unnumbered Preface
730
731 Most of the GNU Emacs integrated environment is written in the programming
732 language called Emacs Lisp. The code written in this programming
733 language is the software---the sets of instructions---that tell the
734 computer what to do when you give it commands. Emacs is designed so
735 that you can write new code in Emacs Lisp and easily install it as an
736 extension to the editor.
737
738 (GNU Emacs is sometimes called an ``extensible editor'', but it does
739 much more than provide editing capabilities. It is better to refer to
740 Emacs as an ``extensible computing environment''. However, that
741 phrase is quite a mouthful. It is easier to refer to Emacs simply as
742 an editor. Moreover, everything you do in Emacs---find the Mayan date
743 and phases of the moon, simplify polynomials, debug code, manage
744 files, read letters, write books---all these activities are kinds of
745 editing in the most general sense of the word.)
746
747 @menu
748 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
749 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
750 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
751 * Lisp History::
752 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
753 * Thank You::
754 @end menu
755
756 @ifnottex
757 @node Why
758 @unnumberedsec Why Study Emacs Lisp?
759 @end ifnottex
760
761 Although Emacs Lisp is usually thought of in association only with Emacs,
762 it is a full computer programming language. You can use Emacs Lisp as
763 you would any other programming language.
764
765 Perhaps you want to understand programming; perhaps you want to extend
766 Emacs; or perhaps you want to become a programmer. This introduction to
767 Emacs Lisp is designed to get you started: to guide you in learning the
768 fundamentals of programming, and more importantly, to show you how you
769 can teach yourself to go further.
770
771 @node On Reading this Text
772 @unnumberedsec On Reading this Text
773
774 All through this document, you will see little sample programs you can
775 run inside of Emacs. If you read this document in Info inside of GNU
776 Emacs, you can run the programs as they appear. (This is easy to do and
777 is explained when the examples are presented.) Alternatively, you can
778 read this introduction as a printed book while sitting beside a computer
779 running Emacs. (This is what I like to do; I like printed books.) If
780 you don't have a running Emacs beside you, you can still read this book,
781 but in this case, it is best to treat it as a novel or as a travel guide
782 to a country not yet visited: interesting, but not the same as being
783 there.
784
785 Much of this introduction is dedicated to walkthroughs or guided tours
786 of code used in GNU Emacs. These tours are designed for two purposes:
787 first, to give you familiarity with real, working code (code you use
788 every day); and, second, to give you familiarity with the way Emacs
789 works. It is interesting to see how a working environment is
790 implemented.
791 Also, I
792 hope that you will pick up the habit of browsing through source code.
793 You can learn from it and mine it for ideas. Having GNU Emacs is like
794 having a dragon's cave of treasures.
795
796 In addition to learning about Emacs as an editor and Emacs Lisp as a
797 programming language, the examples and guided tours will give you an
798 opportunity to get acquainted with Emacs as a Lisp programming
799 environment. GNU Emacs supports programming and provides tools that
800 you will want to become comfortable using, such as @kbd{M-.} (the key
801 which invokes the @code{find-tag} command). You will also learn about
802 buffers and other objects that are part of the environment.
803 Learning about these features of Emacs is like learning new routes
804 around your home town.
805
806 @ignore
807 In addition, I have written several programs as extended examples.
808 Although these are examples, the programs are real. I use them.
809 Other people use them. You may use them. Beyond the fragments of
810 programs used for illustrations, there is very little in here that is
811 `just for teaching purposes'; what you see is used. This is a great
812 advantage of Emacs Lisp: it is easy to learn to use it for work.
813 @end ignore
814
815 Finally, I hope to convey some of the skills for using Emacs to
816 learn aspects of programming that you don't know. You can often use
817 Emacs to help you understand what puzzles you or to find out how to do
818 something new. This self-reliance is not only a pleasure, but an
819 advantage.
820
821 @node Who You Are
822 @unnumberedsec For Whom This is Written
823
824 This text is written as an elementary introduction for people who are
825 not programmers. If you are a programmer, you may not be satisfied with
826 this primer. The reason is that you may have become expert at reading
827 reference manuals and be put off by the way this text is organized.
828
829 An expert programmer who reviewed this text said to me:
830
831 @quotation
832 @i{I prefer to learn from reference manuals. I ``dive into'' each
833 paragraph, and ``come up for air'' between paragraphs.}
834
835 @i{When I get to the end of a paragraph, I assume that that subject is
836 done, finished, that I know everything I need (with the
837 possible exception of the case when the next paragraph starts talking
838 about it in more detail). I expect that a well written reference manual
839 will not have a lot of redundancy, and that it will have excellent
840 pointers to the (one) place where the information I want is.}
841 @end quotation
842
843 This introduction is not written for this person!
844
845 Firstly, I try to say everything at least three times: first, to
846 introduce it; second, to show it in context; and third, to show it in a
847 different context, or to review it.
848
849 Secondly, I hardly ever put all the information about a subject in one
850 place, much less in one paragraph. To my way of thinking, that imposes
851 too heavy a burden on the reader. Instead I try to explain only what
852 you need to know at the time. (Sometimes I include a little extra
853 information so you won't be surprised later when the additional
854 information is formally introduced.)
855
856 When you read this text, you are not expected to learn everything the
857 first time. Frequently, you need only make, as it were, a `nodding
858 acquaintance' with some of the items mentioned. My hope is that I have
859 structured the text and given you enough hints that you will be alert to
860 what is important, and concentrate on it.
861
862 You will need to ``dive into'' some paragraphs; there is no other way
863 to read them. But I have tried to keep down the number of such
864 paragraphs. This book is intended as an approachable hill, rather than
865 as a daunting mountain.
866
867 This introduction to @cite{Programming in Emacs Lisp} has a companion
868 document,
869 @iftex
870 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
871 @end iftex
872 @ifnottex
873 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
874 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
875 @end ifnottex
876 The reference manual has more detail than this introduction. In the
877 reference manual, all the information about one topic is concentrated
878 in one place. You should turn to it if you are like the programmer
879 quoted above. And, of course, after you have read this
880 @cite{Introduction}, you will find the @cite{Reference Manual} useful
881 when you are writing your own programs.
882
883 @node Lisp History
884 @unnumberedsec Lisp History
885 @cindex Lisp history
886
887 Lisp was first developed in the late 1950s at the Massachusetts
888 Institute of Technology for research in artificial intelligence. The
889 great power of the Lisp language makes it superior for other purposes as
890 well, such as writing editor commands and integrated environments.
891
892 @cindex Maclisp
893 @cindex Common Lisp
894 GNU Emacs Lisp is largely inspired by Maclisp, which was written at MIT
895 in the 1960s. It is somewhat inspired by Common Lisp, which became a
896 standard in the 1980s. However, Emacs Lisp is much simpler than Common
897 Lisp. (The standard Emacs distribution contains an optional extensions
898 file, @file{cl.el}, that adds many Common Lisp features to Emacs Lisp.)
899
900 @node Note for Novices
901 @unnumberedsec A Note for Novices
902
903 If you don't know GNU Emacs, you can still read this document
904 profitably. However, I recommend you learn Emacs, if only to learn to
905 move around your computer screen. You can teach yourself how to use
906 Emacs with the on-line tutorial. To use it, type @kbd{C-h t}. (This
907 means you press and release the @key{CTRL} key and the @kbd{h} at the
908 same time, and then press and release @kbd{t}.)
909
910 Also, I often refer to one of Emacs's standard commands by listing the
911 keys which you press to invoke the command and then giving the name of
912 the command in parentheses, like this: @kbd{M-C-\}
913 (@code{indent-region}). What this means is that the
914 @code{indent-region} command is customarily invoked by typing
915 @kbd{M-C-\}. (You can, if you wish, change the keys that are typed to
916 invoke the command; this is called @dfn{rebinding}. @xref{Keymaps, ,
917 Keymaps}.) The abbreviation @kbd{M-C-\} means that you type your
918 @key{META} key, @key{CTRL} key and @key{\} key all at the same time.
919 (On many modern keyboards the @key{META} key is labeled
920 @key{ALT}.)
921 Sometimes a combination like this is called a keychord, since it is
922 similar to the way you play a chord on a piano. If your keyboard does
923 not have a @key{META} key, the @key{ESC} key prefix is used in place
924 of it. In this case, @kbd{M-C-\} means that you press and release your
925 @key{ESC} key and then type the @key{CTRL} key and the @key{\} key at
926 the same time. But usually @kbd{M-C-\} means press the @key{CTRL} key
927 along with the key that is labeled @key{ALT} and, at the same time,
928 press the @key{\} key.
929
930 In addition to typing a lone keychord, you can prefix what you type
931 with @kbd{C-u}, which is called the `universal argument'. The
932 @kbd{C-u} keychord passes an argument to the subsequent command.
933 Thus, to indent a region of plain text by 6 spaces, mark the region,
934 and then type @w{@kbd{C-u 6 M-C-\}}. (If you do not specify a number,
935 Emacs either passes the number 4 to the command or otherwise runs the
936 command differently than it would otherwise.) @xref{Arguments, ,
937 Numeric Arguments, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
938
939 If you are reading this in Info using GNU Emacs, you can read through
940 this whole document just by pressing the space bar, @key{SPC}.
941 (To learn about Info, type @kbd{C-h i} and then select Info.)
942
943 A note on terminology: when I use the word Lisp alone, I often am
944 referring to the various dialects of Lisp in general, but when I speak
945 of Emacs Lisp, I am referring to GNU Emacs Lisp in particular.
946
947 @node Thank You
948 @unnumberedsec Thank You
949
950 My thanks to all who helped me with this book. My especial thanks to
951 @r{Jim Blandy}, @r{Noah Friedman}, @w{Jim Kingdon}, @r{Roland
952 McGrath}, @w{Frank Ritter}, @w{Randy Smith}, @w{Richard M.
953 Stallman}, and @w{Melissa Weisshaus}. My thanks also go to both
954 @w{Philip Johnson} and @w{David Stampe} for their patient
955 encouragement. My mistakes are my own.
956
957 @flushright
958 Robert J. Chassell
959 @ifnothtml
960 @email{bob@@gnu.org}
961 @end ifnothtml
962 @ifhtml
963 bob@@gnu.org
964 @end ifhtml
965 @end flushright
966
967 @c ================ Beginning of main text ================
968
969 @c Start main text on right-hand (verso) page
970
971 @tex
972 \par\vfill\supereject
973 \headings off
974 \ifodd\pageno
975 \par\vfill\supereject
976 \else
977 \par\vfill\supereject
978 \page\hbox{}\page
979 \par\vfill\supereject
980 \fi
981 @end tex
982
983 @c Note: this resetting of the page number back to 1 causes TeX to gripe
984 @c about already having seen page numbers 1-4 before (in the preface):
985 @c pdfTeX warning (ext4): destination with the same identifier (name{1})
986 @c has been already used, duplicate ignored
987 @c I guess that is harmless (what happens if a later part of the text
988 @c makes a link to something in the first 4 pages though?).
989 @c E.g., note that the Emacs manual has a preface, but does not bother
990 @c resetting the page numbers back to 1 after that.
991 @iftex
992 @headings off
993 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
994 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
995 @global@pageno = 1
996 @end iftex
997
998 @node List Processing
999 @chapter List Processing
1000
1001 To the untutored eye, Lisp is a strange programming language. In Lisp
1002 code there are parentheses everywhere. Some people even claim that
1003 the name stands for `Lots of Isolated Silly Parentheses'. But the
1004 claim is unwarranted. Lisp stands for LISt Processing, and the
1005 programming language handles @emph{lists} (and lists of lists) by
1006 putting them between parentheses. The parentheses mark the boundaries
1007 of the list. Sometimes a list is preceded by a single apostrophe or
1008 quotation mark, @samp{'}@footnote{The single apostrophe or quotation
1009 mark is an abbreviation for the function @code{quote}; you need not
1010 think about functions now; functions are defined in @ref{Making
1011 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}.} Lists are the basis of Lisp.
1012
1013 @menu
1014 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
1015 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
1016 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
1017 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
1018 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
1019 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
1020 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
1021 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
1022 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
1023 * Summary:: The major points.
1024 * Error Message Exercises::
1025 @end menu
1026
1027 @node Lisp Lists
1028 @section Lisp Lists
1029 @cindex Lisp Lists
1030
1031 In Lisp, a list looks like this: @code{'(rose violet daisy buttercup)}.
1032 This list is preceded by a single apostrophe. It could just as well be
1033 written as follows, which looks more like the kind of list you are likely
1034 to be familiar with:
1035
1036 @smallexample
1037 @group
1038 '(rose
1039 violet
1040 daisy
1041 buttercup)
1042 @end group
1043 @end smallexample
1044
1045 @noindent
1046 The elements of this list are the names of the four different flowers,
1047 separated from each other by whitespace and surrounded by parentheses,
1048 like flowers in a field with a stone wall around them.
1049 @cindex Flowers in a field
1050
1051 @menu
1052 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
1053 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
1054 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
1055 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
1056 @end menu
1057
1058 @ifnottex
1059 @node Numbers Lists
1060 @unnumberedsubsec Numbers, Lists inside of Lists
1061 @end ifnottex
1062
1063 Lists can also have numbers in them, as in this list: @code{(+ 2 2)}.
1064 This list has a plus-sign, @samp{+}, followed by two @samp{2}s, each
1065 separated by whitespace.
1066
1067 In Lisp, both data and programs are represented the same way; that is,
1068 they are both lists of words, numbers, or other lists, separated by
1069 whitespace and surrounded by parentheses. (Since a program looks like
1070 data, one program may easily serve as data for another; this is a very
1071 powerful feature of Lisp.) (Incidentally, these two parenthetical
1072 remarks are @emph{not} Lisp lists, because they contain @samp{;} and
1073 @samp{.} as punctuation marks.)
1074
1075 @need 1200
1076 Here is another list, this time with a list inside of it:
1077
1078 @smallexample
1079 '(this list has (a list inside of it))
1080 @end smallexample
1081
1082 The components of this list are the words @samp{this}, @samp{list},
1083 @samp{has}, and the list @samp{(a list inside of it)}. The interior
1084 list is made up of the words @samp{a}, @samp{list}, @samp{inside},
1085 @samp{of}, @samp{it}.
1086
1087 @node Lisp Atoms
1088 @subsection Lisp Atoms
1089 @cindex Lisp Atoms
1090
1091 In Lisp, what we have been calling words are called @dfn{atoms}. This
1092 term comes from the historical meaning of the word atom, which means
1093 `indivisible'. As far as Lisp is concerned, the words we have been
1094 using in the lists cannot be divided into any smaller parts and still
1095 mean the same thing as part of a program; likewise with numbers and
1096 single character symbols like @samp{+}. On the other hand, unlike an
1097 ancient atom, a list can be split into parts. (@xref{car cdr & cons,
1098 , @code{car} @code{cdr} & @code{cons} Fundamental Functions}.)
1099
1100 In a list, atoms are separated from each other by whitespace. They can be
1101 right next to a parenthesis.
1102
1103 @cindex @samp{empty list} defined
1104 Technically speaking, a list in Lisp consists of parentheses surrounding
1105 atoms separated by whitespace or surrounding other lists or surrounding
1106 both atoms and other lists. A list can have just one atom in it or
1107 have nothing in it at all. A list with nothing in it looks like this:
1108 @code{()}, and is called the @dfn{empty list}. Unlike anything else, an
1109 empty list is considered both an atom and a list at the same time.
1110
1111 @cindex Symbolic expressions, introduced
1112 @cindex @samp{expression} defined
1113 @cindex @samp{form} defined
1114 The printed representation of both atoms and lists are called
1115 @dfn{symbolic expressions} or, more concisely, @dfn{s-expressions}.
1116 The word @dfn{expression} by itself can refer to either the printed
1117 representation, or to the atom or list as it is held internally in the
1118 computer. Often, people use the term @dfn{expression}
1119 indiscriminately. (Also, in many texts, the word @dfn{form} is used
1120 as a synonym for expression.)
1121
1122 Incidentally, the atoms that make up our universe were named such when
1123 they were thought to be indivisible; but it has been found that physical
1124 atoms are not indivisible. Parts can split off an atom or it can
1125 fission into two parts of roughly equal size. Physical atoms were named
1126 prematurely, before their truer nature was found. In Lisp, certain
1127 kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated into parts; but the
1128 mechanism for doing this is different from the mechanism for splitting a
1129 list. As far as list operations are concerned, the atoms of a list are
1130 unsplittable.
1131
1132 As in English, the meanings of the component letters of a Lisp atom
1133 are different from the meaning the letters make as a word. For
1134 example, the word for the South American sloth, the @samp{ai}, is
1135 completely different from the two words, @samp{a}, and @samp{i}.
1136
1137 There are many kinds of atom in nature but only a few in Lisp: for
1138 example, @dfn{numbers}, such as 37, 511, or 1729, and @dfn{symbols}, such
1139 as @samp{+}, @samp{foo}, or @samp{forward-line}. The words we have
1140 listed in the examples above are all symbols. In everyday Lisp
1141 conversation, the word ``atom'' is not often used, because programmers
1142 usually try to be more specific about what kind of atom they are dealing
1143 with. Lisp programming is mostly about symbols (and sometimes numbers)
1144 within lists. (Incidentally, the preceding three word parenthetical
1145 remark is a proper list in Lisp, since it consists of atoms, which in
1146 this case are symbols, separated by whitespace and enclosed by
1147 parentheses, without any non-Lisp punctuation.)
1148
1149 @need 1250
1150 Text between double quotation marks---even sentences or
1151 paragraphs---is also an atom. Here is an example:
1152 @cindex Text between double quotation marks
1153
1154 @smallexample
1155 '(this list includes "text between quotation marks.")
1156 @end smallexample
1157
1158 @cindex @samp{string} defined
1159 @noindent
1160 In Lisp, all of the quoted text including the punctuation mark and the
1161 blank spaces is a single atom. This kind of atom is called a
1162 @dfn{string} (for `string of characters') and is the sort of thing that
1163 is used for messages that a computer can print for a human to read.
1164 Strings are a different kind of atom than numbers or symbols and are
1165 used differently.
1166
1167 @node Whitespace in Lists
1168 @subsection Whitespace in Lists
1169 @cindex Whitespace in lists
1170
1171 @need 1200
1172 The amount of whitespace in a list does not matter. From the point of view
1173 of the Lisp language,
1174
1175 @smallexample
1176 @group
1177 '(this list
1178 looks like this)
1179 @end group
1180 @end smallexample
1181
1182 @need 800
1183 @noindent
1184 is exactly the same as this:
1185
1186 @smallexample
1187 '(this list looks like this)
1188 @end smallexample
1189
1190 Both examples show what to Lisp is the same list, the list made up of
1191 the symbols @samp{this}, @samp{list}, @samp{looks}, @samp{like}, and
1192 @samp{this} in that order.
1193
1194 Extra whitespace and newlines are designed to make a list more readable
1195 by humans. When Lisp reads the expression, it gets rid of all the extra
1196 whitespace (but it needs to have at least one space between atoms in
1197 order to tell them apart.)
1198
1199 Odd as it seems, the examples we have seen cover almost all of what Lisp
1200 lists look like! Every other list in Lisp looks more or less like one
1201 of these examples, except that the list may be longer and more complex.
1202 In brief, a list is between parentheses, a string is between quotation
1203 marks, a symbol looks like a word, and a number looks like a number.
1204 (For certain situations, square brackets, dots and a few other special
1205 characters may be used; however, we will go quite far without them.)
1206
1207 @node Typing Lists
1208 @subsection GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists
1209 @cindex Help typing lists
1210 @cindex Formatting help
1211
1212 When you type a Lisp expression in GNU Emacs using either Lisp
1213 Interaction mode or Emacs Lisp mode, you have available to you several
1214 commands to format the Lisp expression so it is easy to read. For
1215 example, pressing the @key{TAB} key automatically indents the line the
1216 cursor is on by the right amount. A command to properly indent the
1217 code in a region is customarily bound to @kbd{M-C-\}. Indentation is
1218 designed so that you can see which elements of a list belong to which
1219 list---elements of a sub-list are indented more than the elements of
1220 the enclosing list.
1221
1222 In addition, when you type a closing parenthesis, Emacs momentarily
1223 jumps the cursor back to the matching opening parenthesis, so you can
1224 see which one it is. This is very useful, since every list you type
1225 in Lisp must have its closing parenthesis match its opening
1226 parenthesis. (@xref{Major Modes, , Major Modes, emacs, The GNU Emacs
1227 Manual}, for more information about Emacs's modes.)
1228
1229 @node Run a Program
1230 @section Run a Program
1231 @cindex Run a program
1232 @cindex Program, running one
1233
1234 @cindex @samp{evaluate} defined
1235 A list in Lisp---any list---is a program ready to run. If you run it
1236 (for which the Lisp jargon is @dfn{evaluate}), the computer will do one
1237 of three things: do nothing except return to you the list itself; send
1238 you an error message; or, treat the first symbol in the list as a
1239 command to do something. (Usually, of course, it is the last of these
1240 three things that you really want!)
1241
1242 @c use code for the single apostrophe, not samp.
1243 The single apostrophe, @code{'}, that I put in front of some of the
1244 example lists in preceding sections is called a @dfn{quote}; when it
1245 precedes a list, it tells Lisp to do nothing with the list, other than
1246 take it as it is written. But if there is no quote preceding a list,
1247 the first item of the list is special: it is a command for the computer
1248 to obey. (In Lisp, these commands are called @emph{functions}.) The list
1249 @code{(+ 2 2)} shown above did not have a quote in front of it, so Lisp
1250 understands that the @code{+} is an instruction to do something with the
1251 rest of the list: add the numbers that follow.
1252
1253 @need 1250
1254 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs in Info, here is how you can
1255 evaluate such a list: place your cursor immediately after the right
1256 hand parenthesis of the following list and then type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1257
1258 @smallexample
1259 (+ 2 2)
1260 @end smallexample
1261
1262 @c use code for the number four, not samp.
1263 @noindent
1264 You will see the number @code{4} appear in the echo area. (In the
1265 jargon, what you have just done is ``evaluate the list.'' The echo area
1266 is the line at the bottom of the screen that displays or ``echoes''
1267 text.) Now try the same thing with a quoted list: place the cursor
1268 right after the following list and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1269
1270 @smallexample
1271 '(this is a quoted list)
1272 @end smallexample
1273
1274 @noindent
1275 You will see @code{(this is a quoted list)} appear in the echo area.
1276
1277 @cindex Lisp interpreter, explained
1278 @cindex Interpreter, Lisp, explained
1279 In both cases, what you are doing is giving a command to the program
1280 inside of GNU Emacs called the @dfn{Lisp interpreter}---giving the
1281 interpreter a command to evaluate the expression. The name of the Lisp
1282 interpreter comes from the word for the task done by a human who comes
1283 up with the meaning of an expression---who ``interprets'' it.
1284
1285 You can also evaluate an atom that is not part of a list---one that is
1286 not surrounded by parentheses; again, the Lisp interpreter translates
1287 from the humanly readable expression to the language of the computer.
1288 But before discussing this (@pxref{Variables}), we will discuss what the
1289 Lisp interpreter does when you make an error.
1290
1291 @node Making Errors
1292 @section Generate an Error Message
1293 @cindex Generate an error message
1294 @cindex Error message generation
1295
1296 Partly so you won't worry if you do it accidentally, we will now give
1297 a command to the Lisp interpreter that generates an error message.
1298 This is a harmless activity; and indeed, we will often try to generate
1299 error messages intentionally. Once you understand the jargon, error
1300 messages can be informative. Instead of being called ``error''
1301 messages, they should be called ``help'' messages. They are like
1302 signposts to a traveler in a strange country; deciphering them can be
1303 hard, but once understood, they can point the way.
1304
1305 The error message is generated by a built-in GNU Emacs debugger. We
1306 will `enter the debugger'. You get out of the debugger by typing @code{q}.
1307
1308 What we will do is evaluate a list that is not quoted and does not
1309 have a meaningful command as its first element. Here is a list almost
1310 exactly the same as the one we just used, but without the single-quote
1311 in front of it. Position the cursor right after it and type @kbd{C-x
1312 C-e}:
1313
1314 @smallexample
1315 (this is an unquoted list)
1316 @end smallexample
1317
1318 @ignore
1319 @noindent
1320 What you see depends on which version of Emacs you are running. GNU
1321 Emacs version 22 provides more information than version 20 and before.
1322 First, the more recent result of generating an error; then the
1323 earlier, version 20 result.
1324
1325 @need 1250
1326 @noindent
1327 In GNU Emacs version 22, a @file{*Backtrace*} window will open up and
1328 you will see the following in it:
1329 @end ignore
1330
1331 A @file{*Backtrace*} window will open up and you should see the
1332 following in it:
1333
1334 @smallexample
1335 @group
1336 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1337 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1338 (this is an unquoted list)
1339 eval((this is an unquoted list))
1340 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1341 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1342 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1343 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1344 @end group
1345 @end smallexample
1346
1347 @need 1200
1348 @noindent
1349 Your cursor will be in this window (you may have to wait a few seconds
1350 before it becomes visible). To quit the debugger and make the
1351 debugger window go away, type:
1352
1353 @smallexample
1354 q
1355 @end smallexample
1356
1357 @noindent
1358 Please type @kbd{q} right now, so you become confident that you can
1359 get out of the debugger. Then, type @kbd{C-x C-e} again to re-enter
1360 it.
1361
1362 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1363 Based on what we already know, we can almost read this error message.
1364
1365 You read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells
1366 you what Emacs did. When you typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, you made an
1367 interactive call to the command @code{eval-last-sexp}. @code{eval} is
1368 an abbreviation for `evaluate' and @code{sexp} is an abbreviation for
1369 `symbolic expression'. The command means `evaluate last symbolic
1370 expression', which is the expression just before your cursor.
1371
1372 Each line above tells you what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
1373 The most recent action is at the top. The buffer is called the
1374 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer because it enables you to track Emacs
1375 backwards.
1376
1377 @need 800
1378 At the top of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, you see the line:
1379
1380 @smallexample
1381 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1382 @end smallexample
1383
1384 @noindent
1385 The Lisp interpreter tried to evaluate the first atom of the list, the
1386 word @samp{this}. It is this action that generated the error message
1387 @samp{void-function this}.
1388
1389 The message contains the words @samp{void-function} and @samp{this}.
1390
1391 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1392 The word @samp{function} was mentioned once before. It is a very
1393 important word. For our purposes, we can define it by saying that a
1394 @dfn{function} is a set of instructions to the computer that tell the
1395 computer to do something.
1396
1397 Now we can begin to understand the error message: @samp{void-function
1398 this}. The function (that is, the word @samp{this}) does not have a
1399 definition of any set of instructions for the computer to carry out.
1400
1401 The slightly odd word, @samp{void-function}, is designed to cover the
1402 way Emacs Lisp is implemented, which is that when a symbol does not
1403 have a function definition attached to it, the place that should
1404 contain the instructions is `void'.
1405
1406 On the other hand, since we were able to add 2 plus 2 successfully, by
1407 evaluating @code{(+ 2 2)}, we can infer that the symbol @code{+} must
1408 have a set of instructions for the computer to obey and those
1409 instructions must be to add the numbers that follow the @code{+}.
1410
1411 It is possible to prevent Emacs entering the debugger in cases like
1412 this. We do not explain how to do that here, but we will mention what
1413 the result looks like, because you may encounter a similar situation
1414 if there is a bug in some Emacs code that you are using. In such
1415 cases, you will see only one line of error message; it will appear in
1416 the echo area and look like this:
1417
1418 @smallexample
1419 Symbol's function definition is void:@: this
1420 @end smallexample
1421
1422 @noindent
1423 @ignore
1424 (Also, your terminal may beep at you---some do, some don't; and others
1425 blink. This is just a device to get your attention.)
1426 @end ignore
1427 The message goes away as soon as you type a key, even just to
1428 move the cursor.
1429
1430 We know the meaning of the word @samp{Symbol}. It refers to the first
1431 atom of the list, the word @samp{this}. The word @samp{function}
1432 refers to the instructions that tell the computer what to do.
1433 (Technically, the symbol tells the computer where to find the
1434 instructions, but this is a complication we can ignore for the
1435 moment.)
1436
1437 The error message can be understood: @samp{Symbol's function
1438 definition is void:@: this}. The symbol (that is, the word
1439 @samp{this}) lacks instructions for the computer to carry out.
1440
1441 @node Names & Definitions
1442 @section Symbol Names and Function Definitions
1443 @cindex Symbol names
1444
1445 We can articulate another characteristic of Lisp based on what we have
1446 discussed so far---an important characteristic: a symbol, like
1447 @code{+}, is not itself the set of instructions for the computer to
1448 carry out. Instead, the symbol is used, perhaps temporarily, as a way
1449 of locating the definition or set of instructions. What we see is the
1450 name through which the instructions can be found. Names of people
1451 work the same way. I can be referred to as @samp{Bob}; however, I am
1452 not the letters @samp{B}, @samp{o}, @samp{b} but am, or was, the
1453 consciousness consistently associated with a particular life-form.
1454 The name is not me, but it can be used to refer to me.
1455
1456 In Lisp, one set of instructions can be attached to several names.
1457 For example, the computer instructions for adding numbers can be
1458 linked to the symbol @code{plus} as well as to the symbol @code{+}
1459 (and are in some dialects of Lisp). Among humans, I can be referred
1460 to as @samp{Robert} as well as @samp{Bob} and by other words as well.
1461
1462 On the other hand, a symbol can have only one function definition
1463 attached to it at a time. Otherwise, the computer would be confused as
1464 to which definition to use. If this were the case among people, only
1465 one person in the world could be named @samp{Bob}. However, the function
1466 definition to which the name refers can be changed readily.
1467 (@xref{Install, , Install a Function Definition}.)
1468
1469 Since Emacs Lisp is large, it is customary to name symbols in a way
1470 that identifies the part of Emacs to which the function belongs.
1471 Thus, all the names for functions that deal with Texinfo start with
1472 @samp{texinfo-} and those for functions that deal with reading mail
1473 start with @samp{rmail-}.
1474
1475 @node Lisp Interpreter
1476 @section The Lisp Interpreter
1477 @cindex Lisp interpreter, what it does
1478 @cindex Interpreter, what it does
1479
1480 Based on what we have seen, we can now start to figure out what the
1481 Lisp interpreter does when we command it to evaluate a list.
1482 First, it looks to see whether there is a quote before the list; if
1483 there is, the interpreter just gives us the list. On the other
1484 hand, if there is no quote, the interpreter looks at the first element
1485 in the list and sees whether it has a function definition. If it does,
1486 the interpreter carries out the instructions in the function definition.
1487 Otherwise, the interpreter prints an error message.
1488
1489 This is how Lisp works. Simple. There are added complications which we
1490 will get to in a minute, but these are the fundamentals. Of course, to
1491 write Lisp programs, you need to know how to write function definitions
1492 and attach them to names, and how to do this without confusing either
1493 yourself or the computer.
1494
1495 @menu
1496 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
1497 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
1498 @end menu
1499
1500 @ifnottex
1501 @node Complications
1502 @unnumberedsubsec Complications
1503 @end ifnottex
1504
1505 Now, for the first complication. In addition to lists, the Lisp
1506 interpreter can evaluate a symbol that is not quoted and does not have
1507 parentheses around it. The Lisp interpreter will attempt to determine
1508 the symbol's value as a @dfn{variable}. This situation is described
1509 in the section on variables. (@xref{Variables}.)
1510
1511 @cindex Special form
1512 The second complication occurs because some functions are unusual and
1513 do not work in the usual manner. Those that don't are called
1514 @dfn{special forms}. They are used for special jobs, like defining a
1515 function, and there are not many of them. In the next few chapters,
1516 you will be introduced to several of the more important special forms.
1517
1518 As well as special forms, there are also @dfn{macros}. A macro
1519 is a construct defined in Lisp, which differs from a function in that it
1520 translates a Lisp expression into another expression that is to be
1521 evaluated in place of the original expression. (@xref{Lisp macro}.)
1522
1523 For the purposes of this introduction, you do not need to worry too much
1524 about whether something is a special form, macro, or ordinary function.
1525 For example, @code{if} is a special form (@pxref{if}), but @code{when}
1526 is a macro (@pxref{Lisp macro}). In earlier versions of Emacs,
1527 @code{defun} was a special form, but now it is a macro (@pxref{defun}).
1528 It still behaves in the same way.
1529
1530 The final complication is this: if the function that the
1531 Lisp interpreter is looking at is not a special form, and if it is part
1532 of a list, the Lisp interpreter looks to see whether the list has a list
1533 inside of it. If there is an inner list, the Lisp interpreter first
1534 figures out what it should do with the inside list, and then it works on
1535 the outside list. If there is yet another list embedded inside the
1536 inner list, it works on that one first, and so on. It always works on
1537 the innermost list first. The interpreter works on the innermost list
1538 first, to evaluate the result of that list. The result may be
1539 used by the enclosing expression.
1540
1541 Otherwise, the interpreter works left to right, from one expression to
1542 the next.
1543
1544 @node Byte Compiling
1545 @subsection Byte Compiling
1546 @cindex Byte compiling
1547
1548 One other aspect of interpreting: the Lisp interpreter is able to
1549 interpret two kinds of entity: humanly readable code, on which we will
1550 focus exclusively, and specially processed code, called @dfn{byte
1551 compiled} code, which is not humanly readable. Byte compiled code
1552 runs faster than humanly readable code.
1553
1554 You can transform humanly readable code into byte compiled code by
1555 running one of the compile commands such as @code{byte-compile-file}.
1556 Byte compiled code is usually stored in a file that ends with a
1557 @file{.elc} extension rather than a @file{.el} extension. You will
1558 see both kinds of file in the @file{emacs/lisp} directory; the files
1559 to read are those with @file{.el} extensions.
1560
1561 As a practical matter, for most things you might do to customize or
1562 extend Emacs, you do not need to byte compile; and I will not discuss
1563 the topic here. @xref{Byte Compilation, , Byte Compilation, elisp,
1564 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a full description of byte
1565 compilation.
1566
1567 @node Evaluation
1568 @section Evaluation
1569 @cindex Evaluation
1570
1571 When the Lisp interpreter works on an expression, the term for the
1572 activity is called @dfn{evaluation}. We say that the interpreter
1573 `evaluates the expression'. I've used this term several times before.
1574 The word comes from its use in everyday language, `to ascertain the
1575 value or amount of; to appraise', according to @cite{Webster's New
1576 Collegiate Dictionary}.
1577
1578 @menu
1579 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
1580 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
1581 @end menu
1582
1583 @ifnottex
1584 @node How the Interpreter Acts
1585 @unnumberedsubsec How the Lisp Interpreter Acts
1586 @end ifnottex
1587
1588 @cindex @samp{returned value} explained
1589 After evaluating an expression, the Lisp interpreter will most likely
1590 @dfn{return} the value that the computer produces by carrying out the
1591 instructions it found in the function definition, or perhaps it will
1592 give up on that function and produce an error message. (The interpreter
1593 may also find itself tossed, so to speak, to a different function or it
1594 may attempt to repeat continually what it is doing for ever and ever in
1595 what is called an `infinite loop'. These actions are less common; and
1596 we can ignore them.) Most frequently, the interpreter returns a value.
1597
1598 @cindex @samp{side effect} defined
1599 At the same time the interpreter returns a value, it may do something
1600 else as well, such as move a cursor or copy a file; this other kind of
1601 action is called a @dfn{side effect}. Actions that we humans think are
1602 important, such as printing results, are often ``side effects'' to the
1603 Lisp interpreter. The jargon can sound peculiar, but it turns out that
1604 it is fairly easy to learn to use side effects.
1605
1606 In summary, evaluating a symbolic expression most commonly causes the
1607 Lisp interpreter to return a value and perhaps carry out a side effect;
1608 or else produce an error.
1609
1610 @node Evaluating Inner Lists
1611 @subsection Evaluating Inner Lists
1612 @cindex Inner list evaluation
1613 @cindex Evaluating inner lists
1614
1615 If evaluation applies to a list that is inside another list, the outer
1616 list may use the value returned by the first evaluation as information
1617 when the outer list is evaluated. This explains why inner expressions
1618 are evaluated first: the values they return are used by the outer
1619 expressions.
1620
1621 @need 1250
1622 We can investigate this process by evaluating another addition example.
1623 Place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1624
1625 @smallexample
1626 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1627 @end smallexample
1628
1629 @noindent
1630 The number 8 will appear in the echo area.
1631
1632 What happens is that the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the inner
1633 expression, @code{(+ 3 3)}, for which the value 6 is returned; then it
1634 evaluates the outer expression as if it were written @code{(+ 2 6)}, which
1635 returns the value 8. Since there are no more enclosing expressions to
1636 evaluate, the interpreter prints that value in the echo area.
1637
1638 Now it is easy to understand the name of the command invoked by the
1639 keystrokes @kbd{C-x C-e}: the name is @code{eval-last-sexp}. The
1640 letters @code{sexp} are an abbreviation for `symbolic expression', and
1641 @code{eval} is an abbreviation for `evaluate'. The command means
1642 `evaluate last symbolic expression'.
1643
1644 As an experiment, you can try evaluating the expression by putting the
1645 cursor at the beginning of the next line immediately following the
1646 expression, or inside the expression.
1647
1648 @need 800
1649 Here is another copy of the expression:
1650
1651 @smallexample
1652 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1653 @end smallexample
1654
1655 @noindent
1656 If you place the cursor at the beginning of the blank line that
1657 immediately follows the expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}, you will
1658 still get the value 8 printed in the echo area. Now try putting the
1659 cursor inside the expression. If you put it right after the next to
1660 last parenthesis (so it appears to sit on top of the last parenthesis),
1661 you will get a 6 printed in the echo area! This is because the command
1662 evaluates the expression @code{(+ 3 3)}.
1663
1664 Now put the cursor immediately after a number. Type @kbd{C-x C-e} and
1665 you will get the number itself. In Lisp, if you evaluate a number, you
1666 get the number itself---this is how numbers differ from symbols. If you
1667 evaluate a list starting with a symbol like @code{+}, you will get a
1668 value returned that is the result of the computer carrying out the
1669 instructions in the function definition attached to that name. If a
1670 symbol by itself is evaluated, something different happens, as we will
1671 see in the next section.
1672
1673 @node Variables
1674 @section Variables
1675 @cindex Variables
1676
1677 In Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have a value attached to it just as it can
1678 have a function definition attached to it. The two are different.
1679 The function definition is a set of instructions that a computer will
1680 obey. A value, on the other hand, is something, such as number or a
1681 name, that can vary (which is why such a symbol is called a variable).
1682 The value of a symbol can be any expression in Lisp, such as a symbol,
1683 number, list, or string. A symbol that has a value is often called a
1684 @dfn{variable}.
1685
1686 A symbol can have both a function definition and a value attached to
1687 it at the same time. Or it can have just one or the other.
1688 The two are separate. This is somewhat similar
1689 to the way the name Cambridge can refer to the city in Massachusetts
1690 and have some information attached to the name as well, such as
1691 ``great programming center''.
1692
1693 @ignore
1694 (Incidentally, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have two
1695 other things attached to it, too: a property list and a documentation
1696 string; these are discussed later.)
1697 @end ignore
1698
1699 Another way to think about this is to imagine a symbol as being a chest
1700 of drawers. The function definition is put in one drawer, the value in
1701 another, and so on. What is put in the drawer holding the value can be
1702 changed without affecting the contents of the drawer holding the
1703 function definition, and vice-verse.
1704
1705 @menu
1706 * fill-column Example::
1707 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
1708 without a function.
1709 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
1710 @end menu
1711
1712 @ifnottex
1713 @node fill-column Example
1714 @unnumberedsubsec @code{fill-column}, an Example Variable
1715 @end ifnottex
1716
1717 @findex fill-column, @r{an example variable}
1718 @cindex Example variable, @code{fill-column}
1719 @cindex Variable, example of, @code{fill-column}
1720 The variable @code{fill-column} illustrates a symbol with a value
1721 attached to it: in every GNU Emacs buffer, this symbol is set to some
1722 value, usually 72 or 70, but sometimes to some other value. To find the
1723 value of this symbol, evaluate it by itself. If you are reading this in
1724 Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can do this by putting the cursor after
1725 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1726
1727 @smallexample
1728 fill-column
1729 @end smallexample
1730
1731 @noindent
1732 After I typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, Emacs printed the number 72 in my echo
1733 area. This is the value for which @code{fill-column} is set for me as I
1734 write this. It may be different for you in your Info buffer. Notice
1735 that the value returned as a variable is printed in exactly the same way
1736 as the value returned by a function carrying out its instructions. From
1737 the point of view of the Lisp interpreter, a value returned is a value
1738 returned. What kind of expression it came from ceases to matter once
1739 the value is known.
1740
1741 A symbol can have any value attached to it or, to use the jargon, we can
1742 @dfn{bind} the variable to a value: to a number, such as 72; to a
1743 string, @code{"such as this"}; to a list, such as @code{(spruce pine
1744 oak)}; we can even bind a variable to a function definition.
1745
1746 A symbol can be bound to a value in several ways. @xref{set & setq, ,
1747 Setting the Value of a Variable}, for information about one way to do
1748 this.
1749
1750 @node Void Function
1751 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Function
1752 @cindex Symbol without function error
1753 @cindex Error for symbol without function
1754
1755 When we evaluated @code{fill-column} to find its value as a variable,
1756 we did not place parentheses around the word. This is because we did
1757 not intend to use it as a function name.
1758
1759 If @code{fill-column} were the first or only element of a list, the
1760 Lisp interpreter would attempt to find the function definition
1761 attached to it. But @code{fill-column} has no function definition.
1762 Try evaluating this:
1763
1764 @smallexample
1765 (fill-column)
1766 @end smallexample
1767
1768 @need 1250
1769 @noindent
1770 You will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that says:
1771
1772 @smallexample
1773 @group
1774 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1775 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function fill-column)
1776 (fill-column)
1777 eval((fill-column))
1778 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1779 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1780 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1781 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1782 @end group
1783 @end smallexample
1784
1785 @noindent
1786 (Remember, to quit the debugger and make the debugger window go away,
1787 type @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1788
1789 @ignore
1790 @need 800
1791 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will produce an error message that says:
1792
1793 @smallexample
1794 Symbol's function definition is void:@: fill-column
1795 @end smallexample
1796
1797 @noindent
1798 (The message will go away as soon as you move the cursor or type
1799 another key.)
1800 @end ignore
1801
1802 @node Void Variable
1803 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Value
1804 @cindex Symbol without value error
1805 @cindex Error for symbol without value
1806
1807 If you attempt to evaluate a symbol that does not have a value bound to
1808 it, you will receive an error message. You can see this by
1809 experimenting with our 2 plus 2 addition. In the following expression,
1810 put your cursor right after the @code{+}, before the first number 2,
1811 type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1812
1813 @smallexample
1814 (+ 2 2)
1815 @end smallexample
1816
1817 @need 1500
1818 @noindent
1819 In GNU Emacs 22, you will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that
1820 says:
1821
1822 @smallexample
1823 @group
1824 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1825 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-variable +)
1826 eval(+)
1827 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1828 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1829 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1830 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1831 @end group
1832 @end smallexample
1833
1834 @noindent
1835 (Again, you can quit the debugger by
1836 typing @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1837
1838 This backtrace is different from the very first error message we saw,
1839 which said, @samp{Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)}.
1840 In this case, the function does not have a value as a variable; while
1841 in the other error message, the function (the word `this') did not
1842 have a definition.
1843
1844 In this experiment with the @code{+}, what we did was cause the Lisp
1845 interpreter to evaluate the @code{+} and look for the value of the
1846 variable instead of the function definition. We did this by placing the
1847 cursor right after the symbol rather than after the parenthesis of the
1848 enclosing list as we did before. As a consequence, the Lisp interpreter
1849 evaluated the preceding s-expression, which in this case was
1850 @code{+} by itself.
1851
1852 Since @code{+} does not have a value bound to it, just the function
1853 definition, the error message reported that the symbol's value as a
1854 variable was void.
1855
1856 @ignore
1857 @need 800
1858 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, your error message will say:
1859
1860 @example
1861 Symbol's value as variable is void:@: +
1862 @end example
1863
1864 @noindent
1865 The meaning is the same as in GNU Emacs 22.
1866 @end ignore
1867
1868 @node Arguments
1869 @section Arguments
1870 @cindex Arguments
1871 @cindex Passing information to functions
1872
1873 To see how information is passed to functions, let's look again at
1874 our old standby, the addition of two plus two. In Lisp, this is written
1875 as follows:
1876
1877 @smallexample
1878 (+ 2 2)
1879 @end smallexample
1880
1881 If you evaluate this expression, the number 4 will appear in your echo
1882 area. What the Lisp interpreter does is add the numbers that follow
1883 the @code{+}.
1884
1885 @cindex @samp{argument} defined
1886 The numbers added by @code{+} are called the @dfn{arguments} of the
1887 function @code{+}. These numbers are the information that is given to
1888 or @dfn{passed} to the function.
1889
1890 The word `argument' comes from the way it is used in mathematics and
1891 does not refer to a disputation between two people; instead it refers to
1892 the information presented to the function, in this case, to the
1893 @code{+}. In Lisp, the arguments to a function are the atoms or lists
1894 that follow the function. The values returned by the evaluation of
1895 these atoms or lists are passed to the function. Different functions
1896 require different numbers of arguments; some functions require none at
1897 all.@footnote{It is curious to track the path by which the word `argument'
1898 came to have two different meanings, one in mathematics and the other in
1899 everyday English. According to the @cite{Oxford English Dictionary},
1900 the word derives from the Latin for @samp{to make clear, prove}; thus it
1901 came to mean, by one thread of derivation, `the evidence offered as
1902 proof', which is to say, `the information offered', which led to its
1903 meaning in Lisp. But in the other thread of derivation, it came to mean
1904 `to assert in a manner against which others may make counter
1905 assertions', which led to the meaning of the word as a disputation.
1906 (Note here that the English word has two different definitions attached
1907 to it at the same time. By contrast, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol cannot
1908 have two different function definitions at the same time.)}
1909
1910 @menu
1911 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
1912 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
1913 of a variable or list.
1914 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
1915 variable number of arguments.
1916 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
1917 to a function.
1918 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
1919 @end menu
1920
1921 @node Data types
1922 @subsection Arguments' Data Types
1923 @cindex Data types
1924 @cindex Types of data
1925 @cindex Arguments' data types
1926
1927 The type of data that should be passed to a function depends on what
1928 kind of information it uses. The arguments to a function such as
1929 @code{+} must have values that are numbers, since @code{+} adds numbers.
1930 Other functions use different kinds of data for their arguments.
1931
1932 @need 1250
1933 @findex concat
1934 For example, the @code{concat} function links together or unites two or
1935 more strings of text to produce a string. The arguments are strings.
1936 Concatenating the two character strings @code{abc}, @code{def} produces
1937 the single string @code{abcdef}. This can be seen by evaluating the
1938 following:
1939
1940 @smallexample
1941 (concat "abc" "def")
1942 @end smallexample
1943
1944 @noindent
1945 The value produced by evaluating this expression is @code{"abcdef"}.
1946
1947 A function such as @code{substring} uses both a string and numbers as
1948 arguments. The function returns a part of the string, a substring of
1949 the first argument. This function takes three arguments. Its first
1950 argument is the string of characters, the second and third arguments are
1951 numbers that indicate the beginning and end of the substring. The
1952 numbers are a count of the number of characters (including spaces and
1953 punctuation) from the beginning of the string.
1954
1955 @need 800
1956 For example, if you evaluate the following:
1957
1958 @smallexample
1959 (substring "The quick brown fox jumped." 16 19)
1960 @end smallexample
1961
1962 @noindent
1963 you will see @code{"fox"} appear in the echo area. The arguments are the
1964 string and the two numbers.
1965
1966 Note that the string passed to @code{substring} is a single atom even
1967 though it is made up of several words separated by spaces. Lisp counts
1968 everything between the two quotation marks as part of the string,
1969 including the spaces. You can think of the @code{substring} function as
1970 a kind of `atom smasher' since it takes an otherwise indivisible atom
1971 and extracts a part. However, @code{substring} is only able to extract
1972 a substring from an argument that is a string, not from another type of
1973 atom such as a number or symbol.
1974
1975 @node Args as Variable or List
1976 @subsection An Argument as the Value of a Variable or List
1977
1978 An argument can be a symbol that returns a value when it is evaluated.
1979 For example, when the symbol @code{fill-column} by itself is evaluated,
1980 it returns a number. This number can be used in an addition.
1981
1982 @need 1250
1983 Position the cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
1984 C-e}:
1985
1986 @smallexample
1987 (+ 2 fill-column)
1988 @end smallexample
1989
1990 @noindent
1991 The value will be a number two more than what you get by evaluating
1992 @code{fill-column} alone. For me, this is 74, because my value of
1993 @code{fill-column} is 72.
1994
1995 As we have just seen, an argument can be a symbol that returns a value
1996 when evaluated. In addition, an argument can be a list that returns a
1997 value when it is evaluated. For example, in the following expression,
1998 the arguments to the function @code{concat} are the strings
1999 @w{@code{"The "}} and @w{@code{" red foxes."}} and the list
2000 @code{(number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column))}.
2001
2002 @c For GNU Emacs 22, need number-to-string
2003 @smallexample
2004 (concat "The " (number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column)) " red foxes.")
2005 @end smallexample
2006
2007 @noindent
2008 If you evaluate this expression---and if, as with my Emacs,
2009 @code{fill-column} evaluates to 72---@code{"The 74 red foxes."} will
2010 appear in the echo area. (Note that you must put spaces after the
2011 word @samp{The} and before the word @samp{red} so they will appear in
2012 the final string. The function @code{number-to-string} converts the
2013 integer that the addition function returns to a string.
2014 @code{number-to-string} is also known as @code{int-to-string}.)
2015
2016 @node Variable Number of Arguments
2017 @subsection Variable Number of Arguments
2018 @cindex Variable number of arguments
2019 @cindex Arguments, variable number of
2020
2021 Some functions, such as @code{concat}, @code{+} or @code{*}, take any
2022 number of arguments. (The @code{*} is the symbol for multiplication.)
2023 This can be seen by evaluating each of the following expressions in
2024 the usual way. What you will see in the echo area is printed in this
2025 text after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as `evaluates to'.
2026
2027 @need 1250
2028 In the first set, the functions have no arguments:
2029
2030 @smallexample
2031 @group
2032 (+) @result{} 0
2033
2034 (*) @result{} 1
2035 @end group
2036 @end smallexample
2037
2038 @need 1250
2039 In this set, the functions have one argument each:
2040
2041 @smallexample
2042 @group
2043 (+ 3) @result{} 3
2044
2045 (* 3) @result{} 3
2046 @end group
2047 @end smallexample
2048
2049 @need 1250
2050 In this set, the functions have three arguments each:
2051
2052 @smallexample
2053 @group
2054 (+ 3 4 5) @result{} 12
2055
2056 (* 3 4 5) @result{} 60
2057 @end group
2058 @end smallexample
2059
2060 @node Wrong Type of Argument
2061 @subsection Using the Wrong Type Object as an Argument
2062 @cindex Wrong type of argument
2063 @cindex Argument, wrong type of
2064
2065 When a function is passed an argument of the wrong type, the Lisp
2066 interpreter produces an error message. For example, the @code{+}
2067 function expects the values of its arguments to be numbers. As an
2068 experiment we can pass it the quoted symbol @code{hello} instead of a
2069 number. Position the cursor after the following expression and type
2070 @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2071
2072 @smallexample
2073 (+ 2 'hello)
2074 @end smallexample
2075
2076 @noindent
2077 When you do this you will generate an error message. What has happened
2078 is that @code{+} has tried to add the 2 to the value returned by
2079 @code{'hello}, but the value returned by @code{'hello} is the symbol
2080 @code{hello}, not a number. Only numbers can be added. So @code{+}
2081 could not carry out its addition.
2082
2083 @need 1250
2084 You will create and enter a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that says:
2085
2086 @noindent
2087 @smallexample
2088 @group
2089 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2090 Debugger entered--Lisp error:
2091 (wrong-type-argument number-or-marker-p hello)
2092 +(2 hello)
2093 eval((+ 2 (quote hello)))
2094 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
2095 eval-last-sexp(nil)
2096 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
2097 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2098 @end group
2099 @end smallexample
2100
2101 @need 1250
2102 As usual, the error message tries to be helpful and makes sense after you
2103 learn how to read it.@footnote{@code{(quote hello)} is an expansion of
2104 the abbreviation @code{'hello}.}
2105
2106 The first part of the error message is straightforward; it says
2107 @samp{wrong type argument}. Next comes the mysterious jargon word
2108 @w{@samp{number-or-marker-p}}. This word is trying to tell you what
2109 kind of argument the @code{+} expected.
2110
2111 The symbol @code{number-or-marker-p} says that the Lisp interpreter is
2112 trying to determine whether the information presented it (the value of
2113 the argument) is a number or a marker (a special object representing a
2114 buffer position). What it does is test to see whether the @code{+} is
2115 being given numbers to add. It also tests to see whether the
2116 argument is something called a marker, which is a specific feature of
2117 Emacs Lisp. (In Emacs, locations in a buffer are recorded as markers.
2118 When the mark is set with the @kbd{C-@@} or @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} command,
2119 its position is kept as a marker. The mark can be considered a
2120 number---the number of characters the location is from the beginning
2121 of the buffer.) In Emacs Lisp, @code{+} can be used to add the
2122 numeric value of marker positions as numbers.
2123
2124 The @samp{p} of @code{number-or-marker-p} is the embodiment of a
2125 practice started in the early days of Lisp programming. The @samp{p}
2126 stands for `predicate'. In the jargon used by the early Lisp
2127 researchers, a predicate refers to a function to determine whether some
2128 property is true or false. So the @samp{p} tells us that
2129 @code{number-or-marker-p} is the name of a function that determines
2130 whether it is true or false that the argument supplied is a number or
2131 a marker. Other Lisp symbols that end in @samp{p} include @code{zerop},
2132 a function that tests whether its argument has the value of zero, and
2133 @code{listp}, a function that tests whether its argument is a list.
2134
2135 Finally, the last part of the error message is the symbol @code{hello}.
2136 This is the value of the argument that was passed to @code{+}. If the
2137 addition had been passed the correct type of object, the value passed
2138 would have been a number, such as 37, rather than a symbol like
2139 @code{hello}. But then you would not have got the error message.
2140
2141 @ignore
2142 @need 1250
2143 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, the echo area displays an error
2144 message that says:
2145
2146 @smallexample
2147 Wrong type argument:@: number-or-marker-p, hello
2148 @end smallexample
2149
2150 This says, in different words, the same as the top line of the
2151 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.
2152 @end ignore
2153
2154 @node message
2155 @subsection The @code{message} Function
2156 @findex message
2157
2158 Like @code{+}, the @code{message} function takes a variable number of
2159 arguments. It is used to send messages to the user and is so useful
2160 that we will describe it here.
2161
2162 @need 1250
2163 A message is printed in the echo area. For example, you can print a
2164 message in your echo area by evaluating the following list:
2165
2166 @smallexample
2167 (message "This message appears in the echo area!")
2168 @end smallexample
2169
2170 The whole string between double quotation marks is a single argument
2171 and is printed @i{in toto}. (Note that in this example, the message
2172 itself will appear in the echo area within double quotes; that is
2173 because you see the value returned by the @code{message} function. In
2174 most uses of @code{message} in programs that you write, the text will
2175 be printed in the echo area as a side-effect, without the quotes.
2176 @xref{multiply-by-seven in detail, , @code{multiply-by-seven} in
2177 detail}, for an example of this.)
2178
2179 However, if there is a @samp{%s} in the quoted string of characters, the
2180 @code{message} function does not print the @samp{%s} as such, but looks
2181 to the argument that follows the string. It evaluates the second
2182 argument and prints the value at the location in the string where the
2183 @samp{%s} is.
2184
2185 @need 1250
2186 You can see this by positioning the cursor after the following
2187 expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2188
2189 @smallexample
2190 (message "The name of this buffer is: %s." (buffer-name))
2191 @end smallexample
2192
2193 @noindent
2194 In Info, @code{"The name of this buffer is: *info*."} will appear in the
2195 echo area. The function @code{buffer-name} returns the name of the
2196 buffer as a string, which the @code{message} function inserts in place
2197 of @code{%s}.
2198
2199 To print a value as an integer, use @samp{%d} in the same way as
2200 @samp{%s}. For example, to print a message in the echo area that
2201 states the value of the @code{fill-column}, evaluate the following:
2202
2203 @smallexample
2204 (message "The value of fill-column is %d." fill-column)
2205 @end smallexample
2206
2207 @noindent
2208 On my system, when I evaluate this list, @code{"The value of
2209 fill-column is 72."} appears in my echo area@footnote{Actually, you
2210 can use @code{%s} to print a number. It is non-specific. @code{%d}
2211 prints only the part of a number left of a decimal point, and not
2212 anything that is not a number.}.
2213
2214 If there is more than one @samp{%s} in the quoted string, the value of
2215 the first argument following the quoted string is printed at the
2216 location of the first @samp{%s} and the value of the second argument is
2217 printed at the location of the second @samp{%s}, and so on.
2218
2219 @need 1250
2220 For example, if you evaluate the following,
2221
2222 @smallexample
2223 @group
2224 (message "There are %d %s in the office!"
2225 (- fill-column 14) "pink elephants")
2226 @end group
2227 @end smallexample
2228
2229 @noindent
2230 a rather whimsical message will appear in your echo area. On my system
2231 it says, @code{"There are 58 pink elephants in the office!"}.
2232
2233 The expression @code{(- fill-column 14)} is evaluated and the resulting
2234 number is inserted in place of the @samp{%d}; and the string in double
2235 quotes, @code{"pink elephants"}, is treated as a single argument and
2236 inserted in place of the @samp{%s}. (That is to say, a string between
2237 double quotes evaluates to itself, like a number.)
2238
2239 Finally, here is a somewhat complex example that not only illustrates
2240 the computation of a number, but also shows how you can use an
2241 expression within an expression to generate the text that is substituted
2242 for @samp{%s}:
2243
2244 @smallexample
2245 @group
2246 (message "He saw %d %s"
2247 (- fill-column 32)
2248 (concat "red "
2249 (substring
2250 "The quick brown foxes jumped." 16 21)
2251 " leaping."))
2252 @end group
2253 @end smallexample
2254
2255 In this example, @code{message} has three arguments: the string,
2256 @code{"He saw %d %s"}, the expression, @code{(- fill-column 32)}, and
2257 the expression beginning with the function @code{concat}. The value
2258 resulting from the evaluation of @code{(- fill-column 32)} is inserted
2259 in place of the @samp{%d}; and the value returned by the expression
2260 beginning with @code{concat} is inserted in place of the @samp{%s}.
2261
2262 When your fill column is 70 and you evaluate the expression, the
2263 message @code{"He saw 38 red foxes leaping."} appears in your echo
2264 area.
2265
2266 @node set & setq
2267 @section Setting the Value of a Variable
2268 @cindex Variable, setting value
2269 @cindex Setting value of variable
2270
2271 @cindex @samp{bind} defined
2272 There are several ways by which a variable can be given a value. One of
2273 the ways is to use either the function @code{set} or the function
2274 @code{setq}. Another way is to use @code{let} (@pxref{let}). (The
2275 jargon for this process is to @dfn{bind} a variable to a value.)
2276
2277 The following sections not only describe how @code{set} and @code{setq}
2278 work but also illustrate how arguments are passed.
2279
2280 @menu
2281 * Using set:: Setting values.
2282 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
2283 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
2284 @end menu
2285
2286 @node Using set
2287 @subsection Using @code{set}
2288 @findex set
2289
2290 To set the value of the symbol @code{flowers} to the list @code{'(rose
2291 violet daisy buttercup)}, evaluate the following expression by
2292 positioning the cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2293
2294 @smallexample
2295 (set 'flowers '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
2296 @end smallexample
2297
2298 @noindent
2299 The list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in the echo
2300 area. This is what is @emph{returned} by the @code{set} function. As a
2301 side effect, the symbol @code{flowers} is bound to the list; that is,
2302 the symbol @code{flowers}, which can be viewed as a variable, is given
2303 the list as its value. (This process, by the way, illustrates how a
2304 side effect to the Lisp interpreter, setting the value, can be the
2305 primary effect that we humans are interested in. This is because every
2306 Lisp function must return a value if it does not get an error, but it
2307 will only have a side effect if it is designed to have one.)
2308
2309 After evaluating the @code{set} expression, you can evaluate the symbol
2310 @code{flowers} and it will return the value you just set. Here is the
2311 symbol. Place your cursor after it and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2312
2313 @smallexample
2314 flowers
2315 @end smallexample
2316
2317 @noindent
2318 When you evaluate @code{flowers}, the list
2319 @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} appears in the echo area.
2320
2321 Incidentally, if you evaluate @code{'flowers}, the variable with a quote
2322 in front of it, what you will see in the echo area is the symbol itself,
2323 @code{flowers}. Here is the quoted symbol, so you can try this:
2324
2325 @smallexample
2326 'flowers
2327 @end smallexample
2328
2329 Note also, that when you use @code{set}, you need to quote both
2330 arguments to @code{set}, unless you want them evaluated. Since we do
2331 not want either argument evaluated, neither the variable
2332 @code{flowers} nor the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)}, both
2333 are quoted. (When you use @code{set} without quoting its first
2334 argument, the first argument is evaluated before anything else is
2335 done. If you did this and @code{flowers} did not have a value
2336 already, you would get an error message that the @samp{Symbol's value
2337 as variable is void}; on the other hand, if @code{flowers} did return
2338 a value after it was evaluated, the @code{set} would attempt to set
2339 the value that was returned. There are situations where this is the
2340 right thing for the function to do; but such situations are rare.)
2341
2342 @node Using setq
2343 @subsection Using @code{setq}
2344 @findex setq
2345
2346 As a practical matter, you almost always quote the first argument to
2347 @code{set}. The combination of @code{set} and a quoted first argument
2348 is so common that it has its own name: the special form @code{setq}.
2349 This special form is just like @code{set} except that the first argument
2350 is quoted automatically, so you don't need to type the quote mark
2351 yourself. Also, as an added convenience, @code{setq} permits you to set
2352 several different variables to different values, all in one expression.
2353
2354 To set the value of the variable @code{carnivores} to the list
2355 @code{'(lion tiger leopard)} using @code{setq}, the following expression
2356 is used:
2357
2358 @smallexample
2359 (setq carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2360 @end smallexample
2361
2362 @noindent
2363 This is exactly the same as using @code{set} except the first argument
2364 is automatically quoted by @code{setq}. (The @samp{q} in @code{setq}
2365 means @code{quote}.)
2366
2367 @need 1250
2368 With @code{set}, the expression would look like this:
2369
2370 @smallexample
2371 (set 'carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2372 @end smallexample
2373
2374 Also, @code{setq} can be used to assign different values to
2375 different variables. The first argument is bound to the value
2376 of the second argument, the third argument is bound to the value of the
2377 fourth argument, and so on. For example, you could use the following to
2378 assign a list of trees to the symbol @code{trees} and a list of herbivores
2379 to the symbol @code{herbivores}:
2380
2381 @smallexample
2382 @group
2383 (setq trees '(pine fir oak maple)
2384 herbivores '(gazelle antelope zebra))
2385 @end group
2386 @end smallexample
2387
2388 @noindent
2389 (The expression could just as well have been on one line, but it might
2390 not have fit on a page; and humans find it easier to read nicely
2391 formatted lists.)
2392
2393 Although I have been using the term `assign', there is another way of
2394 thinking about the workings of @code{set} and @code{setq}; and that is to
2395 say that @code{set} and @code{setq} make the symbol @emph{point} to the
2396 list. This latter way of thinking is very common and in forthcoming
2397 chapters we shall come upon at least one symbol that has `pointer' as
2398 part of its name. The name is chosen because the symbol has a value,
2399 specifically a list, attached to it; or, expressed another way,
2400 the symbol is set to ``point'' to the list.
2401
2402 @node Counting
2403 @subsection Counting
2404 @cindex Counting
2405
2406 Here is an example that shows how to use @code{setq} in a counter. You
2407 might use this to count how many times a part of your program repeats
2408 itself. First set a variable to zero; then add one to the number each
2409 time the program repeats itself. To do this, you need a variable that
2410 serves as a counter, and two expressions: an initial @code{setq}
2411 expression that sets the counter variable to zero; and a second
2412 @code{setq} expression that increments the counter each time it is
2413 evaluated.
2414
2415 @smallexample
2416 @group
2417 (setq counter 0) ; @r{Let's call this the initializer.}
2418
2419 (setq counter (+ counter 1)) ; @r{This is the incrementer.}
2420
2421 counter ; @r{This is the counter.}
2422 @end group
2423 @end smallexample
2424
2425 @noindent
2426 (The text following the @samp{;} are comments. @xref{Change a
2427 defun, , Change a Function Definition}.)
2428
2429 If you evaluate the first of these expressions, the initializer,
2430 @code{(setq counter 0)}, and then evaluate the third expression,
2431 @code{counter}, the number @code{0} will appear in the echo area. If
2432 you then evaluate the second expression, the incrementer, @code{(setq
2433 counter (+ counter 1))}, the counter will get the value 1. So if you
2434 again evaluate @code{counter}, the number @code{1} will appear in the
2435 echo area. Each time you evaluate the second expression, the value of
2436 the counter will be incremented.
2437
2438 When you evaluate the incrementer, @code{(setq counter (+ counter 1))},
2439 the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the innermost list; this is the
2440 addition. In order to evaluate this list, it must evaluate the variable
2441 @code{counter} and the number @code{1}. When it evaluates the variable
2442 @code{counter}, it receives its current value. It passes this value and
2443 the number @code{1} to the @code{+} which adds them together. The sum
2444 is then returned as the value of the inner list and passed to the
2445 @code{setq} which sets the variable @code{counter} to this new value.
2446 Thus, the value of the variable, @code{counter}, is changed.
2447
2448 @node Summary
2449 @section Summary
2450
2451 Learning Lisp is like climbing a hill in which the first part is the
2452 steepest. You have now climbed the most difficult part; what remains
2453 becomes easier as you progress onwards.
2454
2455 @need 1000
2456 In summary,
2457
2458 @itemize @bullet
2459
2460 @item
2461 Lisp programs are made up of expressions, which are lists or single atoms.
2462
2463 @item
2464 Lists are made up of zero or more atoms or inner lists, separated by whitespace and
2465 surrounded by parentheses. A list can be empty.
2466
2467 @item
2468 Atoms are multi-character symbols, like @code{forward-paragraph}, single
2469 character symbols like @code{+}, strings of characters between double
2470 quotation marks, or numbers.
2471
2472 @item
2473 A number evaluates to itself.
2474
2475 @item
2476 A string between double quotes also evaluates to itself.
2477
2478 @item
2479 When you evaluate a symbol by itself, its value is returned.
2480
2481 @item
2482 When you evaluate a list, the Lisp interpreter looks at the first symbol
2483 in the list and then at the function definition bound to that symbol.
2484 Then the instructions in the function definition are carried out.
2485
2486 @item
2487 A single quotation mark,
2488 @ifinfo
2489 '
2490 @end ifinfo
2491 @ifnotinfo
2492 @code{'}
2493 @end ifnotinfo
2494 , tells the Lisp interpreter that it should
2495 return the following expression as written, and not evaluate it as it
2496 would if the quote were not there.
2497
2498 @item
2499 Arguments are the information passed to a function. The arguments to a
2500 function are computed by evaluating the rest of the elements of the list
2501 of which the function is the first element.
2502
2503 @item
2504 A function always returns a value when it is evaluated (unless it gets
2505 an error); in addition, it may also carry out some action called a
2506 ``side effect''. In many cases, a function's primary purpose is to
2507 create a side effect.
2508 @end itemize
2509
2510 @node Error Message Exercises
2511 @section Exercises
2512
2513 A few simple exercises:
2514
2515 @itemize @bullet
2516 @item
2517 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2518 not within parentheses.
2519
2520 @item
2521 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2522 between parentheses.
2523
2524 @item
2525 Create a counter that increments by two rather than one.
2526
2527 @item
2528 Write an expression that prints a message in the echo area when
2529 evaluated.
2530 @end itemize
2531
2532 @node Practicing Evaluation
2533 @chapter Practicing Evaluation
2534 @cindex Practicing evaluation
2535 @cindex Evaluation practice
2536
2537 Before learning how to write a function definition in Emacs Lisp, it is
2538 useful to spend a little time evaluating various expressions that have
2539 already been written. These expressions will be lists with the
2540 functions as their first (and often only) element. Since some of the
2541 functions associated with buffers are both simple and interesting, we
2542 will start with those. In this section, we will evaluate a few of
2543 these. In another section, we will study the code of several other
2544 buffer-related functions, to see how they were written.
2545
2546 @menu
2547 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
2548 causes evaluation.
2549 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
2550 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
2551 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
2552 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
2553 the buffer.
2554 * Evaluation Exercise::
2555 @end menu
2556
2557 @ifnottex
2558 @node How to Evaluate
2559 @unnumberedsec How to Evaluate
2560 @end ifnottex
2561
2562 @i{Whenever you give an editing command} to Emacs Lisp, such as the
2563 command to move the cursor or to scroll the screen, @i{you are evaluating
2564 an expression,} the first element of which is a function. @i{This is
2565 how Emacs works.}
2566
2567 @cindex @samp{interactive function} defined
2568 @cindex @samp{command} defined
2569 When you type keys, you cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate an
2570 expression and that is how you get your results. Even typing plain text
2571 involves evaluating an Emacs Lisp function, in this case, one that uses
2572 @code{self-insert-command}, which simply inserts the character you
2573 typed. The functions you evaluate by typing keystrokes are called
2574 @dfn{interactive} functions, or @dfn{commands}; how you make a function
2575 interactive will be illustrated in the chapter on how to write function
2576 definitions. @xref{Interactive, , Making a Function Interactive}.
2577
2578 In addition to typing keyboard commands, we have seen a second way to
2579 evaluate an expression: by positioning the cursor after a list and
2580 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. This is what we will do in the rest of this
2581 section. There are other ways to evaluate an expression as well; these
2582 will be described as we come to them.
2583
2584 Besides being used for practicing evaluation, the functions shown in the
2585 next few sections are important in their own right. A study of these
2586 functions makes clear the distinction between buffers and files, how to
2587 switch to a buffer, and how to determine a location within it.
2588
2589 @node Buffer Names
2590 @section Buffer Names
2591 @findex buffer-name
2592 @findex buffer-file-name
2593
2594 The two functions, @code{buffer-name} and @code{buffer-file-name}, show
2595 the difference between a file and a buffer. When you evaluate the
2596 following expression, @code{(buffer-name)}, the name of the buffer
2597 appears in the echo area. When you evaluate @code{(buffer-file-name)},
2598 the name of the file to which the buffer refers appears in the echo
2599 area. Usually, the name returned by @code{(buffer-name)} is the same as
2600 the name of the file to which it refers, and the name returned by
2601 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is the full path-name of the file.
2602
2603 A file and a buffer are two different entities. A file is information
2604 recorded permanently in the computer (unless you delete it). A buffer,
2605 on the other hand, is information inside of Emacs that will vanish at
2606 the end of the editing session (or when you kill the buffer). Usually,
2607 a buffer contains information that you have copied from a file; we say
2608 the buffer is @dfn{visiting} that file. This copy is what you work on
2609 and modify. Changes to the buffer do not change the file, until you
2610 save the buffer. When you save the buffer, the buffer is copied to the file
2611 and is thus saved permanently.
2612
2613 @need 1250
2614 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
2615 each of the following expressions by positioning the cursor after it and
2616 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2617
2618 @example
2619 @group
2620 (buffer-name)
2621
2622 (buffer-file-name)
2623 @end group
2624 @end example
2625
2626 @noindent
2627 When I do this in Info, the value returned by evaluating
2628 @code{(buffer-name)} is @file{"*info*"}, and the value returned by
2629 evaluating @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}.
2630
2631 On the other hand, while I am writing this document, the value
2632 returned by evaluating @code{(buffer-name)} is
2633 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}, and the value returned by evaluating
2634 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is
2635 @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2636
2637 @cindex @code{nil}, history of word
2638 The former is the name of the buffer and the latter is the name of the
2639 file. In Info, the buffer name is @file{"*info*"}. Info does not
2640 point to any file, so the result of evaluating
2641 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}. The symbol @code{nil} is
2642 from the Latin word for `nothing'; in this case, it means that the
2643 buffer is not associated with any file. (In Lisp, @code{nil} is also
2644 used to mean `false' and is a synonym for the empty list, @code{()}.)
2645
2646 When I am writing, the name of my buffer is
2647 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}. The name of the file to which it
2648 points is @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2649
2650 (In the expressions, the parentheses tell the Lisp interpreter to
2651 treat @w{@code{buffer-name}} and @w{@code{buffer-file-name}} as
2652 functions; without the parentheses, the interpreter would attempt to
2653 evaluate the symbols as variables. @xref{Variables}.)
2654
2655 In spite of the distinction between files and buffers, you will often
2656 find that people refer to a file when they mean a buffer and vice-verse.
2657 Indeed, most people say, ``I am editing a file,'' rather than saying,
2658 ``I am editing a buffer which I will soon save to a file.'' It is
2659 almost always clear from context what people mean. When dealing with
2660 computer programs, however, it is important to keep the distinction in mind,
2661 since the computer is not as smart as a person.
2662
2663 @cindex Buffer, history of word
2664 The word `buffer', by the way, comes from the meaning of the word as a
2665 cushion that deadens the force of a collision. In early computers, a
2666 buffer cushioned the interaction between files and the computer's
2667 central processing unit. The drums or tapes that held a file and the
2668 central processing unit were pieces of equipment that were very
2669 different from each other, working at their own speeds, in spurts. The
2670 buffer made it possible for them to work together effectively.
2671 Eventually, the buffer grew from being an intermediary, a temporary
2672 holding place, to being the place where work is done. This
2673 transformation is rather like that of a small seaport that grew into a
2674 great city: once it was merely the place where cargo was warehoused
2675 temporarily before being loaded onto ships; then it became a business
2676 and cultural center in its own right.
2677
2678 Not all buffers are associated with files. For example, a
2679 @file{*scratch*} buffer does not visit any file. Similarly, a
2680 @file{*Help*} buffer is not associated with any file.
2681
2682 In the old days, when you lacked a @file{~/.emacs} file and started an
2683 Emacs session by typing the command @code{emacs} alone, without naming
2684 any files, Emacs started with the @file{*scratch*} buffer visible.
2685 Nowadays, you will see a splash screen. You can follow one of the
2686 commands suggested on the splash screen, visit a file, or press the
2687 spacebar to reach the @file{*scratch*} buffer.
2688
2689 If you switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer, type
2690 @code{(buffer-name)}, position the cursor after it, and then type
2691 @kbd{C-x C-e} to evaluate the expression. The name @code{"*scratch*"}
2692 will be returned and will appear in the echo area. @code{"*scratch*"}
2693 is the name of the buffer. When you type @code{(buffer-file-name)} in
2694 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate that, @code{nil} will appear
2695 in the echo area, just as it does when you evaluate
2696 @code{(buffer-file-name)} in Info.
2697
2698 Incidentally, if you are in the @file{*scratch*} buffer and want the
2699 value returned by an expression to appear in the @file{*scratch*}
2700 buffer itself rather than in the echo area, type @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
2701 instead of @kbd{C-x C-e}. This causes the value returned to appear
2702 after the expression. The buffer will look like this:
2703
2704 @smallexample
2705 (buffer-name)"*scratch*"
2706 @end smallexample
2707
2708 @noindent
2709 You cannot do this in Info since Info is read-only and it will not allow
2710 you to change the contents of the buffer. But you can do this in any
2711 buffer you can edit; and when you write code or documentation (such as
2712 this book), this feature is very useful.
2713
2714 @node Getting Buffers
2715 @section Getting Buffers
2716 @findex current-buffer
2717 @findex other-buffer
2718 @cindex Getting a buffer
2719
2720 The @code{buffer-name} function returns the @emph{name} of the buffer;
2721 to get the buffer @emph{itself}, a different function is needed: the
2722 @code{current-buffer} function. If you use this function in code, what
2723 you get is the buffer itself.
2724
2725 A name and the object or entity to which the name refers are different
2726 from each other. You are not your name. You are a person to whom
2727 others refer by name. If you ask to speak to George and someone hands you
2728 a card with the letters @samp{G}, @samp{e}, @samp{o}, @samp{r},
2729 @samp{g}, and @samp{e} written on it, you might be amused, but you would
2730 not be satisfied. You do not want to speak to the name, but to the
2731 person to whom the name refers. A buffer is similar: the name of the
2732 scratch buffer is @file{*scratch*}, but the name is not the buffer. To
2733 get a buffer itself, you need to use a function such as
2734 @code{current-buffer}.
2735
2736 However, there is a slight complication: if you evaluate
2737 @code{current-buffer} in an expression on its own, as we will do here,
2738 what you see is a printed representation of the name of the buffer
2739 without the contents of the buffer. Emacs works this way for two
2740 reasons: the buffer may be thousands of lines long---too long to be
2741 conveniently displayed; and, another buffer may have the same contents
2742 but a different name, and it is important to distinguish between them.
2743
2744 @need 800
2745 Here is an expression containing the function:
2746
2747 @smallexample
2748 (current-buffer)
2749 @end smallexample
2750
2751 @noindent
2752 If you evaluate this expression in Info in Emacs in the usual way,
2753 @file{#<buffer *info*>} will appear in the echo area. The special
2754 format indicates that the buffer itself is being returned, rather than
2755 just its name.
2756
2757 Incidentally, while you can type a number or symbol into a program, you
2758 cannot do that with the printed representation of a buffer: the only way
2759 to get a buffer itself is with a function such as @code{current-buffer}.
2760
2761 A related function is @code{other-buffer}. This returns the most
2762 recently selected buffer other than the one you are in currently, not
2763 a printed representation of its name. If you have recently switched
2764 back and forth from the @file{*scratch*} buffer, @code{other-buffer}
2765 will return that buffer.
2766
2767 @need 800
2768 You can see this by evaluating the expression:
2769
2770 @smallexample
2771 (other-buffer)
2772 @end smallexample
2773
2774 @noindent
2775 You should see @file{#<buffer *scratch*>} appear in the echo area, or
2776 the name of whatever other buffer you switched back from most
2777 recently@footnote{Actually, by default, if the buffer from which you
2778 just switched is visible to you in another window, @code{other-buffer}
2779 will choose the most recent buffer that you cannot see; this is a
2780 subtlety that I often forget.}.
2781
2782 @node Switching Buffers
2783 @section Switching Buffers
2784 @findex switch-to-buffer
2785 @findex set-buffer
2786 @cindex Switching to a buffer
2787
2788 The @code{other-buffer} function actually provides a buffer when it is
2789 used as an argument to a function that requires one. We can see this
2790 by using @code{other-buffer} and @code{switch-to-buffer} to switch to a
2791 different buffer.
2792
2793 But first, a brief introduction to the @code{switch-to-buffer}
2794 function. When you switched back and forth from Info to the
2795 @file{*scratch*} buffer to evaluate @code{(buffer-name)}, you most
2796 likely typed @kbd{C-x b} and then typed @file{*scratch*}@footnote{Or
2797 rather, to save typing, you probably only typed @kbd{RET} if the
2798 default buffer was @file{*scratch*}, or if it was different, then you
2799 typed just part of the name, such as @code{*sc}, pressed your
2800 @kbd{TAB} key to cause it to expand to the full name, and then typed
2801 @kbd{RET}.} when prompted in the minibuffer for the name of
2802 the buffer to which you wanted to switch. The keystrokes, @kbd{C-x
2803 b}, cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate the interactive function
2804 @code{switch-to-buffer}. As we said before, this is how Emacs works:
2805 different keystrokes call or run different functions. For example,
2806 @kbd{C-f} calls @code{forward-char}, @kbd{M-e} calls
2807 @code{forward-sentence}, and so on.
2808
2809 By writing @code{switch-to-buffer} in an expression, and giving it a
2810 buffer to switch to, we can switch buffers just the way @kbd{C-x b}
2811 does:
2812
2813 @smallexample
2814 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer))
2815 @end smallexample
2816
2817 @noindent
2818 The symbol @code{switch-to-buffer} is the first element of the list,
2819 so the Lisp interpreter will treat it as a function and carry out the
2820 instructions that are attached to it. But before doing that, the
2821 interpreter will note that @code{other-buffer} is inside parentheses
2822 and work on that symbol first. @code{other-buffer} is the first (and
2823 in this case, the only) element of this list, so the Lisp interpreter
2824 calls or runs the function. It returns another buffer. Next, the
2825 interpreter runs @code{switch-to-buffer}, passing to it, as an
2826 argument, the other buffer, which is what Emacs will switch to. If
2827 you are reading this in Info, try this now. Evaluate the expression.
2828 (To get back, type @kbd{C-x b @key{RET}}.)@footnote{Remember, this
2829 expression will move you to your most recent other buffer that you
2830 cannot see. If you really want to go to your most recently selected
2831 buffer, even if you can still see it, you need to evaluate the
2832 following more complex expression:
2833
2834 @smallexample
2835 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
2836 @end smallexample
2837
2838 @c noindent
2839 In this case, the first argument to @code{other-buffer} tells it which
2840 buffer to skip---the current one---and the second argument tells
2841 @code{other-buffer} it is OK to switch to a visible buffer.
2842 In regular use, @code{switch-to-buffer} takes you to an invisible
2843 window since you would most likely use @kbd{C-x o} (@code{other-window})
2844 to go to another visible buffer.}
2845
2846 In the programming examples in later sections of this document, you will
2847 see the function @code{set-buffer} more often than
2848 @code{switch-to-buffer}. This is because of a difference between
2849 computer programs and humans: humans have eyes and expect to see the
2850 buffer on which they are working on their computer terminals. This is
2851 so obvious, it almost goes without saying. However, programs do not
2852 have eyes. When a computer program works on a buffer, that buffer does
2853 not need to be visible on the screen.
2854
2855 @code{switch-to-buffer} is designed for humans and does two different
2856 things: it switches the buffer to which Emacs's attention is directed; and
2857 it switches the buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer.
2858 @code{set-buffer}, on the other hand, does only one thing: it switches
2859 the attention of the computer program to a different buffer. The buffer
2860 on the screen remains unchanged (of course, normally nothing happens
2861 there until the command finishes running).
2862
2863 @cindex @samp{call} defined
2864 Also, we have just introduced another jargon term, the word @dfn{call}.
2865 When you evaluate a list in which the first symbol is a function, you
2866 are calling that function. The use of the term comes from the notion of
2867 the function as an entity that can do something for you if you `call'
2868 it---just as a plumber is an entity who can fix a leak if you call him
2869 or her.
2870
2871 @node Buffer Size & Locations
2872 @section Buffer Size and the Location of Point
2873 @cindex Size of buffer
2874 @cindex Buffer size
2875 @cindex Point location
2876 @cindex Location of point
2877
2878 Finally, let's look at several rather simple functions,
2879 @code{buffer-size}, @code{point}, @code{point-min}, and
2880 @code{point-max}. These give information about the size of a buffer and
2881 the location of point within it.
2882
2883 The function @code{buffer-size} tells you the size of the current
2884 buffer; that is, the function returns a count of the number of
2885 characters in the buffer.
2886
2887 @smallexample
2888 (buffer-size)
2889 @end smallexample
2890
2891 @noindent
2892 You can evaluate this in the usual way, by positioning the
2893 cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2894
2895 @cindex @samp{point} defined
2896 In Emacs, the current position of the cursor is called @dfn{point}.
2897 The expression @code{(point)} returns a number that tells you where the
2898 cursor is located as a count of the number of characters from the
2899 beginning of the buffer up to point.
2900
2901 @need 1250
2902 You can see the character count for point in this buffer by evaluating
2903 the following expression in the usual way:
2904
2905 @smallexample
2906 (point)
2907 @end smallexample
2908
2909 @noindent
2910 As I write this, the value of @code{point} is 65724. The @code{point}
2911 function is frequently used in some of the examples later in this
2912 book.
2913
2914 @need 1250
2915 The value of point depends, of course, on its location within the
2916 buffer. If you evaluate point in this spot, the number will be larger:
2917
2918 @smallexample
2919 (point)
2920 @end smallexample
2921
2922 @noindent
2923 For me, the value of point in this location is 66043, which means that
2924 there are 319 characters (including spaces) between the two
2925 expressions. (Doubtless, you will see different numbers, since I will
2926 have edited this since I first evaluated point.)
2927
2928 @cindex @samp{narrowing} defined
2929 The function @code{point-min} is somewhat similar to @code{point}, but
2930 it returns the value of the minimum permissible value of point in the
2931 current buffer. This is the number 1 unless @dfn{narrowing} is in
2932 effect. (Narrowing is a mechanism whereby you can restrict yourself,
2933 or a program, to operations on just a part of a buffer.
2934 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}.) Likewise, the
2935 function @code{point-max} returns the value of the maximum permissible
2936 value of point in the current buffer.
2937
2938 @node Evaluation Exercise
2939 @section Exercise
2940
2941 Find a file with which you are working and move towards its middle.
2942 Find its buffer name, file name, length, and your position in the file.
2943
2944 @node Writing Defuns
2945 @chapter How To Write Function Definitions
2946 @cindex Definition writing
2947 @cindex Function definition writing
2948 @cindex Writing a function definition
2949
2950 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates a list, it looks to see whether the
2951 first symbol on the list has a function definition attached to it; or,
2952 put another way, whether the symbol points to a function definition. If
2953 it does, the computer carries out the instructions in the definition. A
2954 symbol that has a function definition is called, simply, a function
2955 (although, properly speaking, the definition is the function and the
2956 symbol refers to it.)
2957
2958 @menu
2959 * Primitive Functions::
2960 * defun:: The @code{defun} macro.
2961 * Install:: Install a function definition.
2962 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
2963 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
2964 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
2965 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
2966 * if:: What if?
2967 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
2968 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
2969 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point, mark, and buffer.
2970 * Review::
2971 * defun Exercises::
2972 @end menu
2973
2974 @ifnottex
2975 @node Primitive Functions
2976 @unnumberedsec An Aside about Primitive Functions
2977 @end ifnottex
2978 @cindex Primitive functions
2979 @cindex Functions, primitive
2980
2981 @cindex C language primitives
2982 @cindex Primitives written in C
2983 All functions are defined in terms of other functions, except for a few
2984 @dfn{primitive} functions that are written in the C programming
2985 language. When you write functions' definitions, you will write them in
2986 Emacs Lisp and use other functions as your building blocks. Some of the
2987 functions you will use will themselves be written in Emacs Lisp (perhaps
2988 by you) and some will be primitives written in C@. The primitive
2989 functions are used exactly like those written in Emacs Lisp and behave
2990 like them. They are written in C so we can easily run GNU Emacs on any
2991 computer that has sufficient power and can run C.
2992
2993 Let me re-emphasize this: when you write code in Emacs Lisp, you do not
2994 distinguish between the use of functions written in C and the use of
2995 functions written in Emacs Lisp. The difference is irrelevant. I
2996 mention the distinction only because it is interesting to know. Indeed,
2997 unless you investigate, you won't know whether an already-written
2998 function is written in Emacs Lisp or C.
2999
3000 @node defun
3001 @section The @code{defun} Macro
3002 @findex defun
3003
3004 @cindex @samp{function definition} defined
3005 In Lisp, a symbol such as @code{mark-whole-buffer} has code attached to
3006 it that tells the computer what to do when the function is called.
3007 This code is called the @dfn{function definition} and is created by
3008 evaluating a Lisp expression that starts with the symbol @code{defun}
3009 (which is an abbreviation for @emph{define function}).
3010
3011 In subsequent sections, we will look at function definitions from the
3012 Emacs source code, such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}. In this section,
3013 we will describe a simple function definition so you can see how it
3014 looks. This function definition uses arithmetic because it makes for a
3015 simple example. Some people dislike examples using arithmetic; however,
3016 if you are such a person, do not despair. Hardly any of the code we
3017 will study in the remainder of this introduction involves arithmetic or
3018 mathematics. The examples mostly involve text in one way or another.
3019
3020 A function definition has up to five parts following the word
3021 @code{defun}:
3022
3023 @enumerate
3024 @item
3025 The name of the symbol to which the function definition should be
3026 attached.
3027
3028 @item
3029 A list of the arguments that will be passed to the function. If no
3030 arguments will be passed to the function, this is an empty list,
3031 @code{()}.
3032
3033 @item
3034 Documentation describing the function. (Technically optional, but
3035 strongly recommended.)
3036
3037 @item
3038 Optionally, an expression to make the function interactive so you can
3039 use it by typing @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by
3040 typing an appropriate key or keychord.
3041
3042 @cindex @samp{body} defined
3043 @item
3044 The code that instructs the computer what to do: the @dfn{body} of the
3045 function definition.
3046 @end enumerate
3047
3048 It is helpful to think of the five parts of a function definition as
3049 being organized in a template, with slots for each part:
3050
3051 @smallexample
3052 @group
3053 (defun @var{function-name} (@var{arguments}@dots{})
3054 "@var{optional-documentation}@dots{}"
3055 (interactive @var{argument-passing-info}) ; @r{optional}
3056 @var{body}@dots{})
3057 @end group
3058 @end smallexample
3059
3060 As an example, here is the code for a function that multiplies its
3061 argument by 7. (This example is not interactive. @xref{Interactive,
3062 , Making a Function Interactive}, for that information.)
3063
3064 @smallexample
3065 @group
3066 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3067 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3068 (* 7 number))
3069 @end group
3070 @end smallexample
3071
3072 This definition begins with a parenthesis and the symbol @code{defun},
3073 followed by the name of the function.
3074
3075 @cindex @samp{argument list} defined
3076 The name of the function is followed by a list that contains the
3077 arguments that will be passed to the function. This list is called
3078 the @dfn{argument list}. In this example, the list has only one
3079 element, the symbol, @code{number}. When the function is used, the
3080 symbol will be bound to the value that is used as the argument to the
3081 function.
3082
3083 Instead of choosing the word @code{number} for the name of the argument,
3084 I could have picked any other name. For example, I could have chosen
3085 the word @code{multiplicand}. I picked the word `number' because it
3086 tells what kind of value is intended for this slot; but I could just as
3087 well have chosen the word `multiplicand' to indicate the role that the
3088 value placed in this slot will play in the workings of the function. I
3089 could have called it @code{foogle}, but that would have been a bad
3090 choice because it would not tell humans what it means. The choice of
3091 name is up to the programmer and should be chosen to make the meaning of
3092 the function clear.
3093
3094 Indeed, you can choose any name you wish for a symbol in an argument
3095 list, even the name of a symbol used in some other function: the name
3096 you use in an argument list is private to that particular definition.
3097 In that definition, the name refers to a different entity than any use
3098 of the same name outside the function definition. Suppose you have a
3099 nick-name `Shorty' in your family; when your family members refer to
3100 `Shorty', they mean you. But outside your family, in a movie, for
3101 example, the name `Shorty' refers to someone else. Because a name in an
3102 argument list is private to the function definition, you can change the
3103 value of such a symbol inside the body of a function without changing
3104 its value outside the function. The effect is similar to that produced
3105 by a @code{let} expression. (@xref{let, , @code{let}}.)
3106
3107 @ignore
3108 Note also that we discuss the word `number' in two different ways: as a
3109 symbol that appears in the code, and as the name of something that will
3110 be replaced by a something else during the evaluation of the function.
3111 In the first case, @code{number} is a symbol, not a number; it happens
3112 that within the function, it is a variable who value is the number in
3113 question, but our primary interest in it is as a symbol. On the other
3114 hand, when we are talking about the function, our interest is that we
3115 will substitute a number for the word @var{number}. To keep this
3116 distinction clear, we use different typography for the two
3117 circumstances. When we talk about this function, or about how it works,
3118 we refer to this number by writing @var{number}. In the function
3119 itself, we refer to it by writing @code{number}.
3120 @end ignore
3121
3122 The argument list is followed by the documentation string that
3123 describes the function. This is what you see when you type
3124 @w{@kbd{C-h f}} and the name of a function. Incidentally, when you
3125 write a documentation string like this, you should make the first line
3126 a complete sentence since some commands, such as @code{apropos}, print
3127 only the first line of a multi-line documentation string. Also, you
3128 should not indent the second line of a documentation string, if you
3129 have one, because that looks odd when you use @kbd{C-h f}
3130 (@code{describe-function}). The documentation string is optional, but
3131 it is so useful, it should be included in almost every function you
3132 write.
3133
3134 @findex * @r{(multiplication)}
3135 The third line of the example consists of the body of the function
3136 definition. (Most functions' definitions, of course, are longer than
3137 this.) In this function, the body is the list, @code{(* 7 number)}, which
3138 says to multiply the value of @var{number} by 7. (In Emacs Lisp,
3139 @code{*} is the function for multiplication, just as @code{+} is the
3140 function for addition.)
3141
3142 When you use the @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the argument
3143 @code{number} evaluates to the actual number you want used. Here is an
3144 example that shows how @code{multiply-by-seven} is used; but don't try
3145 to evaluate this yet!
3146
3147 @smallexample
3148 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3149 @end smallexample
3150
3151 @noindent
3152 The symbol @code{number}, specified in the function definition in the
3153 next section, is given or ``bound to'' the value 3 in the actual use of
3154 the function. Note that although @code{number} was inside parentheses
3155 in the function definition, the argument passed to the
3156 @code{multiply-by-seven} function is not in parentheses. The
3157 parentheses are written in the function definition so the computer can
3158 figure out where the argument list ends and the rest of the function
3159 definition begins.
3160
3161 If you evaluate this example, you are likely to get an error message.
3162 (Go ahead, try it!) This is because we have written the function
3163 definition, but not yet told the computer about the definition---we have
3164 not yet installed (or `loaded') the function definition in Emacs.
3165 Installing a function is the process that tells the Lisp interpreter the
3166 definition of the function. Installation is described in the next
3167 section.
3168
3169 @node Install
3170 @section Install a Function Definition
3171 @cindex Install a Function Definition
3172 @cindex Definition installation
3173 @cindex Function definition installation
3174
3175 If you are reading this inside of Info in Emacs, you can try out the
3176 @code{multiply-by-seven} function by first evaluating the function
3177 definition and then evaluating @code{(multiply-by-seven 3)}. A copy of
3178 the function definition follows. Place the cursor after the last
3179 parenthesis of the function definition and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you
3180 do this, @code{multiply-by-seven} will appear in the echo area. (What
3181 this means is that when a function definition is evaluated, the value it
3182 returns is the name of the defined function.) At the same time, this
3183 action installs the function definition.
3184
3185 @smallexample
3186 @group
3187 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3188 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3189 (* 7 number))
3190 @end group
3191 @end smallexample
3192
3193 @noindent
3194 By evaluating this @code{defun}, you have just installed
3195 @code{multiply-by-seven} in Emacs. The function is now just as much a
3196 part of Emacs as @code{forward-word} or any other editing function you
3197 use. (@code{multiply-by-seven} will stay installed until you quit
3198 Emacs. To reload code automatically whenever you start Emacs, see
3199 @ref{Permanent Installation, , Installing Code Permanently}.)
3200
3201 @menu
3202 * Effect of installation::
3203 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
3204 @end menu
3205
3206 @ifnottex
3207 @node Effect of installation
3208 @unnumberedsubsec The effect of installation
3209 @end ifnottex
3210
3211 You can see the effect of installing @code{multiply-by-seven} by
3212 evaluating the following sample. Place the cursor after the following
3213 expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. The number 21 will appear in the
3214 echo area.
3215
3216 @smallexample
3217 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3218 @end smallexample
3219
3220 If you wish, you can read the documentation for the function by typing
3221 @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and then the name of the
3222 function, @code{multiply-by-seven}. When you do this, a
3223 @file{*Help*} window will appear on your screen that says:
3224
3225 @smallexample
3226 @group
3227 multiply-by-seven is a Lisp function.
3228 (multiply-by-seven NUMBER)
3229
3230 Multiply NUMBER by seven.
3231 @end group
3232 @end smallexample
3233
3234 @noindent
3235 (To return to a single window on your screen, type @kbd{C-x 1}.)
3236
3237 @node Change a defun
3238 @subsection Change a Function Definition
3239 @cindex Changing a function definition
3240 @cindex Function definition, how to change
3241 @cindex Definition, how to change
3242
3243 If you want to change the code in @code{multiply-by-seven}, just rewrite
3244 it. To install the new version in place of the old one, evaluate the
3245 function definition again. This is how you modify code in Emacs. It is
3246 very simple.
3247
3248 As an example, you can change the @code{multiply-by-seven} function to
3249 add the number to itself seven times instead of multiplying the number
3250 by seven. It produces the same answer, but by a different path. At
3251 the same time, we will add a comment to the code; a comment is text
3252 that the Lisp interpreter ignores, but that a human reader may find
3253 useful or enlightening. The comment is that this is the ``second
3254 version''.
3255
3256 @smallexample
3257 @group
3258 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Second version.}
3259 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3260 (+ number number number number number number number))
3261 @end group
3262 @end smallexample
3263
3264 @cindex Comments in Lisp code
3265 The comment follows a semicolon, @samp{;}. In Lisp, everything on a
3266 line that follows a semicolon is a comment. The end of the line is the
3267 end of the comment. To stretch a comment over two or more lines, begin
3268 each line with a semicolon.
3269
3270 @xref{Beginning init File, , Beginning a @file{.emacs}
3271 File}, and @ref{Comments, , Comments, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
3272 Reference Manual}, for more about comments.
3273
3274 You can install this version of the @code{multiply-by-seven} function by
3275 evaluating it in the same way you evaluated the first function: place
3276 the cursor after the last parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
3277
3278 In summary, this is how you write code in Emacs Lisp: you write a
3279 function; install it; test it; and then make fixes or enhancements and
3280 install it again.
3281
3282 @node Interactive
3283 @section Make a Function Interactive
3284 @cindex Interactive functions
3285 @findex interactive
3286
3287 You make a function interactive by placing a list that begins with
3288 the special form @code{interactive} immediately after the
3289 documentation. A user can invoke an interactive function by typing
3290 @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by typing the keys to
3291 which it is bound, for example, by typing @kbd{C-n} for
3292 @code{next-line} or @kbd{C-x h} for @code{mark-whole-buffer}.
3293
3294 Interestingly, when you call an interactive function interactively,
3295 the value returned is not automatically displayed in the echo area.
3296 This is because you often call an interactive function for its side
3297 effects, such as moving forward by a word or line, and not for the
3298 value returned. If the returned value were displayed in the echo area
3299 each time you typed a key, it would be very distracting.
3300
3301 @menu
3302 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
3303 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
3304 @end menu
3305
3306 @ifnottex
3307 @node Interactive multiply-by-seven
3308 @unnumberedsubsec An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}, An Overview
3309 @end ifnottex
3310
3311 Both the use of the special form @code{interactive} and one way to
3312 display a value in the echo area can be illustrated by creating an
3313 interactive version of @code{multiply-by-seven}.
3314
3315 @need 1250
3316 Here is the code:
3317
3318 @smallexample
3319 @group
3320 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3321 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3322 (interactive "p")
3323 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3324 @end group
3325 @end smallexample
3326
3327 @noindent
3328 You can install this code by placing your cursor after it and typing
3329 @kbd{C-x C-e}. The name of the function will appear in your echo area.
3330 Then, you can use this code by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number and then
3331 typing @kbd{M-x multiply-by-seven} and pressing @key{RET}. The phrase
3332 @samp{The result is @dots{}} followed by the product will appear in the
3333 echo area.
3334
3335 Speaking more generally, you invoke a function like this in either of two
3336 ways:
3337
3338 @enumerate
3339 @item
3340 By typing a prefix argument that contains the number to be passed, and
3341 then typing @kbd{M-x} and the name of the function, as with
3342 @kbd{C-u 3 M-x forward-sentence}; or,
3343
3344 @item
3345 By typing whatever key or keychord the function is bound to, as with
3346 @kbd{C-u 3 M-e}.
3347 @end enumerate
3348
3349 @noindent
3350 Both the examples just mentioned work identically to move point forward
3351 three sentences. (Since @code{multiply-by-seven} is not bound to a key,
3352 it could not be used as an example of key binding.)
3353
3354 (@xref{Keybindings, , Some Keybindings}, to learn how to bind a command
3355 to a key.)
3356
3357 A prefix argument is passed to an interactive function by typing the
3358 @key{META} key followed by a number, for example, @kbd{M-3 M-e}, or by
3359 typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number, for example, @kbd{C-u 3 M-e} (if you
3360 type @kbd{C-u} without a number, it defaults to 4).
3361
3362 @node multiply-by-seven in detail
3363 @subsection An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}
3364
3365 Let's look at the use of the special form @code{interactive} and then at
3366 the function @code{message} in the interactive version of
3367 @code{multiply-by-seven}. You will recall that the function definition
3368 looks like this:
3369
3370 @smallexample
3371 @group
3372 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3373 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3374 (interactive "p")
3375 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3376 @end group
3377 @end smallexample
3378
3379 In this function, the expression, @code{(interactive "p")}, is a list of
3380 two elements. The @code{"p"} tells Emacs to pass the prefix argument to
3381 the function and use its value for the argument of the function.
3382
3383 @need 1000
3384 The argument will be a number. This means that the symbol
3385 @code{number} will be bound to a number in the line:
3386
3387 @smallexample
3388 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number))
3389 @end smallexample
3390
3391 @need 1250
3392 @noindent
3393 For example, if your prefix argument is 5, the Lisp interpreter will
3394 evaluate the line as if it were:
3395
3396 @smallexample
3397 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 5))
3398 @end smallexample
3399
3400 @noindent
3401 (If you are reading this in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate this expression
3402 yourself.) First, the interpreter will evaluate the inner list, which
3403 is @code{(* 7 5)}. This returns a value of 35. Next, it
3404 will evaluate the outer list, passing the values of the second and
3405 subsequent elements of the list to the function @code{message}.
3406
3407 As we have seen, @code{message} is an Emacs Lisp function especially
3408 designed for sending a one line message to a user. (@xref{message, ,
3409 The @code{message} function}.) In summary, the @code{message}
3410 function prints its first argument in the echo area as is, except for
3411 occurrences of @samp{%d} or @samp{%s} (and various other %-sequences
3412 which we have not mentioned). When it sees a control sequence, the
3413 function looks to the second or subsequent arguments and prints the
3414 value of the argument in the location in the string where the control
3415 sequence is located.
3416
3417 In the interactive @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the control string
3418 is @samp{%d}, which requires a number, and the value returned by
3419 evaluating @code{(* 7 5)} is the number 35. Consequently, the number 35
3420 is printed in place of the @samp{%d} and the message is @samp{The result
3421 is 35}.
3422
3423 (Note that when you call the function @code{multiply-by-seven}, the
3424 message is printed without quotes, but when you call @code{message}, the
3425 text is printed in double quotes. This is because the value returned by
3426 @code{message} is what appears in the echo area when you evaluate an
3427 expression whose first element is @code{message}; but when embedded in a
3428 function, @code{message} prints the text as a side effect without
3429 quotes.)
3430
3431 @node Interactive Options
3432 @section Different Options for @code{interactive}
3433 @cindex Options for @code{interactive}
3434 @cindex Interactive options
3435
3436 In the example, @code{multiply-by-seven} used @code{"p"} as the
3437 argument to @code{interactive}. This argument told Emacs to interpret
3438 your typing either @kbd{C-u} followed by a number or @key{META}
3439 followed by a number as a command to pass that number to the function
3440 as its argument. Emacs has more than twenty characters predefined for
3441 use with @code{interactive}. In almost every case, one of these
3442 options will enable you to pass the right information interactively to
3443 a function. (@xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for
3444 @code{interactive}, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
3445
3446 @need 1250
3447 Consider the function @code{zap-to-char}. Its interactive expression
3448 is
3449
3450 @smallexample
3451 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3452 @end smallexample
3453
3454 The first part of the argument to @code{interactive} is @samp{p}, with
3455 which you are already familiar. This argument tells Emacs to
3456 interpret a `prefix', as a number to be passed to the function. You
3457 can specify a prefix either by typing @kbd{C-u} followed by a number
3458 or by typing @key{META} followed by a number. The prefix is the
3459 number of specified characters. Thus, if your prefix is three and the
3460 specified character is @samp{x}, then you will delete all the text up
3461 to and including the third next @samp{x}. If you do not set a prefix,
3462 then you delete all the text up to and including the specified
3463 character, but no more.
3464
3465 The @samp{c} tells the function the name of the character to which to delete.
3466
3467 More formally, a function with two or more arguments can have
3468 information passed to each argument by adding parts to the string that
3469 follows @code{interactive}. When you do this, the information is
3470 passed to each argument in the same order it is specified in the
3471 @code{interactive} list. In the string, each part is separated from
3472 the next part by a @samp{\n}, which is a newline. For example, you
3473 can follow @samp{p} with a @samp{\n} and an @samp{cZap to char:@: }.
3474 This causes Emacs to pass the value of the prefix argument (if there
3475 is one) and the character.
3476
3477 In this case, the function definition looks like the following, where
3478 @code{arg} and @code{char} are the symbols to which @code{interactive}
3479 binds the prefix argument and the specified character:
3480
3481 @smallexample
3482 @group
3483 (defun @var{name-of-function} (arg char)
3484 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
3485 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3486 @var{body-of-function}@dots{})
3487 @end group
3488 @end smallexample
3489
3490 @noindent
3491 (The space after the colon in the prompt makes it look better when you
3492 are prompted. @xref{copy-to-buffer, , The Definition of
3493 @code{copy-to-buffer}}, for an example.)
3494
3495 When a function does not take arguments, @code{interactive} does not
3496 require any. Such a function contains the simple expression
3497 @code{(interactive)}. The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is like
3498 this.
3499
3500 Alternatively, if the special letter-codes are not right for your
3501 application, you can pass your own arguments to @code{interactive} as
3502 a list.
3503
3504 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}},
3505 for an example. @xref{Using Interactive, , Using @code{Interactive},
3506 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a more complete
3507 explanation about this technique.
3508
3509 @node Permanent Installation
3510 @section Install Code Permanently
3511 @cindex Install code permanently
3512 @cindex Permanent code installation
3513 @cindex Code installation
3514
3515 When you install a function definition by evaluating it, it will stay
3516 installed until you quit Emacs. The next time you start a new session
3517 of Emacs, the function will not be installed unless you evaluate the
3518 function definition again.
3519
3520 At some point, you may want to have code installed automatically
3521 whenever you start a new session of Emacs. There are several ways of
3522 doing this:
3523
3524 @itemize @bullet
3525 @item
3526 If you have code that is just for yourself, you can put the code for the
3527 function definition in your @file{.emacs} initialization file. When you
3528 start Emacs, your @file{.emacs} file is automatically evaluated and all
3529 the function definitions within it are installed.
3530 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
3531
3532 @item
3533 Alternatively, you can put the function definitions that you want
3534 installed in one or more files of their own and use the @code{load}
3535 function to cause Emacs to evaluate and thereby install each of the
3536 functions in the files.
3537 @xref{Loading Files, , Loading Files}.
3538
3539 @item
3540 Thirdly, if you have code that your whole site will use, it is usual
3541 to put it in a file called @file{site-init.el} that is loaded when
3542 Emacs is built. This makes the code available to everyone who uses
3543 your machine. (See the @file{INSTALL} file that is part of the Emacs
3544 distribution.)
3545 @end itemize
3546
3547 Finally, if you have code that everyone who uses Emacs may want, you
3548 can post it on a computer network or send a copy to the Free Software
3549 Foundation. (When you do this, please license the code and its
3550 documentation under a license that permits other people to run, copy,
3551 study, modify, and redistribute the code and which protects you from
3552 having your work taken from you.) If you send a copy of your code to
3553 the Free Software Foundation, and properly protect yourself and
3554 others, it may be included in the next release of Emacs. In large
3555 part, this is how Emacs has grown over the past years, by donations.
3556
3557 @node let
3558 @section @code{let}
3559 @findex let
3560
3561 The @code{let} expression is a special form in Lisp that you will need
3562 to use in most function definitions.
3563
3564 @code{let} is used to attach or bind a symbol to a value in such a way
3565 that the Lisp interpreter will not confuse the variable with a
3566 variable of the same name that is not part of the function.
3567
3568 To understand why the @code{let} special form is necessary, consider
3569 the situation in which you own a home that you generally refer to as
3570 `the house', as in the sentence, ``The house needs painting.'' If you
3571 are visiting a friend and your host refers to `the house', he is
3572 likely to be referring to @emph{his} house, not yours, that is, to a
3573 different house.
3574
3575 If your friend is referring to his house and you think he is referring
3576 to your house, you may be in for some confusion. The same thing could
3577 happen in Lisp if a variable that is used inside of one function has
3578 the same name as a variable that is used inside of another function,
3579 and the two are not intended to refer to the same value. The
3580 @code{let} special form prevents this kind of confusion.
3581
3582 @menu
3583 * Prevent confusion::
3584 * Parts of let Expression::
3585 * Sample let Expression::
3586 * Uninitialized let Variables::
3587 @end menu
3588
3589 @ifnottex
3590 @node Prevent confusion
3591 @unnumberedsubsec @code{let} Prevents Confusion
3592 @end ifnottex
3593
3594 @cindex @samp{local variable} defined
3595 @cindex @samp{variable, local}, defined
3596 The @code{let} special form prevents confusion. @code{let} creates a
3597 name for a @dfn{local variable} that overshadows any use of the same
3598 name outside the @code{let} expression. This is like understanding
3599 that whenever your host refers to `the house', he means his house, not
3600 yours. (Symbols used in argument lists work the same way.
3601 @xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Macro}.)
3602
3603 Local variables created by a @code{let} expression retain their value
3604 @emph{only} within the @code{let} expression itself (and within
3605 expressions called within the @code{let} expression); the local
3606 variables have no effect outside the @code{let} expression.
3607
3608 Another way to think about @code{let} is that it is like a @code{setq}
3609 that is temporary and local. The values set by @code{let} are
3610 automatically undone when the @code{let} is finished. The setting
3611 only affects expressions that are inside the bounds of the @code{let}
3612 expression. In computer science jargon, we would say ``the binding of
3613 a symbol is visible only in functions called in the @code{let} form;
3614 in Emacs Lisp, scoping is dynamic, not lexical.''
3615
3616 @code{let} can create more than one variable at once. Also,
3617 @code{let} gives each variable it creates an initial value, either a
3618 value specified by you, or @code{nil}. (In the jargon, this is called
3619 `binding the variable to the value'.) After @code{let} has created
3620 and bound the variables, it executes the code in the body of the
3621 @code{let}, and returns the value of the last expression in the body,
3622 as the value of the whole @code{let} expression. (`Execute' is a jargon
3623 term that means to evaluate a list; it comes from the use of the word
3624 meaning `to give practical effect to' (@cite{Oxford English
3625 Dictionary}). Since you evaluate an expression to perform an action,
3626 `execute' has evolved as a synonym to `evaluate'.)
3627
3628 @node Parts of let Expression
3629 @subsection The Parts of a @code{let} Expression
3630 @cindex @code{let} expression, parts of
3631 @cindex Parts of @code{let} expression
3632
3633 @cindex @samp{varlist} defined
3634 A @code{let} expression is a list of three parts. The first part is
3635 the symbol @code{let}. The second part is a list, called a
3636 @dfn{varlist}, each element of which is either a symbol by itself or a
3637 two-element list, the first element of which is a symbol. The third
3638 part of the @code{let} expression is the body of the @code{let}. The
3639 body usually consists of one or more lists.
3640
3641 @need 800
3642 A template for a @code{let} expression looks like this:
3643
3644 @smallexample
3645 (let @var{varlist} @var{body}@dots{})
3646 @end smallexample
3647
3648 @noindent
3649 The symbols in the varlist are the variables that are given initial
3650 values by the @code{let} special form. Symbols by themselves are given
3651 the initial value of @code{nil}; and each symbol that is the first
3652 element of a two-element list is bound to the value that is returned
3653 when the Lisp interpreter evaluates the second element.
3654
3655 Thus, a varlist might look like this: @code{(thread (needles 3))}. In
3656 this case, in a @code{let} expression, Emacs binds the symbol
3657 @code{thread} to an initial value of @code{nil}, and binds the symbol
3658 @code{needles} to an initial value of 3.
3659
3660 When you write a @code{let} expression, what you do is put the
3661 appropriate expressions in the slots of the @code{let} expression
3662 template.
3663
3664 If the varlist is composed of two-element lists, as is often the case,
3665 the template for the @code{let} expression looks like this:
3666
3667 @smallexample
3668 @group
3669 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value})
3670 (@var{variable} @var{value})
3671 @dots{})
3672 @var{body}@dots{})
3673 @end group
3674 @end smallexample
3675
3676 @node Sample let Expression
3677 @subsection Sample @code{let} Expression
3678 @cindex Sample @code{let} expression
3679 @cindex @code{let} expression sample
3680
3681 The following expression creates and gives initial values
3682 to the two variables @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. The body of the
3683 @code{let} expression is a list which calls the @code{message} function.
3684
3685 @smallexample
3686 @group
3687 (let ((zebra 'stripes)
3688 (tiger 'fierce))
3689 (message "One kind of animal has %s and another is %s."
3690 zebra tiger))
3691 @end group
3692 @end smallexample
3693
3694 Here, the varlist is @code{((zebra 'stripes) (tiger 'fierce))}.
3695
3696 The two variables are @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. Each variable is
3697 the first element of a two-element list and each value is the second
3698 element of its two-element list. In the varlist, Emacs binds the
3699 variable @code{zebra} to the value @code{stripes}@footnote{According
3700 to Jared Diamond in @cite{Guns, Germs, and Steel}, ``@dots{} zebras
3701 become impossibly dangerous as they grow older'' but the claim here is
3702 that they do not become fierce like a tiger. (1997, W. W. Norton and
3703 Co., ISBN 0-393-03894-2, page 171)}, and binds the
3704 variable @code{tiger} to the value @code{fierce}. In this example,
3705 both values are symbols preceded by a quote. The values could just as
3706 well have been another list or a string. The body of the @code{let}
3707 follows after the list holding the variables. In this example, the
3708 body is a list that uses the @code{message} function to print a string
3709 in the echo area.
3710
3711 @need 1500
3712 You may evaluate the example in the usual fashion, by placing the
3713 cursor after the last parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you do
3714 this, the following will appear in the echo area:
3715
3716 @smallexample
3717 "One kind of animal has stripes and another is fierce."
3718 @end smallexample
3719
3720 As we have seen before, the @code{message} function prints its first
3721 argument, except for @samp{%s}. In this example, the value of the variable
3722 @code{zebra} is printed at the location of the first @samp{%s} and the
3723 value of the variable @code{tiger} is printed at the location of the
3724 second @samp{%s}.
3725
3726 @node Uninitialized let Variables
3727 @subsection Uninitialized Variables in a @code{let} Statement
3728 @cindex Uninitialized @code{let} variables
3729 @cindex @code{let} variables uninitialized
3730
3731 If you do not bind the variables in a @code{let} statement to specific
3732 initial values, they will automatically be bound to an initial value of
3733 @code{nil}, as in the following expression:
3734
3735 @smallexample
3736 @group
3737 (let ((birch 3)
3738 pine
3739 fir
3740 (oak 'some))
3741 (message
3742 "Here are %d variables with %s, %s, and %s value."
3743 birch pine fir oak))
3744 @end group
3745 @end smallexample
3746
3747 @noindent
3748 Here, the varlist is @code{((birch 3) pine fir (oak 'some))}.
3749
3750 @need 1250
3751 If you evaluate this expression in the usual way, the following will
3752 appear in your echo area:
3753
3754 @smallexample
3755 "Here are 3 variables with nil, nil, and some value."
3756 @end smallexample
3757
3758 @noindent
3759 In this example, Emacs binds the symbol @code{birch} to the number 3,
3760 binds the symbols @code{pine} and @code{fir} to @code{nil}, and binds
3761 the symbol @code{oak} to the value @code{some}.
3762
3763 Note that in the first part of the @code{let}, the variables @code{pine}
3764 and @code{fir} stand alone as atoms that are not surrounded by
3765 parentheses; this is because they are being bound to @code{nil}, the
3766 empty list. But @code{oak} is bound to @code{some} and so is a part of
3767 the list @code{(oak 'some)}. Similarly, @code{birch} is bound to the
3768 number 3 and so is in a list with that number. (Since a number
3769 evaluates to itself, the number does not need to be quoted. Also, the
3770 number is printed in the message using a @samp{%d} rather than a
3771 @samp{%s}.) The four variables as a group are put into a list to
3772 delimit them from the body of the @code{let}.
3773
3774 @node if
3775 @section The @code{if} Special Form
3776 @findex if
3777 @cindex Conditional with @code{if}
3778
3779 A third special form, in addition to @code{defun} and @code{let}, is the
3780 conditional @code{if}. This form is used to instruct the computer to
3781 make decisions. You can write function definitions without using
3782 @code{if}, but it is used often enough, and is important enough, to be
3783 included here. It is used, for example, in the code for the
3784 function @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
3785
3786 The basic idea behind an @code{if}, is that ``@emph{if} a test is true,
3787 @emph{then} an expression is evaluated.'' If the test is not true, the
3788 expression is not evaluated. For example, you might make a decision
3789 such as, ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to the beach!''
3790
3791 @menu
3792 * if in more detail::
3793 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
3794 @end menu
3795
3796 @ifnottex
3797 @node if in more detail
3798 @unnumberedsubsec @code{if} in more detail
3799 @end ifnottex
3800
3801 @cindex @samp{if-part} defined
3802 @cindex @samp{then-part} defined
3803 An @code{if} expression written in Lisp does not use the word `then';
3804 the test and the action are the second and third elements of the list
3805 whose first element is @code{if}. Nonetheless, the test part of an
3806 @code{if} expression is often called the @dfn{if-part} and the second
3807 argument is often called the @dfn{then-part}.
3808
3809 Also, when an @code{if} expression is written, the true-or-false-test
3810 is usually written on the same line as the symbol @code{if}, but the
3811 action to carry out if the test is true, the ``then-part'', is written
3812 on the second and subsequent lines. This makes the @code{if}
3813 expression easier to read.
3814
3815 @smallexample
3816 @group
3817 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3818 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-test-is-true})
3819 @end group
3820 @end smallexample
3821
3822 @noindent
3823 The true-or-false-test will be an expression that
3824 is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter.
3825
3826 Here is an example that you can evaluate in the usual manner. The test
3827 is whether the number 5 is greater than the number 4. Since it is, the
3828 message @samp{5 is greater than 4!} will be printed.
3829
3830 @smallexample
3831 @group
3832 (if (> 5 4) ; @r{if-part}
3833 (message "5 is greater than 4!")) ; @r{then-part}
3834 @end group
3835 @end smallexample
3836
3837 @noindent
3838 (The function @code{>} tests whether its first argument is greater than
3839 its second argument and returns true if it is.)
3840 @findex > (greater than)
3841
3842 Of course, in actual use, the test in an @code{if} expression will not
3843 be fixed for all time as it is by the expression @code{(> 5 4)}.
3844 Instead, at least one of the variables used in the test will be bound to
3845 a value that is not known ahead of time. (If the value were known ahead
3846 of time, we would not need to run the test!)
3847
3848 For example, the value may be bound to an argument of a function
3849 definition. In the following function definition, the character of the
3850 animal is a value that is passed to the function. If the value bound to
3851 @code{characteristic} is @code{fierce}, then the message, @samp{It's a
3852 tiger!} will be printed; otherwise, @code{nil} will be returned.
3853
3854 @smallexample
3855 @group
3856 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
3857 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
3858 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
3859 then warn of a tiger."
3860 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
3861 (message "It's a tiger!")))
3862 @end group
3863 @end smallexample
3864
3865 @need 1500
3866 @noindent
3867 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate the
3868 function definition in the usual way to install it in Emacs, and then you
3869 can evaluate the following two expressions to see the results:
3870
3871 @smallexample
3872 @group
3873 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
3874
3875 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
3876
3877 @end group
3878 @end smallexample
3879
3880 @c Following sentences rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
3881 @noindent
3882 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
3883 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It's a tiger!"}; and
3884 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)} you will see @code{nil}
3885 printed in the echo area.
3886
3887 @node type-of-animal in detail
3888 @subsection The @code{type-of-animal} Function in Detail
3889
3890 Let's look at the @code{type-of-animal} function in detail.
3891
3892 The function definition for @code{type-of-animal} was written by filling
3893 the slots of two templates, one for a function definition as a whole, and
3894 a second for an @code{if} expression.
3895
3896 @need 1250
3897 The template for every function that is not interactive is:
3898
3899 @smallexample
3900 @group
3901 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
3902 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
3903 @var{body}@dots{})
3904 @end group
3905 @end smallexample
3906
3907 @need 800
3908 The parts of the function that match this template look like this:
3909
3910 @smallexample
3911 @group
3912 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
3913 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
3914 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
3915 then warn of a tiger."
3916 @var{body: the} @code{if} @var{expression})
3917 @end group
3918 @end smallexample
3919
3920 The name of function is @code{type-of-animal}; it is passed the value
3921 of one argument. The argument list is followed by a multi-line
3922 documentation string. The documentation string is included in the
3923 example because it is a good habit to write documentation string for
3924 every function definition. The body of the function definition
3925 consists of the @code{if} expression.
3926
3927 @need 800
3928 The template for an @code{if} expression looks like this:
3929
3930 @smallexample
3931 @group
3932 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3933 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true})
3934 @end group
3935 @end smallexample
3936
3937 @need 1250
3938 In the @code{type-of-animal} function, the code for the @code{if}
3939 looks like this:
3940
3941 @smallexample
3942 @group
3943 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
3944 (message "It's a tiger!")))
3945 @end group
3946 @end smallexample
3947
3948 @need 800
3949 Here, the true-or-false-test is the expression:
3950
3951 @smallexample
3952 (equal characteristic 'fierce)
3953 @end smallexample
3954
3955 @noindent
3956 In Lisp, @code{equal} is a function that determines whether its first
3957 argument is equal to its second argument. The second argument is the
3958 quoted symbol @code{'fierce} and the first argument is the value of the
3959 symbol @code{characteristic}---in other words, the argument passed to
3960 this function.
3961
3962 In the first exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the argument
3963 @code{fierce} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. Since @code{fierce}
3964 is equal to @code{fierce}, the expression, @code{(equal characteristic
3965 'fierce)}, returns a value of true. When this happens, the @code{if}
3966 evaluates the second argument or then-part of the @code{if}:
3967 @code{(message "It's tiger!")}.
3968
3969 On the other hand, in the second exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the
3970 argument @code{zebra} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. @code{zebra}
3971 is not equal to @code{fierce}, so the then-part is not evaluated and
3972 @code{nil} is returned by the @code{if} expression.
3973
3974 @node else
3975 @section If--then--else Expressions
3976 @cindex Else
3977
3978 An @code{if} expression may have an optional third argument, called
3979 the @dfn{else-part}, for the case when the true-or-false-test returns
3980 false. When this happens, the second argument or then-part of the
3981 overall @code{if} expression is @emph{not} evaluated, but the third or
3982 else-part @emph{is} evaluated. You might think of this as the cloudy
3983 day alternative for the decision ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to
3984 the beach, else read a book!''.
3985
3986 The word ``else'' is not written in the Lisp code; the else-part of an
3987 @code{if} expression comes after the then-part. In the written Lisp, the
3988 else-part is usually written to start on a line of its own and is
3989 indented less than the then-part:
3990
3991 @smallexample
3992 @group
3993 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3994 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true}
3995 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-false})
3996 @end group
3997 @end smallexample
3998
3999 For example, the following @code{if} expression prints the message @samp{4
4000 is not greater than 5!} when you evaluate it in the usual way:
4001
4002 @smallexample
4003 @group
4004 (if (> 4 5) ; @r{if-part}
4005 (message "4 falsely greater than 5!") ; @r{then-part}
4006 (message "4 is not greater than 5!")) ; @r{else-part}
4007 @end group
4008 @end smallexample
4009
4010 @noindent
4011 Note that the different levels of indentation make it easy to
4012 distinguish the then-part from the else-part. (GNU Emacs has several
4013 commands that automatically indent @code{if} expressions correctly.
4014 @xref{Typing Lists, , GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists}.)
4015
4016 We can extend the @code{type-of-animal} function to include an
4017 else-part by simply incorporating an additional part to the @code{if}
4018 expression.
4019
4020 @need 1500
4021 You can see the consequences of doing this if you evaluate the following
4022 version of the @code{type-of-animal} function definition to install it
4023 and then evaluate the two subsequent expressions to pass different
4024 arguments to the function.
4025
4026 @smallexample
4027 @group
4028 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic) ; @r{Second version.}
4029 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
4030 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
4031 then warn of a tiger;
4032 else say it's not fierce."
4033 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4034 (message "It's a tiger!")
4035 (message "It's not fierce!")))
4036 @end group
4037 @end smallexample
4038 @sp 1
4039
4040 @smallexample
4041 @group
4042 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
4043
4044 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
4045
4046 @end group
4047 @end smallexample
4048
4049 @c Following sentence rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
4050 @noindent
4051 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
4052 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It's a tiger!"}; but
4053 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)}, you will see
4054 @code{"It's not fierce!"}.
4055
4056 (Of course, if the @var{characteristic} were @code{ferocious}, the
4057 message @code{"It's not fierce!"} would be printed; and it would be
4058 misleading! When you write code, you need to take into account the
4059 possibility that some such argument will be tested by the @code{if}
4060 and write your program accordingly.)
4061
4062 @node Truth & Falsehood
4063 @section Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4064 @cindex Truth and falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4065 @cindex Falsehood and truth in Emacs Lisp
4066 @findex nil
4067
4068 There is an important aspect to the truth test in an @code{if}
4069 expression. So far, we have spoken of `true' and `false' as values of
4070 predicates as if they were new kinds of Emacs Lisp objects. In fact,
4071 `false' is just our old friend @code{nil}. Anything else---anything
4072 at all---is `true'.
4073
4074 The expression that tests for truth is interpreted as @dfn{true}
4075 if the result of evaluating it is a value that is not @code{nil}. In
4076 other words, the result of the test is considered true if the value
4077 returned is a number such as 47, a string such as @code{"hello"}, or a
4078 symbol (other than @code{nil}) such as @code{flowers}, or a list (so
4079 long as it is not empty), or even a buffer!
4080
4081 @menu
4082 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
4083 @end menu
4084
4085 @ifnottex
4086 @node nil explained
4087 @unnumberedsubsec An explanation of @code{nil}
4088 @end ifnottex
4089
4090 Before illustrating a test for truth, we need an explanation of @code{nil}.
4091
4092 In Emacs Lisp, the symbol @code{nil} has two meanings. First, it means the
4093 empty list. Second, it means false and is the value returned when a
4094 true-or-false-test tests false. @code{nil} can be written as an empty
4095 list, @code{()}, or as @code{nil}. As far as the Lisp interpreter is
4096 concerned, @code{()} and @code{nil} are the same. Humans, however, tend
4097 to use @code{nil} for false and @code{()} for the empty list.
4098
4099 In Emacs Lisp, any value that is not @code{nil}---is not the empty
4100 list---is considered true. This means that if an evaluation returns
4101 something that is not an empty list, an @code{if} expression will test
4102 true. For example, if a number is put in the slot for the test, it
4103 will be evaluated and will return itself, since that is what numbers
4104 do when evaluated. In this conditional, the @code{if} expression will
4105 test true. The expression tests false only when @code{nil}, an empty
4106 list, is returned by evaluating the expression.
4107
4108 You can see this by evaluating the two expressions in the following examples.
4109
4110 In the first example, the number 4 is evaluated as the test in the
4111 @code{if} expression and returns itself; consequently, the then-part
4112 of the expression is evaluated and returned: @samp{true} appears in
4113 the echo area. In the second example, the @code{nil} indicates false;
4114 consequently, the else-part of the expression is evaluated and
4115 returned: @samp{false} appears in the echo area.
4116
4117 @smallexample
4118 @group
4119 (if 4
4120 'true
4121 'false)
4122 @end group
4123
4124 @group
4125 (if nil
4126 'true
4127 'false)
4128 @end group
4129 @end smallexample
4130
4131 @need 1250
4132 Incidentally, if some other useful value is not available for a test that
4133 returns true, then the Lisp interpreter will return the symbol @code{t}
4134 for true. For example, the expression @code{(> 5 4)} returns @code{t}
4135 when evaluated, as you can see by evaluating it in the usual way:
4136
4137 @smallexample
4138 (> 5 4)
4139 @end smallexample
4140
4141 @need 1250
4142 @noindent
4143 On the other hand, this function returns @code{nil} if the test is false.
4144
4145 @smallexample
4146 (> 4 5)
4147 @end smallexample
4148
4149 @node save-excursion
4150 @section @code{save-excursion}
4151 @findex save-excursion
4152 @cindex Region, what it is
4153 @cindex Preserving point, mark, and buffer
4154 @cindex Point, mark, buffer preservation
4155 @findex point
4156 @findex mark
4157
4158 The @code{save-excursion} function is the third and final special form
4159 that we will discuss in this chapter.
4160
4161 In Emacs Lisp programs used for editing, the @code{save-excursion}
4162 function is very common. It saves the location of point and mark,
4163 executes the body of the function, and then restores point and mark to
4164 their previous positions if their locations were changed. Its primary
4165 purpose is to keep the user from being surprised and disturbed by
4166 unexpected movement of point or mark.
4167
4168 @menu
4169 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
4170 * Template for save-excursion::
4171 @end menu
4172
4173 @ifnottex
4174 @node Point and mark
4175 @unnumberedsubsec Point and Mark
4176 @end ifnottex
4177
4178 Before discussing @code{save-excursion}, however, it may be useful
4179 first to review what point and mark are in GNU Emacs. @dfn{Point} is
4180 the current location of the cursor. Wherever the cursor
4181 is, that is point. More precisely, on terminals where the cursor
4182 appears to be on top of a character, point is immediately before the
4183 character. In Emacs Lisp, point is an integer. The first character in
4184 a buffer is number one, the second is number two, and so on. The
4185 function @code{point} returns the current position of the cursor as a
4186 number. Each buffer has its own value for point.
4187
4188 The @dfn{mark} is another position in the buffer; its value can be set
4189 with a command such as @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}). If
4190 a mark has been set, you can use the command @kbd{C-x C-x}
4191 (@code{exchange-point-and-mark}) to cause the cursor to jump to the mark
4192 and set the mark to be the previous position of point. In addition, if
4193 you set another mark, the position of the previous mark is saved in the
4194 mark ring. Many mark positions can be saved this way. You can jump the
4195 cursor to a saved mark by typing @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}} one or more
4196 times.
4197
4198 The part of the buffer between point and mark is called @dfn{the
4199 region}. Numerous commands work on the region, including
4200 @code{center-region}, @code{count-lines-region}, @code{kill-region}, and
4201 @code{print-region}.
4202
4203 The @code{save-excursion} special form saves the locations of point and
4204 mark and restores those positions after the code within the body of the
4205 special form is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter. Thus, if point were
4206 in the beginning of a piece of text and some code moved point to the end
4207 of the buffer, the @code{save-excursion} would put point back to where
4208 it was before, after the expressions in the body of the function were
4209 evaluated.
4210
4211 In Emacs, a function frequently moves point as part of its internal
4212 workings even though a user would not expect this. For example,
4213 @code{count-lines-region} moves point. To prevent the user from being
4214 bothered by jumps that are both unexpected and (from the user's point of
4215 view) unnecessary, @code{save-excursion} is often used to keep point and
4216 mark in the location expected by the user. The use of
4217 @code{save-excursion} is good housekeeping.
4218
4219 To make sure the house stays clean, @code{save-excursion} restores the
4220 values of point and mark even if something goes wrong in the code inside
4221 of it (or, to be more precise and to use the proper jargon, ``in case of
4222 abnormal exit''). This feature is very helpful.
4223
4224 In addition to recording the values of point and mark,
4225 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the current buffer, and restores
4226 it, too. This means you can write code that will change the buffer and
4227 have @code{save-excursion} switch you back to the original buffer.
4228 This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in @code{append-to-buffer}.
4229 (@xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
4230
4231 @node Template for save-excursion
4232 @subsection Template for a @code{save-excursion} Expression
4233
4234 @need 800
4235 The template for code using @code{save-excursion} is simple:
4236
4237 @smallexample
4238 @group
4239 (save-excursion
4240 @var{body}@dots{})
4241 @end group
4242 @end smallexample
4243
4244 @noindent
4245 The body of the function is one or more expressions that will be
4246 evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter. If there is more than
4247 one expression in the body, the value of the last one will be returned
4248 as the value of the @code{save-excursion} function. The other
4249 expressions in the body are evaluated only for their side effects; and
4250 @code{save-excursion} itself is used only for its side effect (which
4251 is restoring the positions of point and mark).
4252
4253 @need 1250
4254 In more detail, the template for a @code{save-excursion} expression
4255 looks like this:
4256
4257 @smallexample
4258 @group
4259 (save-excursion
4260 @var{first-expression-in-body}
4261 @var{second-expression-in-body}
4262 @var{third-expression-in-body}
4263 @dots{}
4264 @var{last-expression-in-body})
4265 @end group
4266 @end smallexample
4267
4268 @noindent
4269 An expression, of course, may be a symbol on its own or a list.
4270
4271 In Emacs Lisp code, a @code{save-excursion} expression often occurs
4272 within the body of a @code{let} expression. It looks like this:
4273
4274 @smallexample
4275 @group
4276 (let @var{varlist}
4277 (save-excursion
4278 @var{body}@dots{}))
4279 @end group
4280 @end smallexample
4281
4282 @node Review
4283 @section Review
4284
4285 In the last few chapters we have introduced a macro and a fair number
4286 of functions and special forms. Here they are described in brief,
4287 along with a few similar functions that have not been mentioned yet.
4288
4289 @table @code
4290 @item eval-last-sexp
4291 Evaluate the last symbolic expression before the current location of
4292 point. The value is printed in the echo area unless the function is
4293 invoked with an argument; in that case, the output is printed in the
4294 current buffer. This command is normally bound to @kbd{C-x C-e}.
4295
4296 @item defun
4297 Define function. This macro has up to five parts: the name, a
4298 template for the arguments that will be passed to the function,
4299 documentation, an optional interactive declaration, and the body of
4300 the definition.
4301
4302 @need 1250
4303 For example, in an early version of Emacs, the function definition was
4304 as follows. (It is slightly more complex now that it seeks the first
4305 non-whitespace character rather than the first visible character.)
4306
4307 @smallexample
4308 @group
4309 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4310 "Move point to first visible character on line."
4311 (interactive)
4312 (beginning-of-line 1)
4313 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4314 @end group
4315 @end smallexample
4316
4317 @ignore
4318 In GNU Emacs 22,
4319
4320 (defun backward-to-indentation (&optional arg)
4321 "Move backward ARG lines and position at first nonblank character."
4322 (interactive "p")
4323 (forward-line (- (or arg 1)))
4324 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4325
4326 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4327 "Move point to the first non-whitespace character on this line."
4328 (interactive)
4329 (beginning-of-line 1)
4330 (skip-syntax-forward " " (line-end-position))
4331 ;; Move back over chars that have whitespace syntax but have the p flag.
4332 (backward-prefix-chars))
4333 @end ignore
4334
4335 @item interactive
4336 Declare to the interpreter that the function can be used
4337 interactively. This special form may be followed by a string with one
4338 or more parts that pass the information to the arguments of the
4339 function, in sequence. These parts may also tell the interpreter to
4340 prompt for information. Parts of the string are separated by
4341 newlines, @samp{\n}.
4342
4343 @need 1000
4344 Common code characters are:
4345
4346 @table @code
4347 @item b
4348 The name of an existing buffer.
4349
4350 @item f
4351 The name of an existing file.
4352
4353 @item p
4354 The numeric prefix argument. (Note that this `p' is lower case.)
4355
4356 @item r
4357 Point and the mark, as two numeric arguments, smallest first. This
4358 is the only code letter that specifies two successive arguments
4359 rather than one.
4360 @end table
4361
4362 @xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for @samp{interactive},
4363 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a complete list of
4364 code characters.
4365
4366 @item let
4367 Declare that a list of variables is for use within the body of the
4368 @code{let} and give them an initial value, either @code{nil} or a
4369 specified value; then evaluate the rest of the expressions in the body
4370 of the @code{let} and return the value of the last one. Inside the
4371 body of the @code{let}, the Lisp interpreter does not see the values of
4372 the variables of the same names that are bound outside of the
4373 @code{let}.
4374
4375 @need 1250
4376 For example,
4377
4378 @smallexample
4379 @group
4380 (let ((foo (buffer-name))
4381 (bar (buffer-size)))
4382 (message
4383 "This buffer is %s and has %d characters."
4384 foo bar))
4385 @end group
4386 @end smallexample
4387
4388 @item save-excursion
4389 Record the values of point and mark and the current buffer before
4390 evaluating the body of this special form. Restore the values of point
4391 and mark and buffer afterward.
4392
4393 @need 1250
4394 For example,
4395
4396 @smallexample
4397 @group
4398 (message "We are %d characters into this buffer."
4399 (- (point)
4400 (save-excursion
4401 (goto-char (point-min)) (point))))
4402 @end group
4403 @end smallexample
4404
4405 @item if
4406 Evaluate the first argument to the function; if it is true, evaluate
4407 the second argument; else evaluate the third argument, if there is one.
4408
4409 The @code{if} special form is called a @dfn{conditional}. There are
4410 other conditionals in Emacs Lisp, but @code{if} is perhaps the most
4411 commonly used.
4412
4413 @need 1250
4414 For example,
4415
4416 @smallexample
4417 @group
4418 (if (= 22 emacs-major-version)
4419 (message "This is version 22 Emacs")
4420 (message "This is not version 22 Emacs"))
4421 @end group
4422 @end smallexample
4423
4424 @need 1250
4425 @item <
4426 @itemx >
4427 @itemx <=
4428 @itemx >=
4429 The @code{<} function tests whether its first argument is smaller than
4430 its second argument. A corresponding function, @code{>}, tests whether
4431 the first argument is greater than the second. Likewise, @code{<=}
4432 tests whether the first argument is less than or equal to the second and
4433 @code{>=} tests whether the first argument is greater than or equal to
4434 the second. In all cases, both arguments must be numbers or markers
4435 (markers indicate positions in buffers).
4436
4437 @need 800
4438 @item =
4439 The @code{=} function tests whether two arguments, both numbers or
4440 markers, are equal.
4441
4442 @need 1250
4443 @item equal
4444 @itemx eq
4445 Test whether two objects are the same. @code{equal} uses one meaning
4446 of the word `same' and @code{eq} uses another: @code{equal} returns
4447 true if the two objects have a similar structure and contents, such as
4448 two copies of the same book. On the other hand, @code{eq}, returns
4449 true if both arguments are actually the same object.
4450 @findex equal
4451 @findex eq
4452
4453 @need 1250
4454 @item string<
4455 @itemx string-lessp
4456 @itemx string=
4457 @itemx string-equal
4458 The @code{string-lessp} function tests whether its first argument is
4459 smaller than the second argument. A shorter, alternative name for the
4460 same function (a @code{defalias}) is @code{string<}.
4461
4462 The arguments to @code{string-lessp} must be strings or symbols; the
4463 ordering is lexicographic, so case is significant. The print names of
4464 symbols are used instead of the symbols themselves.
4465
4466 @cindex @samp{empty string} defined
4467 An empty string, @samp{""}, a string with no characters in it, is
4468 smaller than any string of characters.
4469
4470 @code{string-equal} provides the corresponding test for equality. Its
4471 shorter, alternative name is @code{string=}. There are no string test
4472 functions that correspond to @var{>}, @code{>=}, or @code{<=}.
4473
4474 @item message
4475 Print a message in the echo area. The first argument is a string that
4476 can contain @samp{%s}, @samp{%d}, or @samp{%c} to print the value of
4477 arguments that follow the string. The argument used by @samp{%s} must
4478 be a string or a symbol; the argument used by @samp{%d} must be a
4479 number. The argument used by @samp{%c} must be an @sc{ascii} code
4480 number; it will be printed as the character with that @sc{ascii} code.
4481 (Various other %-sequences have not been mentioned.)
4482
4483 @item setq
4484 @itemx set
4485 The @code{setq} function sets the value of its first argument to the
4486 value of the second argument. The first argument is automatically
4487 quoted by @code{setq}. It does the same for succeeding pairs of
4488 arguments. Another function, @code{set}, takes only two arguments and
4489 evaluates both of them before setting the value returned by its first
4490 argument to the value returned by its second argument.
4491
4492 @item buffer-name
4493 Without an argument, return the name of the buffer, as a string.
4494
4495 @item buffer-file-name
4496 Without an argument, return the name of the file the buffer is
4497 visiting.
4498
4499 @item current-buffer
4500 Return the buffer in which Emacs is active; it may not be
4501 the buffer that is visible on the screen.
4502
4503 @item other-buffer
4504 Return the most recently selected buffer (other than the buffer passed
4505 to @code{other-buffer} as an argument and other than the current
4506 buffer).
4507
4508 @item switch-to-buffer
4509 Select a buffer for Emacs to be active in and display it in the current
4510 window so users can look at it. Usually bound to @kbd{C-x b}.
4511
4512 @item set-buffer
4513 Switch Emacs's attention to a buffer on which programs will run. Don't
4514 alter what the window is showing.
4515
4516 @item buffer-size
4517 Return the number of characters in the current buffer.
4518
4519 @item point
4520 Return the value of the current position of the cursor, as an
4521 integer counting the number of characters from the beginning of the
4522 buffer.
4523
4524 @item point-min
4525 Return the minimum permissible value of point in
4526 the current buffer. This is 1, unless narrowing is in effect.
4527
4528 @item point-max
4529 Return the value of the maximum permissible value of point in the
4530 current buffer. This is the end of the buffer, unless narrowing is in
4531 effect.
4532 @end table
4533
4534 @need 1500
4535 @node defun Exercises
4536 @section Exercises
4537
4538 @itemize @bullet
4539 @item
4540 Write a non-interactive function that doubles the value of its
4541 argument, a number. Make that function interactive.
4542
4543 @item
4544 Write a function that tests whether the current value of
4545 @code{fill-column} is greater than the argument passed to the function,
4546 and if so, prints an appropriate message.
4547 @end itemize
4548
4549 @node Buffer Walk Through
4550 @chapter A Few Buffer--Related Functions
4551
4552 In this chapter we study in detail several of the functions used in GNU
4553 Emacs. This is called a ``walk-through''. These functions are used as
4554 examples of Lisp code, but are not imaginary examples; with the
4555 exception of the first, simplified function definition, these functions
4556 show the actual code used in GNU Emacs. You can learn a great deal from
4557 these definitions. The functions described here are all related to
4558 buffers. Later, we will study other functions.
4559
4560 @menu
4561 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
4562 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
4563 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
4564 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
4565 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
4566 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
4567 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
4568 * Buffer Exercises::
4569 @end menu
4570
4571 @node Finding More
4572 @section Finding More Information
4573
4574 @findex describe-function, @r{introduced}
4575 @cindex Find function documentation
4576 In this walk-through, I will describe each new function as we come to
4577 it, sometimes in detail and sometimes briefly. If you are interested,
4578 you can get the full documentation of any Emacs Lisp function at any
4579 time by typing @kbd{C-h f} and then the name of the function (and then
4580 @key{RET}). Similarly, you can get the full documentation for a
4581 variable by typing @kbd{C-h v} and then the name of the variable (and
4582 then @key{RET}).
4583
4584 @cindex Find source of function
4585 @c In version 22, tells location both of C and of Emacs Lisp
4586 Also, @code{describe-function} will tell you the location of the
4587 function definition.
4588
4589 Put point into the name of the file that contains the function and
4590 press the @key{RET} key. In this case, @key{RET} means
4591 @code{push-button} rather than `return' or `enter'. Emacs will take
4592 you directly to the function definition.
4593
4594 @ignore
4595 Not In version 22
4596
4597 If you move point over the file name and press
4598 the @key{RET} key, which in this case means @code{help-follow} rather
4599 than `return' or `enter', Emacs will take you directly to the function
4600 definition.
4601 @end ignore
4602
4603 More generally, if you want to see a function in its original source
4604 file, you can use the @code{find-tag} function to jump to it.
4605 @code{find-tag} works with a wide variety of languages, not just
4606 Lisp, and C, and it works with non-programming text as well. For
4607 example, @code{find-tag} will jump to the various nodes in the
4608 Texinfo source file of this document.
4609 The @code{find-tag} function depends on `tags tables' that record
4610 the locations of the functions, variables, and other items to which
4611 @code{find-tag} jumps.
4612
4613 To use the @code{find-tag} command, type @kbd{M-.} (i.e., press the
4614 period key while holding down the @key{META} key, or else type the
4615 @key{ESC} key and then type the period key), and then, at the prompt,
4616 type in the name of the function whose source code you want to see,
4617 such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}, and then type @key{RET}. Emacs will
4618 switch buffers and display the source code for the function on your
4619 screen. To switch back to your current buffer, type @kbd{C-x b
4620 @key{RET}}. (On some keyboards, the @key{META} key is labeled
4621 @key{ALT}.)
4622
4623 @c !!! 22.1.1 tags table location in this paragraph
4624 @cindex TAGS table, specifying
4625 @findex find-tag
4626 Depending on how the initial default values of your copy of Emacs are
4627 set, you may also need to specify the location of your `tags table',
4628 which is a file called @file{TAGS}. For example, if you are
4629 interested in Emacs sources, the tags table you will most likely want,
4630 if it has already been created for you, will be in a subdirectory of
4631 the @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/} directory; thus you would use the
4632 @code{M-x visit-tags-table} command and specify a pathname such as
4633 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/TAGS}. If the tags table
4634 has not already been created, you will have to create it yourself. It
4635 will be in a file such as @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}.
4636
4637 @need 1250
4638 To create a @file{TAGS} file in a specific directory, switch to that
4639 directory in Emacs using @kbd{M-x cd} command, or list the directory
4640 with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the compile command, with
4641 @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute:
4642
4643 @smallexample
4644 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
4645 @end smallexample
4646
4647 For more information, see @ref{etags, , Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File}.
4648
4649 After you become more familiar with Emacs Lisp, you will find that you will
4650 frequently use @code{find-tag} to navigate your way around source code;
4651 and you will create your own @file{TAGS} tables.
4652
4653 @cindex Library, as term for `file'
4654 Incidentally, the files that contain Lisp code are conventionally
4655 called @dfn{libraries}. The metaphor is derived from that of a
4656 specialized library, such as a law library or an engineering library,
4657 rather than a general library. Each library, or file, contains
4658 functions that relate to a particular topic or activity, such as
4659 @file{abbrev.el} for handling abbreviations and other typing
4660 shortcuts, and @file{help.el} for on-line help. (Sometimes several
4661 libraries provide code for a single activity, as the various
4662 @file{rmail@dots{}} files provide code for reading electronic mail.)
4663 In @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}, you will see sentences such as ``The
4664 @kbd{C-h p} command lets you search the standard Emacs Lisp libraries
4665 by topic keywords.''
4666
4667 @node simplified-beginning-of-buffer
4668 @section A Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition
4669 @findex simplified-beginning-of-buffer
4670
4671 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} command is a good function to start with
4672 since you are likely to be familiar with it and it is easy to
4673 understand. Used as an interactive command, @code{beginning-of-buffer}
4674 moves the cursor to the beginning of the buffer, leaving the mark at the
4675 previous position. It is generally bound to @kbd{M-<}.
4676
4677 In this section, we will discuss a shortened version of the function
4678 that shows how it is most frequently used. This shortened function
4679 works as written, but it does not contain the code for a complex option.
4680 In another section, we will describe the entire function.
4681 (@xref{beginning-of-buffer, , Complete Definition of
4682 @code{beginning-of-buffer}}.)
4683
4684 Before looking at the code, let's consider what the function
4685 definition has to contain: it must include an expression that makes
4686 the function interactive so it can be called by typing @kbd{M-x
4687 beginning-of-buffer} or by typing a keychord such as @kbd{M-<}; it
4688 must include code to leave a mark at the original position in the
4689 buffer; and it must include code to move the cursor to the beginning
4690 of the buffer.
4691
4692 @need 1250
4693 Here is the complete text of the shortened version of the function:
4694
4695 @smallexample
4696 @group
4697 (defun simplified-beginning-of-buffer ()
4698 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
4699 leave mark at previous position."
4700 (interactive)
4701 (push-mark)
4702 (goto-char (point-min)))
4703 @end group
4704 @end smallexample
4705
4706 Like all function definitions, this definition has five parts following
4707 the macro @code{defun}:
4708
4709 @enumerate
4710 @item
4711 The name: in this example, @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}.
4712
4713 @item
4714 A list of the arguments: in this example, an empty list, @code{()},
4715
4716 @item
4717 The documentation string.
4718
4719 @item
4720 The interactive expression.
4721
4722 @item
4723 The body.
4724 @end enumerate
4725
4726 @noindent
4727 In this function definition, the argument list is empty; this means that
4728 this function does not require any arguments. (When we look at the
4729 definition for the complete function, we will see that it may be passed
4730 an optional argument.)
4731
4732 The interactive expression tells Emacs that the function is intended to
4733 be used interactively. In this example, @code{interactive} does not have
4734 an argument because @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} does not
4735 require one.
4736
4737 @need 800
4738 The body of the function consists of the two lines:
4739
4740 @smallexample
4741 @group
4742 (push-mark)
4743 (goto-char (point-min))
4744 @end group
4745 @end smallexample
4746
4747 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark)}. When
4748 this expression is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter, it sets a mark at
4749 the current position of the cursor, wherever that may be. The position
4750 of this mark is saved in the mark ring.
4751
4752 The next line is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}. This expression
4753 jumps the cursor to the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the
4754 beginning of the buffer (or to the beginning of the accessible portion
4755 of the buffer if it is narrowed. @xref{Narrowing & Widening, ,
4756 Narrowing and Widening}.)
4757
4758 The @code{push-mark} command sets a mark at the place where the cursor
4759 was located before it was moved to the beginning of the buffer by the
4760 @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression. Consequently, you can, if
4761 you wish, go back to where you were originally by typing @kbd{C-x C-x}.
4762
4763 That is all there is to the function definition!
4764
4765 @findex describe-function
4766 When you are reading code such as this and come upon an unfamiliar
4767 function, such as @code{goto-char}, you can find out what it does by
4768 using the @code{describe-function} command. To use this command, type
4769 @kbd{C-h f} and then type in the name of the function and press
4770 @key{RET}. The @code{describe-function} command will print the
4771 function's documentation string in a @file{*Help*} window. For
4772 example, the documentation for @code{goto-char} is:
4773
4774 @smallexample
4775 @group
4776 Set point to POSITION, a number or marker.
4777 Beginning of buffer is position (point-min), end is (point-max).
4778 @end group
4779 @end smallexample
4780
4781 @noindent
4782 The function's one argument is the desired position.
4783
4784 @noindent
4785 (The prompt for @code{describe-function} will offer you the symbol
4786 under or preceding the cursor, so you can save typing by positioning
4787 the cursor right over or after the function and then typing @kbd{C-h f
4788 @key{RET}}.)
4789
4790 The @code{end-of-buffer} function definition is written in the same way as
4791 the @code{beginning-of-buffer} definition except that the body of the
4792 function contains the expression @code{(goto-char (point-max))} in place
4793 of @code{(goto-char (point-min))}.
4794
4795 @node mark-whole-buffer
4796 @section The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4797 @findex mark-whole-buffer
4798
4799 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is no harder to understand than the
4800 @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function. In this case, however,
4801 we will look at the complete function, not a shortened version.
4802
4803 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is not as commonly used as the
4804 @code{beginning-of-buffer} function, but is useful nonetheless: it
4805 marks a whole buffer as a region by putting point at the beginning and
4806 a mark at the end of the buffer. It is generally bound to @kbd{C-x
4807 h}.
4808
4809 @menu
4810 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
4811 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
4812 @end menu
4813
4814 @ifnottex
4815 @node mark-whole-buffer overview
4816 @unnumberedsubsec An overview of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4817 @end ifnottex
4818
4819 @need 1250
4820 In GNU Emacs 22, the code for the complete function looks like this:
4821
4822 @smallexample
4823 @group
4824 (defun mark-whole-buffer ()
4825 "Put point at beginning and mark at end of buffer.
4826 You probably should not use this function in Lisp programs;
4827 it is usually a mistake for a Lisp function to use any subroutine
4828 that uses or sets the mark."
4829 (interactive)
4830 (push-mark (point))
4831 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4832 (goto-char (point-min)))
4833 @end group
4834 @end smallexample
4835
4836 @need 1250
4837 Like all other functions, the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function fits
4838 into the template for a function definition. The template looks like
4839 this:
4840
4841 @smallexample
4842 @group
4843 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
4844 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
4845 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
4846 @var{body}@dots{})
4847 @end group
4848 @end smallexample
4849
4850 Here is how the function works: the name of the function is
4851 @code{mark-whole-buffer}; it is followed by an empty argument list,
4852 @samp{()}, which means that the function does not require arguments.
4853 The documentation comes next.
4854
4855 The next line is an @code{(interactive)} expression that tells Emacs
4856 that the function will be used interactively. These details are similar
4857 to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function described in the
4858 previous section.
4859
4860 @need 1250
4861 @node Body of mark-whole-buffer
4862 @subsection Body of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4863
4864 The body of the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function consists of three
4865 lines of code:
4866
4867 @c GNU Emacs 22
4868 @smallexample
4869 @group
4870 (push-mark (point))
4871 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4872 (goto-char (point-min))
4873 @end group
4874 @end smallexample
4875
4876 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark (point))}.
4877
4878 This line does exactly the same job as the first line of the body of
4879 the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function, which is written
4880 @code{(push-mark)}. In both cases, the Lisp interpreter sets a mark
4881 at the current position of the cursor.
4882
4883 I don't know why the expression in @code{mark-whole-buffer} is written
4884 @code{(push-mark (point))} and the expression in
4885 @code{beginning-of-buffer} is written @code{(push-mark)}. Perhaps
4886 whoever wrote the code did not know that the arguments for
4887 @code{push-mark} are optional and that if @code{push-mark} is not
4888 passed an argument, the function automatically sets mark at the
4889 location of point by default. Or perhaps the expression was written
4890 so as to parallel the structure of the next line. In any case, the
4891 line causes Emacs to determine the position of point and set a mark
4892 there.
4893
4894 In earlier versions of GNU Emacs, the next line of
4895 @code{mark-whole-buffer} was @code{(push-mark (point-max))}. This
4896 expression sets a mark at the point in the buffer that has the highest
4897 number. This will be the end of the buffer (or, if the buffer is
4898 narrowed, the end of the accessible portion of the buffer.
4899 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more about
4900 narrowing.) After this mark has been set, the previous mark, the one
4901 set at point, is no longer set, but Emacs remembers its position, just
4902 as all other recent marks are always remembered. This means that you
4903 can, if you wish, go back to that position by typing @kbd{C-u
4904 C-@key{SPC}} twice.
4905
4906 @need 1250
4907 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{(point-max)} is slightly more complicated.
4908 The line reads
4909
4910 @smallexample
4911 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4912 @end smallexample
4913
4914 @noindent
4915 The expression works nearly the same as before. It sets a mark at the
4916 highest numbered place in the buffer that it can. However, in this
4917 version, @code{push-mark} has two additional arguments. The second
4918 argument to @code{push-mark} is @code{nil}. This tells the function
4919 it @emph{should} display a message that says `Mark set' when it pushes
4920 the mark. The third argument is @code{t}. This tells
4921 @code{push-mark} to activate the mark when Transient Mark mode is
4922 turned on. Transient Mark mode highlights the currently active
4923 region. It is often turned off.
4924
4925 Finally, the last line of the function is @code{(goto-char
4926 (point-min)))}. This is written exactly the same way as it is written
4927 in @code{beginning-of-buffer}. The expression moves the cursor to
4928 the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the beginning of the buffer
4929 (or to the beginning of the accessible portion of the buffer). As a
4930 result of this, point is placed at the beginning of the buffer and mark
4931 is set at the end of the buffer. The whole buffer is, therefore, the
4932 region.
4933
4934 @node append-to-buffer
4935 @section The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
4936 @findex append-to-buffer
4937
4938 The @code{append-to-buffer} command is more complex than the
4939 @code{mark-whole-buffer} command. What it does is copy the region
4940 (that is, the part of the buffer between point and mark) from the
4941 current buffer to a specified buffer.
4942
4943 @menu
4944 * append-to-buffer overview::
4945 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
4946 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
4947 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
4948 @end menu
4949
4950 @ifnottex
4951 @node append-to-buffer overview
4952 @unnumberedsubsec An Overview of @code{append-to-buffer}
4953 @end ifnottex
4954
4955 @findex insert-buffer-substring
4956 The @code{append-to-buffer} command uses the
4957 @code{insert-buffer-substring} function to copy the region.
4958 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is described by its name: it takes a
4959 string of characters from part of a buffer, a ``substring'', and
4960 inserts them into another buffer.
4961
4962 Most of @code{append-to-buffer} is
4963 concerned with setting up the conditions for
4964 @code{insert-buffer-substring} to work: the code must specify both the
4965 buffer to which the text will go, the window it comes from and goes
4966 to, and the region that will be copied.
4967
4968 @need 1250
4969 Here is the complete text of the function:
4970
4971 @smallexample
4972 @group
4973 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
4974 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
4975 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
4976 @end group
4977
4978 @group
4979 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
4980 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
4981 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
4982 (interactive
4983 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer
4984 (current-buffer) t))
4985 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
4986 @end group
4987 @group
4988 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
4989 (save-excursion
4990 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
4991 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
4992 point)
4993 (set-buffer append-to)
4994 (setq point (point))
4995 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
4996 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
4997 (dolist (window windows)
4998 (when (= (window-point window) point)
4999 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5000 @end group
5001 @end smallexample
5002
5003 The function can be understood by looking at it as a series of
5004 filled-in templates.
5005
5006 The outermost template is for the function definition. In this
5007 function, it looks like this (with several slots filled in):
5008
5009 @smallexample
5010 @group
5011 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5012 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5013 (interactive @dots{})
5014 @var{body}@dots{})
5015 @end group
5016 @end smallexample
5017
5018 The first line of the function includes its name and three arguments.
5019 The arguments are the @code{buffer} to which the text will be copied, and
5020 the @code{start} and @code{end} of the region in the current buffer that
5021 will be copied.
5022
5023 The next part of the function is the documentation, which is clear and
5024 complete. As is conventional, the three arguments are written in
5025 upper case so you will notice them easily. Even better, they are
5026 described in the same order as in the argument list.
5027
5028 Note that the documentation distinguishes between a buffer and its
5029 name. (The function can handle either.)
5030
5031 @node append interactive
5032 @subsection The @code{append-to-buffer} Interactive Expression
5033
5034 Since the @code{append-to-buffer} function will be used interactively,
5035 the function must have an @code{interactive} expression. (For a
5036 review of @code{interactive}, see @ref{Interactive, , Making a
5037 Function Interactive}.) The expression reads as follows:
5038
5039 @smallexample
5040 @group
5041 (interactive
5042 (list (read-buffer
5043 "Append to buffer: "
5044 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5045 (region-beginning)
5046 (region-end)))
5047 @end group
5048 @end smallexample
5049
5050 @noindent
5051 This expression is not one with letters standing for parts, as
5052 described earlier. Instead, it starts a list with these parts:
5053
5054 The first part of the list is an expression to read the name of a
5055 buffer and return it as a string. That is @code{read-buffer}. The
5056 function requires a prompt as its first argument, @samp{"Append to
5057 buffer: "}. Its second argument tells the command what value to
5058 provide if you don't specify anything.
5059
5060 In this case that second argument is an expression containing the
5061 function @code{other-buffer}, an exception, and a @samp{t}, standing
5062 for true.
5063
5064 The first argument to @code{other-buffer}, the exception, is yet
5065 another function, @code{current-buffer}. That is not going to be
5066 returned. The second argument is the symbol for true, @code{t}. that
5067 tells @code{other-buffer} that it may show visible buffers (except in
5068 this case, it will not show the current buffer, which makes sense).
5069
5070 @need 1250
5071 The expression looks like this:
5072
5073 @smallexample
5074 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t)
5075 @end smallexample
5076
5077 The second and third arguments to the @code{list} expression are
5078 @code{(region-beginning)} and @code{(region-end)}. These two
5079 functions specify the beginning and end of the text to be appended.
5080
5081 @need 1250
5082 Originally, the command used the letters @samp{B} and @samp{r}.
5083 The whole @code{interactive} expression looked like this:
5084
5085 @smallexample
5086 (interactive "BAppend to buffer:@: \nr")
5087 @end smallexample
5088
5089 @noindent
5090 But when that was done, the default value of the buffer switched to
5091 was invisible. That was not wanted.
5092
5093 (The prompt was separated from the second argument with a newline,
5094 @samp{\n}. It was followed by an @samp{r} that told Emacs to bind the
5095 two arguments that follow the symbol @code{buffer} in the function's
5096 argument list (that is, @code{start} and @code{end}) to the values of
5097 point and mark. That argument worked fine.)
5098
5099 @node append-to-buffer body
5100 @subsection The Body of @code{append-to-buffer}
5101
5102 @ignore
5103 in GNU Emacs 22 in /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
5104
5105 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5106 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
5107 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
5108
5109 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
5110 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
5111 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
5112 (interactive
5113 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5114 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
5115 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5116 (save-excursion
5117 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5118 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5119 point)
5120 (set-buffer append-to)
5121 (setq point (point))
5122 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5123 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5124 (dolist (window windows)
5125 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5126 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5127 @end ignore
5128
5129 The body of the @code{append-to-buffer} function begins with @code{let}.
5130
5131 As we have seen before (@pxref{let, , @code{let}}), the purpose of a
5132 @code{let} expression is to create and give initial values to one or
5133 more variables that will only be used within the body of the
5134 @code{let}. This means that such a variable will not be confused with
5135 any variable of the same name outside the @code{let} expression.
5136
5137 We can see how the @code{let} expression fits into the function as a
5138 whole by showing a template for @code{append-to-buffer} with the
5139 @code{let} expression in outline:
5140
5141 @smallexample
5142 @group
5143 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5144 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5145 (interactive @dots{})
5146 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value}))
5147 @var{body}@dots{})
5148 @end group
5149 @end smallexample
5150
5151 The @code{let} expression has three elements:
5152
5153 @enumerate
5154 @item
5155 The symbol @code{let};
5156
5157 @item
5158 A varlist containing, in this case, a single two-element list,
5159 @code{(@var{variable} @var{value})};
5160
5161 @item
5162 The body of the @code{let} expression.
5163 @end enumerate
5164
5165 @need 800
5166 In the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the varlist looks like this:
5167
5168 @smallexample
5169 (oldbuf (current-buffer))
5170 @end smallexample
5171
5172 @noindent
5173 In this part of the @code{let} expression, the one variable,
5174 @code{oldbuf}, is bound to the value returned by the
5175 @code{(current-buffer)} expression. The variable, @code{oldbuf}, is
5176 used to keep track of the buffer in which you are working and from
5177 which you will copy.
5178
5179 The element or elements of a varlist are surrounded by a set of
5180 parentheses so the Lisp interpreter can distinguish the varlist from
5181 the body of the @code{let}. As a consequence, the two-element list
5182 within the varlist is surrounded by a circumscribing set of parentheses.
5183 The line looks like this:
5184
5185 @smallexample
5186 @group
5187 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5188 @dots{} )
5189 @end group
5190 @end smallexample
5191
5192 @noindent
5193 The two parentheses before @code{oldbuf} might surprise you if you did
5194 not realize that the first parenthesis before @code{oldbuf} marks the
5195 boundary of the varlist and the second parenthesis marks the beginning
5196 of the two-element list, @code{(oldbuf (current-buffer))}.
5197
5198 @node append save-excursion
5199 @subsection @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}
5200
5201 The body of the @code{let} expression in @code{append-to-buffer}
5202 consists of a @code{save-excursion} expression.
5203
5204 The @code{save-excursion} function saves the locations of point and
5205 mark, and restores them to those positions after the expressions in the
5206 body of the @code{save-excursion} complete execution. In addition,
5207 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the original buffer, and
5208 restores it. This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in
5209 @code{append-to-buffer}.
5210
5211 @need 1500
5212 @cindex Indentation for formatting
5213 @cindex Formatting convention
5214 Incidentally, it is worth noting here that a Lisp function is normally
5215 formatted so that everything that is enclosed in a multi-line spread is
5216 indented more to the right than the first symbol. In this function
5217 definition, the @code{let} is indented more than the @code{defun}, and
5218 the @code{save-excursion} is indented more than the @code{let}, like
5219 this:
5220
5221 @smallexample
5222 @group
5223 (defun @dots{}
5224 @dots{}
5225 @dots{}
5226 (let@dots{}
5227 (save-excursion
5228 @dots{}
5229 @end group
5230 @end smallexample
5231
5232 @need 1500
5233 @noindent
5234 This formatting convention makes it easy to see that the lines in
5235 the body of the @code{save-excursion} are enclosed by the parentheses
5236 associated with @code{save-excursion}, just as the
5237 @code{save-excursion} itself is enclosed by the parentheses associated
5238 with the @code{let}:
5239
5240 @smallexample
5241 @group
5242 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5243 (save-excursion
5244 @dots{}
5245 (set-buffer @dots{})
5246 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5247 @dots{}))
5248 @end group
5249 @end smallexample
5250
5251 @need 1200
5252 The use of the @code{save-excursion} function can be viewed as a process
5253 of filling in the slots of a template:
5254
5255 @smallexample
5256 @group
5257 (save-excursion
5258 @var{first-expression-in-body}
5259 @var{second-expression-in-body}
5260 @dots{}
5261 @var{last-expression-in-body})
5262 @end group
5263 @end smallexample
5264
5265 @need 1200
5266 @noindent
5267 In this function, the body of the @code{save-excursion} contains only
5268 one expression, the @code{let*} expression. You know about a
5269 @code{let} function. The @code{let*} function is different. It has a
5270 @samp{*} in its name. It enables Emacs to set each variable in its
5271 varlist in sequence, one after another.
5272
5273 Its critical feature is that variables later in the varlist can make
5274 use of the values to which Emacs set variables earlier in the varlist.
5275 @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}.
5276
5277 We will skip functions like @code{let*} and focus on two: the
5278 @code{set-buffer} function and the @code{insert-buffer-substring}
5279 function.
5280
5281 @need 1250
5282 In the old days, the @code{set-buffer} expression was simply
5283
5284 @smallexample
5285 (set-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer))
5286 @end smallexample
5287
5288 @need 1250
5289 @noindent
5290 but now it is
5291
5292 @smallexample
5293 (set-buffer append-to)
5294 @end smallexample
5295
5296 @noindent
5297 @code{append-to} is bound to @code{(get-buffer-create buffer)} earlier
5298 on in the @code{let*} expression. That extra binding would not be
5299 necessary except for that @code{append-to} is used later in the
5300 varlist as an argument to @code{get-buffer-window-list}.
5301
5302 @ignore
5303 in GNU Emacs 22
5304
5305 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5306 (save-excursion
5307 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5308 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5309 point)
5310 (set-buffer append-to)
5311 (setq point (point))
5312 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5313 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5314 (dolist (window windows)
5315 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5316 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5317 @end ignore
5318
5319 The @code{append-to-buffer} function definition inserts text from the
5320 buffer in which you are currently to a named buffer. It happens that
5321 @code{insert-buffer-substring} copies text from another buffer to the
5322 current buffer, just the reverse---that is why the
5323 @code{append-to-buffer} definition starts out with a @code{let} that
5324 binds the local symbol @code{oldbuf} to the value returned by
5325 @code{current-buffer}.
5326
5327 @need 1250
5328 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression looks like this:
5329
5330 @smallexample
5331 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5332 @end smallexample
5333
5334 @noindent
5335 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies a string
5336 @emph{from} the buffer specified as its first argument and inserts the
5337 string into the present buffer. In this case, the argument to
5338 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is the value of the variable created
5339 and bound by the @code{let}, namely the value of @code{oldbuf}, which
5340 was the current buffer when you gave the @code{append-to-buffer}
5341 command.
5342
5343 After @code{insert-buffer-substring} has done its work,
5344 @code{save-excursion} will restore the action to the original buffer
5345 and @code{append-to-buffer} will have done its job.
5346
5347 @need 800
5348 Written in skeletal form, the workings of the body look like this:
5349
5350 @smallexample
5351 @group
5352 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5353 (save-excursion ; @r{Keep track of buffer.}
5354 @var{change-buffer}
5355 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})
5356
5357 @var{change-back-to-original-buffer-when-finished}
5358 @var{let-the-local-meaning-of-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-disappear-when-finished}
5359 @end group
5360 @end smallexample
5361
5362 In summary, @code{append-to-buffer} works as follows: it saves the
5363 value of the current buffer in the variable called @code{oldbuf}. It
5364 gets the new buffer (creating one if need be) and switches Emacs's
5365 attention to it. Using the value of @code{oldbuf}, it inserts the
5366 region of text from the old buffer into the new buffer; and then using
5367 @code{save-excursion}, it brings you back to your original buffer.
5368
5369 In looking at @code{append-to-buffer}, you have explored a fairly
5370 complex function. It shows how to use @code{let} and
5371 @code{save-excursion}, and how to change to and come back from another
5372 buffer. Many function definitions use @code{let},
5373 @code{save-excursion}, and @code{set-buffer} this way.
5374
5375 @node Buffer Related Review
5376 @section Review
5377
5378 Here is a brief summary of the various functions discussed in this chapter.
5379
5380 @table @code
5381 @item describe-function
5382 @itemx describe-variable
5383 Print the documentation for a function or variable.
5384 Conventionally bound to @kbd{C-h f} and @kbd{C-h v}.
5385
5386 @item find-tag
5387 Find the file containing the source for a function or variable and
5388 switch buffers to it, positioning point at the beginning of the item.
5389 Conventionally bound to @kbd{M-.} (that's a period following the
5390 @key{META} key).
5391
5392 @item save-excursion
5393 Save the location of point and mark and restore their values after the
5394 arguments to @code{save-excursion} have been evaluated. Also, remember
5395 the current buffer and return to it.
5396
5397 @item push-mark
5398 Set mark at a location and record the value of the previous mark on the
5399 mark ring. The mark is a location in the buffer that will keep its
5400 relative position even if text is added to or removed from the buffer.
5401
5402 @item goto-char
5403 Set point to the location specified by the value of the argument, which
5404 can be a number, a marker, or an expression that returns the number of
5405 a position, such as @code{(point-min)}.
5406
5407 @item insert-buffer-substring
5408 Copy a region of text from a buffer that is passed to the function as
5409 an argument and insert the region into the current buffer.
5410
5411 @item mark-whole-buffer
5412 Mark the whole buffer as a region. Normally bound to @kbd{C-x h}.
5413
5414 @item set-buffer
5415 Switch the attention of Emacs to another buffer, but do not change the
5416 window being displayed. Used when the program rather than a human is
5417 to work on a different buffer.
5418
5419 @item get-buffer-create
5420 @itemx get-buffer
5421 Find a named buffer or create one if a buffer of that name does not
5422 exist. The @code{get-buffer} function returns @code{nil} if the named
5423 buffer does not exist.
5424 @end table
5425
5426 @need 1500
5427 @node Buffer Exercises
5428 @section Exercises
5429
5430 @itemize @bullet
5431 @item
5432 Write your own @code{simplified-end-of-buffer} function definition;
5433 then test it to see whether it works.
5434
5435 @item
5436 Use @code{if} and @code{get-buffer} to write a function that prints a
5437 message telling you whether a buffer exists.
5438
5439 @item
5440 Using @code{find-tag}, find the source for the @code{copy-to-buffer}
5441 function.
5442 @end itemize
5443
5444 @node More Complex
5445 @chapter A Few More Complex Functions
5446
5447 In this chapter, we build on what we have learned in previous chapters
5448 by looking at more complex functions. The @code{copy-to-buffer}
5449 function illustrates use of two @code{save-excursion} expressions in
5450 one definition, while the @code{insert-buffer} function illustrates
5451 use of an asterisk in an @code{interactive} expression, use of
5452 @code{or}, and the important distinction between a name and the object
5453 to which the name refers.
5454
5455 @menu
5456 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
5457 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
5458 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
5459 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
5460 * Second Buffer Related Review::
5461 * optional Exercise::
5462 @end menu
5463
5464 @node copy-to-buffer
5465 @section The Definition of @code{copy-to-buffer}
5466 @findex copy-to-buffer
5467
5468 After understanding how @code{append-to-buffer} works, it is easy to
5469 understand @code{copy-to-buffer}. This function copies text into a
5470 buffer, but instead of adding to the second buffer, it replaces all the
5471 previous text in the second buffer.
5472
5473 @need 800
5474 The body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this,
5475
5476 @smallexample
5477 @group
5478 @dots{}
5479 (interactive "BCopy to buffer: \nr")
5480 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5481 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer)
5482 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5483 (erase-buffer)
5484 (save-excursion
5485 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)))))
5486 @end group
5487 @end smallexample
5488
5489 The @code{copy-to-buffer} function has a simpler @code{interactive}
5490 expression than @code{append-to-buffer}.
5491
5492 @need 800
5493 The definition then says
5494
5495 @smallexample
5496 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer) @dots{}
5497 @end smallexample
5498
5499 First, look at the earliest inner expression; that is evaluated first.
5500 That expression starts with @code{get-buffer-create buffer}. The
5501 function tells the computer to use the buffer with the name specified
5502 as the one to which you are copying, or if such a buffer does not
5503 exist, to create it. Then, the @code{with-current-buffer} function
5504 evaluates its body with that buffer temporarily current.
5505
5506 (This demonstrates another way to shift the computer's attention but
5507 not the user's. The @code{append-to-buffer} function showed how to do
5508 the same with @code{save-excursion} and @code{set-buffer}.
5509 @code{with-current-buffer} is a newer, and arguably easier,
5510 mechanism.)
5511
5512 The @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} function sends you an error
5513 message saying the buffer is read-only if you cannot modify it.
5514
5515 The next line has the @code{erase-buffer} function as its sole
5516 contents. That function erases the buffer.
5517
5518 Finally, the last two lines contain the @code{save-excursion}
5519 expression with @code{insert-buffer-substring} as its body.
5520 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression copies the text from
5521 the buffer you are in (and you have not seen the computer shift its
5522 attention, so you don't know that that buffer is now called
5523 @code{oldbuf}).
5524
5525 Incidentally, this is what is meant by `replacement'. To replace text,
5526 Emacs erases the previous text and then inserts new text.
5527
5528 @need 1250
5529 In outline, the body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this:
5530
5531 @smallexample
5532 @group
5533 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5534 (@var{with-the-buffer-you-are-copying-to}
5535 (@var{but-do-not-erase-or-copy-to-a-read-only-buffer})
5536 (erase-buffer)
5537 (save-excursion
5538 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})))
5539 @end group
5540 @end smallexample
5541
5542 @node insert-buffer
5543 @section The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
5544 @findex insert-buffer
5545
5546 @code{insert-buffer} is yet another buffer-related function. This
5547 command copies another buffer @emph{into} the current buffer. It is the
5548 reverse of @code{append-to-buffer} or @code{copy-to-buffer}, since they
5549 copy a region of text @emph{from} the current buffer to another buffer.
5550
5551 Here is a discussion based on the original code. The code was
5552 simplified in 2003 and is harder to understand.
5553
5554 (@xref{New insert-buffer, , New Body for @code{insert-buffer}}, to see
5555 a discussion of the new body.)
5556
5557 In addition, this code illustrates the use of @code{interactive} with a
5558 buffer that might be @dfn{read-only} and the important distinction
5559 between the name of an object and the object actually referred to.
5560
5561 @menu
5562 * insert-buffer code::
5563 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
5564 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
5565 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
5566 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
5567 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
5568 * New insert-buffer::
5569 @end menu
5570
5571 @ifnottex
5572 @node insert-buffer code
5573 @unnumberedsubsec The Code for @code{insert-buffer}
5574 @end ifnottex
5575
5576 @need 800
5577 Here is the earlier code:
5578
5579 @smallexample
5580 @group
5581 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5582 "Insert after point the contents of BUFFER.
5583 Puts mark after the inserted text.
5584 BUFFER may be a buffer or a buffer name."
5585 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5586 @end group
5587 @group
5588 (or (bufferp buffer)
5589 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5590 (let (start end newmark)
5591 (save-excursion
5592 (save-excursion
5593 (set-buffer buffer)
5594 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5595 @end group
5596 @group
5597 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5598 (setq newmark (point)))
5599 (push-mark newmark)))
5600 @end group
5601 @end smallexample
5602
5603 @need 1200
5604 As with other function definitions, you can use a template to see an
5605 outline of the function:
5606
5607 @smallexample
5608 @group
5609 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5610 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5611 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5612 @var{body}@dots{})
5613 @end group
5614 @end smallexample
5615
5616 @node insert-buffer interactive
5617 @subsection The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5618 @findex interactive, @r{example use of}
5619
5620 In @code{insert-buffer}, the argument to the @code{interactive}
5621 declaration has two parts, an asterisk, @samp{*}, and @samp{bInsert
5622 buffer:@: }.
5623
5624 @menu
5625 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
5626 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
5627 @end menu
5628
5629 @node Read-only buffer
5630 @unnumberedsubsubsec A Read-only Buffer
5631 @cindex Read-only buffer
5632 @cindex Asterisk for read-only buffer
5633 @findex * @r{for read-only buffer}
5634
5635 The asterisk is for the situation when the current buffer is a
5636 read-only buffer---a buffer that cannot be modified. If
5637 @code{insert-buffer} is called when the current buffer is read-only, a
5638 message to this effect is printed in the echo area and the terminal
5639 may beep or blink at you; you will not be permitted to insert anything
5640 into current buffer. The asterisk does not need to be followed by a
5641 newline to separate it from the next argument.
5642
5643 @node b for interactive
5644 @unnumberedsubsubsec @samp{b} in an Interactive Expression
5645
5646 The next argument in the interactive expression starts with a lower
5647 case @samp{b}. (This is different from the code for
5648 @code{append-to-buffer}, which uses an upper-case @samp{B}.
5649 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
5650 The lower-case @samp{b} tells the Lisp interpreter that the argument
5651 for @code{insert-buffer} should be an existing buffer or else its
5652 name. (The upper-case @samp{B} option provides for the possibility
5653 that the buffer does not exist.) Emacs will prompt you for the name
5654 of the buffer, offering you a default buffer, with name completion
5655 enabled. If the buffer does not exist, you receive a message that
5656 says ``No match''; your terminal may beep at you as well.
5657
5658 The new and simplified code generates a list for @code{interactive}.
5659 It uses the @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} and @code{read-buffer}
5660 functions with which we are already familiar and the @code{progn}
5661 special form with which we are not. (It will be described later.)
5662
5663 @node insert-buffer body
5664 @subsection The Body of the @code{insert-buffer} Function
5665
5666 The body of the @code{insert-buffer} function has two major parts: an
5667 @code{or} expression and a @code{let} expression. The purpose of the
5668 @code{or} expression is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is
5669 bound to a buffer and not just the name of a buffer. The body of the
5670 @code{let} expression contains the code which copies the other buffer
5671 into the current buffer.
5672
5673 @need 1250
5674 In outline, the two expressions fit into the @code{insert-buffer}
5675 function like this:
5676
5677 @smallexample
5678 @group
5679 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5680 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5681 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5682 (or @dots{}
5683 @dots{}
5684 @end group
5685 @group
5686 (let (@var{varlist})
5687 @var{body-of-}@code{let}@dots{} )
5688 @end group
5689 @end smallexample
5690
5691 To understand how the @code{or} expression ensures that the argument
5692 @code{buffer} is bound to a buffer and not to the name of a buffer, it
5693 is first necessary to understand the @code{or} function.
5694
5695 Before doing this, let me rewrite this part of the function using
5696 @code{if} so that you can see what is done in a manner that will be familiar.
5697
5698 @node if & or
5699 @subsection @code{insert-buffer} With an @code{if} Instead of an @code{or}
5700
5701 The job to be done is to make sure the value of @code{buffer} is a
5702 buffer itself and not the name of a buffer. If the value is the name,
5703 then the buffer itself must be got.
5704
5705 You can imagine yourself at a conference where an usher is wandering
5706 around holding a list with your name on it and looking for you: the
5707 usher is ``bound'' to your name, not to you; but when the usher finds
5708 you and takes your arm, the usher becomes ``bound'' to you.
5709
5710 @need 800
5711 In Lisp, you might describe this situation like this:
5712
5713 @smallexample
5714 @group
5715 (if (not (holding-on-to-guest))
5716 (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5717 @end group
5718 @end smallexample
5719
5720 We want to do the same thing with a buffer---if we do not have the
5721 buffer itself, we want to get it.
5722
5723 @need 1200
5724 Using a predicate called @code{bufferp} that tells us whether we have a
5725 buffer (rather than its name), we can write the code like this:
5726
5727 @smallexample
5728 @group
5729 (if (not (bufferp buffer)) ; @r{if-part}
5730 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))) ; @r{then-part}
5731 @end group
5732 @end smallexample
5733
5734 @noindent
5735 Here, the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression is
5736 @w{@code{(not (bufferp buffer))}}; and the then-part is the expression
5737 @w{@code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}}.
5738
5739 In the test, the function @code{bufferp} returns true if its argument is
5740 a buffer---but false if its argument is the name of the buffer. (The
5741 last character of the function name @code{bufferp} is the character
5742 @samp{p}; as we saw earlier, such use of @samp{p} is a convention that
5743 indicates that the function is a predicate, which is a term that means
5744 that the function will determine whether some property is true or false.
5745 @xref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong Type Object as an
5746 Argument}.)
5747
5748 @need 1200
5749 The function @code{not} precedes the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)},
5750 so the true-or-false-test looks like this:
5751
5752 @smallexample
5753 (not (bufferp buffer))
5754 @end smallexample
5755
5756 @noindent
5757 @code{not} is a function that returns true if its argument is false
5758 and false if its argument is true. So if @code{(bufferp buffer)}
5759 returns true, the @code{not} expression returns false and vice-verse:
5760 what is ``not true'' is false and what is ``not false'' is true.
5761
5762 Using this test, the @code{if} expression works as follows: when the
5763 value of the variable @code{buffer} is actually a buffer rather than
5764 its name, the true-or-false-test returns false and the @code{if}
5765 expression does not evaluate the then-part. This is fine, since we do
5766 not need to do anything to the variable @code{buffer} if it really is
5767 a buffer.
5768
5769 On the other hand, when the value of @code{buffer} is not a buffer
5770 itself, but the name of a buffer, the true-or-false-test returns true
5771 and the then-part of the expression is evaluated. In this case, the
5772 then-part is @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}. This
5773 expression uses the @code{get-buffer} function to return an actual
5774 buffer itself, given its name. The @code{setq} then sets the variable
5775 @code{buffer} to the value of the buffer itself, replacing its previous
5776 value (which was the name of the buffer).
5777
5778 @node Insert or
5779 @subsection The @code{or} in the Body
5780
5781 The purpose of the @code{or} expression in the @code{insert-buffer}
5782 function is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is bound to a
5783 buffer and not just to the name of a buffer. The previous section shows
5784 how the job could have been done using an @code{if} expression.
5785 However, the @code{insert-buffer} function actually uses @code{or}.
5786 To understand this, it is necessary to understand how @code{or} works.
5787
5788 @findex or
5789 An @code{or} function can have any number of arguments. It evaluates
5790 each argument in turn and returns the value of the first of its
5791 arguments that is not @code{nil}. Also, and this is a crucial feature
5792 of @code{or}, it does not evaluate any subsequent arguments after
5793 returning the first non-@code{nil} value.
5794
5795 @need 800
5796 The @code{or} expression looks like this:
5797
5798 @smallexample
5799 @group
5800 (or (bufferp buffer)
5801 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5802 @end group
5803 @end smallexample
5804
5805 @noindent
5806 The first argument to @code{or} is the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)}.
5807 This expression returns true (a non-@code{nil} value) if the buffer is
5808 actually a buffer, and not just the name of a buffer. In the @code{or}
5809 expression, if this is the case, the @code{or} expression returns this
5810 true value and does not evaluate the next expression---and this is fine
5811 with us, since we do not want to do anything to the value of
5812 @code{buffer} if it really is a buffer.
5813
5814 On the other hand, if the value of @code{(bufferp buffer)} is @code{nil},
5815 which it will be if the value of @code{buffer} is the name of a buffer,
5816 the Lisp interpreter evaluates the next element of the @code{or}
5817 expression. This is the expression @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer
5818 buffer))}. This expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, which
5819 is the value to which it sets the variable @code{buffer}---and this
5820 value is a buffer itself, not the name of a buffer.
5821
5822 The result of all this is that the symbol @code{buffer} is always
5823 bound to a buffer itself rather than to the name of a buffer. All
5824 this is necessary because the @code{set-buffer} function in a
5825 following line only works with a buffer itself, not with the name to a
5826 buffer.
5827
5828 @need 1250
5829 Incidentally, using @code{or}, the situation with the usher would be
5830 written like this:
5831
5832 @smallexample
5833 (or (holding-on-to-guest) (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5834 @end smallexample
5835
5836 @node Insert let
5837 @subsection The @code{let} Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5838
5839 After ensuring that the variable @code{buffer} refers to a buffer itself
5840 and not just to the name of a buffer, the @code{insert-buffer function}
5841 continues with a @code{let} expression. This specifies three local
5842 variables, @code{start}, @code{end}, and @code{newmark} and binds them
5843 to the initial value @code{nil}. These variables are used inside the
5844 remainder of the @code{let} and temporarily hide any other occurrence of
5845 variables of the same name in Emacs until the end of the @code{let}.
5846
5847 @need 1200
5848 The body of the @code{let} contains two @code{save-excursion}
5849 expressions. First, we will look at the inner @code{save-excursion}
5850 expression in detail. The expression looks like this:
5851
5852 @smallexample
5853 @group
5854 (save-excursion
5855 (set-buffer buffer)
5856 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5857 @end group
5858 @end smallexample
5859
5860 @noindent
5861 The expression @code{(set-buffer buffer)} changes Emacs's attention
5862 from the current buffer to the one from which the text will copied.
5863 In that buffer, the variables @code{start} and @code{end} are set to
5864 the beginning and end of the buffer, using the commands
5865 @code{point-min} and @code{point-max}. Note that we have here an
5866 illustration of how @code{setq} is able to set two variables in the
5867 same expression. The first argument of @code{setq} is set to the
5868 value of its second, and its third argument is set to the value of its
5869 fourth.
5870
5871 After the body of the inner @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, the
5872 @code{save-excursion} restores the original buffer, but @code{start} and
5873 @code{end} remain set to the values of the beginning and end of the
5874 buffer from which the text will be copied.
5875
5876 @need 1250
5877 The outer @code{save-excursion} expression looks like this:
5878
5879 @smallexample
5880 @group
5881 (save-excursion
5882 (@var{inner-}@code{save-excursion}@var{-expression}
5883 (@var{go-to-new-buffer-and-set-}@code{start}@var{-and-}@code{end})
5884 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5885 (setq newmark (point)))
5886 @end group
5887 @end smallexample
5888
5889 @noindent
5890 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies the text
5891 @emph{into} the current buffer @emph{from} the region indicated by
5892 @code{start} and @code{end} in @code{buffer}. Since the whole of the
5893 second buffer lies between @code{start} and @code{end}, the whole of
5894 the second buffer is copied into the buffer you are editing. Next,
5895 the value of point, which will be at the end of the inserted text, is
5896 recorded in the variable @code{newmark}.
5897
5898 After the body of the outer @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, point
5899 and mark are relocated to their original places.
5900
5901 However, it is convenient to locate a mark at the end of the newly
5902 inserted text and locate point at its beginning. The @code{newmark}
5903 variable records the end of the inserted text. In the last line of
5904 the @code{let} expression, the @code{(push-mark newmark)} expression
5905 function sets a mark to this location. (The previous location of the
5906 mark is still accessible; it is recorded on the mark ring and you can
5907 go back to it with @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}}.) Meanwhile, point is
5908 located at the beginning of the inserted text, which is where it was
5909 before you called the insert function, the position of which was saved
5910 by the first @code{save-excursion}.
5911
5912 @need 1250
5913 The whole @code{let} expression looks like this:
5914
5915 @smallexample
5916 @group
5917 (let (start end newmark)
5918 (save-excursion
5919 (save-excursion
5920 (set-buffer buffer)
5921 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5922 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5923 (setq newmark (point)))
5924 (push-mark newmark))
5925 @end group
5926 @end smallexample
5927
5928 Like the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the @code{insert-buffer}
5929 function uses @code{let}, @code{save-excursion}, and
5930 @code{set-buffer}. In addition, the function illustrates one way to
5931 use @code{or}. All these functions are building blocks that we will
5932 find and use again and again.
5933
5934 @node New insert-buffer
5935 @subsection New Body for @code{insert-buffer}
5936 @findex insert-buffer, new version body
5937 @findex new version body for insert-buffer
5938
5939 The body in the GNU Emacs 22 version is more confusing than the original.
5940
5941 @need 1250
5942 It consists of two expressions,
5943
5944 @smallexample
5945 @group
5946 (push-mark
5947 (save-excursion
5948 (insert-buffer-substring (get-buffer buffer))
5949 (point)))
5950
5951 nil
5952 @end group
5953 @end smallexample
5954
5955 @noindent
5956 except, and this is what confuses novices, very important work is done
5957 inside the @code{push-mark} expression.
5958
5959 The @code{get-buffer} function returns a buffer with the name
5960 provided. You will note that the function is @emph{not} called
5961 @code{get-buffer-create}; it does not create a buffer if one does not
5962 already exist. The buffer returned by @code{get-buffer}, an existing
5963 buffer, is passed to @code{insert-buffer-substring}, which inserts the
5964 whole of the buffer (since you did not specify anything else).
5965
5966 The location into which the buffer is inserted is recorded by
5967 @code{push-mark}. Then the function returns @code{nil}, the value of
5968 its last command. Put another way, the @code{insert-buffer} function
5969 exists only to produce a side effect, inserting another buffer, not to
5970 return any value.
5971
5972 @node beginning-of-buffer
5973 @section Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
5974 @findex beginning-of-buffer
5975
5976 The basic structure of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function has
5977 already been discussed. (@xref{simplified-beginning-of-buffer, , A
5978 Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition}.)
5979 This section describes the complex part of the definition.
5980
5981 As previously described, when invoked without an argument,
5982 @code{beginning-of-buffer} moves the cursor to the beginning of the
5983 buffer (in truth, the beginning of the accessible portion of the
5984 buffer), leaving the mark at the previous position. However, when the
5985 command is invoked with a number between one and ten, the function
5986 considers that number to be a fraction of the length of the buffer,
5987 measured in tenths, and Emacs moves the cursor that fraction of the
5988 way from the beginning of the buffer. Thus, you can either call this
5989 function with the key command @kbd{M-<}, which will move the cursor to
5990 the beginning of the buffer, or with a key command such as @kbd{C-u 7
5991 M-<} which will move the cursor to a point 70% of the way through the
5992 buffer. If a number bigger than ten is used for the argument, it
5993 moves to the end of the buffer.
5994
5995 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} function can be called with or without an
5996 argument. The use of the argument is optional.
5997
5998 @menu
5999 * Optional Arguments::
6000 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
6001 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
6002 @end menu
6003
6004 @node Optional Arguments
6005 @subsection Optional Arguments
6006
6007 Unless told otherwise, Lisp expects that a function with an argument in
6008 its function definition will be called with a value for that argument.
6009 If that does not happen, you get an error and a message that says
6010 @samp{Wrong number of arguments}.
6011
6012 @cindex Optional arguments
6013 @cindex Keyword
6014 @findex optional
6015 However, optional arguments are a feature of Lisp: a particular
6016 @dfn{keyword} is used to tell the Lisp interpreter that an argument is
6017 optional. The keyword is @code{&optional}. (The @samp{&} in front of
6018 @samp{optional} is part of the keyword.) In a function definition, if
6019 an argument follows the keyword @code{&optional}, no value need be
6020 passed to that argument when the function is called.
6021
6022 @need 1200
6023 The first line of the function definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6024 therefore looks like this:
6025
6026 @smallexample
6027 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6028 @end smallexample
6029
6030 @need 1250
6031 In outline, the whole function looks like this:
6032
6033 @smallexample
6034 @group
6035 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6036 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
6037 (interactive "P")
6038 (or (@var{is-the-argument-a-cons-cell} arg)
6039 (and @var{are-both-transient-mark-mode-and-mark-active-true})
6040 (push-mark))
6041 (let (@var{determine-size-and-set-it})
6042 (goto-char
6043 (@var{if-there-is-an-argument}
6044 @var{figure-out-where-to-go}
6045 @var{else-go-to}
6046 (point-min))))
6047 @var{do-nicety}
6048 @end group
6049 @end smallexample
6050
6051 The function is similar to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}
6052 function except that the @code{interactive} expression has @code{"P"}
6053 as an argument and the @code{goto-char} function is followed by an
6054 if-then-else expression that figures out where to put the cursor if
6055 there is an argument that is not a cons cell.
6056
6057 (Since I do not explain a cons cell for many more chapters, please
6058 consider ignoring the function @code{consp}. @xref{List
6059 Implementation, , How Lists are Implemented}, and @ref{Cons Cell Type,
6060 , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6061 Manual}.)
6062
6063 The @code{"P"} in the @code{interactive} expression tells Emacs to
6064 pass a prefix argument, if there is one, to the function in raw form.
6065 A prefix argument is made by typing the @key{META} key followed by a
6066 number, or by typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number. (If you don't type
6067 a number, @kbd{C-u} defaults to a cons cell with a 4. A lowercase
6068 @code{"p"} in the @code{interactive} expression causes the function to
6069 convert a prefix arg to a number.)
6070
6071 The true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression looks complex, but
6072 it is not: it checks whether @code{arg} has a value that is not
6073 @code{nil} and whether it is a cons cell. (That is what @code{consp}
6074 does; it checks whether its argument is a cons cell.) If @code{arg}
6075 has a value that is not @code{nil} (and is not a cons cell), which
6076 will be the case if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with a
6077 numeric argument, then this true-or-false-test will return true and
6078 the then-part of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. On the
6079 other hand, if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is not called with an
6080 argument, the value of @code{arg} will be @code{nil} and the else-part
6081 of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. The else-part is
6082 simply @code{point-min}, and when this is the outcome, the whole
6083 @code{goto-char} expression is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, which
6084 is how we saw the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function in its
6085 simplified form.
6086
6087 @node beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6088 @subsection @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
6089
6090 When @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with an argument, an
6091 expression is evaluated which calculates what value to pass to
6092 @code{goto-char}. This expression is rather complicated at first sight.
6093 It includes an inner @code{if} expression and much arithmetic. It looks
6094 like this:
6095
6096 @smallexample
6097 @group
6098 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6099 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6100 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6101 (/ size 10))
6102 (/
6103 (+ 10
6104 (*
6105 size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10)))
6106 @end group
6107 @end smallexample
6108
6109 @menu
6110 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
6111 * Large buffer case::
6112 * Small buffer case::
6113 @end menu
6114
6115 @ifnottex
6116 @node Disentangle beginning-of-buffer
6117 @unnumberedsubsubsec Disentangle @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6118 @end ifnottex
6119
6120 Like other complex-looking expressions, the conditional expression
6121 within @code{beginning-of-buffer} can be disentangled by looking at it
6122 as parts of a template, in this case, the template for an if-then-else
6123 expression. In skeletal form, the expression looks like this:
6124
6125 @smallexample
6126 @group
6127 (if (@var{buffer-is-large}
6128 @var{divide-buffer-size-by-10-and-multiply-by-arg}
6129 @var{else-use-alternate-calculation}
6130 @end group
6131 @end smallexample
6132
6133 The true-or-false-test of this inner @code{if} expression checks the
6134 size of the buffer. The reason for this is that the old version 18
6135 Emacs used numbers that are no bigger than eight million or so and in
6136 the computation that followed, the programmer feared that Emacs might
6137 try to use over-large numbers if the buffer were large. The term
6138 `overflow', mentioned in the comment, means numbers that are over
6139 large. More recent versions of Emacs use larger numbers, but this
6140 code has not been touched, if only because people now look at buffers
6141 that are far, far larger than ever before.
6142
6143 There are two cases: if the buffer is large and if it is not.
6144
6145 @node Large buffer case
6146 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a large buffer
6147
6148 In @code{beginning-of-buffer}, the inner @code{if} expression tests
6149 whether the size of the buffer is greater than 10,000 characters. To do
6150 this, it uses the @code{>} function and the computation of @code{size}
6151 that comes from the let expression.
6152
6153 In the old days, the function @code{buffer-size} was used. Not only
6154 was that function called several times, it gave the size of the whole
6155 buffer, not the accessible part. The computation makes much more
6156 sense when it handles just the accessible part. (@xref{Narrowing &
6157 Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more information on focusing
6158 attention to an `accessible' part.)
6159
6160 @need 800
6161 The line looks like this:
6162
6163 @smallexample
6164 (if (> size 10000)
6165 @end smallexample
6166
6167 @need 1200
6168 @noindent
6169 When the buffer is large, the then-part of the @code{if} expression is
6170 evaluated. It reads like this (after formatting for easy reading):
6171
6172 @smallexample
6173 @group
6174 (*
6175 (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6176 (/ size 10))
6177 @end group
6178 @end smallexample
6179
6180 @noindent
6181 This expression is a multiplication, with two arguments to the function
6182 @code{*}.
6183
6184 The first argument is @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}. When
6185 @code{"P"} is used as the argument for @code{interactive}, the value
6186 passed to the function as its argument is passed a ``raw prefix
6187 argument'', and not a number. (It is a number in a list.) To perform
6188 the arithmetic, a conversion is necessary, and
6189 @code{prefix-numeric-value} does the job.
6190
6191 @findex / @r{(division)}
6192 @cindex Division
6193 The second argument is @code{(/ size 10)}. This expression divides
6194 the numeric value by ten---the numeric value of the size of the
6195 accessible portion of the buffer. This produces a number that tells
6196 how many characters make up one tenth of the buffer size. (In Lisp,
6197 @code{/} is used for division, just as @code{*} is used for
6198 multiplication.)
6199
6200 @need 1200
6201 In the multiplication expression as a whole, this amount is multiplied
6202 by the value of the prefix argument---the multiplication looks like this:
6203
6204 @smallexample
6205 @group
6206 (* @var{numeric-value-of-prefix-arg}
6207 @var{number-of-characters-in-one-tenth-of-the-accessible-buffer})
6208 @end group
6209 @end smallexample
6210
6211 @noindent
6212 If, for example, the prefix argument is @samp{7}, the one-tenth value
6213 will be multiplied by 7 to give a position 70% of the way through.
6214
6215 @need 1200
6216 The result of all this is that if the accessible portion of the buffer
6217 is large, the @code{goto-char} expression reads like this:
6218
6219 @smallexample
6220 @group
6221 (goto-char (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6222 (/ size 10)))
6223 @end group
6224 @end smallexample
6225
6226 This puts the cursor where we want it.
6227
6228 @node Small buffer case
6229 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a small buffer
6230
6231 If the buffer contains fewer than 10,000 characters, a slightly
6232 different computation is performed. You might think this is not
6233 necessary, since the first computation could do the job. However, in
6234 a small buffer, the first method may not put the cursor on exactly the
6235 desired line; the second method does a better job.
6236
6237 @need 800
6238 The code looks like this:
6239
6240 @c Keep this on one line.
6241 @smallexample
6242 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10))
6243 @end smallexample
6244
6245 @need 1200
6246 @noindent
6247 This is code in which you figure out what happens by discovering how the
6248 functions are embedded in parentheses. It is easier to read if you
6249 reformat it with each expression indented more deeply than its
6250 enclosing expression:
6251
6252 @smallexample
6253 @group
6254 (/
6255 (+ 10
6256 (*
6257 size
6258 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6259 10))
6260 @end group
6261 @end smallexample
6262
6263 @need 1200
6264 @noindent
6265 Looking at parentheses, we see that the innermost operation is
6266 @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}, which converts the raw argument to
6267 a number. In the following expression, this number is multiplied by
6268 the size of the accessible portion of the buffer:
6269
6270 @smallexample
6271 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))
6272 @end smallexample
6273
6274 @noindent
6275 This multiplication creates a number that may be larger than the size of
6276 the buffer---seven times larger if the argument is 7, for example. Ten
6277 is then added to this number and finally the large number is divided by
6278 ten to provide a value that is one character larger than the percentage
6279 position in the buffer.
6280
6281 The number that results from all this is passed to @code{goto-char} and
6282 the cursor is moved to that point.
6283
6284 @need 1500
6285 @node beginning-of-buffer complete
6286 @subsection The Complete @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6287
6288 @need 1000
6289 Here is the complete text of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function:
6290 @sp 1
6291
6292 @c In GNU Emacs 22
6293 @smallexample
6294 @group
6295 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6296 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6297 leave mark at previous position.
6298 With \\[universal-argument] prefix,
6299 do not set mark at previous position.
6300 With numeric arg N,
6301 put point N/10 of the way from the beginning.
6302
6303 If the buffer is narrowed,
6304 this command uses the beginning and size
6305 of the accessible part of the buffer.
6306 @end group
6307
6308 @group
6309 Don't use this command in Lisp programs!
6310 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6311 and avoids clobbering the mark."
6312 (interactive "P")
6313 (or (consp arg)
6314 (and transient-mark-mode mark-active)
6315 (push-mark))
6316 @end group
6317 @group
6318 (let ((size (- (point-max) (point-min))))
6319 (goto-char (if (and arg (not (consp arg)))
6320 (+ (point-min)
6321 (if (> size 10000)
6322 ;; Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!
6323 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6324 (/ size 10))
6325 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6326 10)))
6327 (point-min))))
6328 (if (and arg (not (consp arg))) (forward-line 1)))
6329 @end group
6330 @end smallexample
6331
6332 @ignore
6333 From before GNU Emacs 22
6334 @smallexample
6335 @group
6336 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6337 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6338 leave mark at previous position.
6339 With arg N, put point N/10 of the way
6340 from the true beginning.
6341 @end group
6342 @group
6343 Don't use this in Lisp programs!
6344 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6345 and does not set the mark."
6346 (interactive "P")
6347 (push-mark)
6348 @end group
6349 @group
6350 (goto-char
6351 (if arg
6352 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6353 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6354 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6355 (/ (buffer-size) 10))
6356 @end group
6357 @group
6358 (/ (+ 10 (* (buffer-size)
6359 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6360 10))
6361 (point-min)))
6362 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6363 @end group
6364 @end smallexample
6365 @end ignore
6366
6367 @noindent
6368 Except for two small points, the previous discussion shows how this
6369 function works. The first point deals with a detail in the
6370 documentation string, and the second point concerns the last line of
6371 the function.
6372
6373 @need 800
6374 In the documentation string, there is reference to an expression:
6375
6376 @smallexample
6377 \\[universal-argument]
6378 @end smallexample
6379
6380 @noindent
6381 A @samp{\\} is used before the first square bracket of this
6382 expression. This @samp{\\} tells the Lisp interpreter to substitute
6383 whatever key is currently bound to the @samp{[@dots{}]}. In the case
6384 of @code{universal-argument}, that is usually @kbd{C-u}, but it might
6385 be different. (@xref{Documentation Tips, , Tips for Documentation
6386 Strings, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
6387 information.)
6388
6389 @need 1200
6390 Finally, the last line of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} command says
6391 to move point to the beginning of the next line if the command is
6392 invoked with an argument:
6393
6394 @smallexample
6395 (if (and arg (not (consp arg))) (forward-line 1))
6396 @end smallexample
6397
6398 @noindent
6399 This puts the cursor at the beginning of the first line after the
6400 appropriate tenths position in the buffer. This is a flourish that
6401 means that the cursor is always located @emph{at least} the requested
6402 tenths of the way through the buffer, which is a nicety that is,
6403 perhaps, not necessary, but which, if it did not occur, would be sure
6404 to draw complaints. (The @code{(not (consp arg))} portion is so that
6405 if you specify the command with a @kbd{C-u}, but without a number,
6406 that is to say, if the `raw prefix argument' is simply a cons cell,
6407 the command does not put you at the beginning of the second line.)
6408
6409 @node Second Buffer Related Review
6410 @section Review
6411
6412 Here is a brief summary of some of the topics covered in this chapter.
6413
6414 @table @code
6415 @item or
6416 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and return the value of the first
6417 argument that is not @code{nil}; if none return a value that is not
6418 @code{nil}, return @code{nil}. In brief, return the first true value
6419 of the arguments; return a true value if one @emph{or} any of the
6420 others are true.
6421
6422 @item and
6423 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and if any are @code{nil}, return
6424 @code{nil}; if none are @code{nil}, return the value of the last
6425 argument. In brief, return a true value only if all the arguments are
6426 true; return a true value if one @emph{and} each of the others is
6427 true.
6428
6429 @item &optional
6430 A keyword used to indicate that an argument to a function definition
6431 is optional; this means that the function can be evaluated without the
6432 argument, if desired.
6433
6434 @item prefix-numeric-value
6435 Convert the `raw prefix argument' produced by @code{(interactive
6436 "P")} to a numeric value.
6437
6438 @item forward-line
6439 Move point forward to the beginning of the next line, or if the argument
6440 is greater than one, forward that many lines. If it can't move as far
6441 forward as it is supposed to, @code{forward-line} goes forward as far as
6442 it can and then returns a count of the number of additional lines it was
6443 supposed to move but couldn't.
6444
6445 @item erase-buffer
6446 Delete the entire contents of the current buffer.
6447
6448 @item bufferp
6449 Return @code{t} if its argument is a buffer; otherwise return @code{nil}.
6450 @end table
6451
6452 @node optional Exercise
6453 @section @code{optional} Argument Exercise
6454
6455 Write an interactive function with an optional argument that tests
6456 whether its argument, a number, is greater than or equal to, or else,
6457 less than the value of @code{fill-column}, and tells you which, in a
6458 message. However, if you do not pass an argument to the function, use
6459 56 as a default value.
6460
6461 @node Narrowing & Widening
6462 @chapter Narrowing and Widening
6463 @cindex Focusing attention (narrowing)
6464 @cindex Narrowing
6465 @cindex Widening
6466
6467 Narrowing is a feature of Emacs that makes it possible for you to focus
6468 on a specific part of a buffer, and work without accidentally changing
6469 other parts. Narrowing is normally disabled since it can confuse
6470 novices.
6471
6472 @menu
6473 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
6474 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
6475 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
6476 * narrow Exercise::
6477 @end menu
6478
6479 @ifnottex
6480 @node Narrowing advantages
6481 @unnumberedsec The Advantages of Narrowing
6482 @end ifnottex
6483
6484 With narrowing, the rest of a buffer is made invisible, as if it weren't
6485 there. This is an advantage if, for example, you want to replace a word
6486 in one part of a buffer but not in another: you narrow to the part you want
6487 and the replacement is carried out only in that section, not in the rest
6488 of the buffer. Searches will only work within a narrowed region, not
6489 outside of one, so if you are fixing a part of a document, you can keep
6490 yourself from accidentally finding parts you do not need to fix by
6491 narrowing just to the region you want.
6492 (The key binding for @code{narrow-to-region} is @kbd{C-x n n}.)
6493
6494 However, narrowing does make the rest of the buffer invisible, which
6495 can scare people who inadvertently invoke narrowing and think they
6496 have deleted a part of their file. Moreover, the @code{undo} command
6497 (which is usually bound to @kbd{C-x u}) does not turn off narrowing
6498 (nor should it), so people can become quite desperate if they do not
6499 know that they can return the rest of a buffer to visibility with the
6500 @code{widen} command.
6501 (The key binding for @code{widen} is @kbd{C-x n w}.)
6502
6503 Narrowing is just as useful to the Lisp interpreter as to a human.
6504 Often, an Emacs Lisp function is designed to work on just part of a
6505 buffer; or conversely, an Emacs Lisp function needs to work on all of a
6506 buffer that has been narrowed. The @code{what-line} function, for
6507 example, removes the narrowing from a buffer, if it has any narrowing
6508 and when it has finished its job, restores the narrowing to what it was.
6509 On the other hand, the @code{count-lines} function
6510 uses narrowing to restrict itself to just that portion
6511 of the buffer in which it is interested and then restores the previous
6512 situation.
6513
6514 @node save-restriction
6515 @section The @code{save-restriction} Special Form
6516 @findex save-restriction
6517
6518 In Emacs Lisp, you can use the @code{save-restriction} special form to
6519 keep track of whatever narrowing is in effect, if any. When the Lisp
6520 interpreter meets with @code{save-restriction}, it executes the code
6521 in the body of the @code{save-restriction} expression, and then undoes
6522 any changes to narrowing that the code caused. If, for example, the
6523 buffer is narrowed and the code that follows @code{save-restriction}
6524 gets rid of the narrowing, @code{save-restriction} returns the buffer
6525 to its narrowed region afterwards. In the @code{what-line} command,
6526 any narrowing the buffer may have is undone by the @code{widen}
6527 command that immediately follows the @code{save-restriction} command.
6528 Any original narrowing is restored just before the completion of the
6529 function.
6530
6531 @need 1250
6532 The template for a @code{save-restriction} expression is simple:
6533
6534 @smallexample
6535 @group
6536 (save-restriction
6537 @var{body}@dots{} )
6538 @end group
6539 @end smallexample
6540
6541 @noindent
6542 The body of the @code{save-restriction} is one or more expressions that
6543 will be evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter.
6544
6545 Finally, a point to note: when you use both @code{save-excursion} and
6546 @code{save-restriction}, one right after the other, you should use
6547 @code{save-excursion} outermost. If you write them in reverse order,
6548 you may fail to record narrowing in the buffer to which Emacs switches
6549 after calling @code{save-excursion}. Thus, when written together,
6550 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} should be written
6551 like this:
6552
6553 @smallexample
6554 @group
6555 (save-excursion
6556 (save-restriction
6557 @var{body}@dots{}))
6558 @end group
6559 @end smallexample
6560
6561 In other circumstances, when not written together, the
6562 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} special forms must
6563 be written in the order appropriate to the function.
6564
6565 @need 1250
6566 For example,
6567
6568 @smallexample
6569 @group
6570 (save-restriction
6571 (widen)
6572 (save-excursion
6573 @var{body}@dots{}))
6574 @end group
6575 @end smallexample
6576
6577 @ignore
6578 Emacs 22
6579 /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
6580
6581 (defun what-line ()
6582 "Print the current buffer line number and narrowed line number of point."
6583 (interactive)
6584 (let ((start (point-min))
6585 (n (line-number-at-pos)))
6586 (if (= start 1)
6587 (message "Line %d" n)
6588 (save-excursion
6589 (save-restriction
6590 (widen)
6591 (message "line %d (narrowed line %d)"
6592 (+ n (line-number-at-pos start) -1) n))))))
6593
6594 (defun line-number-at-pos (&optional pos)
6595 "Return (narrowed) buffer line number at position POS.
6596 If POS is nil, use current buffer location.
6597 Counting starts at (point-min), so the value refers
6598 to the contents of the accessible portion of the buffer."
6599 (let ((opoint (or pos (point))) start)
6600 (save-excursion
6601 (goto-char (point-min))
6602 (setq start (point))
6603 (goto-char opoint)
6604 (forward-line 0)
6605 (1+ (count-lines start (point))))))
6606
6607 (defun count-lines (start end)
6608 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6609 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6610 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6611 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6612 (save-excursion
6613 (save-restriction
6614 (narrow-to-region start end)
6615 (goto-char (point-min))
6616 (if (eq selective-display t)
6617 (save-match-data
6618 (let ((done 0))
6619 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6620 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6621 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6622 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6623 (goto-char (point-max))
6624 (if (and (/= start end)
6625 (not (bolp)))
6626 (1+ done)
6627 done)))
6628 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6629 @end ignore
6630
6631 @node what-line
6632 @section @code{what-line}
6633 @findex what-line
6634 @cindex Widening, example of
6635
6636 The @code{what-line} command tells you the number of the line in which
6637 the cursor is located. The function illustrates the use of the
6638 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} commands. Here is the
6639 original text of the function:
6640
6641 @smallexample
6642 @group
6643 (defun what-line ()
6644 "Print the current line number (in the buffer) of point."
6645 (interactive)
6646 (save-restriction
6647 (widen)
6648 (save-excursion
6649 (beginning-of-line)
6650 (message "Line %d"
6651 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6652 @end group
6653 @end smallexample
6654
6655 (In recent versions of GNU Emacs, the @code{what-line} function has
6656 been expanded to tell you your line number in a narrowed buffer as
6657 well as your line number in a widened buffer. The recent version is
6658 more complex than the version shown here. If you feel adventurous,
6659 you might want to look at it after figuring out how this version
6660 works. You will probably need to use @kbd{C-h f}
6661 (@code{describe-function}). The newer version uses a conditional to
6662 determine whether the buffer has been narrowed.
6663
6664 (Also, it uses @code{line-number-at-pos}, which among other simple
6665 expressions, such as @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, moves point to
6666 the beginning of the current line with @code{(forward-line 0)} rather
6667 than @code{beginning-of-line}.)
6668
6669 The @code{what-line} function as shown here has a documentation line
6670 and is interactive, as you would expect. The next two lines use the
6671 functions @code{save-restriction} and @code{widen}.
6672
6673 The @code{save-restriction} special form notes whatever narrowing is in
6674 effect, if any, in the current buffer and restores that narrowing after
6675 the code in the body of the @code{save-restriction} has been evaluated.
6676
6677 The @code{save-restriction} special form is followed by @code{widen}.
6678 This function undoes any narrowing the current buffer may have had
6679 when @code{what-line} was called. (The narrowing that was there is
6680 the narrowing that @code{save-restriction} remembers.) This widening
6681 makes it possible for the line counting commands to count from the
6682 beginning of the buffer. Otherwise, they would have been limited to
6683 counting within the accessible region. Any original narrowing is
6684 restored just before the completion of the function by the
6685 @code{save-restriction} special form.
6686
6687 The call to @code{widen} is followed by @code{save-excursion}, which
6688 saves the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) and of the mark, and
6689 restores them after the code in the body of the @code{save-excursion}
6690 uses the @code{beginning-of-line} function to move point.
6691
6692 (Note that the @code{(widen)} expression comes between the
6693 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} special forms. When
6694 you write the two @code{save- @dots{}} expressions in sequence, write
6695 @code{save-excursion} outermost.)
6696
6697 @need 1200
6698 The last two lines of the @code{what-line} function are functions to
6699 count the number of lines in the buffer and then print the number in the
6700 echo area.
6701
6702 @smallexample
6703 @group
6704 (message "Line %d"
6705 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6706 @end group
6707 @end smallexample
6708
6709 The @code{message} function prints a one-line message at the bottom of
6710 the Emacs screen. The first argument is inside of quotation marks and
6711 is printed as a string of characters. However, it may contain a
6712 @samp{%d} expression to print a following argument. @samp{%d} prints
6713 the argument as a decimal, so the message will say something such as
6714 @samp{Line 243}.
6715
6716 @need 1200
6717 The number that is printed in place of the @samp{%d} is computed by the
6718 last line of the function:
6719
6720 @smallexample
6721 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))
6722 @end smallexample
6723
6724 @ignore
6725 GNU Emacs 22
6726
6727 (defun count-lines (start end)
6728 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6729 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6730 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6731 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6732 (save-excursion
6733 (save-restriction
6734 (narrow-to-region start end)
6735 (goto-char (point-min))
6736 (if (eq selective-display t)
6737 (save-match-data
6738 (let ((done 0))
6739 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6740 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6741 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6742 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6743 (goto-char (point-max))
6744 (if (and (/= start end)
6745 (not (bolp)))
6746 (1+ done)
6747 done)))
6748 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6749 @end ignore
6750
6751 @noindent
6752 What this does is count the lines from the first position of the
6753 buffer, indicated by the @code{1}, up to @code{(point)}, and then add
6754 one to that number. (The @code{1+} function adds one to its
6755 argument.) We add one to it because line 2 has only one line before
6756 it, and @code{count-lines} counts only the lines @emph{before} the
6757 current line.
6758
6759 After @code{count-lines} has done its job, and the message has been
6760 printed in the echo area, the @code{save-excursion} restores point and
6761 mark to their original positions; and @code{save-restriction} restores
6762 the original narrowing, if any.
6763
6764 @node narrow Exercise
6765 @section Exercise with Narrowing
6766
6767 Write a function that will display the first 60 characters of the
6768 current buffer, even if you have narrowed the buffer to its latter
6769 half so that the first line is inaccessible. Restore point, mark, and
6770 narrowing. For this exercise, you need to use a whole potpourri of
6771 functions, including @code{save-restriction}, @code{widen},
6772 @code{goto-char}, @code{point-min}, @code{message}, and
6773 @code{buffer-substring}.
6774
6775 @cindex Properties, mention of @code{buffer-substring-no-properties}
6776 (@code{buffer-substring} is a previously unmentioned function you will
6777 have to investigate yourself; or perhaps you will have to use
6778 @code{buffer-substring-no-properties} or
6779 @code{filter-buffer-substring} @dots{}, yet other functions. Text
6780 properties are a feature otherwise not discussed here. @xref{Text
6781 Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6782 Manual}.)
6783
6784 Additionally, do you really need @code{goto-char} or @code{point-min}?
6785 Or can you write the function without them?
6786
6787 @node car cdr & cons
6788 @chapter @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
6789 @findex car, @r{introduced}
6790 @findex cdr, @r{introduced}
6791
6792 In Lisp, @code{car}, @code{cdr}, and @code{cons} are fundamental
6793 functions. The @code{cons} function is used to construct lists, and
6794 the @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used to take them apart.
6795
6796 In the walk through of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function, we
6797 will see @code{cons} as well as two variants on @code{cdr},
6798 namely, @code{setcdr} and @code{nthcdr}. (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
6799
6800 @menu
6801 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
6802 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
6803 * cons:: Constructing a list.
6804 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
6805 * nth::
6806 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
6807 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
6808 * cons Exercise::
6809 @end menu
6810
6811 @ifnottex
6812 @node Strange Names
6813 @unnumberedsec Strange Names
6814 @end ifnottex
6815
6816 The name of the @code{cons} function is not unreasonable: it is an
6817 abbreviation of the word `construct'. The origins of the names for
6818 @code{car} and @code{cdr}, on the other hand, are esoteric: @code{car}
6819 is an acronym from the phrase `Contents of the Address part of the
6820 Register'; and @code{cdr} (pronounced `could-er') is an acronym from
6821 the phrase `Contents of the Decrement part of the Register'. These
6822 phrases refer to specific pieces of hardware on the very early
6823 computer on which the original Lisp was developed. Besides being
6824 obsolete, the phrases have been completely irrelevant for more than 25
6825 years to anyone thinking about Lisp. Nonetheless, although a few
6826 brave scholars have begun to use more reasonable names for these
6827 functions, the old terms are still in use. In particular, since the
6828 terms are used in the Emacs Lisp source code, we will use them in this
6829 introduction.
6830
6831 @node car & cdr
6832 @section @code{car} and @code{cdr}
6833
6834 The @sc{car} of a list is, quite simply, the first item in the list.
6835 Thus the @sc{car} of the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} is
6836 @code{rose}.
6837
6838 @need 1200
6839 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can see this by
6840 evaluating the following:
6841
6842 @smallexample
6843 (car '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
6844 @end smallexample
6845
6846 @noindent
6847 After evaluating the expression, @code{rose} will appear in the echo
6848 area.
6849
6850 Clearly, a more reasonable name for the @code{car} function would be
6851 @code{first} and this is often suggested.
6852
6853 @code{car} does not remove the first item from the list; it only reports
6854 what it is. After @code{car} has been applied to a list, the list is
6855 still the same as it was. In the jargon, @code{car} is
6856 `non-destructive'. This feature turns out to be important.
6857
6858 The @sc{cdr} of a list is the rest of the list, that is, the
6859 @code{cdr} function returns the part of the list that follows the
6860 first item. Thus, while the @sc{car} of the list @code{'(rose violet
6861 daisy buttercup)} is @code{rose}, the rest of the list, the value
6862 returned by the @code{cdr} function, is @code{(violet daisy
6863 buttercup)}.
6864
6865 @need 800
6866 You can see this by evaluating the following in the usual way:
6867
6868 @smallexample
6869 (cdr '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
6870 @end smallexample
6871
6872 @noindent
6873 When you evaluate this, @code{(violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in
6874 the echo area.
6875
6876 Like @code{car}, @code{cdr} does not remove any elements from the
6877 list---it just returns a report of what the second and subsequent
6878 elements are.
6879
6880 Incidentally, in the example, the list of flowers is quoted. If it were
6881 not, the Lisp interpreter would try to evaluate the list by calling
6882 @code{rose} as a function. In this example, we do not want to do that.
6883
6884 Clearly, a more reasonable name for @code{cdr} would be @code{rest}.
6885
6886 (There is a lesson here: when you name new functions, consider very
6887 carefully what you are doing, since you may be stuck with the names
6888 for far longer than you expect. The reason this document perpetuates
6889 these names is that the Emacs Lisp source code uses them, and if I did
6890 not use them, you would have a hard time reading the code; but do,
6891 please, try to avoid using these terms yourself. The people who come
6892 after you will be grateful to you.)
6893
6894 When @code{car} and @code{cdr} are applied to a list made up of symbols,
6895 such as the list @code{(pine fir oak maple)}, the element of the list
6896 returned by the function @code{car} is the symbol @code{pine} without
6897 any parentheses around it. @code{pine} is the first element in the
6898 list. However, the @sc{cdr} of the list is a list itself, @code{(fir
6899 oak maple)}, as you can see by evaluating the following expressions in
6900 the usual way:
6901
6902 @smallexample
6903 @group
6904 (car '(pine fir oak maple))
6905
6906 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
6907 @end group
6908 @end smallexample
6909
6910 On the other hand, in a list of lists, the first element is itself a
6911 list. @code{car} returns this first element as a list. For example,
6912 the following list contains three sub-lists, a list of carnivores, a
6913 list of herbivores and a list of sea mammals:
6914
6915 @smallexample
6916 @group
6917 (car '((lion tiger cheetah)
6918 (gazelle antelope zebra)
6919 (whale dolphin seal)))
6920 @end group
6921 @end smallexample
6922
6923 @noindent
6924 In this example, the first element or @sc{car} of the list is the list of
6925 carnivores, @code{(lion tiger cheetah)}, and the rest of the list is
6926 @code{((gazelle antelope zebra) (whale dolphin seal))}.
6927
6928 @smallexample
6929 @group
6930 (cdr '((lion tiger cheetah)
6931 (gazelle antelope zebra)
6932 (whale dolphin seal)))
6933 @end group
6934 @end smallexample
6935
6936 It is worth saying again that @code{car} and @code{cdr} are
6937 non-destructive---that is, they do not modify or change lists to which
6938 they are applied. This is very important for how they are used.
6939
6940 Also, in the first chapter, in the discussion about atoms, I said that
6941 in Lisp, ``certain kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated
6942 into parts; but the mechanism for doing this is different from the
6943 mechanism for splitting a list. As far as Lisp is concerned, the
6944 atoms of a list are unsplittable.'' (@xref{Lisp Atoms}.) The
6945 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used for splitting lists and
6946 are considered fundamental to Lisp. Since they cannot split or gain
6947 access to the parts of an array, an array is considered an atom.
6948 Conversely, the other fundamental function, @code{cons}, can put
6949 together or construct a list, but not an array. (Arrays are handled
6950 by array-specific functions. @xref{Arrays, , Arrays, elisp, The GNU
6951 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
6952
6953 @node cons
6954 @section @code{cons}
6955 @findex cons, @r{introduced}
6956
6957 The @code{cons} function constructs lists; it is the inverse of
6958 @code{car} and @code{cdr}. For example, @code{cons} can be used to make
6959 a four element list from the three element list, @code{(fir oak maple)}:
6960
6961 @smallexample
6962 (cons 'pine '(fir oak maple))
6963 @end smallexample
6964
6965 @need 800
6966 @noindent
6967 After evaluating this list, you will see
6968
6969 @smallexample
6970 (pine fir oak maple)
6971 @end smallexample
6972
6973 @noindent
6974 appear in the echo area. @code{cons} causes the creation of a new
6975 list in which the element is followed by the elements of the original
6976 list.
6977
6978 We often say that `@code{cons} puts a new element at the beginning of
6979 a list; it attaches or pushes elements onto the list', but this
6980 phrasing can be misleading, since @code{cons} does not change an
6981 existing list, but creates a new one.
6982
6983 Like @code{car} and @code{cdr}, @code{cons} is non-destructive.
6984
6985 @menu
6986 * Build a list::
6987 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
6988 @end menu
6989
6990 @ifnottex
6991 @node Build a list
6992 @unnumberedsubsec Build a list
6993 @end ifnottex
6994
6995 @code{cons} must have a list to attach to.@footnote{Actually, you can
6996 @code{cons} an element to an atom to produce a dotted pair. Dotted
6997 pairs are not discussed here; see @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted
6998 Pair Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.} You
6999 cannot start from absolutely nothing. If you are building a list, you
7000 need to provide at least an empty list at the beginning. Here is a
7001 series of @code{cons} expressions that build up a list of flowers. If
7002 you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate each of
7003 the expressions in the usual way; the value is printed in this text
7004 after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as `evaluates to'.
7005
7006 @smallexample
7007 @group
7008 (cons 'buttercup ())
7009 @result{} (buttercup)
7010 @end group
7011
7012 @group
7013 (cons 'daisy '(buttercup))
7014 @result{} (daisy buttercup)
7015 @end group
7016
7017 @group
7018 (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup))
7019 @result{} (violet daisy buttercup)
7020 @end group
7021
7022 @group
7023 (cons 'rose '(violet daisy buttercup))
7024 @result{} (rose violet daisy buttercup)
7025 @end group
7026 @end smallexample
7027
7028 @noindent
7029 In the first example, the empty list is shown as @code{()} and a list
7030 made up of @code{buttercup} followed by the empty list is constructed.
7031 As you can see, the empty list is not shown in the list that was
7032 constructed. All that you see is @code{(buttercup)}. The empty list is
7033 not counted as an element of a list because there is nothing in an empty
7034 list. Generally speaking, an empty list is invisible.
7035
7036 The second example, @code{(cons 'daisy '(buttercup))} constructs a new,
7037 two element list by putting @code{daisy} in front of @code{buttercup};
7038 and the third example constructs a three element list by putting
7039 @code{violet} in front of @code{daisy} and @code{buttercup}.
7040
7041 @node length
7042 @subsection Find the Length of a List: @code{length}
7043 @findex length
7044
7045 You can find out how many elements there are in a list by using the Lisp
7046 function @code{length}, as in the following examples:
7047
7048 @smallexample
7049 @group
7050 (length '(buttercup))
7051 @result{} 1
7052 @end group
7053
7054 @group
7055 (length '(daisy buttercup))
7056 @result{} 2
7057 @end group
7058
7059 @group
7060 (length (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup)))
7061 @result{} 3
7062 @end group
7063 @end smallexample
7064
7065 @noindent
7066 In the third example, the @code{cons} function is used to construct a
7067 three element list which is then passed to the @code{length} function as
7068 its argument.
7069
7070 @need 1200
7071 We can also use @code{length} to count the number of elements in an
7072 empty list:
7073
7074 @smallexample
7075 @group
7076 (length ())
7077 @result{} 0
7078 @end group
7079 @end smallexample
7080
7081 @noindent
7082 As you would expect, the number of elements in an empty list is zero.
7083
7084 An interesting experiment is to find out what happens if you try to find
7085 the length of no list at all; that is, if you try to call @code{length}
7086 without giving it an argument, not even an empty list:
7087
7088 @smallexample
7089 (length )
7090 @end smallexample
7091
7092 @need 800
7093 @noindent
7094 What you see, if you evaluate this, is the error message
7095
7096 @smallexample
7097 Lisp error: (wrong-number-of-arguments length 0)
7098 @end smallexample
7099
7100 @noindent
7101 This means that the function receives the wrong number of
7102 arguments, zero, when it expects some other number of arguments. In
7103 this case, one argument is expected, the argument being a list whose
7104 length the function is measuring. (Note that @emph{one} list is
7105 @emph{one} argument, even if the list has many elements inside it.)
7106
7107 The part of the error message that says @samp{length} is the name of
7108 the function.
7109
7110 @ignore
7111 @code{length} is still a subroutine, but you need C-h f to discover that.
7112
7113 In an earlier version:
7114 This is written with a special notation, @samp{#<subr},
7115 that indicates that the function @code{length} is one of the primitive
7116 functions written in C rather than in Emacs Lisp. (@samp{subr} is an
7117 abbreviation for `subroutine'.) @xref{What Is a Function, , What Is a
7118 Function?, elisp , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
7119 about subroutines.
7120 @end ignore
7121
7122 @node nthcdr
7123 @section @code{nthcdr}
7124 @findex nthcdr
7125
7126 The @code{nthcdr} function is associated with the @code{cdr} function.
7127 What it does is take the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7128
7129 If you take the @sc{cdr} of the list @code{(pine fir
7130 oak maple)}, you will be returned the list @code{(fir oak maple)}. If you
7131 repeat this on what was returned, you will be returned the list
7132 @code{(oak maple)}. (Of course, repeated @sc{cdr}ing on the original
7133 list will just give you the original @sc{cdr} since the function does
7134 not change the list. You need to evaluate the @sc{cdr} of the
7135 @sc{cdr} and so on.) If you continue this, eventually you will be
7136 returned an empty list, which in this case, instead of being shown as
7137 @code{()} is shown as @code{nil}.
7138
7139 @need 1200
7140 For review, here is a series of repeated @sc{cdr}s, the text following
7141 the @samp{@result{}} shows what is returned.
7142
7143 @smallexample
7144 @group
7145 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
7146 @result{}(fir oak maple)
7147 @end group
7148
7149 @group
7150 (cdr '(fir oak maple))
7151 @result{} (oak maple)
7152 @end group
7153
7154 @group
7155 (cdr '(oak maple))
7156 @result{}(maple)
7157 @end group
7158
7159 @group
7160 (cdr '(maple))
7161 @result{} nil
7162 @end group
7163
7164 @group
7165 (cdr 'nil)
7166 @result{} nil
7167 @end group
7168
7169 @group
7170 (cdr ())
7171 @result{} nil
7172 @end group
7173 @end smallexample
7174
7175 @need 1200
7176 You can also do several @sc{cdr}s without printing the values in
7177 between, like this:
7178
7179 @smallexample
7180 @group
7181 (cdr (cdr '(pine fir oak maple)))
7182 @result{} (oak maple)
7183 @end group
7184 @end smallexample
7185
7186 @noindent
7187 In this example, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the innermost list first.
7188 The innermost list is quoted, so it just passes the list as it is to the
7189 innermost @code{cdr}. This @code{cdr} passes a list made up of the
7190 second and subsequent elements of the list to the outermost @code{cdr},
7191 which produces a list composed of the third and subsequent elements of
7192 the original list. In this example, the @code{cdr} function is repeated
7193 and returns a list that consists of the original list without its
7194 first two elements.
7195
7196 The @code{nthcdr} function does the same as repeating the call to
7197 @code{cdr}. In the following example, the argument 2 is passed to the
7198 function @code{nthcdr}, along with the list, and the value returned is
7199 the list without its first two items, which is exactly the same
7200 as repeating @code{cdr} twice on the list:
7201
7202 @smallexample
7203 @group
7204 (nthcdr 2 '(pine fir oak maple))
7205 @result{} (oak maple)
7206 @end group
7207 @end smallexample
7208
7209 @need 1200
7210 Using the original four element list, we can see what happens when
7211 various numeric arguments are passed to @code{nthcdr}, including 0, 1,
7212 and 5:
7213
7214 @smallexample
7215 @group
7216 ;; @r{Leave the list as it was.}
7217 (nthcdr 0 '(pine fir oak maple))
7218 @result{} (pine fir oak maple)
7219 @end group
7220
7221 @group
7222 ;; @r{Return a copy without the first element.}
7223 (nthcdr 1 '(pine fir oak maple))
7224 @result{} (fir oak maple)
7225 @end group
7226
7227 @group
7228 ;; @r{Return a copy of the list without three elements.}
7229 (nthcdr 3 '(pine fir oak maple))
7230 @result{} (maple)
7231 @end group
7232
7233 @group
7234 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all four elements.}
7235 (nthcdr 4 '(pine fir oak maple))
7236 @result{} nil
7237 @end group
7238
7239 @group
7240 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all elements.}
7241 (nthcdr 5 '(pine fir oak maple))
7242 @result{} nil
7243 @end group
7244 @end smallexample
7245
7246 @node nth
7247 @section @code{nth}
7248 @findex nth
7249
7250 The @code{nthcdr} function takes the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7251 The @code{nth} function takes the @sc{car} of the result returned by
7252 @code{nthcdr}. It returns the Nth element of the list.
7253
7254 @need 1500
7255 Thus, if it were not defined in C for speed, the definition of
7256 @code{nth} would be:
7257
7258 @smallexample
7259 @group
7260 (defun nth (n list)
7261 "Returns the Nth element of LIST.
7262 N counts from zero. If LIST is not that long, nil is returned."
7263 (car (nthcdr n list)))
7264 @end group
7265 @end smallexample
7266
7267 @noindent
7268 (Originally, @code{nth} was defined in Emacs Lisp in @file{subr.el},
7269 but its definition was redone in C in the 1980s.)
7270
7271 The @code{nth} function returns a single element of a list.
7272 This can be very convenient.
7273
7274 Note that the elements are numbered from zero, not one. That is to
7275 say, the first element of a list, its @sc{car} is the zeroth element.
7276 This is called `zero-based' counting and often bothers people who
7277 are accustomed to the first element in a list being number one, which
7278 is `one-based'.
7279
7280 @need 1250
7281 For example:
7282
7283 @smallexample
7284 @group
7285 (nth 0 '("one" "two" "three"))
7286 @result{} "one"
7287
7288 (nth 1 '("one" "two" "three"))
7289 @result{} "two"
7290 @end group
7291 @end smallexample
7292
7293 It is worth mentioning that @code{nth}, like @code{nthcdr} and
7294 @code{cdr}, does not change the original list---the function is
7295 non-destructive. This is in sharp contrast to the @code{setcar} and
7296 @code{setcdr} functions.
7297
7298 @node setcar
7299 @section @code{setcar}
7300 @findex setcar
7301
7302 As you might guess from their names, the @code{setcar} and @code{setcdr}
7303 functions set the @sc{car} or the @sc{cdr} of a list to a new value.
7304 They actually change the original list, unlike @code{car} and @code{cdr}
7305 which leave the original list as it was. One way to find out how this
7306 works is to experiment. We will start with the @code{setcar} function.
7307
7308 @need 1200
7309 First, we can make a list and then set the value of a variable to the
7310 list, using the @code{setq} function. Here is a list of animals:
7311
7312 @smallexample
7313 (setq animals '(antelope giraffe lion tiger))
7314 @end smallexample
7315
7316 @noindent
7317 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
7318 this expression in the usual fashion, by positioning the cursor after
7319 the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. (I'm doing this right here
7320 as I write this. This is one of the advantages of having the
7321 interpreter built into the computing environment. Incidentally, when
7322 there is nothing on the line after the final parentheses, such as a
7323 comment, point can be on the next line. Thus, if your cursor is in
7324 the first column of the next line, you do not need to move it.
7325 Indeed, Emacs permits any amount of white space after the final
7326 parenthesis.)
7327
7328 @need 1200
7329 When we evaluate the variable @code{animals}, we see that it is bound to
7330 the list @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}:
7331
7332 @smallexample
7333 @group
7334 animals
7335 @result{} (antelope giraffe lion tiger)
7336 @end group
7337 @end smallexample
7338
7339 @noindent
7340 Put another way, the variable @code{animals} points to the list
7341 @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}.
7342
7343 Next, evaluate the function @code{setcar} while passing it two
7344 arguments, the variable @code{animals} and the quoted symbol
7345 @code{hippopotamus}; this is done by writing the three element list
7346 @code{(setcar animals 'hippopotamus)} and then evaluating it in the
7347 usual fashion:
7348
7349 @smallexample
7350 (setcar animals 'hippopotamus)
7351 @end smallexample
7352
7353 @need 1200
7354 @noindent
7355 After evaluating this expression, evaluate the variable @code{animals}
7356 again. You will see that the list of animals has changed:
7357
7358 @smallexample
7359 @group
7360 animals
7361 @result{} (hippopotamus giraffe lion tiger)
7362 @end group
7363 @end smallexample
7364
7365 @noindent
7366 The first element on the list, @code{antelope} is replaced by
7367 @code{hippopotamus}.
7368
7369 So we can see that @code{setcar} did not add a new element to the list
7370 as @code{cons} would have; it replaced @code{antelope} with
7371 @code{hippopotamus}; it @emph{changed} the list.
7372
7373 @node setcdr
7374 @section @code{setcdr}
7375 @findex setcdr
7376
7377 The @code{setcdr} function is similar to the @code{setcar} function,
7378 except that the function replaces the second and subsequent elements of
7379 a list rather than the first element.
7380
7381 (To see how to change the last element of a list, look ahead to
7382 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, which uses
7383 the @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr} functions.)
7384
7385 @need 1200
7386 To see how this works, set the value of the variable to a list of
7387 domesticated animals by evaluating the following expression:
7388
7389 @smallexample
7390 (setq domesticated-animals '(horse cow sheep goat))
7391 @end smallexample
7392
7393 @need 1200
7394 @noindent
7395 If you now evaluate the list, you will be returned the list
7396 @code{(horse cow sheep goat)}:
7397
7398 @smallexample
7399 @group
7400 domesticated-animals
7401 @result{} (horse cow sheep goat)
7402 @end group
7403 @end smallexample
7404
7405 @need 1200
7406 Next, evaluate @code{setcdr} with two arguments, the name of the
7407 variable which has a list as its value, and the list to which the
7408 @sc{cdr} of the first list will be set;
7409
7410 @smallexample
7411 (setcdr domesticated-animals '(cat dog))
7412 @end smallexample
7413
7414 @noindent
7415 If you evaluate this expression, the list @code{(cat dog)} will appear
7416 in the echo area. This is the value returned by the function. The
7417 result we are interested in is the ``side effect'', which we can see by
7418 evaluating the variable @code{domesticated-animals}:
7419
7420 @smallexample
7421 @group
7422 domesticated-animals
7423 @result{} (horse cat dog)
7424 @end group
7425 @end smallexample
7426
7427 @noindent
7428 Indeed, the list is changed from @code{(horse cow sheep goat)} to
7429 @code{(horse cat dog)}. The @sc{cdr} of the list is changed from
7430 @code{(cow sheep goat)} to @code{(cat dog)}.
7431
7432 @node cons Exercise
7433 @section Exercise
7434
7435 Construct a list of four birds by evaluating several expressions with
7436 @code{cons}. Find out what happens when you @code{cons} a list onto
7437 itself. Replace the first element of the list of four birds with a
7438 fish. Replace the rest of that list with a list of other fish.
7439
7440 @node Cutting & Storing Text
7441 @chapter Cutting and Storing Text
7442 @cindex Cutting and storing text
7443 @cindex Storing and cutting text
7444 @cindex Killing text
7445 @cindex Clipping text
7446 @cindex Erasing text
7447 @cindex Deleting text
7448
7449 Whenever you cut or clip text out of a buffer with a `kill' command in
7450 GNU Emacs, it is stored in a list and you can bring it back with a
7451 `yank' command.
7452
7453 (The use of the word `kill' in Emacs for processes which specifically
7454 @emph{do not} destroy the values of the entities is an unfortunate
7455 historical accident. A much more appropriate word would be `clip' since
7456 that is what the kill commands do; they clip text out of a buffer and
7457 put it into storage from which it can be brought back. I have often
7458 been tempted to replace globally all occurrences of `kill' in the Emacs
7459 sources with `clip' and all occurrences of `killed' with `clipped'.)
7460
7461 @menu
7462 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
7463 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
7464 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
7465 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
7466 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
7467 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
7468 * cons & search-fwd Review::
7469 * search Exercises::
7470 @end menu
7471
7472 @ifnottex
7473 @node Storing Text
7474 @unnumberedsec Storing Text in a List
7475 @end ifnottex
7476
7477 When text is cut out of a buffer, it is stored on a list. Successive
7478 pieces of text are stored on the list successively, so the list might
7479 look like this:
7480
7481 @smallexample
7482 ("a piece of text" "previous piece")
7483 @end smallexample
7484
7485 @need 1200
7486 @noindent
7487 The function @code{cons} can be used to create a new list from a piece
7488 of text (an `atom', to use the jargon) and an existing list, like
7489 this:
7490
7491 @smallexample
7492 @group
7493 (cons "another piece"
7494 '("a piece of text" "previous piece"))
7495 @end group
7496 @end smallexample
7497
7498 @need 1200
7499 @noindent
7500 If you evaluate this expression, a list of three elements will appear in
7501 the echo area:
7502
7503 @smallexample
7504 ("another piece" "a piece of text" "previous piece")
7505 @end smallexample
7506
7507 With the @code{car} and @code{nthcdr} functions, you can retrieve
7508 whichever piece of text you want. For example, in the following code,
7509 @code{nthcdr 1 @dots{}} returns the list with the first item removed;
7510 and the @code{car} returns the first element of that remainder---the
7511 second element of the original list:
7512
7513 @smallexample
7514 @group
7515 (car (nthcdr 1 '("another piece"
7516 "a piece of text"
7517 "previous piece")))
7518 @result{} "a piece of text"
7519 @end group
7520 @end smallexample
7521
7522 The actual functions in Emacs are more complex than this, of course.
7523 The code for cutting and retrieving text has to be written so that
7524 Emacs can figure out which element in the list you want---the first,
7525 second, third, or whatever. In addition, when you get to the end of
7526 the list, Emacs should give you the first element of the list, rather
7527 than nothing at all.
7528
7529 The list that holds the pieces of text is called the @dfn{kill ring}.
7530 This chapter leads up to a description of the kill ring and how it is
7531 used by first tracing how the @code{zap-to-char} function works. This
7532 function uses (or `calls') a function that invokes a function that
7533 manipulates the kill ring. Thus, before reaching the mountains, we
7534 climb the foothills.
7535
7536 A subsequent chapter describes how text that is cut from the buffer is
7537 retrieved. @xref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}.
7538
7539 @node zap-to-char
7540 @section @code{zap-to-char}
7541 @findex zap-to-char
7542
7543 Let us look at the interactive @code{zap-to-char} function.
7544
7545 @menu
7546 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
7547 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
7548 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
7549 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
7550 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
7551 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
7552 @end menu
7553
7554 @ifnottex
7555 @node Complete zap-to-char
7556 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{zap-to-char} Implementation
7557 @end ifnottex
7558
7559 The @code{zap-to-char} function removes the text in the region between
7560 the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) up to and including the
7561 next occurrence of a specified character. The text that
7562 @code{zap-to-char} removes is put in the kill ring; and it can be
7563 retrieved from the kill ring by typing @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}). If
7564 the command is given an argument, it removes text through that number
7565 of occurrences. Thus, if the cursor were at the beginning of this
7566 sentence and the character were @samp{s}, @samp{Thus} would be
7567 removed. If the argument were two, @samp{Thus, if the curs} would be
7568 removed, up to and including the @samp{s} in @samp{cursor}.
7569
7570 If the specified character is not found, @code{zap-to-char} will say
7571 ``Search failed'', tell you the character you typed, and not remove
7572 any text.
7573
7574 In order to determine how much text to remove, @code{zap-to-char} uses
7575 a search function. Searches are used extensively in code that
7576 manipulates text, and we will focus attention on them as well as on the
7577 deletion command.
7578
7579 @ignore
7580 @c GNU Emacs version 19
7581 (defun zap-to-char (arg char) ; version 19 implementation
7582 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7583 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7584 (interactive "*p\ncZap to char: ")
7585 (kill-region (point)
7586 (progn
7587 (search-forward
7588 (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7589 (point))))
7590 @end ignore
7591
7592 @need 1250
7593 Here is the complete text of the version 22 implementation of the function:
7594
7595 @c GNU Emacs 22
7596 @smallexample
7597 @group
7598 (defun zap-to-char (arg char)
7599 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7600 Case is ignored if `case-fold-search' is non-nil in the current buffer.
7601 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7602 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7603 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7604 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7605 (kill-region (point) (progn
7606 (search-forward (char-to-string char)
7607 nil nil arg)
7608 (point))))
7609 @end group
7610 @end smallexample
7611
7612 The documentation is thorough. You do need to know the jargon meaning
7613 of the word `kill'.
7614
7615 @node zap-to-char interactive
7616 @subsection The @code{interactive} Expression
7617
7618 @need 800
7619 The interactive expression in the @code{zap-to-char} command looks like
7620 this:
7621
7622 @smallexample
7623 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7624 @end smallexample
7625
7626 The part within quotation marks, @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "}, specifies
7627 two different things. First, and most simply, is the @samp{p}.
7628 This part is separated from the next part by a newline, @samp{\n}.
7629 The @samp{p} means that the first argument to the function will be
7630 passed the value of a `processed prefix'. The prefix argument is
7631 passed by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number, or @kbd{M-} and a number. If
7632 the function is called interactively without a prefix, 1 is passed to
7633 this argument.
7634
7635 The second part of @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "} is
7636 @samp{cZap to char:@: }. In this part, the lower case @samp{c}
7637 indicates that @code{interactive} expects a prompt and that the
7638 argument will be a character. The prompt follows the @samp{c} and is
7639 the string @samp{Zap to char:@: } (with a space after the colon to
7640 make it look good).
7641
7642 What all this does is prepare the arguments to @code{zap-to-char} so they
7643 are of the right type, and give the user a prompt.
7644
7645 In a read-only buffer, the @code{zap-to-char} function copies the text
7646 to the kill ring, but does not remove it. The echo area displays a
7647 message saying that the buffer is read-only. Also, the terminal may
7648 beep or blink at you.
7649
7650 @node zap-to-char body
7651 @subsection The Body of @code{zap-to-char}
7652
7653 The body of the @code{zap-to-char} function contains the code that
7654 kills (that is, removes) the text in the region from the current
7655 position of the cursor up to and including the specified character.
7656
7657 The first part of the code looks like this:
7658
7659 @smallexample
7660 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7661 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7662 (kill-region (point) (progn
7663 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7664 (point)))
7665 @end smallexample
7666
7667 @noindent
7668 @code{char-table-p} is an hitherto unseen function. It determines
7669 whether its argument is a character table. When it is, it sets the
7670 character passed to @code{zap-to-char} to one of them, if that
7671 character exists, or to the character itself. (This becomes important
7672 for certain characters in non-European languages. The @code{aref}
7673 function extracts an element from an array. It is an array-specific
7674 function that is not described in this document. @xref{Arrays, ,
7675 Arrays, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
7676
7677 @noindent
7678 @code{(point)} is the current position of the cursor.
7679
7680 The next part of the code is an expression using @code{progn}. The body
7681 of the @code{progn} consists of calls to @code{search-forward} and
7682 @code{point}.
7683
7684 It is easier to understand how @code{progn} works after learning about
7685 @code{search-forward}, so we will look at @code{search-forward} and
7686 then at @code{progn}.
7687
7688 @node search-forward
7689 @subsection The @code{search-forward} Function
7690 @findex search-forward
7691
7692 The @code{search-forward} function is used to locate the
7693 zapped-for-character in @code{zap-to-char}. If the search is
7694 successful, @code{search-forward} leaves point immediately after the
7695 last character in the target string. (In @code{zap-to-char}, the
7696 target string is just one character long. @code{zap-to-char} uses the
7697 function @code{char-to-string} to ensure that the computer treats that
7698 character as a string.) If the search is backwards,
7699 @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first character in
7700 the target. Also, @code{search-forward} returns @code{t} for true.
7701 (Moving point is therefore a `side effect'.)
7702
7703 @need 1250
7704 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{search-forward} function looks like this:
7705
7706 @smallexample
7707 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7708 @end smallexample
7709
7710 The @code{search-forward} function takes four arguments:
7711
7712 @enumerate
7713 @item
7714 The first argument is the target, what is searched for. This must be a
7715 string, such as @samp{"z"}.
7716
7717 As it happens, the argument passed to @code{zap-to-char} is a single
7718 character. Because of the way computers are built, the Lisp
7719 interpreter may treat a single character as being different from a
7720 string of characters. Inside the computer, a single character has a
7721 different electronic format than a string of one character. (A single
7722 character can often be recorded in the computer using exactly one
7723 byte; but a string may be longer, and the computer needs to be ready
7724 for this.) Since the @code{search-forward} function searches for a
7725 string, the character that the @code{zap-to-char} function receives as
7726 its argument must be converted inside the computer from one format to
7727 the other; otherwise the @code{search-forward} function will fail.
7728 The @code{char-to-string} function is used to make this conversion.
7729
7730 @item
7731 The second argument bounds the search; it is specified as a position in
7732 the buffer. In this case, the search can go to the end of the buffer,
7733 so no bound is set and the second argument is @code{nil}.
7734
7735 @item
7736 The third argument tells the function what it should do if the search
7737 fails---it can signal an error (and print a message) or it can return
7738 @code{nil}. A @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
7739 signal an error when the search fails.
7740
7741 @item
7742 The fourth argument to @code{search-forward} is the repeat count---how
7743 many occurrences of the string to look for. This argument is optional
7744 and if the function is called without a repeat count, this argument is
7745 passed the value 1. If this argument is negative, the search goes
7746 backwards.
7747 @end enumerate
7748
7749 @need 800
7750 In template form, a @code{search-forward} expression looks like this:
7751
7752 @smallexample
7753 @group
7754 (search-forward "@var{target-string}"
7755 @var{limit-of-search}
7756 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
7757 @var{repeat-count})
7758 @end group
7759 @end smallexample
7760
7761 We will look at @code{progn} next.
7762
7763 @node progn
7764 @subsection The @code{progn} Special Form
7765 @findex progn
7766
7767 @code{progn} is a special form that causes each of its arguments to be
7768 evaluated in sequence and then returns the value of the last one. The
7769 preceding expressions are evaluated only for the side effects they
7770 perform. The values produced by them are discarded.
7771
7772 @need 800
7773 The template for a @code{progn} expression is very simple:
7774
7775 @smallexample
7776 @group
7777 (progn
7778 @var{body}@dots{})
7779 @end group
7780 @end smallexample
7781
7782 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{progn} expression has to do two things:
7783 put point in exactly the right position; and return the location of
7784 point so that @code{kill-region} will know how far to kill to.
7785
7786 The first argument to the @code{progn} is @code{search-forward}. When
7787 @code{search-forward} finds the string, the function leaves point
7788 immediately after the last character in the target string. (In this
7789 case the target string is just one character long.) If the search is
7790 backwards, @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first
7791 character in the target. The movement of point is a side effect.
7792
7793 The second and last argument to @code{progn} is the expression
7794 @code{(point)}. This expression returns the value of point, which in
7795 this case will be the location to which it has been moved by
7796 @code{search-forward}. (In the source, a line that tells the function
7797 to go to the previous character, if it is going forward, was commented
7798 out in 1999; I don't remember whether that feature or mis-feature was
7799 ever a part of the distributed source.) The value of @code{point} is
7800 returned by the @code{progn} expression and is passed to
7801 @code{kill-region} as @code{kill-region}'s second argument.
7802
7803 @node Summing up zap-to-char
7804 @subsection Summing up @code{zap-to-char}
7805
7806 Now that we have seen how @code{search-forward} and @code{progn} work,
7807 we can see how the @code{zap-to-char} function works as a whole.
7808
7809 The first argument to @code{kill-region} is the position of the cursor
7810 when the @code{zap-to-char} command is given---the value of point at
7811 that time. Within the @code{progn}, the search function then moves
7812 point to just after the zapped-to-character and @code{point} returns the
7813 value of this location. The @code{kill-region} function puts together
7814 these two values of point, the first one as the beginning of the region
7815 and the second one as the end of the region, and removes the region.
7816
7817 The @code{progn} special form is necessary because the
7818 @code{kill-region} command takes two arguments; and it would fail if
7819 @code{search-forward} and @code{point} expressions were written in
7820 sequence as two additional arguments. The @code{progn} expression is
7821 a single argument to @code{kill-region} and returns the one value that
7822 @code{kill-region} needs for its second argument.
7823
7824 @node kill-region
7825 @section @code{kill-region}
7826 @findex kill-region
7827
7828 The @code{zap-to-char} function uses the @code{kill-region} function.
7829 This function clips text from a region and copies that text to
7830 the kill ring, from which it may be retrieved.
7831
7832 @ignore
7833 GNU Emacs 22:
7834
7835 (defun kill-region (beg end &optional yank-handler)
7836 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
7837 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
7838 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there.
7839 \(If you want to kill and then yank immediately, use \\[kill-ring-save].)
7840
7841 If you want to append the killed region to the last killed text,
7842 use \\[append-next-kill] before \\[kill-region].
7843
7844 If the buffer is read-only, Emacs will beep and refrain from deleting
7845 the text, but put the text in the kill ring anyway. This means that
7846 you can use the killing commands to copy text from a read-only buffer.
7847
7848 This is the primitive for programs to kill text (as opposed to deleting it).
7849 Supply two arguments, character positions indicating the stretch of text
7850 to be killed.
7851 Any command that calls this function is a \"kill command\".
7852 If the previous command was also a kill command,
7853 the text killed this time appends to the text killed last time
7854 to make one entry in the kill ring.
7855
7856 In Lisp code, optional third arg YANK-HANDLER, if non-nil,
7857 specifies the yank-handler text property to be set on the killed
7858 text. See `insert-for-yank'."
7859 ;; Pass point first, then mark, because the order matters
7860 ;; when calling kill-append.
7861 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
7862 (unless (and beg end)
7863 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
7864 (condition-case nil
7865 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
7866 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
7867 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
7868 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
7869 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
7870 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
7871 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
7872 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
7873 nil)
7874 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only)
7875 ;; The code above failed because the buffer, or some of the characters
7876 ;; in the region, are read-only.
7877 ;; We should beep, in case the user just isn't aware of this.
7878 ;; However, there's no harm in putting
7879 ;; the region's text in the kill ring, anyway.
7880 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
7881 ;; Set this-command now, so it will be set even if we get an error.
7882 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
7883 ;; This should barf, if appropriate, and give us the correct error.
7884 (if kill-read-only-ok
7885 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
7886 ;; Signal an error if the buffer is read-only.
7887 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
7888 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
7889 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
7890 @end ignore
7891
7892 The Emacs 22 version of that function uses @code{condition-case} and
7893 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, both of which we will explain.
7894 @code{condition-case} is an important special form.
7895
7896 In essence, the @code{kill-region} function calls
7897 @code{condition-case}, which takes three arguments. In this function,
7898 the first argument does nothing. The second argument contains the
7899 code that does the work when all goes well. The third argument
7900 contains the code that is called in the event of an error.
7901
7902 @menu
7903 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
7904 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
7905 * Lisp macro::
7906 @end menu
7907
7908 @ifnottex
7909 @node Complete kill-region
7910 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{kill-region} Definition
7911 @end ifnottex
7912
7913 @need 1200
7914 We will go through the @code{condition-case} code in a moment. First,
7915 let us look at the definition of @code{kill-region}, with comments
7916 added:
7917
7918 @c GNU Emacs 22:
7919 @smallexample
7920 @group
7921 (defun kill-region (beg end)
7922 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
7923 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
7924 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there. @dots{} "
7925 @end group
7926
7927 @group
7928 ;; @bullet{} Since order matters, pass point first.
7929 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
7930 ;; @bullet{} And tell us if we cannot cut the text.
7931 ;; `unless' is an `if' without a then-part.
7932 (unless (and beg end)
7933 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
7934 @end group
7935
7936 @group
7937 ;; @bullet{} `condition-case' takes three arguments.
7938 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
7939 ;; information about the error signal is not
7940 ;; stored for use by another function.
7941 (condition-case nil
7942 @end group
7943
7944 @group
7945 ;; @bullet{} The second argument to `condition-case' tells the
7946 ;; Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
7947 @end group
7948
7949 @group
7950 ;; It starts with a `let' function that extracts the string
7951 ;; and tests whether it exists. If so (that is what the
7952 ;; `when' checks), it calls an `if' function that determines
7953 ;; whether the previous command was another call to
7954 ;; `kill-region'; if it was, then the new text is appended to
7955 ;; the previous text; if not, then a different function,
7956 ;; `kill-new', is called.
7957 @end group
7958
7959 @group
7960 ;; The `kill-append' function concatenates the new string and
7961 ;; the old. The `kill-new' function inserts text into a new
7962 ;; item in the kill ring.
7963 @end group
7964
7965 @group
7966 ;; `when' is an `if' without an else-part. The second `when'
7967 ;; again checks whether the current string exists; in
7968 ;; addition, it checks whether the previous command was
7969 ;; another call to `kill-region'. If one or the other
7970 ;; condition is true, then it sets the current command to
7971 ;; be `kill-region'.
7972 @end group
7973 @group
7974 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
7975 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
7976 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
7977 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
7978 @end group
7979 @group
7980 ;; @minus{} `yank-handler' is an optional argument to
7981 ;; `kill-region' that tells the `kill-append' and
7982 ;; `kill-new' functions how deal with properties
7983 ;; added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'.
7984 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
7985 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
7986 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
7987 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
7988 nil)
7989 @end group
7990
7991 @group
7992 ;; @bullet{} The third argument to `condition-case' tells the interpreter
7993 ;; what to do with an error.
7994 @end group
7995 @group
7996 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
7997 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
7998 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
7999 ;; then the body is executed.
8000 @end group
8001 @group
8002 ;; The first part of the third argument is the following:
8003 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; the if-part
8004 ;; @dots{} the then-part
8005 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8006 @end group
8007 @group
8008 ;; Next, also as part of the then-part, set this-command, so
8009 ;; it will be set in an error
8010 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
8011 ;; Finally, in the then-part, send a message if you may copy
8012 ;; the text to the kill ring without signaling an error, but
8013 ;; don't if you may not.
8014 @end group
8015 @group
8016 (if kill-read-only-ok
8017 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
8018 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8019 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
8020 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))
8021 @end group
8022 @end smallexample
8023
8024 @ignore
8025 @c v 21
8026 @smallexample
8027 @group
8028 (defun kill-region (beg end)
8029 "Kill between point and mark.
8030 The text is deleted but saved in the kill ring."
8031 (interactive "r")
8032 @end group
8033
8034 @group
8035 ;; 1. `condition-case' takes three arguments.
8036 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
8037 ;; information about the error signal is not
8038 ;; stored for use by another function.
8039 (condition-case nil
8040 @end group
8041
8042 @group
8043 ;; 2. The second argument to `condition-case'
8044 ;; tells the Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
8045 @end group
8046
8047 @group
8048 ;; The `delete-and-extract-region' function usually does the
8049 ;; work. If the beginning and ending of the region are both
8050 ;; the same, then the variable `string' will be empty, or nil
8051 (let ((string (delete-and-extract-region beg end)))
8052 @end group
8053
8054 @group
8055 ;; `when' is an `if' clause that cannot take an `else-part'.
8056 ;; Emacs normally sets the value of `last-command' to the
8057 ;; previous command.
8058 @end group
8059 @group
8060 ;; `kill-append' concatenates the new string and the old.
8061 ;; `kill-new' inserts text into a new item in the kill ring.
8062 (when string
8063 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8064 ;; if true, prepend string
8065 (kill-append string (< end beg))
8066 (kill-new string)))
8067 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8068 @end group
8069
8070 @group
8071 ;; 3. The third argument to `condition-case' tells the interpreter
8072 ;; what to do with an error.
8073 @end group
8074 @group
8075 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8076 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8077 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8078 ;; then the body is executed.
8079 @end group
8080 @group
8081 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; this is the if-part
8082 ;; then...
8083 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8084 @end group
8085 @group
8086 (if kill-read-only-ok ;; usually this variable is nil
8087 (message "Read only text copied to kill ring")
8088 ;; or else, signal an error if the buffer is read-only;
8089 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8090 ;; and, in any case, signal that the text is read-only.
8091 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
8092 @end group
8093 @end smallexample
8094 @end ignore
8095
8096 @node condition-case
8097 @subsection @code{condition-case}
8098 @findex condition-case
8099
8100 As we have seen earlier (@pxref{Making Errors, , Generate an Error
8101 Message}), when the Emacs Lisp interpreter has trouble evaluating an
8102 expression, it provides you with help; in the jargon, this is called
8103 ``signaling an error''. Usually, the computer stops the program and
8104 shows you a message.
8105
8106 However, some programs undertake complicated actions. They should not
8107 simply stop on an error. In the @code{kill-region} function, the most
8108 likely error is that you will try to kill text that is read-only and
8109 cannot be removed. So the @code{kill-region} function contains code
8110 to handle this circumstance. This code, which makes up the body of
8111 the @code{kill-region} function, is inside of a @code{condition-case}
8112 special form.
8113
8114 @need 800
8115 The template for @code{condition-case} looks like this:
8116
8117 @smallexample
8118 @group
8119 (condition-case
8120 @var{var}
8121 @var{bodyform}
8122 @var{error-handler}@dots{})
8123 @end group
8124 @end smallexample
8125
8126 The second argument, @var{bodyform}, is straightforward. The
8127 @code{condition-case} special form causes the Lisp interpreter to
8128 evaluate the code in @var{bodyform}. If no error occurs, the special
8129 form returns the code's value and produces the side-effects, if any.
8130
8131 In short, the @var{bodyform} part of a @code{condition-case}
8132 expression determines what should happen when everything works
8133 correctly.
8134
8135 However, if an error occurs, among its other actions, the function
8136 generating the error signal will define one or more error condition
8137 names.
8138
8139 An error handler is the third argument to @code{condition case}.
8140 An error handler has two parts, a @var{condition-name} and a
8141 @var{body}. If the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8142 matches a condition name generated by an error, then the @var{body}
8143 part of the error handler is run.
8144
8145 As you will expect, the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8146 may be either a single condition name or a list of condition names.
8147
8148 Also, a complete @code{condition-case} expression may contain more
8149 than one error handler. When an error occurs, the first applicable
8150 handler is run.
8151
8152 Lastly, the first argument to the @code{condition-case} expression,
8153 the @var{var} argument, is sometimes bound to a variable that
8154 contains information about the error. However, if that argument is
8155 nil, as is the case in @code{kill-region}, that information is
8156 discarded.
8157
8158 @need 1200
8159 In brief, in the @code{kill-region} function, the code
8160 @code{condition-case} works like this:
8161
8162 @smallexample
8163 @group
8164 @var{If no errors}, @var{run only this code}
8165 @var{but}, @var{if errors}, @var{run this other code}.
8166 @end group
8167 @end smallexample
8168
8169 @ignore
8170 2006 Oct 24
8171 In Emacs 22,
8172 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
8173 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
8174 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
8175 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
8176
8177 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
8178 this is line 8054
8179 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar} includes line 8350
8180 @end ignore
8181
8182 @node Lisp macro
8183 @subsection Lisp macro
8184 @cindex Macro, lisp
8185 @cindex Lisp macro
8186
8187 The part of the @code{condition-case} expression that is evaluated in
8188 the expectation that all goes well has a @code{when}. The code uses
8189 @code{when} to determine whether the @code{string} variable points to
8190 text that exists.
8191
8192 A @code{when} expression is simply a programmers' convenience. It is
8193 an @code{if} without the possibility of an else clause. In your mind,
8194 you can replace @code{when} with @code{if} and understand what goes
8195 on. That is what the Lisp interpreter does.
8196
8197 Technically speaking, @code{when} is a Lisp macro. A Lisp macro
8198 enables you to define new control constructs and other language
8199 features. It tells the interpreter how to compute another Lisp
8200 expression which will in turn compute the value. In this case, the
8201 `other expression' is an @code{if} expression.
8202
8203 The @code{kill-region} function definition also has an @code{unless}
8204 macro; it is the converse of @code{when}. The @code{unless} macro is
8205 an @code{if} without a then clause
8206
8207 For more about Lisp macros, see @ref{Macros, , Macros, elisp, The GNU
8208 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. The C programming language also
8209 provides macros. These are different, but also useful.
8210
8211 @ignore
8212 We will briefly look at C macros in
8213 @ref{Digression into C}.
8214 @end ignore
8215
8216 @need 1200
8217 Regarding the @code{when} macro, in the @code{condition-case}
8218 expression, when the string has content, then another conditional
8219 expression is executed. This is an @code{if} with both a then-part
8220 and an else-part.
8221
8222 @smallexample
8223 @group
8224 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8225 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8226 (kill-new string nil yank-handler))
8227 @end group
8228 @end smallexample
8229
8230 The then-part is evaluated if the previous command was another call to
8231 @code{kill-region}; if not, the else-part is evaluated.
8232
8233 @code{yank-handler} is an optional argument to @code{kill-region} that
8234 tells the @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new} functions how deal
8235 with properties added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'.
8236
8237 @code{last-command} is a variable that comes with Emacs that we have
8238 not seen before. Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs
8239 sets the value of @code{last-command} to the previous command.
8240
8241 @need 1200
8242 In this segment of the definition, the @code{if} expression checks
8243 whether the previous command was @code{kill-region}. If it was,
8244
8245 @smallexample
8246 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8247 @end smallexample
8248
8249 @noindent
8250 concatenates a copy of the newly clipped text to the just previously
8251 clipped text in the kill ring.
8252
8253 @node copy-region-as-kill
8254 @section @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8255 @findex copy-region-as-kill
8256 @findex nthcdr
8257
8258 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function copies a region of text from a
8259 buffer and (via either @code{kill-append} or @code{kill-new}) saves it
8260 in the @code{kill-ring}.
8261
8262 If you call @code{copy-region-as-kill} immediately after a
8263 @code{kill-region} command, Emacs appends the newly copied text to the
8264 previously copied text. This means that if you yank back the text, you
8265 get it all, from both this and the previous operation. On the other
8266 hand, if some other command precedes the @code{copy-region-as-kill},
8267 the function copies the text into a separate entry in the kill ring.
8268
8269 @menu
8270 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
8271 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
8272 @end menu
8273
8274 @ifnottex
8275 @node Complete copy-region-as-kill
8276 @unnumberedsubsec The complete @code{copy-region-as-kill} function definition
8277 @end ifnottex
8278
8279 @need 1200
8280 Here is the complete text of the version 22 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8281 function:
8282
8283 @smallexample
8284 @group
8285 (defun copy-region-as-kill (beg end)
8286 "Save the region as if killed, but don't kill it.
8287 In Transient Mark mode, deactivate the mark.
8288 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, also save the text for a window
8289 system cut and paste."
8290 (interactive "r")
8291 @end group
8292 @group
8293 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8294 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8295 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8296 @end group
8297 @group
8298 (if transient-mark-mode
8299 (setq deactivate-mark t))
8300 nil)
8301 @end group
8302 @end smallexample
8303
8304 @need 800
8305 As usual, this function can be divided into its component parts:
8306
8307 @smallexample
8308 @group
8309 (defun copy-region-as-kill (@var{argument-list})
8310 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
8311 (interactive "r")
8312 @var{body}@dots{})
8313 @end group
8314 @end smallexample
8315
8316 The arguments are @code{beg} and @code{end} and the function is
8317 interactive with @code{"r"}, so the two arguments must refer to the
8318 beginning and end of the region. If you have been reading through this
8319 document from the beginning, understanding these parts of a function is
8320 almost becoming routine.
8321
8322 The documentation is somewhat confusing unless you remember that the
8323 word `kill' has a meaning different from usual. The `Transient Mark'
8324 and @code{interprogram-cut-function} comments explain certain
8325 side-effects.
8326
8327 After you once set a mark, a buffer always contains a region. If you
8328 wish, you can use Transient Mark mode to highlight the region
8329 temporarily. (No one wants to highlight the region all the time, so
8330 Transient Mark mode highlights it only at appropriate times. Many
8331 people turn off Transient Mark mode, so the region is never
8332 highlighted.)
8333
8334 Also, a windowing system allows you to copy, cut, and paste among
8335 different programs. In the X windowing system, for example, the
8336 @code{interprogram-cut-function} function is @code{x-select-text},
8337 which works with the windowing system's equivalent of the Emacs kill
8338 ring.
8339
8340 The body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function starts with an
8341 @code{if} clause. What this clause does is distinguish between two
8342 different situations: whether or not this command is executed
8343 immediately after a previous @code{kill-region} command. In the first
8344 case, the new region is appended to the previously copied text.
8345 Otherwise, it is inserted into the beginning of the kill ring as a
8346 separate piece of text from the previous piece.
8347
8348 The last two lines of the function prevent the region from lighting up
8349 if Transient Mark mode is turned on.
8350
8351 The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill} merits discussion in detail.
8352
8353 @node copy-region-as-kill body
8354 @subsection The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8355
8356 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function works in much the same way as
8357 the @code{kill-region} function. Both are written so that two or more
8358 kills in a row combine their text into a single entry. If you yank
8359 back the text from the kill ring, you get it all in one piece.
8360 Moreover, kills that kill forward from the current position of the
8361 cursor are added to the end of the previously copied text and commands
8362 that copy text backwards add it to the beginning of the previously
8363 copied text. This way, the words in the text stay in the proper
8364 order.
8365
8366 Like @code{kill-region}, the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function makes
8367 use of the @code{last-command} variable that keeps track of the
8368 previous Emacs command.
8369
8370 @menu
8371 * last-command & this-command::
8372 * kill-append function::
8373 * kill-new function::
8374 @end menu
8375
8376 @ifnottex
8377 @node last-command & this-command
8378 @unnumberedsubsubsec @code{last-command} and @code{this-command}
8379 @end ifnottex
8380
8381 Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs sets the value of
8382 @code{this-command} to the function being executed (which in this case
8383 would be @code{copy-region-as-kill}). At the same time, Emacs sets
8384 the value of @code{last-command} to the previous value of
8385 @code{this-command}.
8386
8387 In the first part of the body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8388 function, an @code{if} expression determines whether the value of
8389 @code{last-command} is @code{kill-region}. If so, the then-part of
8390 the @code{if} expression is evaluated; it uses the @code{kill-append}
8391 function to concatenate the text copied at this call to the function
8392 with the text already in the first element (the @sc{car}) of the kill
8393 ring. On the other hand, if the value of @code{last-command} is not
8394 @code{kill-region}, then the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function
8395 attaches a new element to the kill ring using the @code{kill-new}
8396 function.
8397
8398 @need 1250
8399 The @code{if} expression reads as follows; it uses @code{eq}:
8400
8401 @smallexample
8402 @group
8403 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8404 ;; @r{then-part}
8405 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8406 ;; @r{else-part}
8407 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8408 @end group
8409 @end smallexample
8410
8411 @findex filter-buffer-substring
8412 (The @code{filter-buffer-substring} function returns a filtered
8413 substring of the buffer, if any. Optionally---the arguments are not
8414 here, so neither is done---the function may delete the initial text or
8415 return the text without its properties; this function is a replacement
8416 for the older @code{buffer-substring} function, which came before text
8417 properties were implemented.)
8418
8419 @findex eq @r{(example of use)}
8420 @noindent
8421 The @code{eq} function tests whether its first argument is the same Lisp
8422 object as its second argument. The @code{eq} function is similar to the
8423 @code{equal} function in that it is used to test for equality, but
8424 differs in that it determines whether two representations are actually
8425 the same object inside the computer, but with different names.
8426 @code{equal} determines whether the structure and contents of two
8427 expressions are the same.
8428
8429 If the previous command was @code{kill-region}, then the Emacs Lisp
8430 interpreter calls the @code{kill-append} function
8431
8432 @node kill-append function
8433 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-append} function
8434 @findex kill-append
8435
8436 @need 800
8437 The @code{kill-append} function looks like this:
8438
8439 @c in GNU Emacs 22
8440 @smallexample
8441 @group
8442 (defun kill-append (string before-p &optional yank-handler)
8443 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8444 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8445 @dots{} "
8446 (let* ((cur (car kill-ring)))
8447 (kill-new (if before-p (concat string cur) (concat cur string))
8448 (or (= (length cur) 0)
8449 (equal yank-handler
8450 (get-text-property 0 'yank-handler cur)))
8451 yank-handler)))
8452 @end group
8453 @end smallexample
8454
8455 @ignore
8456 was:
8457 (defun kill-append (string before-p)
8458 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8459 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8460 If `interprogram-cut-function' is set, pass the resulting kill to
8461 it."
8462 (kill-new (if before-p
8463 (concat string (car kill-ring))
8464 (concat (car kill-ring) string))
8465 t))
8466 @end ignore
8467
8468 @noindent
8469 The @code{kill-append} function is fairly straightforward. It uses
8470 the @code{kill-new} function, which we will discuss in more detail in
8471 a moment.
8472
8473 (Also, the function provides an optional argument called
8474 @code{yank-handler}; when invoked, this argument tells the function
8475 how to deal with properties added to the text, such as `bold' or
8476 `italics'.)
8477
8478 @c !!! bug in GNU Emacs 22 version of kill-append ?
8479 It has a @code{let*} function to set the value of the first element of
8480 the kill ring to @code{cur}. (I do not know why the function does not
8481 use @code{let} instead; only one value is set in the expression.
8482 Perhaps this is a bug that produces no problems?)
8483
8484 Consider the conditional that is one of the two arguments to
8485 @code{kill-new}. It uses @code{concat} to concatenate the new text to
8486 the @sc{car} of the kill ring. Whether it prepends or appends the
8487 text depends on the results of an @code{if} expression:
8488
8489 @smallexample
8490 @group
8491 (if before-p ; @r{if-part}
8492 (concat string cur) ; @r{then-part}
8493 (concat cur string)) ; @r{else-part}
8494 @end group
8495 @end smallexample
8496
8497 @noindent
8498 If the region being killed is before the region that was killed in the
8499 last command, then it should be prepended before the material that was
8500 saved in the previous kill; and conversely, if the killed text follows
8501 what was just killed, it should be appended after the previous text.
8502 The @code{if} expression depends on the predicate @code{before-p} to
8503 decide whether the newly saved text should be put before or after the
8504 previously saved text.
8505
8506 The symbol @code{before-p} is the name of one of the arguments to
8507 @code{kill-append}. When the @code{kill-append} function is
8508 evaluated, it is bound to the value returned by evaluating the actual
8509 argument. In this case, this is the expression @code{(< end beg)}.
8510 This expression does not directly determine whether the killed text in
8511 this command is located before or after the kill text of the last
8512 command; what it does is determine whether the value of the variable
8513 @code{end} is less than the value of the variable @code{beg}. If it
8514 is, it means that the user is most likely heading towards the
8515 beginning of the buffer. Also, the result of evaluating the predicate
8516 expression, @code{(< end beg)}, will be true and the text will be
8517 prepended before the previous text. On the other hand, if the value of
8518 the variable @code{end} is greater than the value of the variable
8519 @code{beg}, the text will be appended after the previous text.
8520
8521 @need 800
8522 When the newly saved text will be prepended, then the string with the new
8523 text will be concatenated before the old text:
8524
8525 @smallexample
8526 (concat string cur)
8527 @end smallexample
8528
8529 @need 1200
8530 @noindent
8531 But if the text will be appended, it will be concatenated
8532 after the old text:
8533
8534 @smallexample
8535 (concat cur string))
8536 @end smallexample
8537
8538 To understand how this works, we first need to review the
8539 @code{concat} function. The @code{concat} function links together or
8540 unites two strings of text. The result is a string. For example:
8541
8542 @smallexample
8543 @group
8544 (concat "abc" "def")
8545 @result{} "abcdef"
8546 @end group
8547
8548 @group
8549 (concat "new "
8550 (car '("first element" "second element")))
8551 @result{} "new first element"
8552
8553 (concat (car
8554 '("first element" "second element")) " modified")
8555 @result{} "first element modified"
8556 @end group
8557 @end smallexample
8558
8559 We can now make sense of @code{kill-append}: it modifies the contents
8560 of the kill ring. The kill ring is a list, each element of which is
8561 saved text. The @code{kill-append} function uses the @code{kill-new}
8562 function which in turn uses the @code{setcar} function.
8563
8564 @node kill-new function
8565 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-new} function
8566 @findex kill-new
8567
8568 @c in GNU Emacs 22, additional documentation to kill-new:
8569 @ignore
8570 Optional third arguments YANK-HANDLER controls how the STRING is later
8571 inserted into a buffer; see `insert-for-yank' for details.
8572 When a yank handler is specified, STRING must be non-empty (the yank
8573 handler, if non-nil, is stored as a `yank-handler' text property on STRING).
8574
8575 When the yank handler has a non-nil PARAM element, the original STRING
8576 argument is not used by `insert-for-yank'. However, since Lisp code
8577 may access and use elements from the kill ring directly, the STRING
8578 argument should still be a \"useful\" string for such uses."
8579 @end ignore
8580 @need 1200
8581 The @code{kill-new} function looks like this:
8582
8583 @smallexample
8584 @group
8585 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace yank-handler)
8586 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8587 Set `kill-ring-yank-pointer' to point to it.
8588
8589 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8590 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8591 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list.
8592 @dots{}"
8593 @end group
8594 @group
8595 (if (> (length string) 0)
8596 (if yank-handler
8597 (put-text-property 0 (length string)
8598 'yank-handler yank-handler string))
8599 (if yank-handler
8600 (signal 'args-out-of-range
8601 (list string "yank-handler specified for empty string"))))
8602 @end group
8603 @group
8604 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8605 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8606 @end group
8607 @group
8608 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8609 (setcar kill-ring string)
8610 (push string kill-ring)
8611 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8612 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8613 @end group
8614 @group
8615 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8616 (if interprogram-cut-function
8617 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8618 @end group
8619 @end smallexample
8620 @ignore
8621 was:
8622 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace)
8623 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8624 Set the kill-ring-yank pointer to point to it.
8625 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8626 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8627 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list."
8628 (and (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8629 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8630 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8631 (setcar kill-ring string)
8632 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8633 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8634 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8635 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8636 (if interprogram-cut-function
8637 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8638 @end ignore
8639
8640 (Notice that the function is not interactive.)
8641
8642 As usual, we can look at this function in parts.
8643
8644 The function definition has an optional @code{yank-handler} argument,
8645 which when invoked tells the function how to deal with properties
8646 added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'. We will skip that.
8647
8648 @need 1200
8649 The first line of the documentation makes sense:
8650
8651 @smallexample
8652 Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8653 @end smallexample
8654
8655 @noindent
8656 Let's skip over the rest of the documentation for the moment.
8657
8658 @noindent
8659 Also, let's skip over the initial @code{if} expression and those lines
8660 of code involving @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu}. We will explain
8661 them below.
8662
8663 @need 1200
8664 The critical lines are these:
8665
8666 @smallexample
8667 @group
8668 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8669 ;; @r{then}
8670 (setcar kill-ring string)
8671 @end group
8672 @group
8673 ;; @r{else}
8674 (push string kill-ring)
8675 @end group
8676 @group
8677 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8678 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8679 ;; @r{avoid overly long kill ring}
8680 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8681 @end group
8682 @group
8683 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8684 (if interprogram-cut-function
8685 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8686 @end group
8687 @end smallexample
8688
8689 The conditional test is @w{@code{(and replace kill-ring)}}.
8690 This will be true when two conditions are met: the kill ring has
8691 something in it, and the @code{replace} variable is true.
8692
8693 @need 1250
8694 When the @code{kill-append} function sets @code{replace} to be true
8695 and when the kill ring has at least one item in it, the @code{setcar}
8696 expression is executed:
8697
8698 @smallexample
8699 (setcar kill-ring string)
8700 @end smallexample
8701
8702 The @code{setcar} function actually changes the first element of the
8703 @code{kill-ring} list to the value of @code{string}. It replaces the
8704 first element.
8705
8706 @need 1250
8707 On the other hand, if the kill ring is empty, or replace is false, the
8708 else-part of the condition is executed:
8709
8710 @smallexample
8711 (push string kill-ring)
8712 @end smallexample
8713
8714 @noindent
8715 @need 1250
8716 @code{push} puts its first argument onto the second. It is similar to
8717 the older
8718
8719 @smallexample
8720 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8721 @end smallexample
8722
8723 @noindent
8724 @need 1250
8725 or the newer
8726
8727 @smallexample
8728 (add-to-list kill-ring string)
8729 @end smallexample
8730
8731 @noindent
8732 When it is false, the expression first constructs a new version of the
8733 kill ring by prepending @code{string} to the existing kill ring as a
8734 new element (that is what the @code{push} does). Then it executes a
8735 second @code{if} clause. This second @code{if} clause keeps the kill
8736 ring from growing too long.
8737
8738 Let's look at these two expressions in order.
8739
8740 The @code{push} line of the else-part sets the new value of the kill
8741 ring to what results from adding the string being killed to the old
8742 kill ring.
8743
8744 We can see how this works with an example.
8745
8746 @need 800
8747 First,
8748
8749 @smallexample
8750 (setq example-list '("here is a clause" "another clause"))
8751 @end smallexample
8752
8753 @need 1200
8754 @noindent
8755 After evaluating this expression with @kbd{C-x C-e}, you can evaluate
8756 @code{example-list} and see what it returns:
8757
8758 @smallexample
8759 @group
8760 example-list
8761 @result{} ("here is a clause" "another clause")
8762 @end group
8763 @end smallexample
8764
8765 @need 1200
8766 @noindent
8767 Now, we can add a new element on to this list by evaluating the
8768 following expression:
8769 @findex push, @r{example}
8770
8771 @smallexample
8772 (push "a third clause" example-list)
8773 @end smallexample
8774
8775 @need 800
8776 @noindent
8777 When we evaluate @code{example-list}, we find its value is:
8778
8779 @smallexample
8780 @group
8781 example-list
8782 @result{} ("a third clause" "here is a clause" "another clause")
8783 @end group
8784 @end smallexample
8785
8786 @noindent
8787 Thus, the third clause is added to the list by @code{push}.
8788
8789 @need 1200
8790 Now for the second part of the @code{if} clause. This expression
8791 keeps the kill ring from growing too long. It looks like this:
8792
8793 @smallexample
8794 @group
8795 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8796 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil))
8797 @end group
8798 @end smallexample
8799
8800 The code checks whether the length of the kill ring is greater than
8801 the maximum permitted length. This is the value of
8802 @code{kill-ring-max} (which is 60, by default). If the length of the
8803 kill ring is too long, then this code sets the last element of the
8804 kill ring to @code{nil}. It does this by using two functions,
8805 @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr}.
8806
8807 We looked at @code{setcdr} earlier (@pxref{setcdr, , @code{setcdr}}).
8808 It sets the @sc{cdr} of a list, just as @code{setcar} sets the
8809 @sc{car} of a list. In this case, however, @code{setcdr} will not be
8810 setting the @sc{cdr} of the whole kill ring; the @code{nthcdr}
8811 function is used to cause it to set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last
8812 element of the kill ring---this means that since the @sc{cdr} of the
8813 next to last element is the last element of the kill ring, it will set
8814 the last element of the kill ring.
8815
8816 @findex nthcdr, @r{example}
8817 The @code{nthcdr} function works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a
8818 list---it takes the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr}
8819 @dots{} It does this @var{N} times and returns the results.
8820 (@xref{nthcdr, , @code{nthcdr}}.)
8821
8822 @findex setcdr, @r{example}
8823 Thus, if we had a four element list that was supposed to be three
8824 elements long, we could set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last element
8825 to @code{nil}, and thereby shorten the list. (If you set the last
8826 element to some other value than @code{nil}, which you could do, then
8827 you would not have shortened the list. @xref{setcdr, ,
8828 @code{setcdr}}.)
8829
8830 You can see shortening by evaluating the following three expressions
8831 in turn. First set the value of @code{trees} to @code{(maple oak pine
8832 birch)}, then set the @sc{cdr} of its second @sc{cdr} to @code{nil}
8833 and then find the value of @code{trees}:
8834
8835 @smallexample
8836 @group
8837 (setq trees '(maple oak pine birch))
8838 @result{} (maple oak pine birch)
8839 @end group
8840
8841 @group
8842 (setcdr (nthcdr 2 trees) nil)
8843 @result{} nil
8844
8845 trees
8846 @result{} (maple oak pine)
8847 @end group
8848 @end smallexample
8849
8850 @noindent
8851 (The value returned by the @code{setcdr} expression is @code{nil} since
8852 that is what the @sc{cdr} is set to.)
8853
8854 To repeat, in @code{kill-new}, the @code{nthcdr} function takes the
8855 @sc{cdr} a number of times that is one less than the maximum permitted
8856 size of the kill ring and @code{setcdr} sets the @sc{cdr} of that
8857 element (which will be the rest of the elements in the kill ring) to
8858 @code{nil}. This prevents the kill ring from growing too long.
8859
8860 @need 800
8861 The next to last expression in the @code{kill-new} function is
8862
8863 @smallexample
8864 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8865 @end smallexample
8866
8867 The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a global variable that is set to be
8868 the @code{kill-ring}.
8869
8870 Even though the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is called a
8871 @samp{pointer}, it is a variable just like the kill ring. However, the
8872 name has been chosen to help humans understand how the variable is used.
8873
8874 @need 1200
8875 Now, to return to an early expression in the body of the function:
8876
8877 @smallexample
8878 @group
8879 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8880 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8881 @end group
8882 @end smallexample
8883
8884 @noindent
8885 It starts with an @code{if} expression
8886
8887 In this case, the expression tests first to see whether
8888 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} exists as a function, and if so,
8889 calls it. The @code{fboundp} function returns true if the symbol it
8890 is testing has a function definition that `is not void'. If the
8891 symbol's function definition were void, we would receive an error
8892 message, as we did when we created errors intentionally (@pxref{Making
8893 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}).
8894
8895 @noindent
8896 The then-part contains an expression whose first element is the
8897 function @code{and}.
8898
8899 @findex and
8900 The @code{and} special form evaluates each of its arguments until one
8901 of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in which case the
8902 @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if none of the
8903 arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value resulting from
8904 evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such a value is not
8905 @code{nil}, it is considered true in Emacs Lisp.) In other words, an
8906 @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its arguments
8907 are true. (@xref{Second Buffer Related Review}.)
8908
8909 The expression determines whether the second argument to
8910 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is true or not.
8911 @ignore
8912 ;; If we're supposed to be extending an existing string, and that
8913 ;; string really is at the front of the menu, then update it in place.
8914 @end ignore
8915
8916 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is one of the functions that make it
8917 possible to use the `Select and Paste' menu in the Edit item of a menu
8918 bar; using a mouse, you can look at the various pieces of text you
8919 have saved and select one piece to paste.
8920
8921 The last expression in the @code{kill-new} function adds the newly
8922 copied string to whatever facility exists for copying and pasting
8923 among different programs running in a windowing system. In the X
8924 Windowing system, for example, the @code{x-select-text} function takes
8925 the string and stores it in memory operated by X@. You can paste the
8926 string in another program, such as an Xterm.
8927
8928 @need 1200
8929 The expression looks like this:
8930
8931 @smallexample
8932 @group
8933 (if interprogram-cut-function
8934 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8935 @end group
8936 @end smallexample
8937
8938 If an @code{interprogram-cut-function} exists, then Emacs executes
8939 @code{funcall}, which in turn calls its first argument as a function
8940 and passes the remaining arguments to it. (Incidentally, as far as I
8941 can see, this @code{if} expression could be replaced by an @code{and}
8942 expression similar to the one in the first part of the function.)
8943
8944 We are not going to discuss windowing systems and other programs
8945 further, but merely note that this is a mechanism that enables GNU
8946 Emacs to work easily and well with other programs.
8947
8948 This code for placing text in the kill ring, either concatenated with
8949 an existing element or as a new element, leads us to the code for
8950 bringing back text that has been cut out of the buffer---the yank
8951 commands. However, before discussing the yank commands, it is better
8952 to learn how lists are implemented in a computer. This will make
8953 clear such mysteries as the use of the term `pointer'. But before
8954 that, we will digress into C.
8955
8956 @ignore
8957 @c is this true in Emacs 22? Does not seems to be
8958
8959 (If the @w{@code{(< end beg))}}
8960 expression is true, @code{kill-append} prepends the string to the just
8961 previously clipped text. For a detailed discussion, see
8962 @ref{kill-append function, , The @code{kill-append} function}.)
8963
8964 If you then yank back the text, i.e., `paste' it, you get both
8965 pieces of text at once. That way, if you delete two words in a row,
8966 and then yank them back, you get both words, in their proper order,
8967 with one yank. (The @w{@code{(< end beg))}} expression makes sure the
8968 order is correct.)
8969
8970 On the other hand, if the previous command is not @code{kill-region},
8971 then the @code{kill-new} function is called, which adds the text to
8972 the kill ring as the latest item, and sets the
8973 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable to point to it.
8974 @end ignore
8975 @ignore
8976
8977 @c Evidently, changed for Emacs 22. The zap-to-char command does not
8978 @c use the delete-and-extract-region function
8979
8980 2006 Oct 26, the Digression into C is now OK but should come after
8981 copy-region-as-kill and filter-buffer-substring
8982
8983 2006 Oct 24
8984 In Emacs 22,
8985 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
8986 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
8987 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
8988 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
8989
8990 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
8991 @end ignore
8992
8993 @node Digression into C
8994 @section Digression into C
8995 @findex delete-and-extract-region
8996 @cindex C, a digression into
8997 @cindex Digression into C
8998
8999 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function (@pxref{copy-region-as-kill, ,
9000 @code{copy-region-as-kill}}) uses the @code{filter-buffer-substring}
9001 function, which in turn uses the @code{delete-and-extract-region}
9002 function. It removes the contents of a region and you cannot get them
9003 back.
9004
9005 Unlike the other code discussed here, the
9006 @code{delete-and-extract-region} function is not written in Emacs
9007 Lisp; it is written in C and is one of the primitives of the GNU Emacs
9008 system. Since it is very simple, I will digress briefly from Lisp and
9009 describe it here.
9010
9011 @c GNU Emacs 24 in src/editfns.c
9012 @c the DEFUN for delete-and-extract-region
9013
9014 @need 1500
9015 Like many of the other Emacs primitives,
9016 @code{delete-and-extract-region} is written as an instance of a C
9017 macro, a macro being a template for code. The complete macro looks
9018 like this:
9019
9020 @smallexample
9021 @group
9022 DEFUN ("delete-and-extract-region", Fdelete_and_extract_region,
9023 Sdelete_and_extract_region, 2, 2, 0,
9024 doc: /* Delete the text between START and END and return it. */)
9025 (Lisp_Object start, Lisp_Object end)
9026 @{
9027 validate_region (&start, &end);
9028 if (XINT (start) == XINT (end))
9029 return empty_unibyte_string;
9030 return del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9031 @}
9032 @end group
9033 @end smallexample
9034
9035 Without going into the details of the macro writing process, let me
9036 point out that this macro starts with the word @code{DEFUN}. The word
9037 @code{DEFUN} was chosen since the code serves the same purpose as
9038 @code{defun} does in Lisp. (The @code{DEFUN} C macro is defined in
9039 @file{emacs/src/lisp.h}.)
9040
9041 The word @code{DEFUN} is followed by seven parts inside of
9042 parentheses:
9043
9044 @itemize @bullet
9045 @item
9046 The first part is the name given to the function in Lisp,
9047 @code{delete-and-extract-region}.
9048
9049 @item
9050 The second part is the name of the function in C,
9051 @code{Fdelete_and_extract_region}. By convention, it starts with
9052 @samp{F}. Since C does not use hyphens in names, underscores are used
9053 instead.
9054
9055 @item
9056 The third part is the name for the C constant structure that records
9057 information on this function for internal use. It is the name of the
9058 function in C but begins with an @samp{S} instead of an @samp{F}.
9059
9060 @item
9061 The fourth and fifth parts specify the minimum and maximum number of
9062 arguments the function can have. This function demands exactly 2
9063 arguments.
9064
9065 @item
9066 The sixth part is nearly like the argument that follows the
9067 @code{interactive} declaration in a function written in Lisp: a letter
9068 followed, perhaps, by a prompt. The only difference from the Lisp is
9069 when the macro is called with no arguments. Then you write a @code{0}
9070 (which is a `null string'), as in this macro.
9071
9072 If you were to specify arguments, you would place them between
9073 quotation marks. The C macro for @code{goto-char} includes
9074 @code{"NGoto char: "} in this position to indicate that the function
9075 expects a raw prefix, in this case, a numerical location in a buffer,
9076 and provides a prompt.
9077
9078 @item
9079 The seventh part is a documentation string, just like the one for a
9080 function written in Emacs Lisp. This is written as a C comment. (When
9081 you build Emacs, the program @command{lib-src/make-docfile} extracts
9082 these comments and uses them to make the ``real'' documentation.)
9083 @end itemize
9084
9085 @need 1200
9086 In a C macro, the formal parameters come next, with a statement of
9087 what kind of object they are, followed by what might be called the `body'
9088 of the macro. For @code{delete-and-extract-region} the `body'
9089 consists of the following four lines:
9090
9091 @smallexample
9092 @group
9093 validate_region (&start, &end);
9094 if (XINT (start) == XINT (end))
9095 return empty_unibyte_string;
9096 return del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9097 @end group
9098 @end smallexample
9099
9100 The @code{validate_region} function checks whether the values
9101 passed as the beginning and end of the region are the proper type and
9102 are within range. If the beginning and end positions are the same,
9103 then return an empty string.
9104
9105 The @code{del_range_1} function actually deletes the text. It is a
9106 complex function we will not look into. It updates the buffer and
9107 does other things. However, it is worth looking at the two arguments
9108 passed to @code{del_range}. These are @w{@code{XINT (start)}} and
9109 @w{@code{XINT (end)}}.
9110
9111 As far as the C language is concerned, @code{start} and @code{end} are
9112 two integers that mark the beginning and end of the region to be
9113 deleted@footnote{More precisely, and requiring more expert knowledge
9114 to understand, the two integers are of type `Lisp_Object', which can
9115 also be a C union instead of an integer type.}.
9116
9117 In early versions of Emacs, these two numbers were thirty-two bits
9118 long, but the code is slowly being generalized to handle other
9119 lengths. Three of the available bits are used to specify the type of
9120 information; the remaining bits are used as `content'.
9121
9122 @samp{XINT} is a C macro that extracts the relevant number from the
9123 longer collection of bits; the three other bits are discarded.
9124
9125 @need 800
9126 The command in @code{delete-and-extract-region} looks like this:
9127
9128 @smallexample
9129 del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9130 @end smallexample
9131
9132 @noindent
9133 It deletes the region between the beginning position, @code{start},
9134 and the ending position, @code{end}.
9135
9136 From the point of view of the person writing Lisp, Emacs is all very
9137 simple; but hidden underneath is a great deal of complexity to make it
9138 all work.
9139
9140 @node defvar
9141 @section Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9142 @findex defvar
9143 @cindex Initializing a variable
9144 @cindex Variable initialization
9145
9146 @ignore
9147 2006 Oct 24
9148 In Emacs 22,
9149 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
9150 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
9151 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
9152 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
9153
9154 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9155
9156 @end ignore
9157
9158 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function is written in Emacs Lisp. Two
9159 functions within it, @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new}, copy a
9160 region in a buffer and save it in a variable called the
9161 @code{kill-ring}. This section describes how the @code{kill-ring}
9162 variable is created and initialized using the @code{defvar} special
9163 form.
9164
9165 (Again we note that the term @code{kill-ring} is a misnomer. The text
9166 that is clipped out of the buffer can be brought back; it is not a ring
9167 of corpses, but a ring of resurrectable text.)
9168
9169 In Emacs Lisp, a variable such as the @code{kill-ring} is created and
9170 given an initial value by using the @code{defvar} special form. The
9171 name comes from ``define variable''.
9172
9173 The @code{defvar} special form is similar to @code{setq} in that it sets
9174 the value of a variable. It is unlike @code{setq} in two ways: first,
9175 it only sets the value of the variable if the variable does not already
9176 have a value. If the variable already has a value, @code{defvar} does
9177 not override the existing value. Second, @code{defvar} has a
9178 documentation string.
9179
9180 (There is a related macro, @code{defcustom}, designed for variables
9181 that people customize. It has more features than @code{defvar}.
9182 (@xref{defcustom, , Setting Variables with @code{defcustom}}.)
9183
9184 @menu
9185 * See variable current value::
9186 * defvar and asterisk::
9187 @end menu
9188
9189 @ifnottex
9190 @node See variable current value
9191 @unnumberedsubsec Seeing the Current Value of a Variable
9192 @end ifnottex
9193
9194 You can see the current value of a variable, any variable, by using
9195 the @code{describe-variable} function, which is usually invoked by
9196 typing @kbd{C-h v}. If you type @kbd{C-h v} and then @code{kill-ring}
9197 (followed by @key{RET}) when prompted, you will see what is in your
9198 current kill ring---this may be quite a lot! Conversely, if you have
9199 been doing nothing this Emacs session except read this document, you
9200 may have nothing in it. Also, you will see the documentation for
9201 @code{kill-ring}:
9202
9203 @smallexample
9204 @group
9205 Documentation:
9206 List of killed text sequences.
9207 Since the kill ring is supposed to interact nicely with cut-and-paste
9208 facilities offered by window systems, use of this variable should
9209 @end group
9210 @group
9211 interact nicely with `interprogram-cut-function' and
9212 `interprogram-paste-function'. The functions `kill-new',
9213 `kill-append', and `current-kill' are supposed to implement this
9214 interaction; you may want to use them instead of manipulating the kill
9215 ring directly.
9216 @end group
9217 @end smallexample
9218
9219 @need 800
9220 The kill ring is defined by a @code{defvar} in the following way:
9221
9222 @smallexample
9223 @group
9224 (defvar kill-ring nil
9225 "List of killed text sequences.
9226 @dots{}")
9227 @end group
9228 @end smallexample
9229
9230 @noindent
9231 In this variable definition, the variable is given an initial value of
9232 @code{nil}, which makes sense, since if you have saved nothing, you want
9233 nothing back if you give a @code{yank} command. The documentation
9234 string is written just like the documentation string of a @code{defun}.
9235 As with the documentation string of the @code{defun}, the first line of
9236 the documentation should be a complete sentence, since some commands,
9237 like @code{apropos}, print only the first line of documentation.
9238 Succeeding lines should not be indented; otherwise they look odd when
9239 you use @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}).
9240
9241 @node defvar and asterisk
9242 @subsection @code{defvar} and an asterisk
9243 @findex defvar @r{for a user customizable variable}
9244 @findex defvar @r{with an asterisk}
9245
9246 In the past, Emacs used the @code{defvar} special form both for
9247 internal variables that you would not expect a user to change and for
9248 variables that you do expect a user to change. Although you can still
9249 use @code{defvar} for user customizable variables, please use
9250 @code{defcustom} instead, since it provides a path into
9251 the Customization commands. (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables
9252 using @code{defcustom}}.)
9253
9254 When you specified a variable using the @code{defvar} special form,
9255 you could distinguish a variable that a user might want to change from
9256 others by typing an asterisk, @samp{*}, in the first column of its
9257 documentation string. For example:
9258
9259 @smallexample
9260 @group
9261 (defvar shell-command-default-error-buffer nil
9262 "*Buffer name for `shell-command' @dots{} error output.
9263 @dots{} ")
9264 @end group
9265 @end smallexample
9266
9267 @findex set-variable
9268 @noindent
9269 You could (and still can) use the @code{set-variable} command to
9270 change the value of @code{shell-command-default-error-buffer}
9271 temporarily. However, options set using @code{set-variable} are set
9272 only for the duration of your editing session. The new values are not
9273 saved between sessions. Each time Emacs starts, it reads the original
9274 value, unless you change the value within your @file{.emacs} file,
9275 either by setting it manually or by using @code{customize}.
9276 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
9277
9278 For me, the major use of the @code{set-variable} command is to suggest
9279 variables that I might want to set in my @file{.emacs} file. There
9280 are now more than 700 such variables, far too many to remember
9281 readily. Fortunately, you can press @key{TAB} after calling the
9282 @code{M-x set-variable} command to see the list of variables.
9283 (@xref{Examining, , Examining and Setting Variables, emacs,
9284 The GNU Emacs Manual}.)
9285
9286 @need 1250
9287 @node cons & search-fwd Review
9288 @section Review
9289
9290 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
9291
9292 @table @code
9293 @item car
9294 @itemx cdr
9295 @code{car} returns the first element of a list; @code{cdr} returns the
9296 second and subsequent elements of a list.
9297
9298 @need 1250
9299 For example:
9300
9301 @smallexample
9302 @group
9303 (car '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9304 @result{} 1
9305 (cdr '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9306 @result{} (2 3 4 5 6 7)
9307 @end group
9308 @end smallexample
9309
9310 @item cons
9311 @code{cons} constructs a list by prepending its first argument to its
9312 second argument.
9313
9314 @need 1250
9315 For example:
9316
9317 @smallexample
9318 @group
9319 (cons 1 '(2 3 4))
9320 @result{} (1 2 3 4)
9321 @end group
9322 @end smallexample
9323
9324 @item funcall
9325 @code{funcall} evaluates its first argument as a function. It passes
9326 its remaining arguments to its first argument.
9327
9328 @item nthcdr
9329 Return the result of taking @sc{cdr} `n' times on a list.
9330 @iftex
9331 The
9332 @tex
9333 $n^{th}$
9334 @end tex
9335 @code{cdr}.
9336 @end iftex
9337 The `rest of the rest', as it were.
9338
9339 @need 1250
9340 For example:
9341
9342 @smallexample
9343 @group
9344 (nthcdr 3 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9345 @result{} (4 5 6 7)
9346 @end group
9347 @end smallexample
9348
9349 @item setcar
9350 @itemx setcdr
9351 @code{setcar} changes the first element of a list; @code{setcdr}
9352 changes the second and subsequent elements of a list.
9353
9354 @need 1250
9355 For example:
9356
9357 @smallexample
9358 @group
9359 (setq triple '(1 2 3))
9360
9361 (setcar triple '37)
9362
9363 triple
9364 @result{} (37 2 3)
9365
9366 (setcdr triple '("foo" "bar"))
9367
9368 triple
9369 @result{} (37 "foo" "bar")
9370 @end group
9371 @end smallexample
9372
9373 @item progn
9374 Evaluate each argument in sequence and then return the value of the
9375 last.
9376
9377 @need 1250
9378 For example:
9379
9380 @smallexample
9381 @group
9382 (progn 1 2 3 4)
9383 @result{} 4
9384 @end group
9385 @end smallexample
9386
9387 @item save-restriction
9388 Record whatever narrowing is in effect in the current buffer, if any,
9389 and restore that narrowing after evaluating the arguments.
9390
9391 @item search-forward
9392 Search for a string, and if the string is found, move point. With a
9393 regular expression, use the similar @code{re-search-forward}.
9394 (@xref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, for an
9395 explanation of regular expression patterns and searches.)
9396
9397 @need 1250
9398 @noindent
9399 @code{search-forward} and @code{re-search-forward} take four
9400 arguments:
9401
9402 @enumerate
9403 @item
9404 The string or regular expression to search for.
9405
9406 @item
9407 Optionally, the limit of the search.
9408
9409 @item
9410 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
9411 error message.
9412
9413 @item
9414 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
9415 search goes backwards.
9416 @end enumerate
9417
9418 @item kill-region
9419 @itemx delete-and-extract-region
9420 @itemx copy-region-as-kill
9421
9422 @code{kill-region} cuts the text between point and mark from the
9423 buffer and stores that text in the kill ring, so you can get it back
9424 by yanking.
9425
9426 @code{copy-region-as-kill} copies the text between point and mark into
9427 the kill ring, from which you can get it by yanking. The function
9428 does not cut or remove the text from the buffer.
9429 @end table
9430
9431 @code{delete-and-extract-region} removes the text between point and
9432 mark from the buffer and throws it away. You cannot get it back.
9433 (This is not an interactive command.)
9434
9435 @need 1500
9436 @node search Exercises
9437 @section Searching Exercises
9438
9439 @itemize @bullet
9440 @item
9441 Write an interactive function that searches for a string. If the
9442 search finds the string, leave point after it and display a message
9443 that says ``Found!''. (Do not use @code{search-forward} for the name
9444 of this function; if you do, you will overwrite the existing version of
9445 @code{search-forward} that comes with Emacs. Use a name such as
9446 @code{test-search} instead.)
9447
9448 @item
9449 Write a function that prints the third element of the kill ring in the
9450 echo area, if any; if the kill ring does not contain a third element,
9451 print an appropriate message.
9452 @end itemize
9453
9454 @node List Implementation
9455 @chapter How Lists are Implemented
9456 @cindex Lists in a computer
9457
9458 In Lisp, atoms are recorded in a straightforward fashion; if the
9459 implementation is not straightforward in practice, it is, nonetheless,
9460 straightforward in theory. The atom @samp{rose}, for example, is
9461 recorded as the four contiguous letters @samp{r}, @samp{o}, @samp{s},
9462 @samp{e}. A list, on the other hand, is kept differently. The mechanism
9463 is equally simple, but it takes a moment to get used to the idea. A
9464 list is kept using a series of pairs of pointers. In the series, the
9465 first pointer in each pair points to an atom or to another list, and the
9466 second pointer in each pair points to the next pair, or to the symbol
9467 @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9468
9469 A pointer itself is quite simply the electronic address of what is
9470 pointed to. Hence, a list is kept as a series of electronic addresses.
9471
9472 @menu
9473 * Lists diagrammed::
9474 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
9475 * List Exercise::
9476 @end menu
9477
9478 @ifnottex
9479 @node Lists diagrammed
9480 @unnumberedsec Lists diagrammed
9481 @end ifnottex
9482
9483 For example, the list @code{(rose violet buttercup)} has three elements,
9484 @samp{rose}, @samp{violet}, and @samp{buttercup}. In the computer, the
9485 electronic address of @samp{rose} is recorded in a segment of computer
9486 memory along with the address that gives the electronic address of where
9487 the atom @samp{violet} is located; and that address (the one that tells
9488 where @samp{violet} is located) is kept along with an address that tells
9489 where the address for the atom @samp{buttercup} is located.
9490
9491 @need 1200
9492 This sounds more complicated than it is and is easier seen in a diagram:
9493
9494 @c clear print-postscript-figures
9495 @c !!! cons-cell-diagram #1
9496 @ifnottex
9497 @smallexample
9498 @group
9499 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9500 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9501 | | |
9502 | | |
9503 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9504 @end group
9505 @end smallexample
9506 @end ifnottex
9507 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9508 @sp 1
9509 @tex
9510 @center @image{cons-1}
9511 @end tex
9512 @sp 1
9513 @end ifset
9514 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9515 @iftex
9516 @smallexample
9517 @group
9518 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9519 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9520 | | |
9521 | | |
9522 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9523 @end group
9524 @end smallexample
9525 @end iftex
9526 @end ifclear
9527
9528 @noindent
9529 In the diagram, each box represents a word of computer memory that
9530 holds a Lisp object, usually in the form of a memory address. The boxes,
9531 i.e., the addresses, are in pairs. Each arrow points to what the address
9532 is the address of, either an atom or another pair of addresses. The
9533 first box is the electronic address of @samp{rose} and the arrow points
9534 to @samp{rose}; the second box is the address of the next pair of boxes,
9535 the first part of which is the address of @samp{violet} and the second
9536 part of which is the address of the next pair. The very last box
9537 points to the symbol @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9538
9539 @need 1200
9540 When a variable is set to a list with a function such as @code{setq},
9541 it stores the address of the first box in the variable. Thus,
9542 evaluation of the expression
9543
9544 @smallexample
9545 (setq bouquet '(rose violet buttercup))
9546 @end smallexample
9547
9548 @need 1250
9549 @noindent
9550 creates a situation like this:
9551
9552 @c cons-cell-diagram #2
9553 @ifnottex
9554 @smallexample
9555 @group
9556 bouquet
9557 |
9558 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9559 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9560 | | |
9561 | | |
9562 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9563 @end group
9564 @end smallexample
9565 @end ifnottex
9566 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9567 @sp 1
9568 @tex
9569 @center @image{cons-2}
9570 @end tex
9571 @sp 1
9572 @end ifset
9573 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9574 @iftex
9575 @smallexample
9576 @group
9577 bouquet
9578 |
9579 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9580 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9581 | | |
9582 | | |
9583 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9584 @end group
9585 @end smallexample
9586 @end iftex
9587 @end ifclear
9588
9589 @noindent
9590 In this example, the symbol @code{bouquet} holds the address of the first
9591 pair of boxes.
9592
9593 @need 1200
9594 This same list can be illustrated in a different sort of box notation
9595 like this:
9596
9597 @c cons-cell-diagram #2a
9598 @ifnottex
9599 @smallexample
9600 @group
9601 bouquet
9602 |
9603 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9604 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9605 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9606 | | | | | | | cup | |
9607 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9608 @end group
9609 @end smallexample
9610 @end ifnottex
9611 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9612 @sp 1
9613 @tex
9614 @center @image{cons-2a}
9615 @end tex
9616 @sp 1
9617 @end ifset
9618 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9619 @iftex
9620 @smallexample
9621 @group
9622 bouquet
9623 |
9624 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9625 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9626 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9627 | | | | | | | cup | |
9628 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9629 @end group
9630 @end smallexample
9631 @end iftex
9632 @end ifclear
9633
9634 (Symbols consist of more than pairs of addresses, but the structure of
9635 a symbol is made up of addresses. Indeed, the symbol @code{bouquet}
9636 consists of a group of address-boxes, one of which is the address of
9637 the printed word @samp{bouquet}, a second of which is the address of a
9638 function definition attached to the symbol, if any, a third of which
9639 is the address of the first pair of address-boxes for the list
9640 @code{(rose violet buttercup)}, and so on. Here we are showing that
9641 the symbol's third address-box points to the first pair of
9642 address-boxes for the list.)
9643
9644 If a symbol is set to the @sc{cdr} of a list, the list itself is not
9645 changed; the symbol simply has an address further down the list. (In
9646 the jargon, @sc{car} and @sc{cdr} are `non-destructive'.) Thus,
9647 evaluation of the following expression
9648
9649 @smallexample
9650 (setq flowers (cdr bouquet))
9651 @end smallexample
9652
9653 @need 800
9654 @noindent
9655 produces this:
9656
9657 @c cons-cell-diagram #3
9658 @ifnottex
9659 @sp 1
9660 @smallexample
9661 @group
9662 bouquet flowers
9663 | |
9664 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9665 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9666 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9667 | | |
9668 | | |
9669 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9670 @end group
9671 @end smallexample
9672 @sp 1
9673 @end ifnottex
9674 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9675 @sp 1
9676 @tex
9677 @center @image{cons-3}
9678 @end tex
9679 @sp 1
9680 @end ifset
9681 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9682 @iftex
9683 @sp 1
9684 @smallexample
9685 @group
9686 bouquet flowers
9687 | |
9688 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9689 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9690 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9691 | | |
9692 | | |
9693 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9694 @end group
9695 @end smallexample
9696 @sp 1
9697 @end iftex
9698 @end ifclear
9699
9700 @noindent
9701 The value of @code{flowers} is @code{(violet buttercup)}, which is
9702 to say, the symbol @code{flowers} holds the address of the pair of
9703 address-boxes, the first of which holds the address of @code{violet},
9704 and the second of which holds the address of @code{buttercup}.
9705
9706 A pair of address-boxes is called a @dfn{cons cell} or @dfn{dotted
9707 pair}. @xref{Cons Cell Type, , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
9708 Reference Manual}, and @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted Pair
9709 Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
9710 information about cons cells and dotted pairs.
9711
9712 @need 1200
9713 The function @code{cons} adds a new pair of addresses to the front of
9714 a series of addresses like that shown above. For example, evaluating
9715 the expression
9716
9717 @smallexample
9718 (setq bouquet (cons 'lily bouquet))
9719 @end smallexample
9720
9721 @need 1500
9722 @noindent
9723 produces:
9724
9725 @c cons-cell-diagram #4
9726 @ifnottex
9727 @sp 1
9728 @smallexample
9729 @group
9730 bouquet flowers
9731 | |
9732 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9733 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9734 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9735 | | | |
9736 | | | |
9737 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9738 @end group
9739 @end smallexample
9740 @sp 1
9741 @end ifnottex
9742 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9743 @sp 1
9744 @tex
9745 @center @image{cons-4}
9746 @end tex
9747 @sp 1
9748 @end ifset
9749 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9750 @iftex
9751 @sp 1
9752 @smallexample
9753 @group
9754 bouquet flowers
9755 | |
9756 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9757 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9758 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9759 | | | |
9760 | | | |
9761 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9762 @end group
9763 @end smallexample
9764 @sp 1
9765 @end iftex
9766 @end ifclear
9767
9768 @need 1200
9769 @noindent
9770 However, this does not change the value of the symbol
9771 @code{flowers}, as you can see by evaluating the following,
9772
9773 @smallexample
9774 (eq (cdr (cdr bouquet)) flowers)
9775 @end smallexample
9776
9777 @noindent
9778 which returns @code{t} for true.
9779
9780 Until it is reset, @code{flowers} still has the value
9781 @code{(violet buttercup)}; that is, it has the address of the cons
9782 cell whose first address is of @code{violet}. Also, this does not
9783 alter any of the pre-existing cons cells; they are all still there.
9784
9785 Thus, in Lisp, to get the @sc{cdr} of a list, you just get the address
9786 of the next cons cell in the series; to get the @sc{car} of a list,
9787 you get the address of the first element of the list; to @code{cons} a
9788 new element on a list, you add a new cons cell to the front of the list.
9789 That is all there is to it! The underlying structure of Lisp is
9790 brilliantly simple!
9791
9792 And what does the last address in a series of cons cells refer to? It
9793 is the address of the empty list, of @code{nil}.
9794
9795 In summary, when a Lisp variable is set to a value, it is provided with
9796 the address of the list to which the variable refers.
9797
9798 @node Symbols as Chest
9799 @section Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
9800 @cindex Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
9801 @cindex Chest of Drawers, metaphor for a symbol
9802 @cindex Drawers, Chest of, metaphor for a symbol
9803
9804 In an earlier section, I suggested that you might imagine a symbol as
9805 being a chest of drawers. The function definition is put in one
9806 drawer, the value in another, and so on. What is put in the drawer
9807 holding the value can be changed without affecting the contents of the
9808 drawer holding the function definition, and vice-verse.
9809
9810 Actually, what is put in each drawer is the address of the value or
9811 function definition. It is as if you found an old chest in the attic,
9812 and in one of its drawers you found a map giving you directions to
9813 where the buried treasure lies.
9814
9815 (In addition to its name, symbol definition, and variable value, a
9816 symbol has a `drawer' for a @dfn{property list} which can be used to
9817 record other information. Property lists are not discussed here; see
9818 @ref{Property Lists, , Property Lists, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
9819 Reference Manual}.)
9820
9821 @need 1500
9822 Here is a fanciful representation:
9823
9824 @c chest-of-drawers diagram
9825 @ifnottex
9826 @sp 1
9827 @smallexample
9828 @group
9829 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
9830
9831 __ o0O0o __
9832 / \
9833 ---------------------
9834 | directions to | [map to]
9835 | symbol name | bouquet
9836 | |
9837 +---------------------+
9838 | directions to |
9839 | symbol definition | [none]
9840 | |
9841 +---------------------+
9842 | directions to | [map to]
9843 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
9844 | |
9845 +---------------------+
9846 | directions to |
9847 | property list | [not described here]
9848 | |
9849 +---------------------+
9850 |/ \|
9851 @end group
9852 @end smallexample
9853 @sp 1
9854 @end ifnottex
9855 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9856 @sp 1
9857 @tex
9858 @center @image{drawers}
9859 @end tex
9860 @sp 1
9861 @end ifset
9862 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9863 @iftex
9864 @sp 1
9865 @smallexample
9866 @group
9867 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
9868
9869 __ o0O0o __
9870 / \
9871 ---------------------
9872 | directions to | [map to]
9873 | symbol name | bouquet
9874 | |
9875 +---------------------+
9876 | directions to |
9877 | symbol definition | [none]
9878 | |
9879 +---------------------+
9880 | directions to | [map to]
9881 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
9882 | |
9883 +---------------------+
9884 | directions to |
9885 | property list | [not described here]
9886 | |
9887 +---------------------+
9888 |/ \|
9889 @end group
9890 @end smallexample
9891 @sp 1
9892 @end iftex
9893 @end ifclear
9894
9895 @node List Exercise
9896 @section Exercise
9897
9898 Set @code{flowers} to @code{violet} and @code{buttercup}. Cons two
9899 more flowers on to this list and set this new list to
9900 @code{more-flowers}. Set the @sc{car} of @code{flowers} to a fish.
9901 What does the @code{more-flowers} list now contain?
9902
9903 @node Yanking
9904 @chapter Yanking Text Back
9905 @findex yank
9906 @cindex Text retrieval
9907 @cindex Retrieving text
9908 @cindex Pasting text
9909
9910 Whenever you cut text out of a buffer with a `kill' command in GNU Emacs,
9911 you can bring it back with a `yank' command. The text that is cut out of
9912 the buffer is put in the kill ring and the yank commands insert the
9913 appropriate contents of the kill ring back into a buffer (not necessarily
9914 the original buffer).
9915
9916 A simple @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}) command inserts the first item from
9917 the kill ring into the current buffer. If the @kbd{C-y} command is
9918 followed immediately by @kbd{M-y}, the first element is replaced by
9919 the second element. Successive @kbd{M-y} commands replace the second
9920 element with the third, fourth, or fifth element, and so on. When the
9921 last element in the kill ring is reached, it is replaced by the first
9922 element and the cycle is repeated. (Thus the kill ring is called a
9923 `ring' rather than just a `list'. However, the actual data structure
9924 that holds the text is a list.
9925 @xref{Kill Ring, , Handling the Kill Ring}, for the details of how the
9926 list is handled as a ring.)
9927
9928 @menu
9929 * Kill Ring Overview::
9930 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
9931 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
9932 @end menu
9933
9934 @node Kill Ring Overview
9935 @section Kill Ring Overview
9936 @cindex Kill ring overview
9937
9938 The kill ring is a list of textual strings. This is what it looks like:
9939
9940 @smallexample
9941 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
9942 @end smallexample
9943
9944 If this were the contents of my kill ring and I pressed @kbd{C-y}, the
9945 string of characters saying @samp{some text} would be inserted in this
9946 buffer where my cursor is located.
9947
9948 The @code{yank} command is also used for duplicating text by copying it.
9949 The copied text is not cut from the buffer, but a copy of it is put on the
9950 kill ring and is inserted by yanking it back.
9951
9952 Three functions are used for bringing text back from the kill ring:
9953 @code{yank}, which is usually bound to @kbd{C-y}; @code{yank-pop},
9954 which is usually bound to @kbd{M-y}; and @code{rotate-yank-pointer},
9955 which is used by the two other functions.
9956
9957 These functions refer to the kill ring through a variable called the
9958 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. Indeed, the insertion code for both the
9959 @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} functions is:
9960
9961 @smallexample
9962 (insert (car kill-ring-yank-pointer))
9963 @end smallexample
9964
9965 @noindent
9966 (Well, no more. In GNU Emacs 22, the function has been replaced by
9967 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{insert-for-yank-1}
9968 repetitively for each @code{yank-handler} segment. In turn,
9969 @code{insert-for-yank-1} strips text properties from the inserted text
9970 according to @code{yank-excluded-properties}. Otherwise, it is just
9971 like @code{insert}. We will stick with plain @code{insert} since it
9972 is easier to understand.)
9973
9974 To begin to understand how @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} work, it is
9975 first necessary to look at the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
9976
9977 @node kill-ring-yank-pointer
9978 @section The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} Variable
9979
9980 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a variable, just as @code{kill-ring} is
9981 a variable. It points to something by being bound to the value of what
9982 it points to, like any other Lisp variable.
9983
9984 @need 1000
9985 Thus, if the value of the kill ring is:
9986
9987 @smallexample
9988 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
9989 @end smallexample
9990
9991 @need 1250
9992 @noindent
9993 and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points to the second clause, the
9994 value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is:
9995
9996 @smallexample
9997 ("a different piece of text" "yet more text")
9998 @end smallexample
9999
10000 As explained in the previous chapter (@pxref{List Implementation}), the
10001 computer does not keep two different copies of the text being pointed to
10002 by both the @code{kill-ring} and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. The
10003 words ``a different piece of text'' and ``yet more text'' are not
10004 duplicated. Instead, the two Lisp variables point to the same pieces of
10005 text. Here is a diagram:
10006
10007 @c cons-cell-diagram #5
10008 @ifnottex
10009 @smallexample
10010 @group
10011 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10012 | |
10013 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10014 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10015 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10016 | | |
10017 | | |
10018 | | --> "yet more text"
10019 | |
10020 | --> "a different piece of text"
10021 |
10022 --> "some text"
10023 @end group
10024 @end smallexample
10025 @sp 1
10026 @end ifnottex
10027 @ifset print-postscript-figures
10028 @sp 1
10029 @tex
10030 @center @image{cons-5}
10031 @end tex
10032 @sp 1
10033 @end ifset
10034 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
10035 @iftex
10036 @smallexample
10037 @group
10038 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10039 | |
10040 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10041 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10042 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10043 | | |
10044 | | |
10045 | | --> "yet more text"
10046 | |
10047 | --> "a different piece of text
10048 |
10049 --> "some text"
10050 @end group
10051 @end smallexample
10052 @sp 1
10053 @end iftex
10054 @end ifclear
10055
10056 Both the variable @code{kill-ring} and the variable
10057 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} are pointers. But the kill ring itself is
10058 usually described as if it were actually what it is composed of. The
10059 @code{kill-ring} is spoken of as if it were the list rather than that it
10060 points to the list. Conversely, the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is
10061 spoken of as pointing to a list.
10062
10063 These two ways of talking about the same thing sound confusing at first but
10064 make sense on reflection. The kill ring is generally thought of as the
10065 complete structure of data that holds the information of what has recently
10066 been cut out of the Emacs buffers. The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
10067 on the other hand, serves to indicate---that is, to `point to'---that part
10068 of the kill ring of which the first element (the @sc{car}) will be
10069 inserted.
10070
10071 @ignore
10072 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{kill-new} function calls
10073
10074 @code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)}
10075
10076 (defun rotate-yank-pointer (arg)
10077 "Rotate the yanking point in the kill ring.
10078 With argument, rotate that many kills forward (or backward, if negative)."
10079 (interactive "p")
10080 (current-kill arg))
10081
10082 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
10083 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
10084 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
10085 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
10086 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
10087 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
10088 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
10089 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
10090 interprogram-paste-function
10091 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
10092 (if interprogram-paste
10093 (progn
10094 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
10095 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
10096 ;; selection, with identical text.
10097 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
10098 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
10099 interprogram-paste)
10100 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
10101 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
10102 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
10103 (length kill-ring))
10104 kill-ring)))
10105 (or do-not-move
10106 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
10107 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
10108
10109 @end ignore
10110
10111 @need 1500
10112 @node yank nthcdr Exercises
10113 @section Exercises with @code{yank} and @code{nthcdr}
10114
10115 @itemize @bullet
10116 @item
10117 Using @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}), look at the value of
10118 your kill ring. Add several items to your kill ring; look at its
10119 value again. Using @kbd{M-y} (@code{yank-pop)}, move all the way
10120 around the kill ring. How many items were in your kill ring? Find
10121 the value of @code{kill-ring-max}. Was your kill ring full, or could
10122 you have kept more blocks of text within it?
10123
10124 @item
10125 Using @code{nthcdr} and @code{car}, construct a series of expressions
10126 to return the first, second, third, and fourth elements of a list.
10127 @end itemize
10128
10129 @node Loops & Recursion
10130 @chapter Loops and Recursion
10131 @cindex Loops and recursion
10132 @cindex Recursion and loops
10133 @cindex Repetition (loops)
10134
10135 Emacs Lisp has two primary ways to cause an expression, or a series of
10136 expressions, to be evaluated repeatedly: one uses a @code{while}
10137 loop, and the other uses @dfn{recursion}.
10138
10139 Repetition can be very valuable. For example, to move forward four
10140 sentences, you need only write a program that will move forward one
10141 sentence and then repeat the process four times. Since a computer does
10142 not get bored or tired, such repetitive action does not have the
10143 deleterious effects that excessive or the wrong kinds of repetition can
10144 have on humans.
10145
10146 People mostly write Emacs Lisp functions using @code{while} loops and
10147 their kin; but you can use recursion, which provides a very powerful
10148 way to think about and then to solve problems@footnote{You can write
10149 recursive functions to be frugal or wasteful of mental or computer
10150 resources; as it happens, methods that people find easy---that are
10151 frugal of `mental resources'---sometimes use considerable computer
10152 resources. Emacs was designed to run on machines that we now consider
10153 limited and its default settings are conservative. You may want to
10154 increase the values of @code{max-specpdl-size} and
10155 @code{max-lisp-eval-depth}. In my @file{.emacs} file, I set them to
10156 15 and 30 times their default value.}.
10157
10158 @menu
10159 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
10160 * dolist dotimes::
10161 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
10162 * Looping exercise::
10163 @end menu
10164
10165 @node while
10166 @section @code{while}
10167 @cindex Loops
10168 @findex while
10169
10170 The @code{while} special form tests whether the value returned by
10171 evaluating its first argument is true or false. This is similar to what
10172 the Lisp interpreter does with an @code{if}; what the interpreter does
10173 next, however, is different.
10174
10175 In a @code{while} expression, if the value returned by evaluating the
10176 first argument is false, the Lisp interpreter skips the rest of the
10177 expression (the @dfn{body} of the expression) and does not evaluate it.
10178 However, if the value is true, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the body
10179 of the expression and then again tests whether the first argument to
10180 @code{while} is true or false. If the value returned by evaluating the
10181 first argument is again true, the Lisp interpreter again evaluates the
10182 body of the expression.
10183
10184 @need 1200
10185 The template for a @code{while} expression looks like this:
10186
10187 @smallexample
10188 @group
10189 (while @var{true-or-false-test}
10190 @var{body}@dots{})
10191 @end group
10192 @end smallexample
10193
10194 @menu
10195 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
10196 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
10197 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
10198 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
10199 * Incrementing Loop Details::
10200 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
10201 @end menu
10202
10203 @ifnottex
10204 @node Looping with while
10205 @unnumberedsubsec Looping with @code{while}
10206 @end ifnottex
10207
10208 So long as the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} expression
10209 returns a true value when it is evaluated, the body is repeatedly
10210 evaluated. This process is called a loop since the Lisp interpreter
10211 repeats the same thing again and again, like an airplane doing a loop.
10212 When the result of evaluating the true-or-false-test is false, the
10213 Lisp interpreter does not evaluate the rest of the @code{while}
10214 expression and `exits the loop'.
10215
10216 Clearly, if the value returned by evaluating the first argument to
10217 @code{while} is always true, the body following will be evaluated
10218 again and again @dots{} and again @dots{} forever. Conversely, if the
10219 value returned is never true, the expressions in the body will never
10220 be evaluated. The craft of writing a @code{while} loop consists of
10221 choosing a mechanism such that the true-or-false-test returns true
10222 just the number of times that you want the subsequent expressions to
10223 be evaluated, and then have the test return false.
10224
10225 The value returned by evaluating a @code{while} is the value of the
10226 true-or-false-test. An interesting consequence of this is that a
10227 @code{while} loop that evaluates without error will return @code{nil}
10228 or false regardless of whether it has looped 1 or 100 times or none at
10229 all. A @code{while} expression that evaluates successfully never
10230 returns a true value! What this means is that @code{while} is always
10231 evaluated for its side effects, which is to say, the consequences of
10232 evaluating the expressions within the body of the @code{while} loop.
10233 This makes sense. It is not the mere act of looping that is desired,
10234 but the consequences of what happens when the expressions in the loop
10235 are repeatedly evaluated.
10236
10237 @node Loop Example
10238 @subsection A @code{while} Loop and a List
10239
10240 A common way to control a @code{while} loop is to test whether a list
10241 has any elements. If it does, the loop is repeated; but if it does not,
10242 the repetition is ended. Since this is an important technique, we will
10243 create a short example to illustrate it.
10244
10245 A simple way to test whether a list has elements is to evaluate the
10246 list: if it has no elements, it is an empty list and will return the
10247 empty list, @code{()}, which is a synonym for @code{nil} or false. On
10248 the other hand, a list with elements will return those elements when it
10249 is evaluated. Since Emacs Lisp considers as true any value that is not
10250 @code{nil}, a list that returns elements will test true in a
10251 @code{while} loop.
10252
10253 @need 1200
10254 For example, you can set the variable @code{empty-list} to @code{nil} by
10255 evaluating the following @code{setq} expression:
10256
10257 @smallexample
10258 (setq empty-list ())
10259 @end smallexample
10260
10261 @noindent
10262 After evaluating the @code{setq} expression, you can evaluate the
10263 variable @code{empty-list} in the usual way, by placing the cursor after
10264 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}; @code{nil} will appear in your
10265 echo area:
10266
10267 @smallexample
10268 empty-list
10269 @end smallexample
10270
10271 On the other hand, if you set a variable to be a list with elements, the
10272 list will appear when you evaluate the variable, as you can see by
10273 evaluating the following two expressions:
10274
10275 @smallexample
10276 @group
10277 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10278
10279 animals
10280 @end group
10281 @end smallexample
10282
10283 Thus, to create a @code{while} loop that tests whether there are any
10284 items in the list @code{animals}, the first part of the loop will be
10285 written like this:
10286
10287 @smallexample
10288 @group
10289 (while animals
10290 @dots{}
10291 @end group
10292 @end smallexample
10293
10294 @noindent
10295 When the @code{while} tests its first argument, the variable
10296 @code{animals} is evaluated. It returns a list. So long as the list
10297 has elements, the @code{while} considers the results of the test to be
10298 true; but when the list is empty, it considers the results of the test
10299 to be false.
10300
10301 To prevent the @code{while} loop from running forever, some mechanism
10302 needs to be provided to empty the list eventually. An oft-used
10303 technique is to have one of the subsequent forms in the @code{while}
10304 expression set the value of the list to be the @sc{cdr} of the list.
10305 Each time the @code{cdr} function is evaluated, the list will be made
10306 shorter, until eventually only the empty list will be left. At this
10307 point, the test of the @code{while} loop will return false, and the
10308 arguments to the @code{while} will no longer be evaluated.
10309
10310 For example, the list of animals bound to the variable @code{animals}
10311 can be set to be the @sc{cdr} of the original list with the
10312 following expression:
10313
10314 @smallexample
10315 (setq animals (cdr animals))
10316 @end smallexample
10317
10318 @noindent
10319 If you have evaluated the previous expressions and then evaluate this
10320 expression, you will see @code{(giraffe lion tiger)} appear in the echo
10321 area. If you evaluate the expression again, @code{(lion tiger)} will
10322 appear in the echo area. If you evaluate it again and yet again,
10323 @code{(tiger)} appears and then the empty list, shown by @code{nil}.
10324
10325 A template for a @code{while} loop that uses the @code{cdr} function
10326 repeatedly to cause the true-or-false-test eventually to test false
10327 looks like this:
10328
10329 @smallexample
10330 @group
10331 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
10332 @var{body}@dots{}
10333 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
10334 @end group
10335 @end smallexample
10336
10337 This test and use of @code{cdr} can be put together in a function that
10338 goes through a list and prints each element of the list on a line of its
10339 own.
10340
10341 @node print-elements-of-list
10342 @subsection An Example: @code{print-elements-of-list}
10343 @findex print-elements-of-list
10344
10345 The @code{print-elements-of-list} function illustrates a @code{while}
10346 loop with a list.
10347
10348 @cindex @file{*scratch*} buffer
10349 The function requires several lines for its output. If you are
10350 reading this in a recent instance of GNU Emacs,
10351 @c GNU Emacs 21, GNU Emacs 22, or a later version,
10352 you can evaluate the following expression inside of Info, as usual.
10353
10354 If you are using an earlier version of Emacs, you need to copy the
10355 necessary expressions to your @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate
10356 them there. This is because the echo area had only one line in the
10357 earlier versions.
10358
10359 You can copy the expressions by marking the beginning of the region
10360 with @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}), moving the cursor to
10361 the end of the region and then copying the region using @kbd{M-w}
10362 (@code{kill-ring-save}, which calls @code{copy-region-as-kill} and
10363 then provides visual feedback). In the @file{*scratch*}
10364 buffer, you can yank the expressions back by typing @kbd{C-y}
10365 (@code{yank}).
10366
10367 After you have copied the expressions to the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
10368 evaluate each expression in turn. Be sure to evaluate the last
10369 expression, @code{(print-elements-of-list animals)}, by typing
10370 @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}, that is, by giving an argument to
10371 @code{eval-last-sexp}. This will cause the result of the evaluation
10372 to be printed in the @file{*scratch*} buffer instead of being printed
10373 in the echo area. (Otherwise you will see something like this in your
10374 echo area: @code{^Jgazelle^J^Jgiraffe^J^Jlion^J^Jtiger^Jnil}, in which
10375 each @samp{^J} stands for a `newline'.)
10376
10377 @need 1500
10378 In a recent instance of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate these expressions
10379 directly in the Info buffer, and the echo area will grow to show the
10380 results.
10381
10382 @smallexample
10383 @group
10384 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10385
10386 (defun print-elements-of-list (list)
10387 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own."
10388 (while list
10389 (print (car list))
10390 (setq list (cdr list))))
10391
10392 (print-elements-of-list animals)
10393 @end group
10394 @end smallexample
10395
10396 @need 1200
10397 @noindent
10398 When you evaluate the three expressions in sequence, you will see
10399 this:
10400
10401 @smallexample
10402 @group
10403 gazelle
10404
10405 giraffe
10406
10407 lion
10408
10409 tiger
10410 nil
10411 @end group
10412 @end smallexample
10413
10414 Each element of the list is printed on a line of its own (that is what
10415 the function @code{print} does) and then the value returned by the
10416 function is printed. Since the last expression in the function is the
10417 @code{while} loop, and since @code{while} loops always return
10418 @code{nil}, a @code{nil} is printed after the last element of the list.
10419
10420 @node Incrementing Loop
10421 @subsection A Loop with an Incrementing Counter
10422
10423 A loop is not useful unless it stops when it ought. Besides
10424 controlling a loop with a list, a common way of stopping a loop is to
10425 write the first argument as a test that returns false when the correct
10426 number of repetitions are complete. This means that the loop must
10427 have a counter---an expression that counts how many times the loop
10428 repeats itself.
10429
10430 @ifnottex
10431 @node Incrementing Loop Details
10432 @unnumberedsubsec Details of an Incrementing Loop
10433 @end ifnottex
10434
10435 The test for a loop with an incrementing counter can be an expression
10436 such as @code{(< count desired-number)} which returns @code{t} for
10437 true if the value of @code{count} is less than the
10438 @code{desired-number} of repetitions and @code{nil} for false if the
10439 value of @code{count} is equal to or is greater than the
10440 @code{desired-number}. The expression that increments the count can
10441 be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq count (1+ count))}, where
10442 @code{1+} is a built-in function in Emacs Lisp that adds 1 to its
10443 argument. (The expression @w{@code{(1+ count)}} has the same result
10444 as @w{@code{(+ count 1)}}, but is easier for a human to read.)
10445
10446 @need 1250
10447 The template for a @code{while} loop controlled by an incrementing
10448 counter looks like this:
10449
10450 @smallexample
10451 @group
10452 @var{set-count-to-initial-value}
10453 (while (< count desired-number) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10454 @var{body}@dots{}
10455 (setq count (1+ count))) ; @r{incrementer}
10456 @end group
10457 @end smallexample
10458
10459 @noindent
10460 Note that you need to set the initial value of @code{count}; usually it
10461 is set to 1.
10462
10463 @menu
10464 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
10465 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
10466 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
10467 @end menu
10468
10469 @node Incrementing Example
10470 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with incrementing counter
10471
10472 Suppose you are playing on the beach and decide to make a triangle of
10473 pebbles, putting one pebble in the first row, two in the second row,
10474 three in the third row and so on, like this:
10475
10476 @sp 1
10477 @c pebble diagram
10478 @ifnottex
10479 @smallexample
10480 @group
10481 *
10482 * *
10483 * * *
10484 * * * *
10485 @end group
10486 @end smallexample
10487 @end ifnottex
10488 @iftex
10489 @smallexample
10490 @group
10491 @bullet{}
10492 @bullet{} @bullet{}
10493 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10494 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10495 @end group
10496 @end smallexample
10497 @end iftex
10498 @sp 1
10499
10500 @noindent
10501 (About 2500 years ago, Pythagoras and others developed the beginnings of
10502 number theory by considering questions such as this.)
10503
10504 Suppose you want to know how many pebbles you will need to make a
10505 triangle with 7 rows?
10506
10507 Clearly, what you need to do is add up the numbers from 1 to 7. There
10508 are two ways to do this; start with the smallest number, one, and add up
10509 the list in sequence, 1, 2, 3, 4 and so on; or start with the largest
10510 number and add the list going down: 7, 6, 5, 4 and so on. Because both
10511 mechanisms illustrate common ways of writing @code{while} loops, we will
10512 create two examples, one counting up and the other counting down. In
10513 this first example, we will start with 1 and add 2, 3, 4 and so on.
10514
10515 If you are just adding up a short list of numbers, the easiest way to do
10516 it is to add up all the numbers at once. However, if you do not know
10517 ahead of time how many numbers your list will have, or if you want to be
10518 prepared for a very long list, then you need to design your addition so
10519 that what you do is repeat a simple process many times instead of doing
10520 a more complex process once.
10521
10522 For example, instead of adding up all the pebbles all at once, what you
10523 can do is add the number of pebbles in the first row, 1, to the number
10524 in the second row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to the
10525 third row, 3. Then you can add the number in the fourth row, 4, to the
10526 total of the first three rows; and so on.
10527
10528 The critical characteristic of the process is that each repetitive
10529 action is simple. In this case, at each step we add only two numbers,
10530 the number of pebbles in the row and the total already found. This
10531 process of adding two numbers is repeated again and again until the last
10532 row has been added to the total of all the preceding rows. In a more
10533 complex loop the repetitive action might not be so simple, but it will
10534 be simpler than doing everything all at once.
10535
10536 @node Inc Example parts
10537 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
10538
10539 The preceding analysis gives us the bones of our function definition:
10540 first, we will need a variable that we can call @code{total} that will
10541 be the total number of pebbles. This will be the value returned by
10542 the function.
10543
10544 Second, we know that the function will require an argument: this
10545 argument will be the total number of rows in the triangle. It can be
10546 called @code{number-of-rows}.
10547
10548 Finally, we need a variable to use as a counter. We could call this
10549 variable @code{counter}, but a better name is @code{row-number}. That
10550 is because what the counter does in this function is count rows, and a
10551 program should be written to be as understandable as possible.
10552
10553 When the Lisp interpreter first starts evaluating the expressions in the
10554 function, the value of @code{total} should be set to zero, since we have
10555 not added anything to it. Then the function should add the number of
10556 pebbles in the first row to the total, and then add the number of
10557 pebbles in the second to the total, and then add the number of
10558 pebbles in the third row to the total, and so on, until there are no
10559 more rows left to add.
10560
10561 Both @code{total} and @code{row-number} are used only inside the
10562 function, so they can be declared as local variables with @code{let}
10563 and given initial values. Clearly, the initial value for @code{total}
10564 should be 0. The initial value of @code{row-number} should be 1,
10565 since we start with the first row. This means that the @code{let}
10566 statement will look like this:
10567
10568 @smallexample
10569 @group
10570 (let ((total 0)
10571 (row-number 1))
10572 @var{body}@dots{})
10573 @end group
10574 @end smallexample
10575
10576 After the internal variables are declared and bound to their initial
10577 values, we can begin the @code{while} loop. The expression that serves
10578 as the test should return a value of @code{t} for true so long as the
10579 @code{row-number} is less than or equal to the @code{number-of-rows}.
10580 (If the expression tests true only so long as the row number is less
10581 than the number of rows in the triangle, the last row will never be
10582 added to the total; hence the row number has to be either less than or
10583 equal to the number of rows.)
10584
10585 @need 1500
10586 @findex <= @r{(less than or equal)}
10587 Lisp provides the @code{<=} function that returns true if the value of
10588 its first argument is less than or equal to the value of its second
10589 argument and false otherwise. So the expression that the @code{while}
10590 will evaluate as its test should look like this:
10591
10592 @smallexample
10593 (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10594 @end smallexample
10595
10596 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
10597 of pebbles in a row to the total already found. Since the number of
10598 pebbles in the row is equal to the row number, the total can be found by
10599 adding the row number to the total. (Clearly, in a more complex
10600 situation, the number of pebbles in the row might be related to the row
10601 number in a more complicated way; if this were the case, the row number
10602 would be replaced by the appropriate expression.)
10603
10604 @smallexample
10605 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10606 @end smallexample
10607
10608 @noindent
10609 What this does is set the new value of @code{total} to be equal to the
10610 sum of adding the number of pebbles in the row to the previous total.
10611
10612 After setting the value of @code{total}, the conditions need to be
10613 established for the next repetition of the loop, if there is one. This
10614 is done by incrementing the value of the @code{row-number} variable,
10615 which serves as a counter. After the @code{row-number} variable has
10616 been incremented, the true-or-false-test at the beginning of the
10617 @code{while} loop tests whether its value is still less than or equal to
10618 the value of the @code{number-of-rows} and if it is, adds the new value
10619 of the @code{row-number} variable to the @code{total} of the previous
10620 repetition of the loop.
10621
10622 @need 1200
10623 The built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1+} adds 1 to a number, so the
10624 @code{row-number} variable can be incremented with this expression:
10625
10626 @smallexample
10627 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))
10628 @end smallexample
10629
10630 @node Inc Example altogether
10631 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
10632
10633 We have created the parts for the function definition; now we need to
10634 put them together.
10635
10636 @need 800
10637 First, the contents of the @code{while} expression:
10638
10639 @smallexample
10640 @group
10641 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10642 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10643 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))) ; @r{incrementer}
10644 @end group
10645 @end smallexample
10646
10647 Along with the @code{let} expression varlist, this very nearly
10648 completes the body of the function definition. However, it requires
10649 one final element, the need for which is somewhat subtle.
10650
10651 The final touch is to place the variable @code{total} on a line by
10652 itself after the @code{while} expression. Otherwise, the value returned
10653 by the whole function is the value of the last expression that is
10654 evaluated in the body of the @code{let}, and this is the value
10655 returned by the @code{while}, which is always @code{nil}.
10656
10657 This may not be evident at first sight. It almost looks as if the
10658 incrementing expression is the last expression of the whole function.
10659 But that expression is part of the body of the @code{while}; it is the
10660 last element of the list that starts with the symbol @code{while}.
10661 Moreover, the whole of the @code{while} loop is a list within the body
10662 of the @code{let}.
10663
10664 @need 1250
10665 In outline, the function will look like this:
10666
10667 @smallexample
10668 @group
10669 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
10670 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
10671 (let (@var{varlist})
10672 (while (@var{true-or-false-test})
10673 @var{body-of-while}@dots{} )
10674 @dots{} )) ; @r{Need final expression here.}
10675 @end group
10676 @end smallexample
10677
10678 The result of evaluating the @code{let} is what is going to be returned
10679 by the @code{defun} since the @code{let} is not embedded within any
10680 containing list, except for the @code{defun} as a whole. However, if
10681 the @code{while} is the last element of the @code{let} expression, the
10682 function will always return @code{nil}. This is not what we want!
10683 Instead, what we want is the value of the variable @code{total}. This
10684 is returned by simply placing the symbol as the last element of the list
10685 starting with @code{let}. It gets evaluated after the preceding
10686 elements of the list are evaluated, which means it gets evaluated after
10687 it has been assigned the correct value for the total.
10688
10689 It may be easier to see this by printing the list starting with
10690 @code{let} all on one line. This format makes it evident that the
10691 @var{varlist} and @code{while} expressions are the second and third
10692 elements of the list starting with @code{let}, and the @code{total} is
10693 the last element:
10694
10695 @smallexample
10696 @group
10697 (let (@var{varlist}) (while (@var{true-or-false-test}) @var{body-of-while}@dots{} ) total)
10698 @end group
10699 @end smallexample
10700
10701 @need 1200
10702 Putting everything together, the @code{triangle} function definition
10703 looks like this:
10704
10705 @smallexample
10706 @group
10707 (defun triangle (number-of-rows) ; @r{Version with}
10708 ; @r{ incrementing counter.}
10709 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
10710 The first row has one pebble, the second row two pebbles,
10711 the third row three pebbles, and so on.
10712 The argument is NUMBER-OF-ROWS."
10713 @end group
10714 @group
10715 (let ((total 0)
10716 (row-number 1))
10717 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10718 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10719 (setq row-number (1+ row-number)))
10720 total))
10721 @end group
10722 @end smallexample
10723
10724 @need 1200
10725 After you have installed @code{triangle} by evaluating the function, you
10726 can try it out. Here are two examples:
10727
10728 @smallexample
10729 @group
10730 (triangle 4)
10731
10732 (triangle 7)
10733 @end group
10734 @end smallexample
10735
10736 @noindent
10737 The sum of the first four numbers is 10 and the sum of the first seven
10738 numbers is 28.
10739
10740 @node Decrementing Loop
10741 @subsection Loop with a Decrementing Counter
10742
10743 Another common way to write a @code{while} loop is to write the test
10744 so that it determines whether a counter is greater than zero. So long
10745 as the counter is greater than zero, the loop is repeated. But when
10746 the counter is equal to or less than zero, the loop is stopped. For
10747 this to work, the counter has to start out greater than zero and then
10748 be made smaller and smaller by a form that is evaluated
10749 repeatedly.
10750
10751 The test will be an expression such as @code{(> counter 0)} which
10752 returns @code{t} for true if the value of @code{counter} is greater
10753 than zero, and @code{nil} for false if the value of @code{counter} is
10754 equal to or less than zero. The expression that makes the number
10755 smaller and smaller can be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq
10756 counter (1- counter))}, where @code{1-} is a built-in function in
10757 Emacs Lisp that subtracts 1 from its argument.
10758
10759 @need 1250
10760 The template for a decrementing @code{while} loop looks like this:
10761
10762 @smallexample
10763 @group
10764 (while (> counter 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10765 @var{body}@dots{}
10766 (setq counter (1- counter))) ; @r{decrementer}
10767 @end group
10768 @end smallexample
10769
10770 @menu
10771 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
10772 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
10773 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
10774 @end menu
10775
10776 @node Decrementing Example
10777 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with decrementing counter
10778
10779 To illustrate a loop with a decrementing counter, we will rewrite the
10780 @code{triangle} function so the counter decreases to zero.
10781
10782 This is the reverse of the earlier version of the function. In this
10783 case, to find out how many pebbles are needed to make a triangle with
10784 3 rows, add the number of pebbles in the third row, 3, to the number
10785 in the preceding row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to
10786 the row that precedes them, which is 1.
10787
10788 Likewise, to find the number of pebbles in a triangle with 7 rows, add
10789 the number of pebbles in the seventh row, 7, to the number in the
10790 preceding row, which is 6, and then add the total of those two rows to
10791 the row that precedes them, which is 5, and so on. As in the previous
10792 example, each addition only involves adding two numbers, the total of
10793 the rows already added up and the number of pebbles in the row that is
10794 being added to the total. This process of adding two numbers is
10795 repeated again and again until there are no more pebbles to add.
10796
10797 We know how many pebbles to start with: the number of pebbles in the
10798 last row is equal to the number of rows. If the triangle has seven
10799 rows, the number of pebbles in the last row is 7. Likewise, we know how
10800 many pebbles are in the preceding row: it is one less than the number in
10801 the row.
10802
10803 @node Dec Example parts
10804 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
10805
10806 We start with three variables: the total number of rows in the
10807 triangle; the number of pebbles in a row; and the total number of
10808 pebbles, which is what we want to calculate. These variables can be
10809 named @code{number-of-rows}, @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}, and
10810 @code{total}, respectively.
10811
10812 Both @code{total} and @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} are used only
10813 inside the function and are declared with @code{let}. The initial
10814 value of @code{total} should, of course, be zero. However, the
10815 initial value of @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be equal to
10816 the number of rows in the triangle, since the addition will start with
10817 the longest row.
10818
10819 @need 1250
10820 This means that the beginning of the @code{let} expression will look
10821 like this:
10822
10823 @smallexample
10824 @group
10825 (let ((total 0)
10826 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
10827 @var{body}@dots{})
10828 @end group
10829 @end smallexample
10830
10831 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
10832 of pebbles in a row to the total already found, that is, by repeatedly
10833 evaluating the following expression:
10834
10835 @smallexample
10836 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
10837 @end smallexample
10838
10839 @noindent
10840 After the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is added to the @code{total},
10841 the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be decremented by one, since
10842 the next time the loop repeats, the preceding row will be
10843 added to the total.
10844
10845 The number of pebbles in a preceding row is one less than the number of
10846 pebbles in a row, so the built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1-} can be
10847 used to compute the number of pebbles in the preceding row. This can be
10848 done with the following expression:
10849
10850 @smallexample
10851 @group
10852 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
10853 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row))
10854 @end group
10855 @end smallexample
10856
10857 Finally, we know that the @code{while} loop should stop making repeated
10858 additions when there are no pebbles in a row. So the test for
10859 the @code{while} loop is simply:
10860
10861 @smallexample
10862 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
10863 @end smallexample
10864
10865 @node Dec Example altogether
10866 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
10867
10868 We can put these expressions together to create a function definition
10869 that works. However, on examination, we find that one of the local
10870 variables is unneeded!
10871
10872 @need 1250
10873 The function definition looks like this:
10874
10875 @smallexample
10876 @group
10877 ;;; @r{First subtractive version.}
10878 (defun triangle (number-of-rows)
10879 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
10880 (let ((total 0)
10881 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
10882 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
10883 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
10884 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
10885 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row)))
10886 total))
10887 @end group
10888 @end smallexample
10889
10890 As written, this function works.
10891
10892 However, we do not need @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}.
10893
10894 @cindex Argument as local variable
10895 When the @code{triangle} function is evaluated, the symbol
10896 @code{number-of-rows} will be bound to a number, giving it an initial
10897 value. That number can be changed in the body of the function as if
10898 it were a local variable, without any fear that such a change will
10899 effect the value of the variable outside of the function. This is a
10900 very useful characteristic of Lisp; it means that the variable
10901 @code{number-of-rows} can be used anywhere in the function where
10902 @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is used.
10903
10904 @need 800
10905 Here is a second version of the function written a bit more cleanly:
10906
10907 @smallexample
10908 @group
10909 (defun triangle (number) ; @r{Second version.}
10910 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
10911 (let ((total 0))
10912 (while (> number 0)
10913 (setq total (+ total number))
10914 (setq number (1- number)))
10915 total))
10916 @end group
10917 @end smallexample
10918
10919 In brief, a properly written @code{while} loop will consist of three parts:
10920
10921 @enumerate
10922 @item
10923 A test that will return false after the loop has repeated itself the
10924 correct number of times.
10925
10926 @item
10927 An expression the evaluation of which will return the value desired
10928 after being repeatedly evaluated.
10929
10930 @item
10931 An expression to change the value passed to the true-or-false-test so
10932 that the test returns false after the loop has repeated itself the right
10933 number of times.
10934 @end enumerate
10935
10936 @node dolist dotimes
10937 @section Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
10938
10939 In addition to @code{while}, both @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
10940 provide for looping. Sometimes these are quicker to write than the
10941 equivalent @code{while} loop. Both are Lisp macros. (@xref{Macros, ,
10942 Macros, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. )
10943
10944 @code{dolist} works like a @code{while} loop that `@sc{cdr}s down a
10945 list': @code{dolist} automatically shortens the list each time it
10946 loops---takes the @sc{cdr} of the list---and binds the @sc{car} of
10947 each shorter version of the list to the first of its arguments.
10948
10949 @code{dotimes} loops a specific number of times: you specify the number.
10950
10951 @menu
10952 * dolist::
10953 * dotimes::
10954 @end menu
10955
10956 @node dolist
10957 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{dolist} Macro
10958 @findex dolist
10959
10960 Suppose, for example, you want to reverse a list, so that
10961 ``first'' ``second'' ``third'' becomes ``third'' ``second'' ``first''.
10962
10963 @need 1250
10964 In practice, you would use the @code{reverse} function, like this:
10965
10966 @smallexample
10967 @group
10968 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10969
10970 (reverse animals)
10971 @end group
10972 @end smallexample
10973
10974 @need 800
10975 @noindent
10976 Here is how you could reverse the list using a @code{while} loop:
10977
10978 @smallexample
10979 @group
10980 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10981
10982 (defun reverse-list-with-while (list)
10983 "Using while, reverse the order of LIST."
10984 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
10985 (while list
10986 (setq value (cons (car list) value))
10987 (setq list (cdr list)))
10988 value))
10989
10990 (reverse-list-with-while animals)
10991 @end group
10992 @end smallexample
10993
10994 @need 800
10995 @noindent
10996 And here is how you could use the @code{dolist} macro:
10997
10998 @smallexample
10999 @group
11000 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11001
11002 (defun reverse-list-with-dolist (list)
11003 "Using dolist, reverse the order of LIST."
11004 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
11005 (dolist (element list value)
11006 (setq value (cons element value)))))
11007
11008 (reverse-list-with-dolist animals)
11009 @end group
11010 @end smallexample
11011
11012 @need 1250
11013 @noindent
11014 In Info, you can place your cursor after the closing parenthesis of
11015 each expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}; in each case, you should see
11016
11017 @smallexample
11018 (tiger lion giraffe gazelle)
11019 @end smallexample
11020
11021 @noindent
11022 in the echo area.
11023
11024 For this example, the existing @code{reverse} function is obviously best.
11025 The @code{while} loop is just like our first example (@pxref{Loop
11026 Example, , A @code{while} Loop and a List}). The @code{while} first
11027 checks whether the list has elements; if so, it constructs a new list
11028 by adding the first element of the list to the existing list (which in
11029 the first iteration of the loop is @code{nil}). Since the second
11030 element is prepended in front of the first element, and the third
11031 element is prepended in front of the second element, the list is reversed.
11032
11033 In the expression using a @code{while} loop,
11034 the @w{@code{(setq list (cdr list))}}
11035 expression shortens the list, so the @code{while} loop eventually
11036 stops. In addition, it provides the @code{cons} expression with a new
11037 first element by creating a new and shorter list at each repetition of
11038 the loop.
11039
11040 The @code{dolist} expression does very much the same as the
11041 @code{while} expression, except that the @code{dolist} macro does some
11042 of the work you have to do when writing a @code{while} expression.
11043
11044 Like a @code{while} loop, a @code{dolist} loops. What is different is
11045 that it automatically shortens the list each time it loops---it
11046 `@sc{cdr}s down the list' on its own---and it automatically binds
11047 the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list to the first of its
11048 arguments.
11049
11050 In the example, the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list is
11051 referred to using the symbol @samp{element}, the list itself is called
11052 @samp{list}, and the value returned is called @samp{value}. The
11053 remainder of the @code{dolist} expression is the body.
11054
11055 The @code{dolist} expression binds the @sc{car} of each shorter
11056 version of the list to @code{element} and then evaluates the body of
11057 the expression; and repeats the loop. The result is returned in
11058 @code{value}.
11059
11060 @node dotimes
11061 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{dotimes} Macro
11062 @findex dotimes
11063
11064 The @code{dotimes} macro is similar to @code{dolist}, except that it
11065 loops a specific number of times.
11066
11067 The first argument to @code{dotimes} is assigned the numbers 0, 1, 2
11068 and so forth each time around the loop, and the value of the third
11069 argument is returned. You need to provide the value of the second
11070 argument, which is how many times the macro loops.
11071
11072 @need 1250
11073 For example, the following binds the numbers from 0 up to, but not
11074 including, the number 3 to the first argument, @var{number}, and then
11075 constructs a list of the three numbers. (The first number is 0, the
11076 second number is 1, and the third number is 2; this makes a total of
11077 three numbers in all, starting with zero as the first number.)
11078
11079 @smallexample
11080 @group
11081 (let (value) ; otherwise a value is a void variable
11082 (dotimes (number 3 value)
11083 (setq value (cons number value))))
11084
11085 @result{} (2 1 0)
11086 @end group
11087 @end smallexample
11088
11089 @noindent
11090 @code{dotimes} returns @code{value}, so the way to use
11091 @code{dotimes} is to operate on some expression @var{number} number of
11092 times and then return the result, either as a list or an atom.
11093
11094 @need 1250
11095 Here is an example of a @code{defun} that uses @code{dotimes} to add
11096 up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
11097
11098 @smallexample
11099 @group
11100 (defun triangle-using-dotimes (number-of-rows)
11101 "Using dotimes, add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
11102 (let ((total 0)) ; otherwise a total is a void variable
11103 (dotimes (number number-of-rows total)
11104 (setq total (+ total (1+ number))))))
11105
11106 (triangle-using-dotimes 4)
11107 @end group
11108 @end smallexample
11109
11110 @node Recursion
11111 @section Recursion
11112 @cindex Recursion
11113
11114 A recursive function contains code that tells the Lisp interpreter to
11115 call a program that runs exactly like itself, but with slightly
11116 different arguments. The code runs exactly the same because it has
11117 the same name. However, even though the program has the same name, it
11118 is not the same entity. It is different. In the jargon, it is a
11119 different `instance'.
11120
11121 Eventually, if the program is written correctly, the `slightly
11122 different arguments' will become sufficiently different from the first
11123 arguments that the final instance will stop.
11124
11125 @menu
11126 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
11127 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
11128 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
11129 * Recursive triangle function::
11130 * Recursion with cond::
11131 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
11132 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
11133 * No deferment solution::
11134 @end menu
11135
11136 @node Building Robots
11137 @subsection Building Robots: Extending the Metaphor
11138 @cindex Building robots
11139 @cindex Robots, building
11140
11141 It is sometimes helpful to think of a running program as a robot that
11142 does a job. In doing its job, a recursive function calls on a second
11143 robot to help it. The second robot is identical to the first in every
11144 way, except that the second robot helps the first and has been
11145 passed different arguments than the first.
11146
11147 In a recursive function, the second robot may call a third; and the
11148 third may call a fourth, and so on. Each of these is a different
11149 entity; but all are clones.
11150
11151 Since each robot has slightly different instructions---the arguments
11152 will differ from one robot to the next---the last robot should know
11153 when to stop.
11154
11155 Let's expand on the metaphor in which a computer program is a robot.
11156
11157 A function definition provides the blueprints for a robot. When you
11158 install a function definition, that is, when you evaluate a
11159 @code{defun} macro, you install the necessary equipment to build
11160 robots. It is as if you were in a factory, setting up an assembly
11161 line. Robots with the same name are built according to the same
11162 blueprints. So they have, as it were, the same `model number', but a
11163 different `serial number'.
11164
11165 We often say that a recursive function `calls itself'. What we mean
11166 is that the instructions in a recursive function cause the Lisp
11167 interpreter to run a different function that has the same name and
11168 does the same job as the first, but with different arguments.
11169
11170 It is important that the arguments differ from one instance to the
11171 next; otherwise, the process will never stop.
11172
11173 @node Recursive Definition Parts
11174 @subsection The Parts of a Recursive Definition
11175 @cindex Parts of a Recursive Definition
11176 @cindex Recursive Definition Parts
11177
11178 A recursive function typically contains a conditional expression which
11179 has three parts:
11180
11181 @enumerate
11182 @item
11183 A true-or-false-test that determines whether the function is called
11184 again, here called the @dfn{do-again-test}.
11185
11186 @item
11187 The name of the function. When this name is called, a new instance of
11188 the function---a new robot, as it were---is created and told what to do.
11189
11190 @item
11191 An expression that returns a different value each time the function is
11192 called, here called the @dfn{next-step-expression}. Consequently, the
11193 argument (or arguments) passed to the new instance of the function
11194 will be different from that passed to the previous instance. This
11195 causes the conditional expression, the @dfn{do-again-test}, to test
11196 false after the correct number of repetitions.
11197 @end enumerate
11198
11199 Recursive functions can be much simpler than any other kind of
11200 function. Indeed, when people first start to use them, they often look
11201 so mysteriously simple as to be incomprehensible. Like riding a
11202 bicycle, reading a recursive function definition takes a certain knack
11203 which is hard at first but then seems simple.
11204
11205 @need 1200
11206 There are several different common recursive patterns. A very simple
11207 pattern looks like this:
11208
11209 @smallexample
11210 @group
11211 (defun @var{name-of-recursive-function} (@var{argument-list})
11212 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
11213 (if @var{do-again-test}
11214 @var{body}@dots{}
11215 (@var{name-of-recursive-function}
11216 @var{next-step-expression})))
11217 @end group
11218 @end smallexample
11219
11220 Each time a recursive function is evaluated, a new instance of it is
11221 created and told what to do. The arguments tell the instance what to do.
11222
11223 An argument is bound to the value of the next-step-expression. Each
11224 instance runs with a different value of the next-step-expression.
11225
11226 The value in the next-step-expression is used in the do-again-test.
11227
11228 The value returned by the next-step-expression is passed to the new
11229 instance of the function, which evaluates it (or some
11230 transmogrification of it) to determine whether to continue or stop.
11231 The next-step-expression is designed so that the do-again-test returns
11232 false when the function should no longer be repeated.
11233
11234 The do-again-test is sometimes called the @dfn{stop condition},
11235 since it stops the repetitions when it tests false.
11236
11237 @node Recursion with list
11238 @subsection Recursion with a List
11239
11240 The example of a @code{while} loop that printed the elements of a list
11241 of numbers can be written recursively. Here is the code, including
11242 an expression to set the value of the variable @code{animals} to a list.
11243
11244 If you are reading this in Info in Emacs, you can evaluate this
11245 expression directly in Info. Otherwise, you must copy the example
11246 to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate each expression there.
11247 Use @kbd{C-u C-x C-e} to evaluate the
11248 @code{(print-elements-recursively animals)} expression so that the
11249 results are printed in the buffer; otherwise the Lisp interpreter will
11250 try to squeeze the results into the one line of the echo area.
11251
11252 Also, place your cursor immediately after the last closing parenthesis
11253 of the @code{print-elements-recursively} function, before the comment.
11254 Otherwise, the Lisp interpreter will try to evaluate the comment.
11255
11256 @findex print-elements-recursively
11257 @smallexample
11258 @group
11259 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11260
11261 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11262 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11263 Uses recursion."
11264 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11265 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11266 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11267 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11268
11269 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11270 @end group
11271 @end smallexample
11272
11273 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function first tests whether
11274 there is any content in the list; if there is, the function prints the
11275 first element of the list, the @sc{car} of the list. Then the
11276 function `invokes itself', but gives itself as its argument, not the
11277 whole list, but the second and subsequent elements of the list, the
11278 @sc{cdr} of the list.
11279
11280 Put another way, if the list is not empty, the function invokes
11281 another instance of code that is similar to the initial code, but is a
11282 different thread of execution, with different arguments than the first
11283 instance.
11284
11285 Put in yet another way, if the list is not empty, the first robot
11286 assembles a second robot and tells it what to do; the second robot is
11287 a different individual from the first, but is the same model.
11288
11289 When the second evaluation occurs, the @code{when} expression is
11290 evaluated and if true, prints the first element of the list it
11291 receives as its argument (which is the second element of the original
11292 list). Then the function `calls itself' with the @sc{cdr} of the list
11293 it is invoked with, which (the second time around) is the @sc{cdr} of
11294 the @sc{cdr} of the original list.
11295
11296 Note that although we say that the function `calls itself', what we
11297 mean is that the Lisp interpreter assembles and instructs a new
11298 instance of the program. The new instance is a clone of the first,
11299 but is a separate individual.
11300
11301 Each time the function `invokes itself', it invokes itself on a
11302 shorter version of the original list. It creates a new instance that
11303 works on a shorter list.
11304
11305 Eventually, the function invokes itself on an empty list. It creates
11306 a new instance whose argument is @code{nil}. The conditional expression
11307 tests the value of @code{list}. Since the value of @code{list} is
11308 @code{nil}, the @code{when} expression tests false so the then-part is
11309 not evaluated. The function as a whole then returns @code{nil}.
11310
11311 @need 1200
11312 When you evaluate the expression @code{(print-elements-recursively
11313 animals)} in the @file{*scratch*} buffer, you see this result:
11314
11315 @smallexample
11316 @group
11317 gazelle
11318
11319 giraffe
11320
11321 lion
11322
11323 tiger
11324 nil
11325 @end group
11326 @end smallexample
11327
11328 @need 2000
11329 @node Recursive triangle function
11330 @subsection Recursion in Place of a Counter
11331 @findex triangle-recursively
11332
11333 @need 1200
11334 The @code{triangle} function described in a previous section can also
11335 be written recursively. It looks like this:
11336
11337 @smallexample
11338 @group
11339 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
11340 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11341 Uses recursion."
11342 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
11343 1 ; @r{then-part}
11344 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
11345 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11346 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11347
11348 (triangle-recursively 7)
11349 @end group
11350 @end smallexample
11351
11352 @noindent
11353 You can install this function by evaluating it and then try it by
11354 evaluating @code{(triangle-recursively 7)}. (Remember to put your
11355 cursor immediately after the last parenthesis of the function
11356 definition, before the comment.) The function evaluates to 28.
11357
11358 To understand how this function works, let's consider what happens in the
11359 various cases when the function is passed 1, 2, 3, or 4 as the value of
11360 its argument.
11361
11362 @menu
11363 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
11364 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
11365 @end menu
11366
11367 @ifnottex
11368 @node Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2
11369 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 1 or 2
11370 @end ifnottex
11371
11372 First, what happens if the value of the argument is 1?
11373
11374 The function has an @code{if} expression after the documentation
11375 string. It tests whether the value of @code{number} is equal to 1; if
11376 so, Emacs evaluates the then-part of the @code{if} expression, which
11377 returns the number 1 as the value of the function. (A triangle with
11378 one row has one pebble in it.)
11379
11380 Suppose, however, that the value of the argument is 2. In this case,
11381 Emacs evaluates the else-part of the @code{if} expression.
11382
11383 @need 1200
11384 The else-part consists of an addition, the recursive call to
11385 @code{triangle-recursively} and a decrementing action; and it looks like
11386 this:
11387
11388 @smallexample
11389 (+ number (triangle-recursively (1- number)))
11390 @end smallexample
11391
11392 When Emacs evaluates this expression, the innermost expression is
11393 evaluated first; then the other parts in sequence. Here are the steps
11394 in detail:
11395
11396 @table @i
11397 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression.
11398
11399 The innermost expression is @code{(1- number)} so Emacs decrements the
11400 value of @code{number} from 2 to 1.
11401
11402 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11403
11404 The Lisp interpreter creates an individual instance of
11405 @code{triangle-recursively}. It does not matter that this function is
11406 contained within itself. Emacs passes the result Step 1 as the
11407 argument used by this instance of the @code{triangle-recursively}
11408 function
11409
11410 In this case, Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with an
11411 argument of 1. This means that this evaluation of
11412 @code{triangle-recursively} returns 1.
11413
11414 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the value of @code{number}.
11415
11416 The variable @code{number} is the second element of the list that
11417 starts with @code{+}; its value is 2.
11418
11419 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{+} expression.
11420
11421 The @code{+} expression receives two arguments, the first
11422 from the evaluation of @code{number} (Step 3) and the second from the
11423 evaluation of @code{triangle-recursively} (Step 2).
11424
11425 The result of the addition is the sum of 2 plus 1, and the number 3 is
11426 returned, which is correct. A triangle with two rows has three
11427 pebbles in it.
11428 @end table
11429
11430 @node Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4
11431 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 3 or 4
11432
11433 Suppose that @code{triangle-recursively} is called with an argument of
11434 3.
11435
11436 @table @i
11437 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the do-again-test.
11438
11439 The @code{if} expression is evaluated first. This is the do-again
11440 test and returns false, so the else-part of the @code{if} expression
11441 is evaluated. (Note that in this example, the do-again-test causes
11442 the function to call itself when it tests false, not when it tests
11443 true.)
11444
11445 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression of the else-part.
11446
11447 The innermost expression of the else-part is evaluated, which decrements
11448 3 to 2. This is the next-step-expression.
11449
11450 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11451
11452 The number 2 is passed to the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11453
11454 We already know what happens when Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with
11455 an argument of 2. After going through the sequence of actions described
11456 earlier, it returns a value of 3. So that is what will happen here.
11457
11458 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the addition.
11459
11460 3 will be passed as an argument to the addition and will be added to the
11461 number with which the function was called, which is 3.
11462 @end table
11463
11464 @noindent
11465 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 6.
11466
11467 Now that we know what will happen when @code{triangle-recursively} is
11468 called with an argument of 3, it is evident what will happen if it is
11469 called with an argument of 4:
11470
11471 @quotation
11472 @need 800
11473 In the recursive call, the evaluation of
11474
11475 @smallexample
11476 (triangle-recursively (1- 4))
11477 @end smallexample
11478
11479 @need 800
11480 @noindent
11481 will return the value of evaluating
11482
11483 @smallexample
11484 (triangle-recursively 3)
11485 @end smallexample
11486
11487 @noindent
11488 which is 6 and this value will be added to 4 by the addition in the
11489 third line.
11490 @end quotation
11491
11492 @noindent
11493 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 10.
11494
11495 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is evaluated, it evaluates a
11496 version of itself---a different instance of itself---with a smaller
11497 argument, until the argument is small enough so that it does not
11498 evaluate itself.
11499
11500 Note that this particular design for a recursive function
11501 requires that operations be deferred.
11502
11503 Before @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} can calculate its answer, it
11504 must call @code{(triangle-recursively 6)}; and before
11505 @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} can calculate its answer, it must call
11506 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)}; and so on. That is to say, the
11507 calculation that @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} makes must be
11508 deferred until @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} makes its calculation;
11509 and @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} must defer until
11510 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)} completes; and so on.
11511
11512 If each of these instances of @code{triangle-recursively} are thought
11513 of as different robots, the first robot must wait for the second to
11514 complete its job, which must wait until the third completes, and so
11515 on.
11516
11517 There is a way around this kind of waiting, which we will discuss in
11518 @ref{No Deferment, , Recursion without Deferments}.
11519
11520 @node Recursion with cond
11521 @subsection Recursion Example Using @code{cond}
11522 @findex cond
11523
11524 The version of @code{triangle-recursively} described earlier is written
11525 with the @code{if} special form. It can also be written using another
11526 special form called @code{cond}. The name of the special form
11527 @code{cond} is an abbreviation of the word @samp{conditional}.
11528
11529 Although the @code{cond} special form is not used as often in the
11530 Emacs Lisp sources as @code{if}, it is used often enough to justify
11531 explaining it.
11532
11533 @need 800
11534 The template for a @code{cond} expression looks like this:
11535
11536 @smallexample
11537 @group
11538 (cond
11539 @var{body}@dots{})
11540 @end group
11541 @end smallexample
11542
11543 @noindent
11544 where the @var{body} is a series of lists.
11545
11546 @need 800
11547 Written out more fully, the template looks like this:
11548
11549 @smallexample
11550 @group
11551 (cond
11552 (@var{first-true-or-false-test} @var{first-consequent})
11553 (@var{second-true-or-false-test} @var{second-consequent})
11554 (@var{third-true-or-false-test} @var{third-consequent})
11555 @dots{})
11556 @end group
11557 @end smallexample
11558
11559 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates the @code{cond} expression, it
11560 evaluates the first element (the @sc{car} or true-or-false-test) of
11561 the first expression in a series of expressions within the body of the
11562 @code{cond}.
11563
11564 If the true-or-false-test returns @code{nil} the rest of that
11565 expression, the consequent, is skipped and the true-or-false-test of the
11566 next expression is evaluated. When an expression is found whose
11567 true-or-false-test returns a value that is not @code{nil}, the
11568 consequent of that expression is evaluated. The consequent can be one
11569 or more expressions. If the consequent consists of more than one
11570 expression, the expressions are evaluated in sequence and the value of
11571 the last one is returned. If the expression does not have a consequent,
11572 the value of the true-or-false-test is returned.
11573
11574 If none of the true-or-false-tests test true, the @code{cond} expression
11575 returns @code{nil}.
11576
11577 @need 1250
11578 Written using @code{cond}, the @code{triangle} function looks like this:
11579
11580 @smallexample
11581 @group
11582 (defun triangle-using-cond (number)
11583 (cond ((<= number 0) 0)
11584 ((= number 1) 1)
11585 ((> number 1)
11586 (+ number (triangle-using-cond (1- number))))))
11587 @end group
11588 @end smallexample
11589
11590 @noindent
11591 In this example, the @code{cond} returns 0 if the number is less than or
11592 equal to 0, it returns 1 if the number is 1 and it evaluates @code{(+
11593 number (triangle-using-cond (1- number)))} if the number is greater than
11594 1.
11595
11596 @node Recursive Patterns
11597 @subsection Recursive Patterns
11598 @cindex Recursive Patterns
11599
11600 Here are three common recursive patterns. Each involves a list.
11601 Recursion does not need to involve lists, but Lisp is designed for lists
11602 and this provides a sense of its primal capabilities.
11603
11604 @menu
11605 * Every::
11606 * Accumulate::
11607 * Keep::
11608 @end menu
11609
11610 @node Every
11611 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{every}
11612 @cindex Every, type of recursive pattern
11613 @cindex Recursive pattern: every
11614
11615 In the @code{every} recursive pattern, an action is performed on every
11616 element of a list.
11617
11618 @need 1500
11619 The basic pattern is:
11620
11621 @itemize @bullet
11622 @item
11623 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
11624 @item
11625 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list)
11626 @itemize @minus
11627 @item
11628 through a recursive call by the function on the rest (the
11629 @sc{cdr}) of the list,
11630 @item
11631 and, optionally, combine the acted-on element, using @code{cons},
11632 with the results of acting on the rest.
11633 @end itemize
11634 @end itemize
11635
11636 @need 1500
11637 Here is example:
11638
11639 @smallexample
11640 @group
11641 (defun square-each (numbers-list)
11642 "Square each of a NUMBERS LIST, recursively."
11643 (if (not numbers-list) ; do-again-test
11644 nil
11645 (cons
11646 (* (car numbers-list) (car numbers-list))
11647 (square-each (cdr numbers-list))))) ; next-step-expression
11648 @end group
11649
11650 @group
11651 (square-each '(1 2 3))
11652 @result{} (1 4 9)
11653 @end group
11654 @end smallexample
11655
11656 @need 1200
11657 @noindent
11658 If @code{numbers-list} is empty, do nothing. But if it has content,
11659 construct a list combining the square of the first number in the list
11660 with the result of the recursive call.
11661
11662 (The example follows the pattern exactly: @code{nil} is returned if
11663 the numbers' list is empty. In practice, you would write the
11664 conditional so it carries out the action when the numbers' list is not
11665 empty.)
11666
11667 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function (@pxref{Recursion with
11668 list, , Recursion with a List}) is another example of an @code{every}
11669 pattern, except in this case, rather than bring the results together
11670 using @code{cons}, we print each element of output.
11671
11672 @need 1250
11673 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function looks like this:
11674
11675 @smallexample
11676 @group
11677 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11678 @end group
11679
11680 @group
11681 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11682 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11683 Uses recursion."
11684 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11685 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11686 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11687 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11688
11689 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11690 @end group
11691 @end smallexample
11692
11693 @need 1500
11694 The pattern for @code{print-elements-recursively} is:
11695
11696 @itemize @bullet
11697 @item
11698 When the list is empty, do nothing.
11699 @item
11700 But when the list has at least one element,
11701 @itemize @minus
11702 @item
11703 act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11704 @item
11705 and make a recursive call on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11706 @end itemize
11707 @end itemize
11708
11709 @node Accumulate
11710 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{accumulate}
11711 @cindex Accumulate, type of recursive pattern
11712 @cindex Recursive pattern: accumulate
11713
11714 Another recursive pattern is called the @code{accumulate} pattern. In
11715 the @code{accumulate} recursive pattern, an action is performed on
11716 every element of a list and the result of that action is accumulated
11717 with the results of performing the action on the other elements.
11718
11719 This is very like the `every' pattern using @code{cons}, except that
11720 @code{cons} is not used, but some other combiner.
11721
11722 @need 1500
11723 The pattern is:
11724
11725 @itemize @bullet
11726 @item
11727 If a list be empty, return zero or some other constant.
11728 @item
11729 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11730 @itemize @minus
11731 @item
11732 and combine that acted-on element, using @code{+} or
11733 some other combining function, with
11734 @item
11735 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11736 @end itemize
11737 @end itemize
11738
11739 @need 1500
11740 Here is an example:
11741
11742 @smallexample
11743 @group
11744 (defun add-elements (numbers-list)
11745 "Add the elements of NUMBERS-LIST together."
11746 (if (not numbers-list)
11747 0
11748 (+ (car numbers-list) (add-elements (cdr numbers-list)))))
11749 @end group
11750
11751 @group
11752 (add-elements '(1 2 3 4))
11753 @result{} 10
11754 @end group
11755 @end smallexample
11756
11757 @xref{Files List, , Making a List of Files}, for an example of the
11758 accumulate pattern.
11759
11760 @node Keep
11761 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{keep}
11762 @cindex Keep, type of recursive pattern
11763 @cindex Recursive pattern: keep
11764
11765 A third recursive pattern is called the @code{keep} pattern.
11766 In the @code{keep} recursive pattern, each element of a list is tested;
11767 the element is acted on and the results are kept only if the element
11768 meets a criterion.
11769
11770 Again, this is very like the `every' pattern, except the element is
11771 skipped unless it meets a criterion.
11772
11773 @need 1500
11774 The pattern has three parts:
11775
11776 @itemize @bullet
11777 @item
11778 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
11779 @item
11780 Else, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) passes
11781 a test
11782 @itemize @minus
11783 @item
11784 act on that element and combine it, using @code{cons} with
11785 @item
11786 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11787 @end itemize
11788 @item
11789 Otherwise, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) fails
11790 the test
11791 @itemize @minus
11792 @item
11793 skip on that element,
11794 @item
11795 and, recursively call the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11796 @end itemize
11797 @end itemize
11798
11799 @need 1500
11800 Here is an example that uses @code{cond}:
11801
11802 @smallexample
11803 @group
11804 (defun keep-three-letter-words (word-list)
11805 "Keep three letter words in WORD-LIST."
11806 (cond
11807 ;; First do-again-test: stop-condition
11808 ((not word-list) nil)
11809
11810 ;; Second do-again-test: when to act
11811 ((eq 3 (length (symbol-name (car word-list))))
11812 ;; combine acted-on element with recursive call on shorter list
11813 (cons (car word-list) (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list))))
11814
11815 ;; Third do-again-test: when to skip element;
11816 ;; recursively call shorter list with next-step expression
11817 (t (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list)))))
11818 @end group
11819
11820 @group
11821 (keep-three-letter-words '(one two three four five six))
11822 @result{} (one two six)
11823 @end group
11824 @end smallexample
11825
11826 It goes without saying that you need not use @code{nil} as the test for
11827 when to stop; and you can, of course, combine these patterns.
11828
11829 @node No Deferment
11830 @subsection Recursion without Deferments
11831 @cindex Deferment in recursion
11832 @cindex Recursion without Deferments
11833
11834 Let's consider again what happens with the @code{triangle-recursively}
11835 function. We will find that the intermediate calculations are
11836 deferred until all can be done.
11837
11838 @need 800
11839 Here is the function definition:
11840
11841 @smallexample
11842 @group
11843 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
11844 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11845 Uses recursion."
11846 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
11847 1 ; @r{then-part}
11848 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
11849 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11850 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11851 @end group
11852 @end smallexample
11853
11854 What happens when we call this function with a argument of 7?
11855
11856 The first instance of the @code{triangle-recursively} function adds
11857 the number 7 to the value returned by a second instance of
11858 @code{triangle-recursively}, an instance that has been passed an
11859 argument of 6. That is to say, the first calculation is:
11860
11861 @smallexample
11862 (+ 7 (triangle-recursively 6))
11863 @end smallexample
11864
11865 @noindent
11866 The first instance of @code{triangle-recursively}---you may want to
11867 think of it as a little robot---cannot complete its job. It must hand
11868 off the calculation for @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} to a second
11869 instance of the program, to a second robot. This second individual is
11870 completely different from the first one; it is, in the jargon, a
11871 `different instantiation'. Or, put another way, it is a different
11872 robot. It is the same model as the first; it calculates triangle
11873 numbers recursively; but it has a different serial number.
11874
11875 And what does @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} return? It returns the
11876 number 6 added to the value returned by evaluating
11877 @code{triangle-recursively} with an argument of 5. Using the robot
11878 metaphor, it asks yet another robot to help it.
11879
11880 @need 800
11881 Now the total is:
11882
11883 @smallexample
11884 (+ 7 6 (triangle-recursively 5))
11885 @end smallexample
11886
11887 @need 800
11888 And what happens next?
11889
11890 @smallexample
11891 (+ 7 6 5 (triangle-recursively 4))
11892 @end smallexample
11893
11894 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is called, except for the last
11895 time, it creates another instance of the program---another robot---and
11896 asks it to make a calculation.
11897
11898 @need 800
11899 Eventually, the full addition is set up and performed:
11900
11901 @smallexample
11902 (+ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1)
11903 @end smallexample
11904
11905 This design for the function defers the calculation of the first step
11906 until the second can be done, and defers that until the third can be
11907 done, and so on. Each deferment means the computer must remember what
11908 is being waited on. This is not a problem when there are only a few
11909 steps, as in this example. But it can be a problem when there are
11910 more steps.
11911
11912 @node No deferment solution
11913 @subsection No Deferment Solution
11914 @cindex No deferment solution
11915 @cindex Solution without deferment
11916
11917 The solution to the problem of deferred operations is to write in a
11918 manner that does not defer operations@footnote{The phrase @dfn{tail
11919 recursive} is used to describe such a process, one that uses
11920 `constant space'.}. This requires
11921 writing to a different pattern, often one that involves writing two
11922 function definitions, an `initialization' function and a `helper'
11923 function.
11924
11925 The `initialization' function sets up the job; the `helper' function
11926 does the work.
11927
11928 @need 1200
11929 Here are the two function definitions for adding up numbers. They are
11930 so simple, I find them hard to understand.
11931
11932 @smallexample
11933 @group
11934 (defun triangle-initialization (number)
11935 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11936 This is the `initialization' component of a two function
11937 duo that uses recursion."
11938 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 number))
11939 @end group
11940 @end smallexample
11941
11942 @smallexample
11943 @group
11944 (defun triangle-recursive-helper (sum counter number)
11945 "Return SUM, using COUNTER, through NUMBER inclusive.
11946 This is the `helper' component of a two function duo
11947 that uses recursion."
11948 (if (> counter number)
11949 sum
11950 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum}
11951 (1+ counter) ; @r{counter}
11952 number))) ; @r{number}
11953 @end group
11954 @end smallexample
11955
11956 @need 1250
11957 Install both function definitions by evaluating them, then call
11958 @code{triangle-initialization} with 2 rows:
11959
11960 @smallexample
11961 @group
11962 (triangle-initialization 2)
11963 @result{} 3
11964 @end group
11965 @end smallexample
11966
11967 The `initialization' function calls the first instance of the `helper'
11968 function with three arguments: zero, zero, and a number which is the
11969 number of rows in the triangle.
11970
11971 The first two arguments passed to the `helper' function are
11972 initialization values. These values are changed when
11973 @code{triangle-recursive-helper} invokes new instances.@footnote{The
11974 jargon is mildly confusing: @code{triangle-recursive-helper} uses a
11975 process that is iterative in a procedure that is recursive. The
11976 process is called iterative because the computer need only record the
11977 three values, @code{sum}, @code{counter}, and @code{number}; the
11978 procedure is recursive because the function `calls itself'. On the
11979 other hand, both the process and the procedure used by
11980 @code{triangle-recursively} are called recursive. The word
11981 `recursive' has different meanings in the two contexts.}
11982
11983 Let's see what happens when we have a triangle that has one row. (This
11984 triangle will have one pebble in it!)
11985
11986 @need 1200
11987 @code{triangle-initialization} will call its helper with
11988 the arguments @w{@code{0 0 1}}. That function will run the conditional
11989 test whether @code{(> counter number)}:
11990
11991 @smallexample
11992 (> 0 1)
11993 @end smallexample
11994
11995 @need 1200
11996 @noindent
11997 and find that the result is false, so it will invoke
11998 the else-part of the @code{if} clause:
11999
12000 @smallexample
12001 @group
12002 (triangle-recursive-helper
12003 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12004 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12005 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12006 @end group
12007 @end smallexample
12008
12009 @need 800
12010 @noindent
12011 which will first compute:
12012
12013 @smallexample
12014 @group
12015 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ 0 0) ; @r{sum}
12016 (1+ 0) ; @r{counter}
12017 1) ; @r{number}
12018 @exdent which is:
12019
12020 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 1)
12021 @end group
12022 @end smallexample
12023
12024 Again, @code{(> counter number)} will be false, so again, the Lisp
12025 interpreter will evaluate @code{triangle-recursive-helper}, creating a
12026 new instance with new arguments.
12027
12028 @need 800
12029 This new instance will be;
12030
12031 @smallexample
12032 @group
12033 (triangle-recursive-helper
12034 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12035 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12036 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12037
12038 @exdent which is:
12039
12040 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 1)
12041 @end group
12042 @end smallexample
12043
12044 In this case, the @code{(> counter number)} test will be true! So the
12045 instance will return the value of the sum, which will be 1, as
12046 expected.
12047
12048 Now, let's pass @code{triangle-initialization} an argument
12049 of 2, to find out how many pebbles there are in a triangle with two rows.
12050
12051 That function calls @code{(triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 2)}.
12052
12053 @need 800
12054 In stages, the instances called will be:
12055
12056 @smallexample
12057 @group
12058 @r{sum counter number}
12059 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 2)
12060
12061 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 2)
12062
12063 (triangle-recursive-helper 3 3 2)
12064 @end group
12065 @end smallexample
12066
12067 When the last instance is called, the @code{(> counter number)} test
12068 will be true, so the instance will return the value of @code{sum},
12069 which will be 3.
12070
12071 This kind of pattern helps when you are writing functions that can use
12072 many resources in a computer.
12073
12074 @need 1500
12075 @node Looping exercise
12076 @section Looping Exercise
12077
12078 @itemize @bullet
12079 @item
12080 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} in which each row has a
12081 value which is the square of the row number. Use a @code{while} loop.
12082
12083 @item
12084 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} that multiplies instead of
12085 adds the values.
12086
12087 @item
12088 Rewrite these two functions recursively. Rewrite these functions
12089 using @code{cond}.
12090
12091 @c comma in printed title causes problem in Info cross reference
12092 @item
12093 Write a function for Texinfo mode that creates an index entry at the
12094 beginning of a paragraph for every @samp{@@dfn} within the paragraph.
12095 (In a Texinfo file, @samp{@@dfn} marks a definition. This book is
12096 written in Texinfo.)
12097
12098 Many of the functions you will need are described in two of the
12099 previous chapters, @ref{Cutting & Storing Text, , Cutting and Storing
12100 Text}, and @ref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}. If you use
12101 @code{forward-paragraph} to put the index entry at the beginning of
12102 the paragraph, you will have to use @w{@kbd{C-h f}}
12103 (@code{describe-function}) to find out how to make the command go
12104 backwards.
12105
12106 For more information, see
12107 @ifinfo
12108 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating Definitions, texinfo}.
12109 @end ifinfo
12110 @ifhtml
12111 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating, texinfo, Texinfo Manual}, which goes to
12112 a Texinfo manual in the current directory. Or, if you are on the
12113 Internet, see
12114 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/manual/texinfo/}
12115 @end ifhtml
12116 @iftex
12117 ``Indicating Definitions, Commands, etc.'' in @cite{Texinfo, The GNU
12118 Documentation Format}.
12119 @end iftex
12120 @end itemize
12121
12122 @node Regexp Search
12123 @chapter Regular Expression Searches
12124 @cindex Searches, illustrating
12125 @cindex Regular expression searches
12126 @cindex Patterns, searching for
12127 @cindex Motion by sentence and paragraph
12128 @cindex Sentences, movement by
12129 @cindex Paragraphs, movement by
12130
12131 Regular expression searches are used extensively in GNU Emacs. The
12132 two functions, @code{forward-sentence} and @code{forward-paragraph},
12133 illustrate these searches well. They use regular expressions to find
12134 where to move point. The phrase `regular expression' is often written
12135 as `regexp'.
12136
12137 Regular expression searches are described in @ref{Regexp Search, ,
12138 Regular Expression Search, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, as well as in
12139 @ref{Regular Expressions, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
12140 Manual}. In writing this chapter, I am presuming that you have at
12141 least a mild acquaintance with them. The major point to remember is
12142 that regular expressions permit you to search for patterns as well as
12143 for literal strings of characters. For example, the code in
12144 @code{forward-sentence} searches for the pattern of possible
12145 characters that could mark the end of a sentence, and moves point to
12146 that spot.
12147
12148 Before looking at the code for the @code{forward-sentence} function, it
12149 is worth considering what the pattern that marks the end of a sentence
12150 must be. The pattern is discussed in the next section; following that
12151 is a description of the regular expression search function,
12152 @code{re-search-forward}. The @code{forward-sentence} function
12153 is described in the section following. Finally, the
12154 @code{forward-paragraph} function is described in the last section of
12155 this chapter. @code{forward-paragraph} is a complex function that
12156 introduces several new features.
12157
12158 @menu
12159 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
12160 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
12161 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
12162 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
12163 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
12164 * Regexp Review::
12165 * re-search Exercises::
12166 @end menu
12167
12168 @node sentence-end
12169 @section The Regular Expression for @code{sentence-end}
12170 @findex sentence-end
12171
12172 The symbol @code{sentence-end} is bound to the pattern that marks the
12173 end of a sentence. What should this regular expression be?
12174
12175 Clearly, a sentence may be ended by a period, a question mark, or an
12176 exclamation mark. Indeed, in English, only clauses that end with one
12177 of those three characters should be considered the end of a sentence.
12178 This means that the pattern should include the character set:
12179
12180 @smallexample
12181 [.?!]
12182 @end smallexample
12183
12184 However, we do not want @code{forward-sentence} merely to jump to a
12185 period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark, because such a character
12186 might be used in the middle of a sentence. A period, for example, is
12187 used after abbreviations. So other information is needed.
12188
12189 According to convention, you type two spaces after every sentence, but
12190 only one space after a period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark in
12191 the body of a sentence. So a period, a question mark, or an exclamation
12192 mark followed by two spaces is a good indicator of an end of sentence.
12193 However, in a file, the two spaces may instead be a tab or the end of a
12194 line. This means that the regular expression should include these three
12195 items as alternatives.
12196
12197 @need 800
12198 This group of alternatives will look like this:
12199
12200 @smallexample
12201 @group
12202 \\($\\| \\| \\)
12203 ^ ^^
12204 TAB SPC
12205 @end group
12206 @end smallexample
12207
12208 @noindent
12209 Here, @samp{$} indicates the end of the line, and I have pointed out
12210 where the tab and two spaces are inserted in the expression. Both are
12211 inserted by putting the actual characters into the expression.
12212
12213 Two backslashes, @samp{\\}, are required before the parentheses and
12214 vertical bars: the first backslash quotes the following backslash in
12215 Emacs; and the second indicates that the following character, the
12216 parenthesis or the vertical bar, is special.
12217
12218 @need 1000
12219 Also, a sentence may be followed by one or more carriage returns, like
12220 this:
12221
12222 @smallexample
12223 @group
12224 [
12225 ]*
12226 @end group
12227 @end smallexample
12228
12229 @noindent
12230 Like tabs and spaces, a carriage return is inserted into a regular
12231 expression by inserting it literally. The asterisk indicates that the
12232 @key{RET} is repeated zero or more times.
12233
12234 But a sentence end does not consist only of a period, a question mark or
12235 an exclamation mark followed by appropriate space: a closing quotation
12236 mark or a closing brace of some kind may precede the space. Indeed more
12237 than one such mark or brace may precede the space. These require a
12238 expression that looks like this:
12239
12240 @smallexample
12241 []\"')@}]*
12242 @end smallexample
12243
12244 In this expression, the first @samp{]} is the first character in the
12245 expression; the second character is @samp{"}, which is preceded by a
12246 @samp{\} to tell Emacs the @samp{"} is @emph{not} special. The last
12247 three characters are @samp{'}, @samp{)}, and @samp{@}}.
12248
12249 All this suggests what the regular expression pattern for matching the
12250 end of a sentence should be; and, indeed, if we evaluate
12251 @code{sentence-end} we find that it returns the following value:
12252
12253 @smallexample
12254 @group
12255 sentence-end
12256 @result{} "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12257 ]*"
12258 @end group
12259 @end smallexample
12260
12261 @noindent
12262 (Well, not in GNU Emacs 22; that is because of an effort to make the
12263 process simpler and to handle more glyphs and languages. When the
12264 value of @code{sentence-end} is @code{nil}, then use the value defined
12265 by the function @code{sentence-end}. (Here is a use of the difference
12266 between a value and a function in Emacs Lisp.) The function returns a
12267 value constructed from the variables @code{sentence-end-base},
12268 @code{sentence-end-double-space}, @code{sentence-end-without-period},
12269 and @code{sentence-end-without-space}. The critical variable is
12270 @code{sentence-end-base}; its global value is similar to the one
12271 described above but it also contains two additional quotation marks.
12272 These have differing degrees of curliness. The
12273 @code{sentence-end-without-period} variable, when true, tells Emacs
12274 that a sentence may end without a period, such as text in Thai.)
12275
12276 @ignore
12277 @noindent
12278 (Note that here the @key{TAB}, two spaces, and @key{RET} are shown
12279 literally in the pattern.)
12280
12281 This regular expression can be deciphered as follows:
12282
12283 @table @code
12284 @item [.?!]
12285 The first part of the pattern is the three characters, a period, a question
12286 mark and an exclamation mark, within square brackets. The pattern must
12287 begin with one or other of these characters.
12288
12289 @item []\"')@}]*
12290 The second part of the pattern is the group of closing braces and
12291 quotation marks, which can appear zero or more times. These may follow
12292 the period, question mark or exclamation mark. In a regular expression,
12293 the backslash, @samp{\}, followed by the double quotation mark,
12294 @samp{"}, indicates the class of string-quote characters. Usually, the
12295 double quotation mark is the only character in this class. The
12296 asterisk, @samp{*}, indicates that the items in the previous group (the
12297 group surrounded by square brackets, @samp{[]}) may be repeated zero or
12298 more times.
12299
12300 @item \\($\\| \\| \\)
12301 The third part of the pattern is one or other of: either the end of a
12302 line, or two blank spaces, or a tab. The double back-slashes are used
12303 to prevent Emacs from reading the parentheses and vertical bars as part
12304 of the search pattern; the parentheses are used to mark the group and
12305 the vertical bars are used to indicated that the patterns to either side
12306 of them are alternatives. The dollar sign is used to indicate the end
12307 of a line and both the two spaces and the tab are each inserted as is to
12308 indicate what they are.
12309
12310 @item [@key{RET}]*
12311 Finally, the last part of the pattern indicates that the end of the line
12312 or the whitespace following the period, question mark or exclamation
12313 mark may, but need not, be followed by one or more carriage returns. In
12314 the pattern, the carriage return is inserted as an actual carriage
12315 return between square brackets but here it is shown as @key{RET}.
12316 @end table
12317 @end ignore
12318
12319 @node re-search-forward
12320 @section The @code{re-search-forward} Function
12321 @findex re-search-forward
12322
12323 The @code{re-search-forward} function is very like the
12324 @code{search-forward} function. (@xref{search-forward, , The
12325 @code{search-forward} Function}.)
12326
12327 @code{re-search-forward} searches for a regular expression. If the
12328 search is successful, it leaves point immediately after the last
12329 character in the target. If the search is backwards, it leaves point
12330 just before the first character in the target. You may tell
12331 @code{re-search-forward} to return @code{t} for true. (Moving point
12332 is therefore a `side effect'.)
12333
12334 Like @code{search-forward}, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes
12335 four arguments:
12336
12337 @enumerate
12338 @item
12339 The first argument is the regular expression that the function searches
12340 for. The regular expression will be a string between quotation marks.
12341
12342 @item
12343 The optional second argument limits how far the function will search; it is a
12344 bound, which is specified as a position in the buffer.
12345
12346 @item
12347 The optional third argument specifies how the function responds to
12348 failure: @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
12349 signal an error (and print a message) when the search fails; any other
12350 value causes it to return @code{nil} if the search fails and @code{t}
12351 if the search succeeds.
12352
12353 @item
12354 The optional fourth argument is the repeat count. A negative repeat
12355 count causes @code{re-search-forward} to search backwards.
12356 @end enumerate
12357
12358 @need 800
12359 The template for @code{re-search-forward} looks like this:
12360
12361 @smallexample
12362 @group
12363 (re-search-forward "@var{regular-expression}"
12364 @var{limit-of-search}
12365 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
12366 @var{repeat-count})
12367 @end group
12368 @end smallexample
12369
12370 The second, third, and fourth arguments are optional. However, if you
12371 want to pass a value to either or both of the last two arguments, you
12372 must also pass a value to all the preceding arguments. Otherwise, the
12373 Lisp interpreter will mistake which argument you are passing the value
12374 to.
12375
12376 @need 1200
12377 In the @code{forward-sentence} function, the regular expression will be
12378 the value of the variable @code{sentence-end}. In simple form, that is:
12379
12380 @smallexample
12381 @group
12382 "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12383 ]*"
12384 @end group
12385 @end smallexample
12386
12387 @noindent
12388 The limit of the search will be the end of the paragraph (since a
12389 sentence cannot go beyond a paragraph). If the search fails, the
12390 function will return @code{nil}; and the repeat count will be provided
12391 by the argument to the @code{forward-sentence} function.
12392
12393 @node forward-sentence
12394 @section @code{forward-sentence}
12395 @findex forward-sentence
12396
12397 The command to move the cursor forward a sentence is a straightforward
12398 illustration of how to use regular expression searches in Emacs Lisp.
12399 Indeed, the function looks longer and more complicated than it is; this
12400 is because the function is designed to go backwards as well as forwards;
12401 and, optionally, over more than one sentence. The function is usually
12402 bound to the key command @kbd{M-e}.
12403
12404 @menu
12405 * Complete forward-sentence::
12406 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
12407 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
12408 @end menu
12409
12410 @ifnottex
12411 @node Complete forward-sentence
12412 @unnumberedsubsec Complete @code{forward-sentence} function definition
12413 @end ifnottex
12414
12415 @need 1250
12416 Here is the code for @code{forward-sentence}:
12417
12418 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12419 @smallexample
12420 @group
12421 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12422 "Move forward to next `sentence-end'. With argument, repeat.
12423 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to `sentence-beginning'.
12424
12425 The variable `sentence-end' is a regular expression that matches ends of
12426 sentences. Also, every paragraph boundary terminates sentences as well."
12427 @end group
12428 @group
12429 (interactive "p")
12430 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12431 (let ((opoint (point))
12432 (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12433 (while (< arg 0)
12434 (let ((pos (point))
12435 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12436 (if (and (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)
12437 (or (< (match-end 0) pos)
12438 (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)))
12439 (goto-char (match-end 0))
12440 (goto-char par-beg)))
12441 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12442 @end group
12443 @group
12444 (while (> arg 0)
12445 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12446 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12447 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12448 (goto-char par-end)))
12449 (setq arg (1- arg)))
12450 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)))
12451 @end group
12452 @end smallexample
12453
12454 @ignore
12455 GNU Emacs 21
12456 @smallexample
12457 @group
12458 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12459 "Move forward to next sentence-end. With argument, repeat.
12460 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to sentence-beginning.
12461 Sentence ends are identified by the value of sentence-end
12462 treated as a regular expression. Also, every paragraph boundary
12463 terminates sentences as well."
12464 @end group
12465 @group
12466 (interactive "p")
12467 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12468 (while (< arg 0)
12469 (let ((par-beg
12470 (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12471 (if (re-search-backward
12472 (concat sentence-end "[^ \t\n]") par-beg t)
12473 (goto-char (1- (match-end 0)))
12474 (goto-char par-beg)))
12475 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12476 (while (> arg 0)
12477 (let ((par-end
12478 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12479 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12480 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12481 (goto-char par-end)))
12482 (setq arg (1- arg))))
12483 @end group
12484 @end smallexample
12485 @end ignore
12486
12487 The function looks long at first sight and it is best to look at its
12488 skeleton first, and then its muscle. The way to see the skeleton is to
12489 look at the expressions that start in the left-most columns:
12490
12491 @smallexample
12492 @group
12493 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12494 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
12495 (interactive "p")
12496 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12497 (let ((opoint (point)) (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12498 (while (< arg 0)
12499 (let ((pos (point))
12500 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12501 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-backwards}
12502 (while (> arg 0)
12503 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12504 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-forwards}
12505 @var{handle-forms-and-equivalent}
12506 @end group
12507 @end smallexample
12508
12509 This looks much simpler! The function definition consists of
12510 documentation, an @code{interactive} expression, an @code{or}
12511 expression, a @code{let} expression, and @code{while} loops.
12512
12513 Let's look at each of these parts in turn.
12514
12515 We note that the documentation is thorough and understandable.
12516
12517 The function has an @code{interactive "p"} declaration. This means
12518 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the
12519 function as its argument. (This will be a number.) If the function
12520 is not passed an argument (it is optional) then the argument
12521 @code{arg} will be bound to 1.
12522
12523 When @code{forward-sentence} is called non-interactively without an
12524 argument, @code{arg} is bound to @code{nil}. The @code{or} expression
12525 handles this. What it does is either leave the value of @code{arg} as
12526 it is, but only if @code{arg} is bound to a value; or it sets the
12527 value of @code{arg} to 1, in the case when @code{arg} is bound to
12528 @code{nil}.
12529
12530 Next is a @code{let}. That specifies the values of two local
12531 variables, @code{point} and @code{sentence-end}. The local value of
12532 point, from before the search, is used in the
12533 @code{constrain-to-field} function which handles forms and
12534 equivalents. The @code{sentence-end} variable is set by the
12535 @code{sentence-end} function.
12536
12537 @node fwd-sentence while loops
12538 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{while} loops
12539
12540 Two @code{while} loops follow. The first @code{while} has a
12541 true-or-false-test that tests true if the prefix argument for
12542 @code{forward-sentence} is a negative number. This is for going
12543 backwards. The body of this loop is similar to the body of the second
12544 @code{while} clause, but it is not exactly the same. We will skip
12545 this @code{while} loop and concentrate on the second @code{while}
12546 loop.
12547
12548 @need 1500
12549 The second @code{while} loop is for moving point forward. Its skeleton
12550 looks like this:
12551
12552 @smallexample
12553 @group
12554 (while (> arg 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
12555 (let @var{varlist}
12556 (if (@var{true-or-false-test})
12557 @var{then-part}
12558 @var{else-part}
12559 (setq arg (1- arg)))) ; @code{while} @r{loop decrementer}
12560 @end group
12561 @end smallexample
12562
12563 The @code{while} loop is of the decrementing kind.
12564 (@xref{Decrementing Loop, , A Loop with a Decrementing Counter}.) It
12565 has a true-or-false-test that tests true so long as the counter (in
12566 this case, the variable @code{arg}) is greater than zero; and it has a
12567 decrementer that subtracts 1 from the value of the counter every time
12568 the loop repeats.
12569
12570 If no prefix argument is given to @code{forward-sentence}, which is
12571 the most common way the command is used, this @code{while} loop will
12572 run once, since the value of @code{arg} will be 1.
12573
12574 The body of the @code{while} loop consists of a @code{let} expression,
12575 which creates and binds a local variable, and has, as its body, an
12576 @code{if} expression.
12577
12578 @need 1250
12579 The body of the @code{while} loop looks like this:
12580
12581 @smallexample
12582 @group
12583 (let ((par-end
12584 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12585 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12586 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12587 (goto-char par-end)))
12588 @end group
12589 @end smallexample
12590
12591 The @code{let} expression creates and binds the local variable
12592 @code{par-end}. As we shall see, this local variable is designed to
12593 provide a bound or limit to the regular expression search. If the
12594 search fails to find a proper sentence ending in the paragraph, it will
12595 stop on reaching the end of the paragraph.
12596
12597 But first, let us examine how @code{par-end} is bound to the value of
12598 the end of the paragraph. What happens is that the @code{let} sets the
12599 value of @code{par-end} to the value returned when the Lisp interpreter
12600 evaluates the expression
12601
12602 @smallexample
12603 @group
12604 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))
12605 @end group
12606 @end smallexample
12607
12608 @noindent
12609 In this expression, @code{(end-of-paragraph-text)} moves point to the
12610 end of the paragraph, @code{(point)} returns the value of point, and then
12611 @code{save-excursion} restores point to its original position. Thus,
12612 the @code{let} binds @code{par-end} to the value returned by the
12613 @code{save-excursion} expression, which is the position of the end of
12614 the paragraph. (The @code{end-of-paragraph-text} function uses
12615 @code{forward-paragraph}, which we will discuss shortly.)
12616
12617 @need 1200
12618 Emacs next evaluates the body of the @code{let}, which is an @code{if}
12619 expression that looks like this:
12620
12621 @smallexample
12622 @group
12623 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t) ; @r{if-part}
12624 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n") ; @r{then-part}
12625 (goto-char par-end))) ; @r{else-part}
12626 @end group
12627 @end smallexample
12628
12629 The @code{if} tests whether its first argument is true and if so,
12630 evaluates its then-part; otherwise, the Emacs Lisp interpreter
12631 evaluates the else-part. The true-or-false-test of the @code{if}
12632 expression is the regular expression search.
12633
12634 It may seem odd to have what looks like the `real work' of
12635 the @code{forward-sentence} function buried here, but this is a common
12636 way this kind of operation is carried out in Lisp.
12637
12638 @node fwd-sentence re-search
12639 @unnumberedsubsec The regular expression search
12640
12641 The @code{re-search-forward} function searches for the end of the
12642 sentence, that is, for the pattern defined by the @code{sentence-end}
12643 regular expression. If the pattern is found---if the end of the sentence is
12644 found---then the @code{re-search-forward} function does two things:
12645
12646 @enumerate
12647 @item
12648 The @code{re-search-forward} function carries out a side effect, which
12649 is to move point to the end of the occurrence found.
12650
12651 @item
12652 The @code{re-search-forward} function returns a value of true. This is
12653 the value received by the @code{if}, and means that the search was
12654 successful.
12655 @end enumerate
12656
12657 @noindent
12658 The side effect, the movement of point, is completed before the
12659 @code{if} function is handed the value returned by the successful
12660 conclusion of the search.
12661
12662 When the @code{if} function receives the value of true from a successful
12663 call to @code{re-search-forward}, the @code{if} evaluates the then-part,
12664 which is the expression @code{(skip-chars-backward " \t\n")}. This
12665 expression moves backwards over any blank spaces, tabs or carriage
12666 returns until a printed character is found and then leaves point after
12667 the character. Since point has already been moved to the end of the
12668 pattern that marks the end of the sentence, this action leaves point
12669 right after the closing printed character of the sentence, which is
12670 usually a period.
12671
12672 On the other hand, if the @code{re-search-forward} function fails to
12673 find a pattern marking the end of the sentence, the function returns
12674 false. The false then causes the @code{if} to evaluate its third
12675 argument, which is @code{(goto-char par-end)}: it moves point to the
12676 end of the paragraph.
12677
12678 (And if the text is in a form or equivalent, and point may not move
12679 fully, then the @code{constrain-to-field} function comes into play.)
12680
12681 Regular expression searches are exceptionally useful and the pattern
12682 illustrated by @code{re-search-forward}, in which the search is the
12683 test of an @code{if} expression, is handy. You will see or write code
12684 incorporating this pattern often.
12685
12686 @node forward-paragraph
12687 @section @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
12688 @findex forward-paragraph
12689
12690 @ignore
12691 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12692 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
12693 "Move forward to end of paragraph.
12694 With argument ARG, do it ARG times;
12695 a negative argument ARG = -N means move backward N paragraphs.
12696
12697 A line which `paragraph-start' matches either separates paragraphs
12698 \(if `paragraph-separate' matches it also) or is the first line of a paragraph.
12699 A paragraph end is the beginning of a line which is not part of the paragraph
12700 to which the end of the previous line belongs, or the end of the buffer.
12701 Returns the count of paragraphs left to move."
12702 (interactive "p")
12703 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12704 (let* ((opoint (point))
12705 (fill-prefix-regexp
12706 (and fill-prefix (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
12707 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12708 (regexp-quote fill-prefix)))
12709 ;; Remove ^ from paragraph-start and paragraph-sep if they are there.
12710 ;; These regexps shouldn't be anchored, because we look for them
12711 ;; starting at the left-margin. This allows paragraph commands to
12712 ;; work normally with indented text.
12713 ;; This hack will not find problem cases like "whatever\\|^something".
12714 (parstart (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-start))
12715 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-start 0)))
12716 (substring paragraph-start 1)
12717 paragraph-start))
12718 (parsep (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-separate))
12719 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-separate 0)))
12720 (substring paragraph-separate 1)
12721 paragraph-separate))
12722 (parsep
12723 (if fill-prefix-regexp
12724 (concat parsep "\\|"
12725 fill-prefix-regexp "[ \t]*$")
12726 parsep))
12727 ;; This is used for searching.
12728 (sp-parstart (concat "^[ \t]*\\(?:" parstart "\\|" parsep "\\)"))
12729 start found-start)
12730 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp)))
12731 (if (and (not (looking-at parsep))
12732 (re-search-backward "^\n" (max (1- (point)) (point-min)) t)
12733 (looking-at parsep))
12734 (setq arg (1+ arg))
12735 (setq start (point))
12736 ;; Move back over paragraph-separating lines.
12737 (forward-char -1) (beginning-of-line)
12738 (while (and (not (bobp))
12739 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12740 (looking-at parsep)))
12741 (forward-line -1))
12742 (if (bobp)
12743 nil
12744 (setq arg (1+ arg))
12745 ;; Go to end of the previous (non-separating) line.
12746 (end-of-line)
12747 ;; Search back for line that starts or separates paragraphs.
12748 (if (if fill-prefix-regexp
12749 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
12750 (let (multiple-lines)
12751 (while (and (progn (beginning-of-line) (not (bobp)))
12752 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12753 (not (looking-at parsep)))
12754 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
12755 (unless (= (point) start)
12756 (setq multiple-lines t))
12757 (forward-line -1))
12758 (move-to-left-margin)
12759 ;; This deleted code caused a long hanging-indent line
12760 ;; not to be filled together with the following lines.
12761 ;; ;; Don't move back over a line before the paragraph
12762 ;; ;; which doesn't start with fill-prefix
12763 ;; ;; unless that is the only line we've moved over.
12764 ;; (and (not (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
12765 ;; multiple-lines
12766 ;; (forward-line 1))
12767 (not (bobp)))
12768 (while (and (re-search-backward sp-parstart nil 1)
12769 (setq found-start t)
12770 ;; Found a candidate, but need to check if it is a
12771 ;; REAL parstart.
12772 (progn (setq start (point))
12773 (move-to-left-margin)
12774 (not (looking-at parsep)))
12775 (not (and (looking-at parstart)
12776 (or (not use-hard-newlines)
12777 (bobp)
12778 (get-text-property
12779 (1- start) 'hard)))))
12780 (setq found-start nil)
12781 (goto-char start))
12782 found-start)
12783 ;; Found one.
12784 (progn
12785 ;; Move forward over paragraph separators.
12786 ;; We know this cannot reach the place we started
12787 ;; because we know we moved back over a non-separator.
12788 (while (and (not (eobp))
12789 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12790 (looking-at parsep)))
12791 (forward-line 1))
12792 ;; If line before paragraph is just margin, back up to there.
12793 (end-of-line 0)
12794 (if (> (current-column) (current-left-margin))
12795 (forward-char 1)
12796 (skip-chars-backward " \t")
12797 (if (not (bolp))
12798 (forward-line 1))))
12799 ;; No starter or separator line => use buffer beg.
12800 (goto-char (point-min))))))
12801
12802 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
12803 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
12804 (while (and (not (eobp))
12805 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
12806 (looking-at parsep))
12807 (forward-line 1))
12808 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
12809 ;; ... and one more line.
12810 (forward-line 1)
12811 (if fill-prefix-regexp
12812 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
12813 (while (and (not (eobp))
12814 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
12815 (not (looking-at parsep))
12816 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
12817 (forward-line 1))
12818 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
12819 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
12820 (goto-char start)
12821 (not (eobp)))
12822 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12823 (not (looking-at parsep)))
12824 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
12825 (and use-hard-newlines
12826 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
12827 (forward-char 1))
12828 (if (< (point) (point-max))
12829 (goto-char start))))
12830 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)
12831 ;; Return the number of steps that could not be done.
12832 arg))
12833 @end ignore
12834
12835 The @code{forward-paragraph} function moves point forward to the end
12836 of the paragraph. It is usually bound to @kbd{M-@}} and makes use of a
12837 number of functions that are important in themselves, including
12838 @code{let*}, @code{match-beginning}, and @code{looking-at}.
12839
12840 The function definition for @code{forward-paragraph} is considerably
12841 longer than the function definition for @code{forward-sentence}
12842 because it works with a paragraph, each line of which may begin with a
12843 fill prefix.
12844
12845 A fill prefix consists of a string of characters that are repeated at
12846 the beginning of each line. For example, in Lisp code, it is a
12847 convention to start each line of a paragraph-long comment with
12848 @samp{;;; }. In Text mode, four blank spaces make up another common
12849 fill prefix, creating an indented paragraph. (@xref{Fill Prefix, , ,
12850 emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for more information about fill
12851 prefixes.)
12852
12853 The existence of a fill prefix means that in addition to being able to
12854 find the end of a paragraph whose lines begin on the left-most
12855 column, the @code{forward-paragraph} function must be able to find the
12856 end of a paragraph when all or many of the lines in the buffer begin
12857 with the fill prefix.
12858
12859 Moreover, it is sometimes practical to ignore a fill prefix that
12860 exists, especially when blank lines separate paragraphs.
12861 This is an added complication.
12862
12863 @menu
12864 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
12865 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
12866 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
12867 @end menu
12868
12869 @ifnottex
12870 @node forward-paragraph in brief
12871 @unnumberedsubsec Shortened @code{forward-paragraph} function definition
12872 @end ifnottex
12873
12874 Rather than print all of the @code{forward-paragraph} function, we
12875 will only print parts of it. Read without preparation, the function
12876 can be daunting!
12877
12878 @need 800
12879 In outline, the function looks like this:
12880
12881 @smallexample
12882 @group
12883 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
12884 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
12885 (interactive "p")
12886 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12887 (let*
12888 @var{varlist}
12889 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp))) ; @r{backward-moving-code}
12890 @dots{}
12891 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp))) ; @r{forward-moving-code}
12892 @dots{}
12893 @end group
12894 @end smallexample
12895
12896 The first parts of the function are routine: the function's argument
12897 list consists of one optional argument. Documentation follows.
12898
12899 The lower case @samp{p} in the @code{interactive} declaration means
12900 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the function.
12901 This will be a number, and is the repeat count of how many paragraphs
12902 point will move. The @code{or} expression in the next line handles
12903 the common case when no argument is passed to the function, which occurs
12904 if the function is called from other code rather than interactively.
12905 This case was described earlier. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
12906 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Now we reach the end of the
12907 familiar part of this function.
12908
12909 @node fwd-para let
12910 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{let*} expression
12911
12912 The next line of the @code{forward-paragraph} function begins a
12913 @code{let*} expression. This is a different than @code{let}. The
12914 symbol is @code{let*} not @code{let}.
12915
12916 The @code{let*} special form is like @code{let} except that Emacs sets
12917 each variable in sequence, one after another, and variables in the
12918 latter part of the varlist can make use of the values to which Emacs
12919 set variables in the earlier part of the varlist.
12920
12921 @ignore
12922 ( refappend save-excursion, , code save-excursion in code append-to-buffer .)
12923 @end ignore
12924
12925 (@ref{append save-excursion, , @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
12926
12927 In the @code{let*} expression in this function, Emacs binds a total of
12928 seven variables: @code{opoint}, @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
12929 @code{parstart}, @code{parsep}, @code{sp-parstart}, @code{start}, and
12930 @code{found-start}.
12931
12932 The variable @code{parsep} appears twice, first, to remove instances
12933 of @samp{^}, and second, to handle fill prefixes.
12934
12935 The variable @code{opoint} is just the value of @code{point}. As you
12936 can guess, it is used in a @code{constrain-to-field} expression, just
12937 as in @code{forward-sentence}.
12938
12939 The variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is set to the value returned by
12940 evaluating the following list:
12941
12942 @smallexample
12943 @group
12944 (and fill-prefix
12945 (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
12946 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12947 (regexp-quote fill-prefix))
12948 @end group
12949 @end smallexample
12950
12951 @noindent
12952 This is an expression whose first element is the @code{and} special form.
12953
12954 As we learned earlier (@pxref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new}
12955 function}), the @code{and} special form evaluates each of its
12956 arguments until one of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in
12957 which case the @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if
12958 none of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value
12959 resulting from evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such
12960 a value is not @code{nil}, it is considered true in Lisp.) In other
12961 words, an @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its
12962 arguments are true.
12963 @findex and
12964
12965 In this case, the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to a
12966 non-@code{nil} value only if the following four expressions produce a
12967 true (i.e., a non-@code{nil}) value when they are evaluated; otherwise,
12968 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to @code{nil}.
12969
12970 @table @code
12971 @item fill-prefix
12972 When this variable is evaluated, the value of the fill prefix, if any,
12973 is returned. If there is no fill prefix, this variable returns
12974 @code{nil}.
12975
12976 @item (not (equal fill-prefix "")
12977 This expression checks whether an existing fill prefix is an empty
12978 string, that is, a string with no characters in it. An empty string is
12979 not a useful fill prefix.
12980
12981 @item (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12982 This expression returns @code{nil} if the variable
12983 @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix} has been turned on by being set to a
12984 true value such as @code{t}.
12985
12986 @item (regexp-quote fill-prefix)
12987 This is the last argument to the @code{and} special form. If all the
12988 arguments to the @code{and} are true, the value resulting from
12989 evaluating this expression will be returned by the @code{and} expression
12990 and bound to the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
12991 @end table
12992
12993 @findex regexp-quote
12994 @noindent
12995 The result of evaluating this @code{and} expression successfully is that
12996 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be bound to the value of
12997 @code{fill-prefix} as modified by the @code{regexp-quote} function.
12998 What @code{regexp-quote} does is read a string and return a regular
12999 expression that will exactly match the string and match nothing else.
13000 This means that @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be set to a value that
13001 will exactly match the fill prefix if the fill prefix exists.
13002 Otherwise, the variable will be set to @code{nil}.
13003
13004 The next two local variables in the @code{let*} expression are
13005 designed to remove instances of @samp{^} from @code{parstart} and
13006 @code{parsep}, the local variables which indicate the paragraph start
13007 and the paragraph separator. The next expression sets @code{parsep}
13008 again. That is to handle fill prefixes.
13009
13010 This is the setting that requires the definition call @code{let*}
13011 rather than @code{let}. The true-or-false-test for the @code{if}
13012 depends on whether the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} evaluates to
13013 @code{nil} or some other value.
13014
13015 If @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does not have a value, Emacs evaluates
13016 the else-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to
13017 its local value. (@code{parsep} is a regular expression that matches
13018 what separates paragraphs.)
13019
13020 But if @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does have a value, Emacs evaluates
13021 the then-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to a
13022 regular expression that includes the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} as part
13023 of the pattern.
13024
13025 Specifically, @code{parsep} is set to the original value of the
13026 paragraph separate regular expression concatenated with an alternative
13027 expression that consists of the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} followed by
13028 optional whitespace to the end of the line. The whitespace is defined
13029 by @w{@code{"[ \t]*$"}}.) The @samp{\\|} defines this portion of the
13030 regexp as an alternative to @code{parsep}.
13031
13032 According to a comment in the code, the next local variable,
13033 @code{sp-parstart}, is used for searching, and then the final two,
13034 @code{start} and @code{found-start}, are set to @code{nil}.
13035
13036 Now we get into the body of the @code{let*}. The first part of the body
13037 of the @code{let*} deals with the case when the function is given a
13038 negative argument and is therefore moving backwards. We will skip this
13039 section.
13040
13041 @node fwd-para while
13042 @unnumberedsubsec The forward motion @code{while} loop
13043
13044 The second part of the body of the @code{let*} deals with forward
13045 motion. It is a @code{while} loop that repeats itself so long as the
13046 value of @code{arg} is greater than zero. In the most common use of
13047 the function, the value of the argument is 1, so the body of the
13048 @code{while} loop is evaluated exactly once, and the cursor moves
13049 forward one paragraph.
13050
13051 @ignore
13052 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13053
13054 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13055 (while (and (not (eobp))
13056 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13057 (looking-at parsep))
13058 (forward-line 1))
13059 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13060 ;; ... and one more line.
13061 (forward-line 1)
13062
13063 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13064 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13065 (while (and (not (eobp))
13066 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13067 (not (looking-at parsep))
13068 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13069 (forward-line 1))
13070
13071 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13072 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13073 (goto-char start)
13074 (not (eobp)))
13075 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13076 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13077 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13078 (and use-hard-newlines
13079 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13080 (forward-char 1))
13081
13082 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13083 (goto-char start))))
13084 @end ignore
13085
13086 This part handles three situations: when point is between paragraphs,
13087 when there is a fill prefix and when there is no fill prefix.
13088
13089 @need 800
13090 The @code{while} loop looks like this:
13091
13092 @smallexample
13093 @group
13094 ;; @r{going forwards and not at the end of the buffer}
13095 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13096
13097 ;; @r{between paragraphs}
13098 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13099 (while (and (not (eobp))
13100 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13101 (looking-at parsep))
13102 (forward-line 1))
13103 ;; @r{This decrements the loop}
13104 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13105 ;; ... and one more line.
13106 (forward-line 1)
13107 @end group
13108
13109 @group
13110 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13111 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13112 ;; we go forward line by line
13113 (while (and (not (eobp))
13114 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13115 (not (looking-at parsep))
13116 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13117 (forward-line 1))
13118 @end group
13119
13120 @group
13121 ;; There is no fill prefix;
13122 ;; we go forward character by character
13123 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13124 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13125 (goto-char start)
13126 (not (eobp)))
13127 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13128 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13129 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13130 (and use-hard-newlines
13131 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13132 (forward-char 1))
13133 @end group
13134
13135 @group
13136 ;; and if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the end,
13137 ;; go to whatever was found in the regular expression search
13138 ;; for sp-parstart
13139 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13140 (goto-char start))))
13141 @end group
13142 @end smallexample
13143
13144 @findex eobp
13145 We can see that this is a decrementing counter @code{while} loop,
13146 using the expression @code{(setq arg (1- arg))} as the decrementer.
13147 That expression is not far from the @code{while}, but is hidden in
13148 another Lisp macro, an @code{unless} macro. Unless we are at the end
13149 of the buffer---that is what the @code{eobp} function determines; it
13150 is an abbreviation of @samp{End Of Buffer P}---we decrease the value
13151 of @code{arg} by one.
13152
13153 (If we are at the end of the buffer, we cannot go forward any more and
13154 the next loop of the @code{while} expression will test false since the
13155 test is an @code{and} with @code{(not (eobp))}. The @code{not}
13156 function means exactly as you expect; it is another name for
13157 @code{null}, a function that returns true when its argument is false.)
13158
13159 Interestingly, the loop count is not decremented until we leave the
13160 space between paragraphs, unless we come to the end of buffer or stop
13161 seeing the local value of the paragraph separator.
13162
13163 That second @code{while} also has a @code{(move-to-left-margin)}
13164 expression. The function is self-explanatory. It is inside a
13165 @code{progn} expression and not the last element of its body, so it is
13166 only invoked for its side effect, which is to move point to the left
13167 margin of the current line.
13168
13169 @findex looking-at
13170 The @code{looking-at} function is also self-explanatory; it returns
13171 true if the text after point matches the regular expression given as
13172 its argument.
13173
13174 The rest of the body of the loop looks difficult at first, but makes
13175 sense as you come to understand it.
13176
13177 @need 800
13178 First consider what happens if there is a fill prefix:
13179
13180 @smallexample
13181 @group
13182 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13183 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13184 ;; we go forward line by line
13185 (while (and (not (eobp))
13186 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13187 (not (looking-at parsep))
13188 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13189 (forward-line 1))
13190 @end group
13191 @end smallexample
13192
13193 @noindent
13194 This expression moves point forward line by line so long
13195 as four conditions are true:
13196
13197 @enumerate
13198 @item
13199 Point is not at the end of the buffer.
13200
13201 @item
13202 We can move to the left margin of the text and are
13203 not at the end of the buffer.
13204
13205 @item
13206 The text following point does not separate paragraphs.
13207
13208 @item
13209 The pattern following point is the fill prefix regular expression.
13210 @end enumerate
13211
13212 The last condition may be puzzling, until you remember that point was
13213 moved to the beginning of the line early in the @code{forward-paragraph}
13214 function. This means that if the text has a fill prefix, the
13215 @code{looking-at} function will see it.
13216
13217 @need 1250
13218 Consider what happens when there is no fill prefix.
13219
13220 @smallexample
13221 @group
13222 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13223 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13224 (goto-char start)
13225 (not (eobp)))
13226 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13227 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13228 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13229 (and use-hard-newlines
13230 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13231 (forward-char 1))
13232 @end group
13233 @end smallexample
13234
13235 @noindent
13236 This @code{while} loop has us searching forward for
13237 @code{sp-parstart}, which is the combination of possible whitespace
13238 with a the local value of the start of a paragraph or of a paragraph
13239 separator. (The latter two are within an expression starting
13240 @code{\(?:} so that they are not referenced by the
13241 @code{match-beginning} function.)
13242
13243 @need 800
13244 The two expressions,
13245
13246 @smallexample
13247 @group
13248 (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13249 (goto-char start)
13250 @end group
13251 @end smallexample
13252
13253 @noindent
13254 mean go to the start of the text matched by the regular expression
13255 search.
13256
13257 The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression is new. It returns a number
13258 specifying the location of the start of the text that was matched by
13259 the last search.
13260
13261 The @code{match-beginning} function is used here because of a
13262 characteristic of a forward search: a successful forward search,
13263 regardless of whether it is a plain search or a regular expression
13264 search, moves point to the end of the text that is found. In this
13265 case, a successful search moves point to the end of the pattern for
13266 @code{sp-parstart}.
13267
13268 However, we want to put point at the end of the current paragraph, not
13269 somewhere else. Indeed, since the search possibly includes the
13270 paragraph separator, point may end up at the beginning of the next one
13271 unless we use an expression that includes @code{match-beginning}.
13272
13273 @findex match-beginning
13274 When given an argument of 0, @code{match-beginning} returns the
13275 position that is the start of the text matched by the most recent
13276 search. In this case, the most recent search looks for
13277 @code{sp-parstart}. The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression returns
13278 the beginning position of that pattern, rather than the end position
13279 of that pattern.
13280
13281 (Incidentally, when passed a positive number as an argument, the
13282 @code{match-beginning} function returns the location of point at that
13283 parenthesized expression in the last search unless that parenthesized
13284 expression begins with @code{\(?:}. I don't know why @code{\(?:}
13285 appears here since the argument is 0.)
13286
13287 @need 1250
13288 The last expression when there is no fill prefix is
13289
13290 @smallexample
13291 @group
13292 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13293 (goto-char start))))
13294 @end group
13295 @end smallexample
13296
13297 @noindent
13298 This says that if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the
13299 end, point should move to the beginning of whatever was found by the
13300 regular expression search for @code{sp-parstart}.
13301
13302 The full definition for the @code{forward-paragraph} function not only
13303 includes code for going forwards, but also code for going backwards.
13304
13305 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs and you want to see the
13306 whole function, you can type @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function})
13307 and the name of the function. This gives you the function
13308 documentation and the name of the library containing the function's
13309 source. Place point over the name of the library and press the RET
13310 key; you will be taken directly to the source. (Be sure to install
13311 your sources! Without them, you are like a person who tries to drive
13312 a car with his eyes shut!)
13313
13314 @node etags
13315 @section Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File
13316 @findex etags
13317 @cindex @file{TAGS} file, create own
13318
13319 Besides @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}), another way to see the
13320 source of a function is to type @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) and the
13321 name of the function when prompted for it. This is a good habit to
13322 get into. The @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) command takes you directly
13323 to the source for a function, variable, or node. The function depends
13324 on tags tables to tell it where to go.
13325
13326 If the @code{find-tag} function first asks you for the name of a
13327 @file{TAGS} table, give it the name of a @file{TAGS} file such as
13328 @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}. (The exact path to your
13329 @file{TAGS} file depends on how your copy of Emacs was installed. I
13330 just told you the location that provides both my C and my Emacs Lisp
13331 sources.)
13332
13333 You can also create your own @file{TAGS} file for directories that
13334 lack one.
13335
13336 You often need to build and install tags tables yourself. They are
13337 not built automatically. A tags table is called a @file{TAGS} file;
13338 the name is in upper case letters.
13339
13340 You can create a @file{TAGS} file by calling the @code{etags} program
13341 that comes as a part of the Emacs distribution. Usually, @code{etags}
13342 is compiled and installed when Emacs is built. (@code{etags} is not
13343 an Emacs Lisp function or a part of Emacs; it is a C program.)
13344
13345 @need 1250
13346 To create a @file{TAGS} file, first switch to the directory in which
13347 you want to create the file. In Emacs you can do this with the
13348 @kbd{M-x cd} command, or by visiting a file in the directory, or by
13349 listing the directory with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the
13350 compile command, with @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute
13351
13352 @smallexample
13353 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
13354 @end smallexample
13355
13356 @noindent
13357 to create a @file{TAGS} file for Emacs Lisp.
13358
13359 For example, if you have a large number of files in your
13360 @file{~/emacs} directory, as I do---I have 137 @file{.el} files in it,
13361 of which I load 12---you can create a @file{TAGS} file for the Emacs
13362 Lisp files in that directory.
13363
13364 @need 1250
13365 The @code{etags} program takes all the usual shell `wildcards'. For
13366 example, if you have two directories for which you want a single
13367 @file{TAGS} file, type @w{@code{etags *.el ../elisp/*.el}}, where
13368 @file{../elisp/} is the second directory:
13369
13370 @smallexample
13371 M-x compile RET etags *.el ../elisp/*.el RET
13372 @end smallexample
13373
13374 @need 1250
13375 Type
13376
13377 @smallexample
13378 M-x compile RET etags --help RET
13379 @end smallexample
13380
13381 @noindent
13382 to see a list of the options accepted by @code{etags} as well as a
13383 list of supported languages.
13384
13385 The @code{etags} program handles more than 20 languages, including
13386 Emacs Lisp, Common Lisp, Scheme, C, C++, Ada, Fortran, HTML, Java,
13387 LaTeX, Pascal, Perl, PostScript, Python, TeX, Texinfo, makefiles, and
13388 most assemblers. The program has no switches for specifying the
13389 language; it recognizes the language in an input file according to its
13390 file name and contents.
13391
13392 @file{etags} is very helpful when you are writing code yourself and
13393 want to refer back to functions you have already written. Just run
13394 @code{etags} again at intervals as you write new functions, so they
13395 become part of the @file{TAGS} file.
13396
13397 If you think an appropriate @file{TAGS} file already exists for what
13398 you want, but do not know where it is, you can use the @code{locate}
13399 program to attempt to find it.
13400
13401 Type @w{@kbd{M-x locate @key{RET} TAGS @key{RET}}} and Emacs will list
13402 for you the full path names of all your @file{TAGS} files. On my
13403 system, this command lists 34 @file{TAGS} files. On the other hand, a
13404 `plain vanilla' system I recently installed did not contain any
13405 @file{TAGS} files.
13406
13407 If the tags table you want has been created, you can use the @code{M-x
13408 visit-tags-table} command to specify it. Otherwise, you will need to
13409 create the tag table yourself and then use @code{M-x
13410 visit-tags-table}.
13411
13412 @subsubheading Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13413 @cindex Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13414 @cindex Tags in the Emacs sources
13415 @findex make tags
13416
13417 The GNU Emacs sources come with a @file{Makefile} that contains a
13418 sophisticated @code{etags} command that creates, collects, and merges
13419 tags tables from all over the Emacs sources and puts the information
13420 into one @file{TAGS} file in the @file{src/} directory. (The
13421 @file{src/} directory is below the top level of your Emacs directory.)
13422
13423 @need 1250
13424 To build this @file{TAGS} file, go to the top level of your Emacs
13425 source directory and run the compile command @code{make tags}:
13426
13427 @smallexample
13428 M-x compile RET make tags RET
13429 @end smallexample
13430
13431 @noindent
13432 (The @code{make tags} command works well with the GNU Emacs sources,
13433 as well as with some other source packages.)
13434
13435 For more information, see @ref{Tags, , Tag Tables, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13436 Manual}.
13437
13438 @node Regexp Review
13439 @section Review
13440
13441 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
13442
13443 @table @code
13444 @item while
13445 Repeatedly evaluate the body of the expression so long as the first
13446 element of the body tests true. Then return @code{nil}. (The
13447 expression is evaluated only for its side effects.)
13448
13449 @need 1250
13450 For example:
13451
13452 @smallexample
13453 @group
13454 (let ((foo 2))
13455 (while (> foo 0)
13456 (insert (format "foo is %d.\n" foo))
13457 (setq foo (1- foo))))
13458
13459 @result{} foo is 2.
13460 foo is 1.
13461 nil
13462 @end group
13463 @end smallexample
13464
13465 @noindent
13466 (The @code{insert} function inserts its arguments at point; the
13467 @code{format} function returns a string formatted from its arguments
13468 the way @code{message} formats its arguments; @code{\n} produces a new
13469 line.)
13470
13471 @item re-search-forward
13472 Search for a pattern, and if the pattern is found, move point to rest
13473 just after it.
13474
13475 @noindent
13476 Takes four arguments, like @code{search-forward}:
13477
13478 @enumerate
13479 @item
13480 A regular expression that specifies the pattern to search for.
13481 (Remember to put quotation marks around this argument!)
13482
13483 @item
13484 Optionally, the limit of the search.
13485
13486 @item
13487 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
13488 error message.
13489
13490 @item
13491 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
13492 search goes backwards.
13493 @end enumerate
13494
13495 @item let*
13496 Bind some variables locally to particular values,
13497 and then evaluate the remaining arguments, returning the value of the
13498 last one. While binding the local variables, use the local values of
13499 variables bound earlier, if any.
13500
13501 @need 1250
13502 For example:
13503
13504 @smallexample
13505 @group
13506 (let* ((foo 7)
13507 (bar (* 3 foo)))
13508 (message "`bar' is %d." bar))
13509 @result{} `bar' is 21.
13510 @end group
13511 @end smallexample
13512
13513 @item match-beginning
13514 Return the position of the start of the text found by the last regular
13515 expression search.
13516
13517 @item looking-at
13518 Return @code{t} for true if the text after point matches the argument,
13519 which should be a regular expression.
13520
13521 @item eobp
13522 Return @code{t} for true if point is at the end of the accessible part
13523 of a buffer. The end of the accessible part is the end of the buffer
13524 if the buffer is not narrowed; it is the end of the narrowed part if
13525 the buffer is narrowed.
13526 @end table
13527
13528 @need 1500
13529 @node re-search Exercises
13530 @section Exercises with @code{re-search-forward}
13531
13532 @itemize @bullet
13533 @item
13534 Write a function to search for a regular expression that matches two
13535 or more blank lines in sequence.
13536
13537 @item
13538 Write a function to search for duplicated words, such as `the the'.
13539 @xref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13540 Manual}, for information on how to write a regexp (a regular
13541 expression) to match a string that is composed of two identical
13542 halves. You can devise several regexps; some are better than others.
13543 The function I use is described in an appendix, along with several
13544 regexps. @xref{the-the, , @code{the-the} Duplicated Words Function}.
13545 @end itemize
13546
13547 @node Counting Words
13548 @chapter Counting via Repetition and Regexps
13549 @cindex Repetition for word counting
13550 @cindex Regular expressions for word counting
13551
13552 Repetition and regular expression searches are powerful tools that you
13553 often use when you write code in Emacs Lisp. This chapter illustrates
13554 the use of regular expression searches through the construction of
13555 word count commands using @code{while} loops and recursion.
13556
13557 @menu
13558 * Why Count Words::
13559 * @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
13560 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
13561 * Counting Exercise::
13562 @end menu
13563
13564 @ifnottex
13565 @node Why Count Words
13566 @unnumberedsec Counting words
13567 @end ifnottex
13568
13569 The standard Emacs distribution contains functions for counting the
13570 number of lines and words within a region.
13571
13572 Certain types of writing ask you to count words. Thus, if you write
13573 an essay, you may be limited to 800 words; if you write a novel, you
13574 may discipline yourself to write 1000 words a day. It seems odd, but
13575 for a long time, Emacs lacked a word count command. Perhaps people used
13576 Emacs mostly for code or types of documentation that did not require
13577 word counts; or perhaps they restricted themselves to the operating
13578 system word count command, @code{wc}. Alternatively, people may have
13579 followed the publishers' convention and computed a word count by
13580 dividing the number of characters in a document by five.
13581
13582 There are many ways to implement a command to count words. Here are
13583 some examples, which you may wish to compare with the standard Emacs
13584 command, @code{count-words-region}.
13585
13586 @node @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13587 @section The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} Function
13588 @findex @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13589
13590 A word count command could count words in a line, paragraph, region,
13591 or buffer. What should the command cover? You could design the
13592 command to count the number of words in a complete buffer. However,
13593 the Emacs tradition encourages flexibility---you may want to count
13594 words in just a section, rather than all of a buffer. So it makes
13595 more sense to design the command to count the number of words in a
13596 region. Once you have a command to count words in a region, you can,
13597 if you wish, count words in a whole buffer by marking it with
13598 @w{@kbd{C-x h}} (@code{mark-whole-buffer}).
13599
13600 Clearly, counting words is a repetitive act: starting from the
13601 beginning of the region, you count the first word, then the second
13602 word, then the third word, and so on, until you reach the end of the
13603 region. This means that word counting is ideally suited to recursion
13604 or to a @code{while} loop.
13605
13606 @menu
13607 * Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
13608 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
13609 @end menu
13610
13611 @ifnottex
13612 @node Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13613 @unnumberedsubsec Designing @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13614 @end ifnottex
13615
13616 First, we will implement the word count command with a @code{while}
13617 loop, then with recursion. The command will, of course, be
13618 interactive.
13619
13620 @need 800
13621 The template for an interactive function definition is, as always:
13622
13623 @smallexample
13624 @group
13625 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
13626 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
13627 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
13628 @var{body}@dots{})
13629 @end group
13630 @end smallexample
13631
13632 What we need to do is fill in the slots.
13633
13634 The name of the function should be self-explanatory and similar to the
13635 existing @code{count-lines-region} name. This makes the name easier
13636 to remember. @code{count-words-region} is the obvious choice. Since
13637 that name is now used for the standard Emacs command to count words, we
13638 will name our implementation @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
13639
13640 The function counts words within a region. This means that the
13641 argument list must contain symbols that are bound to the two
13642 positions, the beginning and end of the region. These two positions
13643 can be called @samp{beginning} and @samp{end} respectively. The first
13644 line of the documentation should be a single sentence, since that is
13645 all that is printed as documentation by a command such as
13646 @code{apropos}. The interactive expression will be of the form
13647 @samp{(interactive "r")}, since that will cause Emacs to pass the
13648 beginning and end of the region to the function's argument list. All
13649 this is routine.
13650
13651 The body of the function needs to be written to do three tasks:
13652 first, to set up conditions under which the @code{while} loop can
13653 count words, second, to run the @code{while} loop, and third, to send
13654 a message to the user.
13655
13656 When a user calls @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}, point may be at the
13657 beginning or the end of the region. However, the counting process
13658 must start at the beginning of the region. This means we will want
13659 to put point there if it is not already there. Executing
13660 @code{(goto-char beginning)} ensures this. Of course, we will want to
13661 return point to its expected position when the function finishes its
13662 work. For this reason, the body must be enclosed in a
13663 @code{save-excursion} expression.
13664
13665 The central part of the body of the function consists of a
13666 @code{while} loop in which one expression jumps point forward word by
13667 word, and another expression counts those jumps. The true-or-false-test
13668 of the @code{while} loop should test true so long as point should jump
13669 forward, and false when point is at the end of the region.
13670
13671 We could use @code{(forward-word 1)} as the expression for moving point
13672 forward word by word, but it is easier to see what Emacs identifies as a
13673 `word' if we use a regular expression search.
13674
13675 A regular expression search that finds the pattern for which it is
13676 searching leaves point after the last character matched. This means
13677 that a succession of successful word searches will move point forward
13678 word by word.
13679
13680 As a practical matter, we want the regular expression search to jump
13681 over whitespace and punctuation between words as well as over the
13682 words themselves. A regexp that refuses to jump over interword
13683 whitespace would never jump more than one word! This means that
13684 the regexp should include the whitespace and punctuation that follows
13685 a word, if any, as well as the word itself. (A word may end a buffer
13686 and not have any following whitespace or punctuation, so that part of
13687 the regexp must be optional.)
13688
13689 Thus, what we want for the regexp is a pattern defining one or more
13690 word constituent characters followed, optionally, by one or more
13691 characters that are not word constituents. The regular expression for
13692 this is:
13693
13694 @smallexample
13695 \w+\W*
13696 @end smallexample
13697
13698 @noindent
13699 The buffer's syntax table determines which characters are and are not
13700 word constituents. For more information about syntax,
13701 @pxref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
13702 Reference Manual}.
13703
13704 @need 800
13705 The search expression looks like this:
13706
13707 @smallexample
13708 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13709 @end smallexample
13710
13711 @noindent
13712 (Note that paired backslashes precede the @samp{w} and @samp{W}. A
13713 single backslash has special meaning to the Emacs Lisp interpreter.
13714 It indicates that the following character is interpreted differently
13715 than usual. For example, the two characters, @samp{\n}, stand for
13716 @samp{newline}, rather than for a backslash followed by @samp{n}. Two
13717 backslashes in a row stand for an ordinary, `unspecial' backslash, so
13718 Emacs Lisp interpreter ends of seeing a single backslash followed by a
13719 letter. So it discovers the letter is special.)
13720
13721 We need a counter to count how many words there are; this variable
13722 must first be set to 0 and then incremented each time Emacs goes
13723 around the @code{while} loop. The incrementing expression is simply:
13724
13725 @smallexample
13726 (setq count (1+ count))
13727 @end smallexample
13728
13729 Finally, we want to tell the user how many words there are in the
13730 region. The @code{message} function is intended for presenting this
13731 kind of information to the user. The message has to be phrased so
13732 that it reads properly regardless of how many words there are in the
13733 region: we don't want to say that ``there are 1 words in the region''.
13734 The conflict between singular and plural is ungrammatical. We can
13735 solve this problem by using a conditional expression that evaluates
13736 different messages depending on the number of words in the region.
13737 There are three possibilities: no words in the region, one word in the
13738 region, and more than one word. This means that the @code{cond}
13739 special form is appropriate.
13740
13741 @need 1500
13742 All this leads to the following function definition:
13743
13744 @smallexample
13745 @group
13746 ;;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
13747 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
13748 "Print number of words in the region.
13749 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
13750 character followed by at least one character that
13751 is not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax
13752 table determines which characters these are."
13753 (interactive "r")
13754 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
13755 @end group
13756
13757 @group
13758 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
13759 (save-excursion
13760 (goto-char beginning)
13761 (let ((count 0))
13762 @end group
13763
13764 @group
13765 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
13766 (while (< (point) end)
13767 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13768 (setq count (1+ count)))
13769 @end group
13770
13771 @group
13772 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
13773 (cond ((zerop count)
13774 (message
13775 "The region does NOT have any words."))
13776 ((= 1 count)
13777 (message
13778 "The region has 1 word."))
13779 (t
13780 (message
13781 "The region has %d words." count))))))
13782 @end group
13783 @end smallexample
13784
13785 @noindent
13786 As written, the function works, but not in all circumstances.
13787
13788 @node Whitespace Bug
13789 @subsection The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13790
13791 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} command described in the preceding
13792 section has two bugs, or rather, one bug with two manifestations.
13793 First, if you mark a region containing only whitespace in the middle
13794 of some text, the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} command tells you that the
13795 region contains one word! Second, if you mark a region containing
13796 only whitespace at the end of the buffer or the accessible portion of
13797 a narrowed buffer, the command displays an error message that looks
13798 like this:
13799
13800 @smallexample
13801 Search failed: "\\w+\\W*"
13802 @end smallexample
13803
13804 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can test for these
13805 bugs yourself.
13806
13807 First, evaluate the function in the usual manner to install it.
13808 @ifinfo
13809 Here is a copy of the definition. Place your cursor after the closing
13810 parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e} to install it.
13811
13812 @smallexample
13813 @group
13814 ;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
13815 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
13816 "Print number of words in the region.
13817 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent character followed
13818 by at least one character that is not a word-constituent. The buffer's
13819 syntax table determines which characters these are."
13820 @end group
13821 @group
13822 (interactive "r")
13823 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
13824 @end group
13825
13826 @group
13827 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
13828 (save-excursion
13829 (goto-char beginning)
13830 (let ((count 0))
13831 @end group
13832
13833 @group
13834 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
13835 (while (< (point) end)
13836 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13837 (setq count (1+ count)))
13838 @end group
13839
13840 @group
13841 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
13842 (cond ((zerop count)
13843 (message "The region does NOT have any words."))
13844 ((= 1 count) (message "The region has 1 word."))
13845 (t (message "The region has %d words." count))))))
13846 @end group
13847 @end smallexample
13848 @end ifinfo
13849
13850 @need 1000
13851 If you wish, you can also install this keybinding by evaluating it:
13852
13853 @smallexample
13854 (global-set-key "\C-c=" '@value{COUNT-WORDS})
13855 @end smallexample
13856
13857 To conduct the first test, set mark and point to the beginning and end
13858 of the following line and then type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x
13859 @value{COUNT-WORDS}} if you have not bound @kbd{C-c =}):
13860
13861 @smallexample
13862 one two three
13863 @end smallexample
13864
13865 @noindent
13866 Emacs will tell you, correctly, that the region has three words.
13867
13868 Repeat the test, but place mark at the beginning of the line and place
13869 point just @emph{before} the word @samp{one}. Again type the command
13870 @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}). Emacs should tell you
13871 that the region has no words, since it is composed only of the
13872 whitespace at the beginning of the line. But instead Emacs tells you
13873 that the region has one word!
13874
13875 For the third test, copy the sample line to the end of the
13876 @file{*scratch*} buffer and then type several spaces at the end of the
13877 line. Place mark right after the word @samp{three} and point at the
13878 end of line. (The end of the line will be the end of the buffer.)
13879 Type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}) as you did before.
13880 Again, Emacs should tell you that the region has no words, since it is
13881 composed only of the whitespace at the end of the line. Instead,
13882 Emacs displays an error message saying @samp{Search failed}.
13883
13884 The two bugs stem from the same problem.
13885
13886 Consider the first manifestation of the bug, in which the command
13887 tells you that the whitespace at the beginning of the line contains
13888 one word. What happens is this: The @code{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13889 command moves point to the beginning of the region. The @code{while}
13890 tests whether the value of point is smaller than the value of
13891 @code{end}, which it is. Consequently, the regular expression search
13892 looks for and finds the first word. It leaves point after the word.
13893 @code{count} is set to one. The @code{while} loop repeats; but this
13894 time the value of point is larger than the value of @code{end}, the
13895 loop is exited; and the function displays a message saying the number
13896 of words in the region is one. In brief, the regular expression
13897 search looks for and finds the word even though it is outside
13898 the marked region.
13899
13900 In the second manifestation of the bug, the region is whitespace at
13901 the end of the buffer. Emacs says @samp{Search failed}. What happens
13902 is that the true-or-false-test in the @code{while} loop tests true, so
13903 the search expression is executed. But since there are no more words
13904 in the buffer, the search fails.
13905
13906 In both manifestations of the bug, the search extends or attempts to
13907 extend outside of the region.
13908
13909 The solution is to limit the search to the region---this is a fairly
13910 simple action, but as you may have come to expect, it is not quite as
13911 simple as you might think.
13912
13913 As we have seen, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes a search
13914 pattern as its first argument. But in addition to this first,
13915 mandatory argument, it accepts three optional arguments. The optional
13916 second argument bounds the search. The optional third argument, if
13917 @code{t}, causes the function to return @code{nil} rather than signal
13918 an error if the search fails. The optional fourth argument is a
13919 repeat count. (In Emacs, you can see a function's documentation by
13920 typing @kbd{C-h f}, the name of the function, and then @key{RET}.)
13921
13922 In the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition, the value of the end of
13923 the region is held by the variable @code{end} which is passed as an
13924 argument to the function. Thus, we can add @code{end} as an argument
13925 to the regular expression search expression:
13926
13927 @smallexample
13928 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end)
13929 @end smallexample
13930
13931 However, if you make only this change to the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13932 definition and then test the new version of the definition on a
13933 stretch of whitespace, you will receive an error message saying
13934 @samp{Search failed}.
13935
13936 What happens is this: the search is limited to the region, and fails
13937 as you expect because there are no word-constituent characters in the
13938 region. Since it fails, we receive an error message. But we do not
13939 want to receive an error message in this case; we want to receive the
13940 message that "The region does NOT have any words."
13941
13942 The solution to this problem is to provide @code{re-search-forward}
13943 with a third argument of @code{t}, which causes the function to return
13944 @code{nil} rather than signal an error if the search fails.
13945
13946 However, if you make this change and try it, you will see the message
13947 ``Counting words in region ... '' and @dots{} you will keep on seeing
13948 that message @dots{}, until you type @kbd{C-g} (@code{keyboard-quit}).
13949
13950 Here is what happens: the search is limited to the region, as before,
13951 and it fails because there are no word-constituent characters in the
13952 region, as expected. Consequently, the @code{re-search-forward}
13953 expression returns @code{nil}. It does nothing else. In particular,
13954 it does not move point, which it does as a side effect if it finds the
13955 search target. After the @code{re-search-forward} expression returns
13956 @code{nil}, the next expression in the @code{while} loop is evaluated.
13957 This expression increments the count. Then the loop repeats. The
13958 true-or-false-test tests true because the value of point is still less
13959 than the value of end, since the @code{re-search-forward} expression
13960 did not move point. @dots{} and the cycle repeats @dots{}
13961
13962 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition requires yet another
13963 modification, to cause the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} loop
13964 to test false if the search fails. Put another way, there are two
13965 conditions that must be satisfied in the true-or-false-test before the
13966 word count variable is incremented: point must still be within the
13967 region and the search expression must have found a word to count.
13968
13969 Since both the first condition and the second condition must be true
13970 together, the two expressions, the region test and the search
13971 expression, can be joined with an @code{and} special form and embedded in
13972 the @code{while} loop as the true-or-false-test, like this:
13973
13974 @smallexample
13975 (and (< (point) end) (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
13976 @end smallexample
13977
13978 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
13979 @c also trouble with an overfull hbox
13980 @iftex
13981 @noindent
13982 (For information about @code{and}, see
13983 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
13984 @end iftex
13985 @ifinfo
13986 @noindent
13987 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
13988 information about @code{and}.)
13989 @end ifinfo
13990
13991 The @code{re-search-forward} expression returns @code{t} if the search
13992 succeeds and as a side effect moves point. Consequently, as words are
13993 found, point is moved through the region. When the search expression
13994 fails to find another word, or when point reaches the end of the
13995 region, the true-or-false-test tests false, the @code{while} loop
13996 exits, and the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function displays one or
13997 other of its messages.
13998
13999 After incorporating these final changes, the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14000 works without bugs (or at least, without bugs that I have found!).
14001 Here is what it looks like:
14002
14003 @smallexample
14004 @group
14005 ;;; @r{Final version:} @code{while}
14006 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14007 "Print number of words in the region."
14008 (interactive "r")
14009 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14010 @end group
14011
14012 @group
14013 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14014 (save-excursion
14015 (let ((count 0))
14016 (goto-char beginning)
14017 @end group
14018
14019 @group
14020 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14021 (while (and (< (point) end)
14022 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
14023 (setq count (1+ count)))
14024 @end group
14025
14026 @group
14027 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14028 (cond ((zerop count)
14029 (message
14030 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14031 ((= 1 count)
14032 (message
14033 "The region has 1 word."))
14034 (t
14035 (message
14036 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14037 @end group
14038 @end smallexample
14039
14040 @node recursive-count-words
14041 @section Count Words Recursively
14042 @cindex Count words recursively
14043 @cindex Recursively counting words
14044 @cindex Words, counted recursively
14045
14046 You can write the function for counting words recursively as well as
14047 with a @code{while} loop. Let's see how this is done.
14048
14049 First, we need to recognize that the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14050 function has three jobs: it sets up the appropriate conditions for
14051 counting to occur; it counts the words in the region; and it sends a
14052 message to the user telling how many words there are.
14053
14054 If we write a single recursive function to do everything, we will
14055 receive a message for every recursive call. If the region contains 13
14056 words, we will receive thirteen messages, one right after the other.
14057 We don't want this! Instead, we must write two functions to do the
14058 job, one of which (the recursive function) will be used inside of the
14059 other. One function will set up the conditions and display the
14060 message; the other will return the word count.
14061
14062 Let us start with the function that causes the message to be displayed.
14063 We can continue to call this @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14064
14065 This is the function that the user will call. It will be interactive.
14066 Indeed, it will be similar to our previous versions of this
14067 function, except that it will call @code{recursive-count-words} to
14068 determine how many words are in the region.
14069
14070 @need 1250
14071 We can readily construct a template for this function, based on our
14072 previous versions:
14073
14074 @smallexample
14075 @group
14076 ;; @r{Recursive version; uses regular expression search}
14077 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14078 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14079 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
14080 @end group
14081 @group
14082
14083 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14084 (@var{explanatory message})
14085 (@var{set-up functions}@dots{}
14086 @end group
14087 @group
14088
14089 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14090 @var{recursive call}
14091 @end group
14092 @group
14093
14094 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14095 @var{message providing word count}))
14096 @end group
14097 @end smallexample
14098
14099 The definition looks straightforward, except that somehow the count
14100 returned by the recursive call must be passed to the message
14101 displaying the word count. A little thought suggests that this can be
14102 done by making use of a @code{let} expression: we can bind a variable
14103 in the varlist of a @code{let} expression to the number of words in
14104 the region, as returned by the recursive call; and then the
14105 @code{cond} expression, using binding, can display the value to the
14106 user.
14107
14108 Often, one thinks of the binding within a @code{let} expression as
14109 somehow secondary to the `primary' work of a function. But in this
14110 case, what you might consider the `primary' job of the function,
14111 counting words, is done within the @code{let} expression.
14112
14113 @need 1250
14114 Using @code{let}, the function definition looks like this:
14115
14116 @smallexample
14117 @group
14118 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14119 "Print number of words in the region."
14120 (interactive "r")
14121 @end group
14122
14123 @group
14124 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14125 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14126 (save-excursion
14127 (goto-char beginning)
14128 @end group
14129
14130 @group
14131 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14132 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14133 @end group
14134
14135 @group
14136 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14137 (cond ((zerop count)
14138 (message
14139 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14140 ((= 1 count)
14141 (message
14142 "The region has 1 word."))
14143 (t
14144 (message
14145 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14146 @end group
14147 @end smallexample
14148
14149 Next, we need to write the recursive counting function.
14150
14151 A recursive function has at least three parts: the `do-again-test', the
14152 `next-step-expression', and the recursive call.
14153
14154 The do-again-test determines whether the function will or will not be
14155 called again. Since we are counting words in a region and can use a
14156 function that moves point forward for every word, the do-again-test
14157 can check whether point is still within the region. The do-again-test
14158 should find the value of point and determine whether point is before,
14159 at, or after the value of the end of the region. We can use the
14160 @code{point} function to locate point. Clearly, we must pass the
14161 value of the end of the region to the recursive counting function as an
14162 argument.
14163
14164 In addition, the do-again-test should also test whether the search finds a
14165 word. If it does not, the function should not call itself again.
14166
14167 The next-step-expression changes a value so that when the recursive
14168 function is supposed to stop calling itself, it stops. More
14169 precisely, the next-step-expression changes a value so that at the
14170 right time, the do-again-test stops the recursive function from
14171 calling itself again. In this case, the next-step-expression can be
14172 the expression that moves point forward, word by word.
14173
14174 The third part of a recursive function is the recursive call.
14175
14176 Somewhere, also, we also need a part that does the `work' of the
14177 function, a part that does the counting. A vital part!
14178
14179 @need 1250
14180 But already, we have an outline of the recursive counting function:
14181
14182 @smallexample
14183 @group
14184 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14185 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14186 @var{do-again-test}
14187 @var{next-step-expression}
14188 @var{recursive call})
14189 @end group
14190 @end smallexample
14191
14192 Now we need to fill in the slots. Let's start with the simplest cases
14193 first: if point is at or beyond the end of the region, there cannot
14194 be any words in the region, so the function should return zero.
14195 Likewise, if the search fails, there are no words to count, so the
14196 function should return zero.
14197
14198 On the other hand, if point is within the region and the search
14199 succeeds, the function should call itself again.
14200
14201 @need 800
14202 Thus, the do-again-test should look like this:
14203
14204 @smallexample
14205 @group
14206 (and (< (point) region-end)
14207 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14208 @end group
14209 @end smallexample
14210
14211 Note that the search expression is part of the do-again-test---the
14212 function returns @code{t} if its search succeeds and @code{nil} if it
14213 fails. (@xref{Whitespace Bug, , The Whitespace Bug in
14214 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}}, for an explanation of how
14215 @code{re-search-forward} works.)
14216
14217 The do-again-test is the true-or-false test of an @code{if} clause.
14218 Clearly, if the do-again-test succeeds, the then-part of the @code{if}
14219 clause should call the function again; but if it fails, the else-part
14220 should return zero since either point is outside the region or the
14221 search failed because there were no words to find.
14222
14223 But before considering the recursive call, we need to consider the
14224 next-step-expression. What is it? Interestingly, it is the search
14225 part of the do-again-test.
14226
14227 In addition to returning @code{t} or @code{nil} for the
14228 do-again-test, @code{re-search-forward} moves point forward as a side
14229 effect of a successful search. This is the action that changes the
14230 value of point so that the recursive function stops calling itself
14231 when point completes its movement through the region. Consequently,
14232 the @code{re-search-forward} expression is the next-step-expression.
14233
14234 @need 1200
14235 In outline, then, the body of the @code{recursive-count-words}
14236 function looks like this:
14237
14238 @smallexample
14239 @group
14240 (if @var{do-again-test-and-next-step-combined}
14241 ;; @r{then}
14242 @var{recursive-call-returning-count}
14243 ;; @r{else}
14244 @var{return-zero})
14245 @end group
14246 @end smallexample
14247
14248 How to incorporate the mechanism that counts?
14249
14250 If you are not used to writing recursive functions, a question like
14251 this can be troublesome. But it can and should be approached
14252 systematically.
14253
14254 We know that the counting mechanism should be associated in some way
14255 with the recursive call. Indeed, since the next-step-expression moves
14256 point forward by one word, and since a recursive call is made for
14257 each word, the counting mechanism must be an expression that adds one
14258 to the value returned by a call to @code{recursive-count-words}.
14259
14260 @need 800
14261 Consider several cases:
14262
14263 @itemize @bullet
14264 @item
14265 If there are two words in the region, the function should return
14266 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14267 the first word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14268 words in the region, which in this case is one.
14269
14270 @item
14271 If there is one word in the region, the function should return
14272 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14273 that word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14274 words in the region, which in this case is zero.
14275
14276 @item
14277 If there are no words in the region, the function should return zero.
14278 @end itemize
14279
14280 From the sketch we can see that the else-part of the @code{if} returns
14281 zero for the case of no words. This means that the then-part of the
14282 @code{if} must return a value resulting from adding one to the value
14283 returned from a count of the remaining words.
14284
14285 @need 1200
14286 The expression will look like this, where @code{1+} is a function that
14287 adds one to its argument.
14288
14289 @smallexample
14290 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14291 @end smallexample
14292
14293 @need 1200
14294 The whole @code{recursive-count-words} function will then look like
14295 this:
14296
14297 @smallexample
14298 @group
14299 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14300 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14301
14302 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14303 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14304 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14305 @end group
14306
14307 @group
14308 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14309 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14310
14311 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14312 0))
14313 @end group
14314 @end smallexample
14315
14316 @need 1250
14317 Let's examine how this works:
14318
14319 If there are no words in the region, the else part of the @code{if}
14320 expression is evaluated and consequently the function returns zero.
14321
14322 If there is one word in the region, the value of point is less than
14323 the value of @code{region-end} and the search succeeds. In this case,
14324 the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression tests true, and the
14325 then-part of the @code{if} expression is evaluated. The counting
14326 expression is evaluated. This expression returns a value (which will
14327 be the value returned by the whole function) that is the sum of one
14328 added to the value returned by a recursive call.
14329
14330 Meanwhile, the next-step-expression has caused point to jump over the
14331 first (and in this case only) word in the region. This means that
14332 when @code{(recursive-count-words region-end)} is evaluated a second
14333 time, as a result of the recursive call, the value of point will be
14334 equal to or greater than the value of region end. So this time,
14335 @code{recursive-count-words} will return zero. The zero will be added
14336 to one, and the original evaluation of @code{recursive-count-words}
14337 will return one plus zero, which is one, which is the correct amount.
14338
14339 Clearly, if there are two words in the region, the first call to
14340 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14341 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14342 remaining word---that is, it adds one to one, producing two, which is
14343 the correct amount.
14344
14345 Similarly, if there are three words in the region, the first call to
14346 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14347 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14348 remaining two words---and so on and so on.
14349
14350 @need 1250
14351 @noindent
14352 With full documentation the two functions look like this:
14353
14354 @need 1250
14355 @noindent
14356 The recursive function:
14357
14358 @findex recursive-count-words
14359 @smallexample
14360 @group
14361 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14362 "Number of words between point and REGION-END."
14363 @end group
14364
14365 @group
14366 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14367 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14368 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14369 @end group
14370
14371 @group
14372 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14373 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14374
14375 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14376 0))
14377 @end group
14378 @end smallexample
14379
14380 @need 800
14381 @noindent
14382 The wrapper:
14383
14384 @smallexample
14385 @group
14386 ;;; @r{Recursive version}
14387 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14388 "Print number of words in the region.
14389 @end group
14390
14391 @group
14392 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
14393 character followed by at least one character that is
14394 not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax table
14395 determines which characters these are."
14396 @end group
14397 @group
14398 (interactive "r")
14399 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14400 (save-excursion
14401 (goto-char beginning)
14402 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14403 @end group
14404 @group
14405 (cond ((zerop count)
14406 (message
14407 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14408 @end group
14409 @group
14410 ((= 1 count)
14411 (message "The region has 1 word."))
14412 (t
14413 (message
14414 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14415 @end group
14416 @end smallexample
14417
14418 @node Counting Exercise
14419 @section Exercise: Counting Punctuation
14420
14421 Using a @code{while} loop, write a function to count the number of
14422 punctuation marks in a region---period, comma, semicolon, colon,
14423 exclamation mark, and question mark. Do the same using recursion.
14424
14425 @node Words in a defun
14426 @chapter Counting Words in a @code{defun}
14427 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14428 @cindex Word counting in a @code{defun}
14429
14430 Our next project is to count the number of words in a function
14431 definition. Clearly, this can be done using some variant of
14432 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}. @xref{Counting Words, , Counting via
14433 Repetition and Regexps}. If we are just going to count the words in
14434 one definition, it is easy enough to mark the definition with the
14435 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}) command, and then call
14436 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14437
14438 However, I am more ambitious: I want to count the words and symbols in
14439 every definition in the Emacs sources and then print a graph that
14440 shows how many functions there are of each length: how many contain 40
14441 to 49 words or symbols, how many contain 50 to 59 words or symbols,
14442 and so on. I have often been curious how long a typical function is,
14443 and this will tell.
14444
14445 @menu
14446 * Divide and Conquer::
14447 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
14448 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
14449 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14450 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
14451 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
14452 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
14453 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
14454 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
14455 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
14456 @end menu
14457
14458 @ifnottex
14459 @node Divide and Conquer
14460 @unnumberedsec Divide and Conquer
14461 @end ifnottex
14462
14463 Described in one phrase, the histogram project is daunting; but
14464 divided into numerous small steps, each of which we can take one at a
14465 time, the project becomes less fearsome. Let us consider what the
14466 steps must be:
14467
14468 @itemize @bullet
14469 @item
14470 First, write a function to count the words in one definition. This
14471 includes the problem of handling symbols as well as words.
14472
14473 @item
14474 Second, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14475 in a file. This function can use the @code{count-words-in-defun}
14476 function.
14477
14478 @item
14479 Third, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14480 in each of several files. This entails automatically finding the
14481 various files, switching to them, and counting the words in the
14482 definitions within them.
14483
14484 @item
14485 Fourth, write a function to convert the list of numbers that we
14486 created in step three to a form that will be suitable for printing as
14487 a graph.
14488
14489 @item
14490 Fifth, write a function to print the results as a graph.
14491 @end itemize
14492
14493 This is quite a project! But if we take each step slowly, it will not
14494 be difficult.
14495
14496 @node Words and Symbols
14497 @section What to Count?
14498 @cindex Words and symbols in defun
14499
14500 When we first start thinking about how to count the words in a
14501 function definition, the first question is (or ought to be) what are
14502 we going to count? When we speak of `words' with respect to a Lisp
14503 function definition, we are actually speaking, in large part, of
14504 `symbols'. For example, the following @code{multiply-by-seven}
14505 function contains the five symbols @code{defun},
14506 @code{multiply-by-seven}, @code{number}, @code{*}, and @code{7}. In
14507 addition, in the documentation string, it contains the four words
14508 @samp{Multiply}, @samp{NUMBER}, @samp{by}, and @samp{seven}. The
14509 symbol @samp{number} is repeated, so the definition contains a total
14510 of ten words and symbols.
14511
14512 @smallexample
14513 @group
14514 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
14515 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
14516 (* 7 number))
14517 @end group
14518 @end smallexample
14519
14520 @noindent
14521 However, if we mark the @code{multiply-by-seven} definition with
14522 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}), and then call
14523 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} on it, we will find that
14524 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} claims the definition has eleven words, not
14525 ten! Something is wrong!
14526
14527 The problem is twofold: @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} does not count the
14528 @samp{*} as a word, and it counts the single symbol,
14529 @code{multiply-by-seven}, as containing three words. The hyphens are
14530 treated as if they were interword spaces rather than intraword
14531 connectors: @samp{multiply-by-seven} is counted as if it were written
14532 @samp{multiply by seven}.
14533
14534 The cause of this confusion is the regular expression search within
14535 the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition that moves point forward word
14536 by word. In the canonical version of @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}, the
14537 regexp is:
14538
14539 @smallexample
14540 "\\w+\\W*"
14541 @end smallexample
14542
14543 @noindent
14544 This regular expression is a pattern defining one or more word
14545 constituent characters possibly followed by one or more characters
14546 that are not word constituents. What is meant by `word constituent
14547 characters' brings us to the issue of syntax, which is worth a section
14548 of its own.
14549
14550 @node Syntax
14551 @section What Constitutes a Word or Symbol?
14552 @cindex Syntax categories and tables
14553
14554 Emacs treats different characters as belonging to different
14555 @dfn{syntax categories}. For example, the regular expression,
14556 @samp{\\w+}, is a pattern specifying one or more @emph{word
14557 constituent} characters. Word constituent characters are members of
14558 one syntax category. Other syntax categories include the class of
14559 punctuation characters, such as the period and the comma, and the
14560 class of whitespace characters, such as the blank space and the tab
14561 character. (For more information, @pxref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax
14562 Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
14563
14564 Syntax tables specify which characters belong to which categories.
14565 Usually, a hyphen is not specified as a `word constituent character'.
14566 Instead, it is specified as being in the `class of characters that are
14567 part of symbol names but not words.' This means that the
14568 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function treats it in the same way it treats
14569 an interword white space, which is why @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14570 counts @samp{multiply-by-seven} as three words.
14571
14572 There are two ways to cause Emacs to count @samp{multiply-by-seven} as
14573 one symbol: modify the syntax table or modify the regular expression.
14574
14575 We could redefine a hyphen as a word constituent character by
14576 modifying the syntax table that Emacs keeps for each mode. This
14577 action would serve our purpose, except that a hyphen is merely the
14578 most common character within symbols that is not typically a word
14579 constituent character; there are others, too.
14580
14581 Alternatively, we can redefine the regexp used in the
14582 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition so as to include symbols. This
14583 procedure has the merit of clarity, but the task is a little tricky.
14584
14585 @need 1200
14586 The first part is simple enough: the pattern must match ``at least one
14587 character that is a word or symbol constituent''. Thus:
14588
14589 @smallexample
14590 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+"
14591 @end smallexample
14592
14593 @noindent
14594 The @samp{\\(} is the first part of the grouping construct that
14595 includes the @samp{\\w} and the @samp{\\s_} as alternatives, separated
14596 by the @samp{\\|}. The @samp{\\w} matches any word-constituent
14597 character and the @samp{\\s_} matches any character that is part of a
14598 symbol name but not a word-constituent character. The @samp{+}
14599 following the group indicates that the word or symbol constituent
14600 characters must be matched at least once.
14601
14602 However, the second part of the regexp is more difficult to design.
14603 What we want is to follow the first part with ``optionally one or more
14604 characters that are not constituents of a word or symbol''. At first,
14605 I thought I could define this with the following:
14606
14607 @smallexample
14608 "\\(\\W\\|\\S_\\)*"
14609 @end smallexample
14610
14611 @noindent
14612 The upper case @samp{W} and @samp{S} match characters that are
14613 @emph{not} word or symbol constituents. Unfortunately, this
14614 expression matches any character that is either not a word constituent
14615 or not a symbol constituent. This matches any character!
14616
14617 I then noticed that every word or symbol in my test region was
14618 followed by white space (blank space, tab, or newline). So I tried
14619 placing a pattern to match one or more blank spaces after the pattern
14620 for one or more word or symbol constituents. This failed, too. Words
14621 and symbols are often separated by whitespace, but in actual code
14622 parentheses may follow symbols and punctuation may follow words. So
14623 finally, I designed a pattern in which the word or symbol constituents
14624 are followed optionally by characters that are not white space and
14625 then followed optionally by white space.
14626
14627 @need 800
14628 Here is the full regular expression:
14629
14630 @smallexample
14631 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
14632 @end smallexample
14633
14634 @node count-words-in-defun
14635 @section The @code{count-words-in-defun} Function
14636 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14637
14638 We have seen that there are several ways to write a
14639 @code{count-words-region} function. To write a
14640 @code{count-words-in-defun}, we need merely adapt one of these
14641 versions.
14642
14643 The version that uses a @code{while} loop is easy to understand, so I
14644 am going to adapt that. Because @code{count-words-in-defun} will be
14645 part of a more complex program, it need not be interactive and it need
14646 not display a message but just return the count. These considerations
14647 simplify the definition a little.
14648
14649 On the other hand, @code{count-words-in-defun} will be used within a
14650 buffer that contains function definitions. Consequently, it is
14651 reasonable to ask that the function determine whether it is called
14652 when point is within a function definition, and if it is, to return
14653 the count for that definition. This adds complexity to the
14654 definition, but saves us from needing to pass arguments to the
14655 function.
14656
14657 @need 1250
14658 These considerations lead us to prepare the following template:
14659
14660 @smallexample
14661 @group
14662 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
14663 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14664 (@var{set up}@dots{}
14665 (@var{while loop}@dots{})
14666 @var{return count})
14667 @end group
14668 @end smallexample
14669
14670 @noindent
14671 As usual, our job is to fill in the slots.
14672
14673 First, the set up.
14674
14675 We are presuming that this function will be called within a buffer
14676 containing function definitions. Point will either be within a
14677 function definition or not. For @code{count-words-in-defun} to work,
14678 point must move to the beginning of the definition, a counter must
14679 start at zero, and the counting loop must stop when point reaches the
14680 end of the definition.
14681
14682 The @code{beginning-of-defun} function searches backwards for an
14683 opening delimiter such as a @samp{(} at the beginning of a line, and
14684 moves point to that position, or else to the limit of the search. In
14685 practice, this means that @code{beginning-of-defun} moves point to the
14686 beginning of an enclosing or preceding function definition, or else to
14687 the beginning of the buffer. We can use @code{beginning-of-defun} to
14688 place point where we wish to start.
14689
14690 The @code{while} loop requires a counter to keep track of the words or
14691 symbols being counted. A @code{let} expression can be used to create
14692 a local variable for this purpose, and bind it to an initial value of zero.
14693
14694 The @code{end-of-defun} function works like @code{beginning-of-defun}
14695 except that it moves point to the end of the definition.
14696 @code{end-of-defun} can be used as part of an expression that
14697 determines the position of the end of the definition.
14698
14699 The set up for @code{count-words-in-defun} takes shape rapidly: first
14700 we move point to the beginning of the definition, then we create a
14701 local variable to hold the count, and finally, we record the position
14702 of the end of the definition so the @code{while} loop will know when to stop
14703 looping.
14704
14705 @need 1250
14706 The code looks like this:
14707
14708 @smallexample
14709 @group
14710 (beginning-of-defun)
14711 (let ((count 0)
14712 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
14713 @end group
14714 @end smallexample
14715
14716 @noindent
14717 The code is simple. The only slight complication is likely to concern
14718 @code{end}: it is bound to the position of the end of the definition
14719 by a @code{save-excursion} expression that returns the value of point
14720 after @code{end-of-defun} temporarily moves it to the end of the
14721 definition.
14722
14723 The second part of the @code{count-words-in-defun}, after the set up,
14724 is the @code{while} loop.
14725
14726 The loop must contain an expression that jumps point forward word by
14727 word and symbol by symbol, and another expression that counts the
14728 jumps. The true-or-false-test for the @code{while} loop should test
14729 true so long as point should jump forward, and false when point is at
14730 the end of the definition. We have already redefined the regular
14731 expression for this, so the loop is straightforward:
14732
14733 @smallexample
14734 @group
14735 (while (and (< (point) end)
14736 (re-search-forward
14737 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*" end t))
14738 (setq count (1+ count)))
14739 @end group
14740 @end smallexample
14741
14742 The third part of the function definition returns the count of words
14743 and symbols. This part is the last expression within the body of the
14744 @code{let} expression, and can be, very simply, the local variable
14745 @code{count}, which when evaluated returns the count.
14746
14747 @need 1250
14748 Put together, the @code{count-words-in-defun} definition looks like this:
14749
14750 @findex count-words-in-defun
14751 @smallexample
14752 @group
14753 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
14754 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
14755 (beginning-of-defun)
14756 (let ((count 0)
14757 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
14758 @end group
14759 @group
14760 (while
14761 (and (< (point) end)
14762 (re-search-forward
14763 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
14764 end t))
14765 (setq count (1+ count)))
14766 count))
14767 @end group
14768 @end smallexample
14769
14770 How to test this? The function is not interactive, but it is easy to
14771 put a wrapper around the function to make it interactive; we can use
14772 almost the same code as for the recursive version of
14773 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}:
14774
14775 @smallexample
14776 @group
14777 ;;; @r{Interactive version.}
14778 (defun count-words-defun ()
14779 "Number of words and symbols in a function definition."
14780 (interactive)
14781 (message
14782 "Counting words and symbols in function definition ... ")
14783 @end group
14784 @group
14785 (let ((count (count-words-in-defun)))
14786 (cond
14787 ((zerop count)
14788 (message
14789 "The definition does NOT have any words or symbols."))
14790 @end group
14791 @group
14792 ((= 1 count)
14793 (message
14794 "The definition has 1 word or symbol."))
14795 (t
14796 (message
14797 "The definition has %d words or symbols." count)))))
14798 @end group
14799 @end smallexample
14800
14801 @need 800
14802 @noindent
14803 Let's re-use @kbd{C-c =} as a convenient keybinding:
14804
14805 @smallexample
14806 (global-set-key "\C-c=" 'count-words-defun)
14807 @end smallexample
14808
14809 Now we can try out @code{count-words-defun}: install both
14810 @code{count-words-in-defun} and @code{count-words-defun}, and set the
14811 keybinding, and then place the cursor within the following definition:
14812
14813 @smallexample
14814 @group
14815 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
14816 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
14817 (* 7 number))
14818 @result{} 10
14819 @end group
14820 @end smallexample
14821
14822 @noindent
14823 Success! The definition has 10 words and symbols.
14824
14825 The next problem is to count the numbers of words and symbols in
14826 several definitions within a single file.
14827
14828 @node Several defuns
14829 @section Count Several @code{defuns} Within a File
14830
14831 A file such as @file{simple.el} may have a hundred or more function
14832 definitions within it. Our long term goal is to collect statistics on
14833 many files, but as a first step, our immediate goal is to collect
14834 statistics on one file.
14835
14836 The information will be a series of numbers, each number being the
14837 length of a function definition. We can store the numbers in a list.
14838
14839 We know that we will want to incorporate the information regarding one
14840 file with information about many other files; this means that the
14841 function for counting definition lengths within one file need only
14842 return the list of lengths. It need not and should not display any
14843 messages.
14844
14845 The word count commands contain one expression to jump point forward
14846 word by word and another expression to count the jumps. The function
14847 to return the lengths of definitions can be designed to work the same
14848 way, with one expression to jump point forward definition by
14849 definition and another expression to construct the lengths' list.
14850
14851 This statement of the problem makes it elementary to write the
14852 function definition. Clearly, we will start the count at the
14853 beginning of the file, so the first command will be @code{(goto-char
14854 (point-min))}. Next, we start the @code{while} loop; and the
14855 true-or-false test of the loop can be a regular expression search for
14856 the next function definition---so long as the search succeeds, point
14857 is moved forward and then the body of the loop is evaluated. The body
14858 needs an expression that constructs the lengths' list. @code{cons},
14859 the list construction command, can be used to create the list. That
14860 is almost all there is to it.
14861
14862 @need 800
14863 Here is what this fragment of code looks like:
14864
14865 @smallexample
14866 @group
14867 (goto-char (point-min))
14868 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
14869 (setq lengths-list
14870 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
14871 @end group
14872 @end smallexample
14873
14874 What we have left out is the mechanism for finding the file that
14875 contains the function definitions.
14876
14877 In previous examples, we either used this, the Info file, or we
14878 switched back and forth to some other buffer, such as the
14879 @file{*scratch*} buffer.
14880
14881 Finding a file is a new process that we have not yet discussed.
14882
14883 @node Find a File
14884 @section Find a File
14885 @cindex Find a File
14886
14887 To find a file in Emacs, you use the @kbd{C-x C-f} (@code{find-file})
14888 command. This command is almost, but not quite right for the lengths
14889 problem.
14890
14891 @need 1200
14892 Let's look at the source for @code{find-file}:
14893
14894 @smallexample
14895 @group
14896 (defun find-file (filename)
14897 "Edit file FILENAME.
14898 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
14899 creating one if none already exists."
14900 (interactive "FFind file: ")
14901 (switch-to-buffer (find-file-noselect filename)))
14902 @end group
14903 @end smallexample
14904
14905 @noindent
14906 (The most recent version of the @code{find-file} function definition
14907 permits you to specify optional wildcards to visit multiple files; that
14908 makes the definition more complex and we will not discuss it here,
14909 since it is not relevant. You can see its source using either
14910 @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) or @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}).)
14911
14912 @ignore
14913 In Emacs 22
14914 (defun find-file (filename &optional wildcards)
14915 "Edit file FILENAME.
14916 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
14917 creating one if none already exists.
14918 Interactively, the default if you just type RET is the current directory,
14919 but the visited file name is available through the minibuffer history:
14920 type M-n to pull it into the minibuffer.
14921
14922 Interactively, or if WILDCARDS is non-nil in a call from Lisp,
14923 expand wildcards (if any) and visit multiple files. You can
14924 suppress wildcard expansion by setting `find-file-wildcards' to nil.
14925
14926 To visit a file without any kind of conversion and without
14927 automatically choosing a major mode, use \\[find-file-literally]."
14928 (interactive (find-file-read-args "Find file: " nil))
14929 (let ((value (find-file-noselect filename nil nil wildcards)))
14930 (if (listp value)
14931 (mapcar 'switch-to-buffer (nreverse value))
14932 (switch-to-buffer value))))
14933 @end ignore
14934
14935 The definition I am showing possesses short but complete documentation
14936 and an interactive specification that prompts you for a file name when
14937 you use the command interactively. The body of the definition
14938 contains two functions, @code{find-file-noselect} and
14939 @code{switch-to-buffer}.
14940
14941 According to its documentation as shown by @kbd{C-h f} (the
14942 @code{describe-function} command), the @code{find-file-noselect}
14943 function reads the named file into a buffer and returns the buffer.
14944 (Its most recent version includes an optional wildcards argument,
14945 too, as well as another to read a file literally and an other you
14946 suppress warning messages. These optional arguments are irrelevant.)
14947
14948 However, the @code{find-file-noselect} function does not select the
14949 buffer in which it puts the file. Emacs does not switch its attention
14950 (or yours if you are using @code{find-file-noselect}) to the selected
14951 buffer. That is what @code{switch-to-buffer} does: it switches the
14952 buffer to which Emacs attention is directed; and it switches the
14953 buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer. We have discussed
14954 buffer switching elsewhere. (@xref{Switching Buffers}.)
14955
14956 In this histogram project, we do not need to display each file on the
14957 screen as the program determines the length of each definition within
14958 it. Instead of employing @code{switch-to-buffer}, we can work with
14959 @code{set-buffer}, which redirects the attention of the computer
14960 program to a different buffer but does not redisplay it on the screen.
14961 So instead of calling on @code{find-file} to do the job, we must write
14962 our own expression.
14963
14964 The task is easy: use @code{find-file-noselect} and @code{set-buffer}.
14965
14966 @node lengths-list-file
14967 @section @code{lengths-list-file} in Detail
14968
14969 The core of the @code{lengths-list-file} function is a @code{while}
14970 loop containing a function to move point forward `defun by defun' and
14971 a function to count the number of words and symbols in each defun.
14972 This core must be surrounded by functions that do various other tasks,
14973 including finding the file, and ensuring that point starts out at the
14974 beginning of the file. The function definition looks like this:
14975 @findex lengths-list-file
14976
14977 @smallexample
14978 @group
14979 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
14980 "Return list of definitions' lengths within FILE.
14981 The returned list is a list of numbers.
14982 Each number is the number of words or
14983 symbols in one function definition."
14984 @end group
14985 @group
14986 (message "Working on `%s' ... " filename)
14987 (save-excursion
14988 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
14989 (lengths-list))
14990 (set-buffer buffer)
14991 (setq buffer-read-only t)
14992 (widen)
14993 (goto-char (point-min))
14994 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
14995 (setq lengths-list
14996 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
14997 (kill-buffer buffer)
14998 lengths-list)))
14999 @end group
15000 @end smallexample
15001
15002 @noindent
15003 The function is passed one argument, the name of the file on which it
15004 will work. It has four lines of documentation, but no interactive
15005 specification. Since people worry that a computer is broken if they
15006 don't see anything going on, the first line of the body is a
15007 message.
15008
15009 The next line contains a @code{save-excursion} that returns Emacs's
15010 attention to the current buffer when the function completes. This is
15011 useful in case you embed this function in another function that
15012 presumes point is restored to the original buffer.
15013
15014 In the varlist of the @code{let} expression, Emacs finds the file and
15015 binds the local variable @code{buffer} to the buffer containing the
15016 file. At the same time, Emacs creates @code{lengths-list} as a local
15017 variable.
15018
15019 Next, Emacs switches its attention to the buffer.
15020
15021 In the following line, Emacs makes the buffer read-only. Ideally,
15022 this line is not necessary. None of the functions for counting words
15023 and symbols in a function definition should change the buffer.
15024 Besides, the buffer is not going to be saved, even if it were changed.
15025 This line is entirely the consequence of great, perhaps excessive,
15026 caution. The reason for the caution is that this function and those
15027 it calls work on the sources for Emacs and it is inconvenient if they
15028 are inadvertently modified. It goes without saying that I did not
15029 realize a need for this line until an experiment went awry and started
15030 to modify my Emacs source files @dots{}
15031
15032 Next comes a call to widen the buffer if it is narrowed. This
15033 function is usually not needed---Emacs creates a fresh buffer if none
15034 already exists; but if a buffer visiting the file already exists Emacs
15035 returns that one. In this case, the buffer may be narrowed and must
15036 be widened. If we wanted to be fully `user-friendly', we would
15037 arrange to save the restriction and the location of point, but we
15038 won't.
15039
15040 The @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression moves point to the
15041 beginning of the buffer.
15042
15043 Then comes a @code{while} loop in which the `work' of the function is
15044 carried out. In the loop, Emacs determines the length of each
15045 definition and constructs a lengths' list containing the information.
15046
15047 Emacs kills the buffer after working through it. This is to save
15048 space inside of Emacs. My version of GNU Emacs 19 contained over 300
15049 source files of interest; GNU Emacs 22 contains over a thousand source
15050 files. Another function will apply @code{lengths-list-file} to each
15051 of the files.
15052
15053 Finally, the last expression within the @code{let} expression is the
15054 @code{lengths-list} variable; its value is returned as the value of
15055 the whole function.
15056
15057 You can try this function by installing it in the usual fashion. Then
15058 place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
15059 C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}).
15060
15061 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15062 @smallexample
15063 (lengths-list-file
15064 "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el")
15065 @end smallexample
15066
15067 @noindent
15068 (You may need to change the pathname of the file; the one here is for
15069 GNU Emacs version 22.1.1. To change the expression, copy it to
15070 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and edit it.
15071
15072 @need 1200
15073 @noindent
15074 (Also, to see the full length of the list, rather than a truncated
15075 version, you may have to evaluate the following:
15076
15077 @smallexample
15078 (custom-set-variables '(eval-expression-print-length nil))
15079 @end smallexample
15080
15081 @noindent
15082 (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}}.
15083 Then evaluate the @code{lengths-list-file} expression.)
15084
15085 @need 1200
15086 The lengths' list for @file{debug.el} takes less than a second to
15087 produce and looks like this in GNU Emacs 22:
15088
15089 @smallexample
15090 (83 113 105 144 289 22 30 97 48 89 25 52 52 88 28 29 77 49 43 290 232 587)
15091 @end smallexample
15092
15093 @need 1500
15094 (Using my old machine, the version 19 lengths' list for @file{debug.el}
15095 took seven seconds to produce and looked like this:
15096
15097 @smallexample
15098 (75 41 80 62 20 45 44 68 45 12 34 235)
15099 @end smallexample
15100
15101 (The newer version of @file{debug.el} contains more defuns than the
15102 earlier one; and my new machine is much faster than the old one.)
15103
15104 Note that the length of the last definition in the file is first in
15105 the list.
15106
15107 @node Several files
15108 @section Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
15109
15110 In the previous section, we created a function that returns a list of
15111 the lengths of each definition in a file. Now, we want to define a
15112 function to return a master list of the lengths of the definitions in
15113 a list of files.
15114
15115 Working on each of a list of files is a repetitious act, so we can use
15116 either a @code{while} loop or recursion.
15117
15118 @menu
15119 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
15120 * append:: Attach one list to another.
15121 @end menu
15122
15123 @ifnottex
15124 @node lengths-list-many-files
15125 @unnumberedsubsec Determine the lengths of @code{defuns}
15126 @end ifnottex
15127
15128 The design using a @code{while} loop is routine. The argument passed
15129 the function is a list of files. As we saw earlier (@pxref{Loop
15130 Example}), you can write a @code{while} loop so that the body of the
15131 loop is evaluated if such a list contains elements, but to exit the
15132 loop if the list is empty. For this design to work, the body of the
15133 loop must contain an expression that shortens the list each time the
15134 body is evaluated, so that eventually the list is empty. The usual
15135 technique is to set the value of the list to the value of the @sc{cdr}
15136 of the list each time the body is evaluated.
15137
15138 @need 800
15139 The template looks like this:
15140
15141 @smallexample
15142 @group
15143 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
15144 @var{body}@dots{}
15145 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
15146 @end group
15147 @end smallexample
15148
15149 Also, we remember that a @code{while} loop returns @code{nil} (the
15150 result of evaluating the true-or-false-test), not the result of any
15151 evaluation within its body. (The evaluations within the body of the
15152 loop are done for their side effects.) However, the expression that
15153 sets the lengths' list is part of the body---and that is the value
15154 that we want returned by the function as a whole. To do this, we
15155 enclose the @code{while} loop within a @code{let} expression, and
15156 arrange that the last element of the @code{let} expression contains
15157 the value of the lengths' list. (@xref{Incrementing Example, , Loop
15158 Example with an Incrementing Counter}.)
15159
15160 @findex lengths-list-many-files
15161 @need 1250
15162 These considerations lead us directly to the function itself:
15163
15164 @smallexample
15165 @group
15166 ;;; @r{Use @code{while} loop.}
15167 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15168 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
15169 @end group
15170 @group
15171 (let (lengths-list)
15172
15173 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
15174 (while list-of-files
15175 (setq lengths-list
15176 (append
15177 lengths-list
15178
15179 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
15180 (lengths-list-file
15181 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
15182 @end group
15183
15184 @group
15185 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
15186 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
15187
15188 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
15189 lengths-list))
15190 @end group
15191 @end smallexample
15192
15193 @code{expand-file-name} is a built-in function that converts a file
15194 name to the absolute, long, path name form. The function employs the
15195 name of the directory in which the function is called.
15196
15197 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15198 @need 1500
15199 Thus, if @code{expand-file-name} is called on @code{debug.el} when
15200 Emacs is visiting the
15201 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/} directory,
15202
15203 @smallexample
15204 debug.el
15205 @end smallexample
15206
15207 @need 800
15208 @noindent
15209 becomes
15210
15211 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15212 @smallexample
15213 /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el
15214 @end smallexample
15215
15216 The only other new element of this function definition is the as yet
15217 unstudied function @code{append}, which merits a short section for
15218 itself.
15219
15220 @node append
15221 @subsection The @code{append} Function
15222
15223 @need 800
15224 The @code{append} function attaches one list to another. Thus,
15225
15226 @smallexample
15227 (append '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15228 @end smallexample
15229
15230 @need 800
15231 @noindent
15232 produces the list
15233
15234 @smallexample
15235 (1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8)
15236 @end smallexample
15237
15238 This is exactly how we want to attach two lengths' lists produced by
15239 @code{lengths-list-file} to each other. The results contrast with
15240 @code{cons},
15241
15242 @smallexample
15243 (cons '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15244 @end smallexample
15245
15246 @need 1250
15247 @noindent
15248 which constructs a new list in which the first argument to @code{cons}
15249 becomes the first element of the new list:
15250
15251 @smallexample
15252 ((1 2 3 4) 5 6 7 8)
15253 @end smallexample
15254
15255 @node Several files recursively
15256 @section Recursively Count Words in Different Files
15257
15258 Besides a @code{while} loop, you can work on each of a list of files
15259 with recursion. A recursive version of @code{lengths-list-many-files}
15260 is short and simple.
15261
15262 The recursive function has the usual parts: the `do-again-test', the
15263 `next-step-expression', and the recursive call. The `do-again-test'
15264 determines whether the function should call itself again, which it
15265 will do if the @code{list-of-files} contains any remaining elements;
15266 the `next-step-expression' resets the @code{list-of-files} to the
15267 @sc{cdr} of itself, so eventually the list will be empty; and the
15268 recursive call calls itself on the shorter list. The complete
15269 function is shorter than this description!
15270 @findex recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15271
15272 @smallexample
15273 @group
15274 (defun recursive-lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15275 "Return list of lengths of each defun in LIST-OF-FILES."
15276 (if list-of-files ; @r{do-again-test}
15277 (append
15278 (lengths-list-file
15279 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))
15280 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15281 (cdr list-of-files)))))
15282 @end group
15283 @end smallexample
15284
15285 @noindent
15286 In a sentence, the function returns the lengths' list for the first of
15287 the @code{list-of-files} appended to the result of calling itself on
15288 the rest of the @code{list-of-files}.
15289
15290 Here is a test of @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}, along with
15291 the results of running @code{lengths-list-file} on each of the files
15292 individually.
15293
15294 Install @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} and
15295 @code{lengths-list-file}, if necessary, and then evaluate the
15296 following expressions. You may need to change the files' pathnames;
15297 those here work when this Info file and the Emacs sources are located
15298 in their customary places. To change the expressions, copy them to
15299 the @file{*scratch*} buffer, edit them, and then evaluate them.
15300
15301 The results are shown after the @samp{@result{}}. (These results are
15302 for files from Emacs version 22.1.1; files from other versions of
15303 Emacs may produce different results.)
15304
15305 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15306 @smallexample
15307 @group
15308 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/")
15309
15310 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/macros.el")
15311 @result{} (283 263 480 90)
15312 @end group
15313
15314 @group
15315 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el")
15316 @result{} (38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324)
15317 @end group
15318
15319 @group
15320 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/makesum.el")
15321 @result{} (85 181)
15322 @end group
15323
15324 @group
15325 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15326 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15327 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15328 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15329 @result{} (283 263 480 90 38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324 85 181)
15330 @end group
15331 @end smallexample
15332
15333 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function produces the
15334 output we want.
15335
15336 The next step is to prepare the data in the list for display in a graph.
15337
15338 @node Prepare the data
15339 @section Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
15340
15341 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a list
15342 of numbers. Each number records the length of a function definition.
15343 What we need to do now is transform this data into a list of numbers
15344 suitable for generating a graph. The new list will tell how many
15345 functions definitions contain less than 10 words and
15346 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
15347 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
15348
15349 In brief, we need to go through the lengths' list produced by the
15350 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function and count the number
15351 of defuns within each range of lengths, and produce a list of those
15352 numbers.
15353
15354 @menu
15355 * Data for Display in Detail::
15356 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
15357 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
15358 * Counting function definitions::
15359 @end menu
15360
15361 @ifnottex
15362 @node Data for Display in Detail
15363 @unnumberedsubsec The Data for Display in Detail
15364 @end ifnottex
15365
15366 Based on what we have done before, we can readily foresee that it
15367 should not be too hard to write a function that `@sc{cdr}s' down the
15368 lengths' list, looks at each element, determines which length range it
15369 is in, and increments a counter for that range.
15370
15371 However, before beginning to write such a function, we should consider
15372 the advantages of sorting the lengths' list first, so the numbers are
15373 ordered from smallest to largest. First, sorting will make it easier
15374 to count the numbers in each range, since two adjacent numbers will
15375 either be in the same length range or in adjacent ranges. Second, by
15376 inspecting a sorted list, we can discover the highest and lowest
15377 number, and thereby determine the largest and smallest length range
15378 that we will need.
15379
15380 @node Sorting
15381 @subsection Sorting Lists
15382 @findex sort
15383
15384 Emacs contains a function to sort lists, called (as you might guess)
15385 @code{sort}. The @code{sort} function takes two arguments, the list
15386 to be sorted, and a predicate that determines whether the first of
15387 two list elements is ``less'' than the second.
15388
15389 As we saw earlier (@pxref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong
15390 Type Object as an Argument}), a predicate is a function that
15391 determines whether some property is true or false. The @code{sort}
15392 function will reorder a list according to whatever property the
15393 predicate uses; this means that @code{sort} can be used to sort
15394 non-numeric lists by non-numeric criteria---it can, for example,
15395 alphabetize a list.
15396
15397 @need 1250
15398 The @code{<} function is used when sorting a numeric list. For example,
15399
15400 @smallexample
15401 (sort '(4 8 21 17 33 7 21 7) '<)
15402 @end smallexample
15403
15404 @need 800
15405 @noindent
15406 produces this:
15407
15408 @smallexample
15409 (4 7 7 8 17 21 21 33)
15410 @end smallexample
15411
15412 @noindent
15413 (Note that in this example, both the arguments are quoted so that the
15414 symbols are not evaluated before being passed to @code{sort} as
15415 arguments.)
15416
15417 Sorting the list returned by the
15418 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function is straightforward;
15419 it uses the @code{<} function:
15420
15421 @ignore
15422 2006 Oct 29
15423 In GNU Emacs 22, eval
15424 (progn
15425 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.0.50/")
15426 (sort
15427 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15428 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15429 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15430 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15431 '<))
15432
15433 @end ignore
15434
15435 @smallexample
15436 @group
15437 (sort
15438 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15439 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15440 "./lisp/mailalias.el"
15441 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15442 '<)
15443 @end group
15444 @end smallexample
15445
15446 @need 800
15447 @noindent
15448 which produces:
15449
15450 @smallexample
15451 (29 32 38 85 90 95 178 180 181 218 263 283 321 324 480)
15452 @end smallexample
15453
15454 @noindent
15455 (Note that in this example, the first argument to @code{sort} is not
15456 quoted, since the expression must be evaluated so as to produce the
15457 list that is passed to @code{sort}.)
15458
15459 @node Files List
15460 @subsection Making a List of Files
15461
15462 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function requires a list
15463 of files as its argument. For our test examples, we constructed such
15464 a list by hand; but the Emacs Lisp source directory is too large for
15465 us to do for that. Instead, we will write a function to do the job
15466 for us. In this function, we will use both a @code{while} loop and a
15467 recursive call.
15468
15469 @findex directory-files
15470 We did not have to write a function like this for older versions of
15471 GNU Emacs, since they placed all the @samp{.el} files in one
15472 directory. Instead, we were able to use the @code{directory-files}
15473 function, which lists the names of files that match a specified
15474 pattern within a single directory.
15475
15476 However, recent versions of Emacs place Emacs Lisp files in
15477 sub-directories of the top level @file{lisp} directory. This
15478 re-arrangement eases navigation. For example, all the mail related
15479 files are in a @file{lisp} sub-directory called @file{mail}. But at
15480 the same time, this arrangement forces us to create a file listing
15481 function that descends into the sub-directories.
15482
15483 @findex files-in-below-directory
15484 We can create this function, called @code{files-in-below-directory},
15485 using familiar functions such as @code{car}, @code{nthcdr}, and
15486 @code{substring} in conjunction with an existing function called
15487 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}. This latter function not only
15488 lists all the filenames in a directory, including the names
15489 of sub-directories, but also their attributes.
15490
15491 To restate our goal: to create a function that will enable us
15492 to feed filenames to @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}
15493 as a list that looks like this (but with more elements):
15494
15495 @smallexample
15496 @group
15497 ("./lisp/macros.el"
15498 "./lisp/mail/rmail.el"
15499 "./lisp/makesum.el")
15500 @end group
15501 @end smallexample
15502
15503 The @code{directory-files-and-attributes} function returns a list of
15504 lists. Each of the lists within the main list consists of 13
15505 elements. The first element is a string that contains the name of the
15506 file---which, in GNU/Linux, may be a `directory file', that is to
15507 say, a file with the special attributes of a directory. The second
15508 element of the list is @code{t} for a directory, a string
15509 for symbolic link (the string is the name linked to), or @code{nil}.
15510
15511 For example, the first @samp{.el} file in the @file{lisp/} directory
15512 is @file{abbrev.el}. Its name is
15513 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/abbrev.el} and it is not a
15514 directory or a symbolic link.
15515
15516 @need 1000
15517 This is how @code{directory-files-and-attributes} lists that file and
15518 its attributes:
15519
15520 @smallexample
15521 @group
15522 ("abbrev.el"
15523 nil
15524 1
15525 1000
15526 100
15527 @end group
15528 @group
15529 (20615 27034 579989 697000)
15530 (17905 55681 0 0)
15531 (20615 26327 734791 805000)
15532 13188
15533 "-rw-r--r--"
15534 @end group
15535 @group
15536 t
15537 2971624
15538 773)
15539 @end group
15540 @end smallexample
15541
15542 @need 1200
15543 On the other hand, @file{mail/} is a directory within the @file{lisp/}
15544 directory. The beginning of its listing looks like this:
15545
15546 @smallexample
15547 @group
15548 ("mail"
15549 t
15550 @dots{}
15551 )
15552 @end group
15553 @end smallexample
15554
15555 (To learn about the different attributes, look at the documentation of
15556 @code{file-attributes}. Bear in mind that the @code{file-attributes}
15557 function does not list the filename, so its first element is
15558 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}'s second element.)
15559
15560 We will want our new function, @code{files-in-below-directory}, to
15561 list the @samp{.el} files in the directory it is told to check, and in
15562 any directories below that directory.
15563
15564 This gives us a hint on how to construct
15565 @code{files-in-below-directory}: within a directory, the function
15566 should add @samp{.el} filenames to a list; and if, within a directory,
15567 the function comes upon a sub-directory, it should go into that
15568 sub-directory and repeat its actions.
15569
15570 However, we should note that every directory contains a name that
15571 refers to itself, called @file{.}, (``dot'') and a name that refers to
15572 its parent directory, called @file{..} (``double dot''). (In
15573 @file{/}, the root directory, @file{..} refers to itself, since
15574 @file{/} has no parent.) Clearly, we do not want our
15575 @code{files-in-below-directory} function to enter those directories,
15576 since they always lead us, directly or indirectly, to the current
15577 directory.
15578
15579 Consequently, our @code{files-in-below-directory} function must do
15580 several tasks:
15581
15582 @itemize @bullet
15583 @item
15584 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that ends in
15585 @samp{.el}; and if so, add its name to a list.
15586
15587 @item
15588 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that is the name of a
15589 directory; and if so,
15590
15591 @itemize @minus
15592 @item
15593 Check to see whether it is looking at @file{.} or @file{..}; and if
15594 so skip it.
15595
15596 @item
15597 Or else, go into that directory and repeat the process.
15598 @end itemize
15599 @end itemize
15600
15601 Let's write a function definition to do these tasks. We will use a
15602 @code{while} loop to move from one filename to another within a
15603 directory, checking what needs to be done; and we will use a recursive
15604 call to repeat the actions on each sub-directory. The recursive
15605 pattern is `accumulate'
15606 (@pxref{Accumulate}),
15607 using @code{append} as the combiner.
15608
15609 @ignore
15610 (directory-files "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15611 (shell-command "find /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15612
15613 (directory-files "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15614 (shell-command "find /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15615 @end ignore
15616
15617 @c /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/
15618
15619 @need 800
15620 Here is the function:
15621
15622 @smallexample
15623 @group
15624 (defun files-in-below-directory (directory)
15625 "List the .el files in DIRECTORY and in its sub-directories."
15626 ;; Although the function will be used non-interactively,
15627 ;; it will be easier to test if we make it interactive.
15628 ;; The directory will have a name such as
15629 ;; "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"
15630 (interactive "DDirectory name: ")
15631 @end group
15632 @group
15633 (let (el-files-list
15634 (current-directory-list
15635 (directory-files-and-attributes directory t)))
15636 ;; while we are in the current directory
15637 (while current-directory-list
15638 @end group
15639 @group
15640 (cond
15641 ;; check to see whether filename ends in `.el'
15642 ;; and if so, append its name to a list.
15643 ((equal ".el" (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -3))
15644 (setq el-files-list
15645 (cons (car (car current-directory-list)) el-files-list)))
15646 @end group
15647 @group
15648 ;; check whether filename is that of a directory
15649 ((eq t (car (cdr (car current-directory-list))))
15650 ;; decide whether to skip or recurse
15651 (if
15652 (equal "."
15653 (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -1))
15654 ;; then do nothing since filename is that of
15655 ;; current directory or parent, "." or ".."
15656 ()
15657 @end group
15658 @group
15659 ;; else descend into the directory and repeat the process
15660 (setq el-files-list
15661 (append
15662 (files-in-below-directory
15663 (car (car current-directory-list)))
15664 el-files-list)))))
15665 ;; move to the next filename in the list; this also
15666 ;; shortens the list so the while loop eventually comes to an end
15667 (setq current-directory-list (cdr current-directory-list)))
15668 ;; return the filenames
15669 el-files-list))
15670 @end group
15671 @end smallexample
15672
15673 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/")
15674 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15675
15676 The @code{files-in-below-directory} @code{directory-files} function
15677 takes one argument, the name of a directory.
15678
15679 @need 1250
15680 Thus, on my system,
15681
15682 @c (length (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15683
15684 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15685 @smallexample
15686 @group
15687 (length
15688 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"))
15689 @end group
15690 @end smallexample
15691
15692 @noindent
15693 tells me that in and below my Lisp sources directory are 1031
15694 @samp{.el} files.
15695
15696 @code{files-in-below-directory} returns a list in reverse alphabetical
15697 order. An expression to sort the list in alphabetical order looks
15698 like this:
15699
15700 @smallexample
15701 @group
15702 (sort
15703 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15704 'string-lessp)
15705 @end group
15706 @end smallexample
15707
15708 @ignore
15709 (defun test ()
15710 "Test how long it takes to find lengths of all sorted elisp defuns."
15711 (insert "\n" (current-time-string) "\n")
15712 (sit-for 0)
15713 (sort
15714 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15715 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15716 '<)
15717 (insert (format "%s" (current-time-string))))
15718 @end ignore
15719
15720 @node Counting function definitions
15721 @subsection Counting function definitions
15722
15723 Our immediate goal is to generate a list that tells us how many
15724 function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and symbols, how many
15725 contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how many contain between
15726 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
15727
15728 With a sorted list of numbers, this is easy: count how many elements
15729 of the list are smaller than 10, then, after moving past the numbers
15730 just counted, count how many are smaller than 20, then, after moving
15731 past the numbers just counted, count how many are smaller than 30, and
15732 so on. Each of the numbers, 10, 20, 30, 40, and the like, is one
15733 larger than the top of that range. We can call the list of such
15734 numbers the @code{top-of-ranges} list.
15735
15736 @need 1200
15737 If we wished, we could generate this list automatically, but it is
15738 simpler to write a list manually. Here it is:
15739 @vindex top-of-ranges
15740
15741 @smallexample
15742 @group
15743 (defvar top-of-ranges
15744 '(10 20 30 40 50
15745 60 70 80 90 100
15746 110 120 130 140 150
15747 160 170 180 190 200
15748 210 220 230 240 250
15749 260 270 280 290 300)
15750 "List specifying ranges for `defuns-per-range'.")
15751 @end group
15752 @end smallexample
15753
15754 To change the ranges, we edit this list.
15755
15756 Next, we need to write the function that creates the list of the
15757 number of definitions within each range. Clearly, this function must
15758 take the @code{sorted-lengths} and the @code{top-of-ranges} lists
15759 as arguments.
15760
15761 The @code{defuns-per-range} function must do two things again and
15762 again: it must count the number of definitions within a range
15763 specified by the current top-of-range value; and it must shift to the
15764 next higher value in the @code{top-of-ranges} list after counting the
15765 number of definitions in the current range. Since each of these
15766 actions is repetitive, we can use @code{while} loops for the job.
15767 One loop counts the number of definitions in the range defined by the
15768 current top-of-range value, and the other loop selects each of the
15769 top-of-range values in turn.
15770
15771 Several entries of the @code{sorted-lengths} list are counted for each
15772 range; this means that the loop for the @code{sorted-lengths} list
15773 will be inside the loop for the @code{top-of-ranges} list, like a
15774 small gear inside a big gear.
15775
15776 The inner loop counts the number of definitions within the range. It
15777 is a simple counting loop of the type we have seen before.
15778 (@xref{Incrementing Loop, , A loop with an incrementing counter}.)
15779 The true-or-false test of the loop tests whether the value from the
15780 @code{sorted-lengths} list is smaller than the current value of the
15781 top of the range. If it is, the function increments the counter and
15782 tests the next value from the @code{sorted-lengths} list.
15783
15784 @need 1250
15785 The inner loop looks like this:
15786
15787 @smallexample
15788 @group
15789 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
15790 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
15791 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
15792 @end group
15793 @end smallexample
15794
15795 The outer loop must start with the lowest value of the
15796 @code{top-of-ranges} list, and then be set to each of the succeeding
15797 higher values in turn. This can be done with a loop like this:
15798
15799 @smallexample
15800 @group
15801 (while top-of-ranges
15802 @var{body-of-loop}@dots{}
15803 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
15804 @end group
15805 @end smallexample
15806
15807 @need 1200
15808 Put together, the two loops look like this:
15809
15810 @smallexample
15811 @group
15812 (while top-of-ranges
15813
15814 ;; @r{Count the number of elements within the current range.}
15815 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
15816 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
15817 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
15818
15819 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
15820 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
15821 @end group
15822 @end smallexample
15823
15824 In addition, in each circuit of the outer loop, Emacs should record
15825 the number of definitions within that range (the value of
15826 @code{number-within-range}) in a list. We can use @code{cons} for
15827 this purpose. (@xref{cons, , @code{cons}}.)
15828
15829 The @code{cons} function works fine, except that the list it
15830 constructs will contain the number of definitions for the highest
15831 range at its beginning and the number of definitions for the lowest
15832 range at its end. This is because @code{cons} attaches new elements
15833 of the list to the beginning of the list, and since the two loops are
15834 working their way through the lengths' list from the lower end first,
15835 the @code{defuns-per-range-list} will end up largest number first.
15836 But we will want to print our graph with smallest values first and the
15837 larger later. The solution is to reverse the order of the
15838 @code{defuns-per-range-list}. We can do this using the
15839 @code{nreverse} function, which reverses the order of a list.
15840 @findex nreverse
15841
15842 @need 800
15843 For example,
15844
15845 @smallexample
15846 (nreverse '(1 2 3 4))
15847 @end smallexample
15848
15849 @need 800
15850 @noindent
15851 produces:
15852
15853 @smallexample
15854 (4 3 2 1)
15855 @end smallexample
15856
15857 Note that the @code{nreverse} function is ``destructive''---that is,
15858 it changes the list to which it is applied; this contrasts with the
15859 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions, which are non-destructive. In
15860 this case, we do not want the original @code{defuns-per-range-list},
15861 so it does not matter that it is destroyed. (The @code{reverse}
15862 function provides a reversed copy of a list, leaving the original list
15863 as is.)
15864 @findex reverse
15865
15866 @need 1250
15867 Put all together, the @code{defuns-per-range} looks like this:
15868
15869 @smallexample
15870 @group
15871 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
15872 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
15873 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
15874 (number-within-range 0)
15875 defuns-per-range-list)
15876 @end group
15877
15878 @group
15879 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
15880 (while top-of-ranges
15881 @end group
15882
15883 @group
15884 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
15885 (while (and
15886 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
15887 (car sorted-lengths)
15888 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
15889 @end group
15890
15891 @group
15892 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
15893 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
15894 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
15895
15896 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
15897 @end group
15898
15899 @group
15900 (setq defuns-per-range-list
15901 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
15902 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
15903 @end group
15904
15905 @group
15906 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
15907 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
15908 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
15909 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
15910 @end group
15911
15912 @group
15913 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
15914 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
15915 (setq defuns-per-range-list
15916 (cons
15917 (length sorted-lengths)
15918 defuns-per-range-list))
15919 @end group
15920
15921 @group
15922 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
15923 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
15924 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
15925 @end group
15926 @end smallexample
15927
15928 @need 1200
15929 @noindent
15930 The function is straightforward except for one subtle feature. The
15931 true-or-false test of the inner loop looks like this:
15932
15933 @smallexample
15934 @group
15935 (and (car sorted-lengths)
15936 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
15937 @end group
15938 @end smallexample
15939
15940 @need 800
15941 @noindent
15942 instead of like this:
15943
15944 @smallexample
15945 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range)
15946 @end smallexample
15947
15948 The purpose of the test is to determine whether the first item in the
15949 @code{sorted-lengths} list is less than the value of the top of the
15950 range.
15951
15952 The simple version of the test works fine unless the
15953 @code{sorted-lengths} list has a @code{nil} value. In that case, the
15954 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression function returns
15955 @code{nil}. The @code{<} function cannot compare a number to
15956 @code{nil}, which is an empty list, so Emacs signals an error and
15957 stops the function from attempting to continue to execute.
15958
15959 The @code{sorted-lengths} list always becomes @code{nil} when the
15960 counter reaches the end of the list. This means that any attempt to
15961 use the @code{defuns-per-range} function with the simple version of
15962 the test will fail.
15963
15964 We solve the problem by using the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
15965 expression in conjunction with the @code{and} expression. The
15966 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression returns a non-@code{nil}
15967 value so long as the list has at least one number within it, but
15968 returns @code{nil} if the list is empty. The @code{and} expression
15969 first evaluates the @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression, and
15970 if it is @code{nil}, returns false @emph{without} evaluating the
15971 @code{<} expression. But if the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
15972 expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, the @code{and} expression
15973 evaluates the @code{<} expression, and returns that value as the value
15974 of the @code{and} expression.
15975
15976 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
15977 This way, we avoid an error.
15978 @iftex
15979 @noindent
15980 (For information about @code{and}, see
15981 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
15982 @end iftex
15983 @ifinfo
15984 @noindent
15985 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
15986 information about @code{and}.)
15987 @end ifinfo
15988
15989 Here is a short test of the @code{defuns-per-range} function. First,
15990 evaluate the expression that binds (a shortened)
15991 @code{top-of-ranges} list to the list of values, then evaluate the
15992 expression for binding the @code{sorted-lengths} list, and then
15993 evaluate the @code{defuns-per-range} function.
15994
15995 @smallexample
15996 @group
15997 ;; @r{(Shorter list than we will use later.)}
15998 (setq top-of-ranges
15999 '(110 120 130 140 150
16000 160 170 180 190 200))
16001
16002 (setq sorted-lengths
16003 '(85 86 110 116 122 129 154 176 179 200 265 300 300))
16004
16005 (defuns-per-range sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
16006 @end group
16007 @end smallexample
16008
16009 @need 800
16010 @noindent
16011 The list returned looks like this:
16012
16013 @smallexample
16014 (2 2 2 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 4)
16015 @end smallexample
16016
16017 @noindent
16018 Indeed, there are two elements of the @code{sorted-lengths} list
16019 smaller than 110, two elements between 110 and 119, two elements
16020 between 120 and 129, and so on. There are four elements with a value
16021 of 200 or larger.
16022
16023 @c The next step is to turn this numbers' list into a graph.
16024 @node Readying a Graph
16025 @chapter Readying a Graph
16026 @cindex Readying a graph
16027 @cindex Graph prototype
16028 @cindex Prototype graph
16029 @cindex Body of graph
16030
16031 Our goal is to construct a graph showing the numbers of function
16032 definitions of various lengths in the Emacs lisp sources.
16033
16034 As a practical matter, if you were creating a graph, you would
16035 probably use a program such as @code{gnuplot} to do the job.
16036 (@code{gnuplot} is nicely integrated into GNU Emacs.) In this case,
16037 however, we create one from scratch, and in the process we will
16038 re-acquaint ourselves with some of what we learned before and learn
16039 more.
16040
16041 In this chapter, we will first write a simple graph printing function.
16042 This first definition will be a @dfn{prototype}, a rapidly written
16043 function that enables us to reconnoiter this unknown graph-making
16044 territory. We will discover dragons, or find that they are myth.
16045 After scouting the terrain, we will feel more confident and enhance
16046 the function to label the axes automatically.
16047
16048 @menu
16049 * Columns of a graph::
16050 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
16051 * recursive-graph-body-print::
16052 * Printed Axes::
16053 * Line Graph Exercise::
16054 @end menu
16055
16056 @ifnottex
16057 @node Columns of a graph
16058 @unnumberedsec Printing the Columns of a Graph
16059 @end ifnottex
16060
16061 Since Emacs is designed to be flexible and work with all kinds of
16062 terminals, including character-only terminals, the graph will need to
16063 be made from one of the `typewriter' symbols. An asterisk will do; as
16064 we enhance the graph-printing function, we can make the choice of
16065 symbol a user option.
16066
16067 We can call this function @code{graph-body-print}; it will take a
16068 @code{numbers-list} as its only argument. At this stage, we will not
16069 label the graph, but only print its body.
16070
16071 The @code{graph-body-print} function inserts a vertical column of
16072 asterisks for each element in the @code{numbers-list}. The height of
16073 each line is determined by the value of that element of the
16074 @code{numbers-list}.
16075
16076 Inserting columns is a repetitive act; that means that this function can
16077 be written either with a @code{while} loop or recursively.
16078
16079 Our first challenge is to discover how to print a column of asterisks.
16080 Usually, in Emacs, we print characters onto a screen horizontally,
16081 line by line, by typing. We have two routes we can follow: write our
16082 own column-insertion function or discover whether one exists in Emacs.
16083
16084 To see whether there is one in Emacs, we can use the @kbd{M-x apropos}
16085 command. This command is like the @kbd{C-h a} (@code{command-apropos})
16086 command, except that the latter finds only those functions that are
16087 commands. The @kbd{M-x apropos} command lists all symbols that match
16088 a regular expression, including functions that are not interactive.
16089 @findex apropos
16090
16091 What we want to look for is some command that prints or inserts
16092 columns. Very likely, the name of the function will contain either
16093 the word `print' or the word `insert' or the word `column'.
16094 Therefore, we can simply type @kbd{M-x apropos RET
16095 print\|insert\|column RET} and look at the result. On my system, this
16096 command once too takes quite some time, and then produced a list of 79
16097 functions and variables. Now it does not take much time at all and
16098 produces a list of 211 functions and variables. Scanning down the
16099 list, the only function that looks as if it might do the job is
16100 @code{insert-rectangle}.
16101
16102 @need 1200
16103 Indeed, this is the function we want; its documentation says:
16104
16105 @smallexample
16106 @group
16107 insert-rectangle:
16108 Insert text of RECTANGLE with upper left corner at point.
16109 RECTANGLE's first line is inserted at point,
16110 its second line is inserted at a point vertically under point, etc.
16111 RECTANGLE should be a list of strings.
16112 After this command, the mark is at the upper left corner
16113 and point is at the lower right corner.
16114 @end group
16115 @end smallexample
16116
16117 We can run a quick test, to make sure it does what we expect of it.
16118
16119 Here is the result of placing the cursor after the
16120 @code{insert-rectangle} expression and typing @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
16121 (@code{eval-last-sexp}). The function inserts the strings
16122 @samp{"first"}, @samp{"second"}, and @samp{"third"} at and below
16123 point. Also the function returns @code{nil}.
16124
16125 @smallexample
16126 @group
16127 (insert-rectangle '("first" "second" "third"))first
16128 second
16129 thirdnil
16130 @end group
16131 @end smallexample
16132
16133 @noindent
16134 Of course, we won't be inserting the text of the
16135 @code{insert-rectangle} expression itself into the buffer in which we
16136 are making the graph, but will call the function from our program. We
16137 shall, however, have to make sure that point is in the buffer at the
16138 place where the @code{insert-rectangle} function will insert its
16139 column of strings.
16140
16141 If you are reading this in Info, you can see how this works by
16142 switching to another buffer, such as the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
16143 placing point somewhere in the buffer, typing @kbd{M-:}, typing the
16144 @code{insert-rectangle} expression into the minibuffer at the prompt,
16145 and then typing @key{RET}. This causes Emacs to evaluate the
16146 expression in the minibuffer, but to use as the value of point the
16147 position of point in the @file{*scratch*} buffer. (@kbd{M-:} is the
16148 keybinding for @code{eval-expression}. Also, @code{nil} does not
16149 appear in the @file{*scratch*} buffer since the expression is
16150 evaluated in the minibuffer.)
16151
16152 We find when we do this that point ends up at the end of the last
16153 inserted line---that is to say, this function moves point as a
16154 side-effect. If we were to repeat the command, with point at this
16155 position, the next insertion would be below and to the right of the
16156 previous insertion. We don't want this! If we are going to make a
16157 bar graph, the columns need to be beside each other.
16158
16159 So we discover that each cycle of the column-inserting @code{while}
16160 loop must reposition point to the place we want it, and that place
16161 will be at the top, not the bottom, of the column. Moreover, we
16162 remember that when we print a graph, we do not expect all the columns
16163 to be the same height. This means that the top of each column may be
16164 at a different height from the previous one. We cannot simply
16165 reposition point to the same line each time, but moved over to the
16166 right---or perhaps we can@dots{}
16167
16168 We are planning to make the columns of the bar graph out of asterisks.
16169 The number of asterisks in the column is the number specified by the
16170 current element of the @code{numbers-list}. We need to construct a
16171 list of asterisks of the right length for each call to
16172 @code{insert-rectangle}. If this list consists solely of the requisite
16173 number of asterisks, then we will have position point the right number
16174 of lines above the base for the graph to print correctly. This could
16175 be difficult.
16176
16177 Alternatively, if we can figure out some way to pass
16178 @code{insert-rectangle} a list of the same length each time, then we
16179 can place point on the same line each time, but move it over one
16180 column to the right for each new column. If we do this, however, some
16181 of the entries in the list passed to @code{insert-rectangle} must be
16182 blanks rather than asterisks. For example, if the maximum height of
16183 the graph is 5, but the height of the column is 3, then
16184 @code{insert-rectangle} requires an argument that looks like this:
16185
16186 @smallexample
16187 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16188 @end smallexample
16189
16190 This last proposal is not so difficult, so long as we can determine
16191 the column height. There are two ways for us to specify the column
16192 height: we can arbitrarily state what it will be, which would work
16193 fine for graphs of that height; or we can search through the list of
16194 numbers and use the maximum height of the list as the maximum height
16195 of the graph. If the latter operation were difficult, then the former
16196 procedure would be easiest, but there is a function built into Emacs
16197 that determines the maximum of its arguments. We can use that
16198 function. The function is called @code{max} and it returns the
16199 largest of all its arguments, which must be numbers. Thus, for
16200 example,
16201
16202 @smallexample
16203 (max 3 4 6 5 7 3)
16204 @end smallexample
16205
16206 @noindent
16207 returns 7. (A corresponding function called @code{min} returns the
16208 smallest of all its arguments.)
16209 @findex max
16210 @findex min
16211
16212 However, we cannot simply call @code{max} on the @code{numbers-list};
16213 the @code{max} function expects numbers as its argument, not a list of
16214 numbers. Thus, the following expression,
16215
16216 @smallexample
16217 (max '(3 4 6 5 7 3))
16218 @end smallexample
16219
16220 @need 800
16221 @noindent
16222 produces the following error message;
16223
16224 @smallexample
16225 Wrong type of argument: number-or-marker-p, (3 4 6 5 7 3)
16226 @end smallexample
16227
16228 @findex apply
16229 We need a function that passes a list of arguments to a function.
16230 This function is @code{apply}. This function `applies' its first
16231 argument (a function) to its remaining arguments, the last of which
16232 may be a list.
16233
16234 @need 1250
16235 For example,
16236
16237 @smallexample
16238 (apply 'max 3 4 7 3 '(4 8 5))
16239 @end smallexample
16240
16241 @noindent
16242 returns 8.
16243
16244 (Incidentally, I don't know how you would learn of this function
16245 without a book such as this. It is possible to discover other
16246 functions, like @code{search-forward} or @code{insert-rectangle}, by
16247 guessing at a part of their names and then using @code{apropos}. Even
16248 though its base in metaphor is clear---`apply' its first argument to
16249 the rest---I doubt a novice would come up with that particular word
16250 when using @code{apropos} or other aid. Of course, I could be wrong;
16251 after all, the function was first named by someone who had to invent
16252 it.)
16253
16254 The second and subsequent arguments to @code{apply} are optional, so
16255 we can use @code{apply} to call a function and pass the elements of a
16256 list to it, like this, which also returns 8:
16257
16258 @smallexample
16259 (apply 'max '(4 8 5))
16260 @end smallexample
16261
16262 This latter way is how we will use @code{apply}. The
16263 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a numbers'
16264 list to which we can apply @code{max} (we could also apply @code{max} to
16265 the sorted numbers' list; it does not matter whether the list is
16266 sorted or not.)
16267
16268 @need 800
16269 Hence, the operation for finding the maximum height of the graph is this:
16270
16271 @smallexample
16272 (setq max-graph-height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16273 @end smallexample
16274
16275 Now we can return to the question of how to create a list of strings
16276 for a column of the graph. Told the maximum height of the graph
16277 and the number of asterisks that should appear in the column, the
16278 function should return a list of strings for the
16279 @code{insert-rectangle} command to insert.
16280
16281 Each column is made up of asterisks or blanks. Since the function is
16282 passed the value of the height of the column and the number of
16283 asterisks in the column, the number of blanks can be found by
16284 subtracting the number of asterisks from the height of the column.
16285 Given the number of blanks and the number of asterisks, two
16286 @code{while} loops can be used to construct the list:
16287
16288 @smallexample
16289 @group
16290 ;;; @r{First version.}
16291 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16292 "Return list of strings that is one column of a graph."
16293 (let ((insert-list nil)
16294 (number-of-top-blanks
16295 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16296 @end group
16297
16298 @group
16299 ;; @r{Fill in asterisks.}
16300 (while (> actual-height 0)
16301 (setq insert-list (cons "*" insert-list))
16302 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16303 @end group
16304
16305 @group
16306 ;; @r{Fill in blanks.}
16307 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16308 (setq insert-list (cons " " insert-list))
16309 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16310 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16311 @end group
16312
16313 @group
16314 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16315 insert-list))
16316 @end group
16317 @end smallexample
16318
16319 If you install this function and then evaluate the following
16320 expression you will see that it returns the list as desired:
16321
16322 @smallexample
16323 (column-of-graph 5 3)
16324 @end smallexample
16325
16326 @need 800
16327 @noindent
16328 returns
16329
16330 @smallexample
16331 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16332 @end smallexample
16333
16334 As written, @code{column-of-graph} contains a major flaw: the symbols
16335 used for the blank and for the marked entries in the column are
16336 `hard-coded' as a space and asterisk. This is fine for a prototype,
16337 but you, or another user, may wish to use other symbols. For example,
16338 in testing the graph function, you many want to use a period in place
16339 of the space, to make sure the point is being repositioned properly
16340 each time the @code{insert-rectangle} function is called; or you might
16341 want to substitute a @samp{+} sign or other symbol for the asterisk.
16342 You might even want to make a graph-column that is more than one
16343 display column wide. The program should be more flexible. The way to
16344 do that is to replace the blank and the asterisk with two variables
16345 that we can call @code{graph-blank} and @code{graph-symbol} and define
16346 those variables separately.
16347
16348 Also, the documentation is not well written. These considerations
16349 lead us to the second version of the function:
16350
16351 @smallexample
16352 @group
16353 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
16354 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
16355 @end group
16356
16357 @group
16358 (defvar graph-blank " "
16359 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
16360 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
16361 as graph-symbol.")
16362 @end group
16363 @end smallexample
16364
16365 @noindent
16366 (For an explanation of @code{defvar}, see
16367 @ref{defvar, , Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}}.)
16368
16369 @smallexample
16370 @group
16371 ;;; @r{Second version.}
16372 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16373 "Return MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings; ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
16374
16375 @end group
16376 @group
16377 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
16378 of the list.
16379 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
16380 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
16381 @end group
16382
16383 @group
16384 (let ((insert-list nil)
16385 (number-of-top-blanks
16386 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16387 @end group
16388
16389 @group
16390 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
16391 (while (> actual-height 0)
16392 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
16393 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16394 @end group
16395
16396 @group
16397 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
16398 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16399 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
16400 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16401 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16402
16403 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16404 insert-list))
16405 @end group
16406 @end smallexample
16407
16408 If we wished, we could rewrite @code{column-of-graph} a third time to
16409 provide optionally for a line graph as well as for a bar graph. This
16410 would not be hard to do. One way to think of a line graph is that it
16411 is no more than a bar graph in which the part of each bar that is
16412 below the top is blank. To construct a column for a line graph, the
16413 function first constructs a list of blanks that is one shorter than
16414 the value, then it uses @code{cons} to attach a graph symbol to the
16415 list; then it uses @code{cons} again to attach the `top blanks' to
16416 the list.
16417
16418 It is easy to see how to write such a function, but since we don't
16419 need it, we will not do it. But the job could be done, and if it were
16420 done, it would be done with @code{column-of-graph}. Even more
16421 important, it is worth noting that few changes would have to be made
16422 anywhere else. The enhancement, if we ever wish to make it, is
16423 simple.
16424
16425 Now, finally, we come to our first actual graph printing function.
16426 This prints the body of a graph, not the labels for the vertical and
16427 horizontal axes, so we can call this @code{graph-body-print}.
16428
16429 @node graph-body-print
16430 @section The @code{graph-body-print} Function
16431 @findex graph-body-print
16432
16433 After our preparation in the preceding section, the
16434 @code{graph-body-print} function is straightforward. The function
16435 will print column after column of asterisks and blanks, using the
16436 elements of a numbers' list to specify the number of asterisks in each
16437 column. This is a repetitive act, which means we can use a
16438 decrementing @code{while} loop or recursive function for the job. In
16439 this section, we will write the definition using a @code{while} loop.
16440
16441 The @code{column-of-graph} function requires the height of the graph
16442 as an argument, so we should determine and record that as a local variable.
16443
16444 This leads us to the following template for the @code{while} loop
16445 version of this function:
16446
16447 @smallexample
16448 @group
16449 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16450 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
16451 (let ((height @dots{}
16452 @dots{}))
16453 @end group
16454
16455 @group
16456 (while numbers-list
16457 @var{insert-columns-and-reposition-point}
16458 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))))
16459 @end group
16460 @end smallexample
16461
16462 @noindent
16463 We need to fill in the slots of the template.
16464
16465 Clearly, we can use the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression to
16466 determine the height of the graph.
16467
16468 The @code{while} loop will cycle through the @code{numbers-list} one
16469 element at a time. As it is shortened by the @code{(setq numbers-list
16470 (cdr numbers-list))} expression, the @sc{car} of each instance of the
16471 list is the value of the argument for @code{column-of-graph}.
16472
16473 At each cycle of the @code{while} loop, the @code{insert-rectangle}
16474 function inserts the list returned by @code{column-of-graph}. Since
16475 the @code{insert-rectangle} function moves point to the lower right of
16476 the inserted rectangle, we need to save the location of point at the
16477 time the rectangle is inserted, move back to that position after the
16478 rectangle is inserted, and then move horizontally to the next place
16479 from which @code{insert-rectangle} is called.
16480
16481 If the inserted columns are one character wide, as they will be if
16482 single blanks and asterisks are used, the repositioning command is
16483 simply @code{(forward-char 1)}; however, the width of a column may be
16484 greater than one. This means that the repositioning command should be
16485 written @code{(forward-char symbol-width)}. The @code{symbol-width}
16486 itself is the length of a @code{graph-blank} and can be found using
16487 the expression @code{(length graph-blank)}. The best place to bind
16488 the @code{symbol-width} variable to the value of the width of graph
16489 column is in the varlist of the @code{let} expression.
16490
16491 @need 1250
16492 These considerations lead to the following function definition:
16493
16494 @smallexample
16495 @group
16496 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16497 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16498 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16499
16500 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16501 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16502 from-position)
16503 @end group
16504
16505 @group
16506 (while numbers-list
16507 (setq from-position (point))
16508 (insert-rectangle
16509 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16510 (goto-char from-position)
16511 (forward-char symbol-width)
16512 @end group
16513 @group
16514 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16515 (sit-for 0)
16516 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
16517 @end group
16518 @group
16519 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
16520 (forward-line height)
16521 (insert "\n")
16522 ))
16523 @end group
16524 @end smallexample
16525
16526 @noindent
16527 The one unexpected expression in this function is the
16528 @w{@code{(sit-for 0)}} expression in the @code{while} loop. This
16529 expression makes the graph printing operation more interesting to
16530 watch than it would be otherwise. The expression causes Emacs to
16531 `sit' or do nothing for a zero length of time and then redraw the
16532 screen. Placed here, it causes Emacs to redraw the screen column by
16533 column. Without it, Emacs would not redraw the screen until the
16534 function exits.
16535
16536 We can test @code{graph-body-print} with a short list of numbers.
16537
16538 @enumerate
16539 @item
16540 Install @code{graph-symbol}, @code{graph-blank},
16541 @code{column-of-graph}, which are in
16542 @iftex
16543 @ref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph},
16544 @end iftex
16545 @ifinfo
16546 @ref{Columns of a graph},
16547 @end ifinfo
16548 and @code{graph-body-print}.
16549
16550 @need 800
16551 @item
16552 Copy the following expression:
16553
16554 @smallexample
16555 (graph-body-print '(1 2 3 4 6 4 3 5 7 6 5 2 3))
16556 @end smallexample
16557
16558 @item
16559 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
16560 want the graph to start.
16561
16562 @item
16563 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
16564
16565 @item
16566 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
16567 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
16568
16569 @item
16570 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the @code{graph-body-print} expression.
16571 @end enumerate
16572
16573 @need 800
16574 Emacs will print a graph like this:
16575
16576 @smallexample
16577 @group
16578 *
16579 * **
16580 * ****
16581 *** ****
16582 ********* *
16583 ************
16584 *************
16585 @end group
16586 @end smallexample
16587
16588 @node recursive-graph-body-print
16589 @section The @code{recursive-graph-body-print} Function
16590 @findex recursive-graph-body-print
16591
16592 The @code{graph-body-print} function may also be written recursively.
16593 The recursive solution is divided into two parts: an outside `wrapper'
16594 that uses a @code{let} expression to determine the values of several
16595 variables that need only be found once, such as the maximum height of
16596 the graph, and an inside function that is called recursively to print
16597 the graph.
16598
16599 @need 1250
16600 The `wrapper' is uncomplicated:
16601
16602 @smallexample
16603 @group
16604 (defun recursive-graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16605 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16606 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16607 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16608 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16609 from-position)
16610 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16611 numbers-list
16612 height
16613 symbol-width)))
16614 @end group
16615 @end smallexample
16616
16617 The recursive function is a little more difficult. It has four parts:
16618 the `do-again-test', the printing code, the recursive call, and the
16619 `next-step-expression'. The `do-again-test' is a @code{when}
16620 expression that determines whether the @code{numbers-list} contains
16621 any remaining elements; if it does, the function prints one column of
16622 the graph using the printing code and calls itself again. The
16623 function calls itself again according to the value produced by the
16624 `next-step-expression' which causes the call to act on a shorter
16625 version of the @code{numbers-list}.
16626
16627 @smallexample
16628 @group
16629 (defun recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16630 (numbers-list height symbol-width)
16631 "Print a bar graph.
16632 Used within recursive-graph-body-print function."
16633 @end group
16634
16635 @group
16636 (when numbers-list
16637 (setq from-position (point))
16638 (insert-rectangle
16639 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16640 @end group
16641 @group
16642 (goto-char from-position)
16643 (forward-char symbol-width)
16644 (sit-for 0) ; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16645 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16646 (cdr numbers-list) height symbol-width)))
16647 @end group
16648 @end smallexample
16649
16650 @need 1250
16651 After installation, this expression can be tested; here is a sample:
16652
16653 @smallexample
16654 (recursive-graph-body-print '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
16655 @end smallexample
16656
16657 @need 800
16658 Here is what @code{recursive-graph-body-print} produces:
16659
16660 @smallexample
16661 @group
16662 *
16663 ** *
16664 **** *
16665 **** ***
16666 * *********
16667 ************
16668 *************
16669 @end group
16670 @end smallexample
16671
16672 Either of these two functions, @code{graph-body-print} or
16673 @code{recursive-graph-body-print}, create the body of a graph.
16674
16675 @node Printed Axes
16676 @section Need for Printed Axes
16677
16678 A graph needs printed axes, so you can orient yourself. For a do-once
16679 project, it may be reasonable to draw the axes by hand using Emacs's
16680 Picture mode; but a graph drawing function may be used more than once.
16681
16682 For this reason, I have written enhancements to the basic
16683 @code{print-graph-body} function that automatically print labels for
16684 the horizontal and vertical axes. Since the label printing functions
16685 do not contain much new material, I have placed their description in
16686 an appendix. @xref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labeled Axes}.
16687
16688 @node Line Graph Exercise
16689 @section Exercise
16690
16691 Write a line graph version of the graph printing functions.
16692
16693 @node Emacs Initialization
16694 @chapter Your @file{.emacs} File
16695 @cindex @file{.emacs} file
16696 @cindex Customizing your @file{.emacs} file
16697 @cindex Initialization file
16698
16699 ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it''---this seemingly
16700 paradoxical statement is the secret of GNU Emacs. The plain, `out of
16701 the box' Emacs is a generic tool. Most people who use it, customize
16702 it to suit themselves.
16703
16704 GNU Emacs is mostly written in Emacs Lisp; this means that by writing
16705 expressions in Emacs Lisp you can change or extend Emacs.
16706
16707 @menu
16708 * Default Configuration::
16709 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
16710 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
16711 * Beginning init File:: How to write a @file{.emacs} init file.
16712 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
16713 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
16714 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
16715 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
16716 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
16717 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
16718 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
16719 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
16720 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
16721 * Miscellaneous::
16722 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
16723 @end menu
16724
16725 @ifnottex
16726 @node Default Configuration
16727 @unnumberedsec Emacs's Default Configuration
16728 @end ifnottex
16729
16730 There are those who appreciate Emacs's default configuration. After
16731 all, Emacs starts you in C mode when you edit a C file, starts you in
16732 Fortran mode when you edit a Fortran file, and starts you in
16733 Fundamental mode when you edit an unadorned file. This all makes
16734 sense, if you do not know who is going to use Emacs. Who knows what a
16735 person hopes to do with an unadorned file? Fundamental mode is the
16736 right default for such a file, just as C mode is the right default for
16737 editing C code. (Enough programming languages have syntaxes
16738 that enable them to share or nearly share features, so C mode is
16739 now provided by CC mode, the `C Collection'.)
16740
16741 But when you do know who is going to use Emacs---you,
16742 yourself---then it makes sense to customize Emacs.
16743
16744 For example, I seldom want Fundamental mode when I edit an
16745 otherwise undistinguished file; I want Text mode. This is why I
16746 customize Emacs: so it suits me.
16747
16748 You can customize and extend Emacs by writing or adapting a
16749 @file{~/.emacs} file. This is your personal initialization file; its
16750 contents, written in Emacs Lisp, tell Emacs what to do.@footnote{You
16751 may also add @file{.el} to @file{~/.emacs} and call it a
16752 @file{~/.emacs.el} file. In the past, you were forbidden to type the
16753 extra keystrokes that the name @file{~/.emacs.el} requires, but now
16754 you may. The new format is consistent with the Emacs Lisp file
16755 naming conventions; the old format saves typing.}
16756
16757 A @file{~/.emacs} file contains Emacs Lisp code. You can write this
16758 code yourself; or you can use Emacs's @code{customize} feature to write
16759 the code for you. You can combine your own expressions and
16760 auto-written Customize expressions in your @file{.emacs} file.
16761
16762 (I myself prefer to write my own expressions, except for those,
16763 particularly fonts, that I find easier to manipulate using the
16764 @code{customize} command. I combine the two methods.)
16765
16766 Most of this chapter is about writing expressions yourself. It
16767 describes a simple @file{.emacs} file; for more information, see
16768 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, and
16769 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
16770 Manual}.
16771
16772 @node Site-wide Init
16773 @section Site-wide Initialization Files
16774
16775 @cindex @file{default.el} init file
16776 @cindex @file{site-init.el} init file
16777 @cindex @file{site-load.el} init file
16778 In addition to your personal initialization file, Emacs automatically
16779 loads various site-wide initialization files, if they exist. These
16780 have the same form as your @file{.emacs} file, but are loaded by
16781 everyone.
16782
16783 Two site-wide initialization files, @file{site-load.el} and
16784 @file{site-init.el}, are loaded into Emacs and then `dumped' if a
16785 `dumped' version of Emacs is created, as is most common. (Dumped
16786 copies of Emacs load more quickly. However, once a file is loaded and
16787 dumped, a change to it does not lead to a change in Emacs unless you
16788 load it yourself or re-dump Emacs. @xref{Building Emacs, , Building
16789 Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, and the
16790 @file{INSTALL} file.)
16791
16792 Three other site-wide initialization files are loaded automatically
16793 each time you start Emacs, if they exist. These are
16794 @file{site-start.el}, which is loaded @emph{before} your @file{.emacs}
16795 file, and @file{default.el}, and the terminal type file, which are both
16796 loaded @emph{after} your @file{.emacs} file.
16797
16798 Settings and definitions in your @file{.emacs} file will overwrite
16799 conflicting settings and definitions in a @file{site-start.el} file,
16800 if it exists; but the settings and definitions in a @file{default.el}
16801 or terminal type file will overwrite those in your @file{.emacs} file.
16802 (You can prevent interference from a terminal type file by setting
16803 @code{term-file-prefix} to @code{nil}. @xref{Simple Extension, , A
16804 Simple Extension}.)
16805
16806 @c Rewritten to avoid overfull hbox.
16807 The @file{INSTALL} file that comes in the distribution contains
16808 descriptions of the @file{site-init.el} and @file{site-load.el} files.
16809
16810 The @file{loadup.el}, @file{startup.el}, and @file{loaddefs.el} files
16811 control loading. These files are in the @file{lisp} directory of the
16812 Emacs distribution and are worth perusing.
16813
16814 The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains a good many suggestions as to
16815 what to put into your own @file{.emacs} file, or into a site-wide
16816 initialization file.
16817
16818 @node defcustom
16819 @section Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}
16820 @findex defcustom
16821
16822 You can specify variables using @code{defcustom} so that you and
16823 others can then use Emacs's @code{customize} feature to set their
16824 values. (You cannot use @code{customize} to write function
16825 definitions; but you can write @code{defuns} in your @file{.emacs}
16826 file. Indeed, you can write any Lisp expression in your @file{.emacs}
16827 file.)
16828
16829 The @code{customize} feature depends on the @code{defcustom} macro.
16830 Although you can use @code{defvar} or @code{setq} for variables that
16831 users set, the @code{defcustom} macro is designed for the job.
16832
16833 You can use your knowledge of @code{defvar} for writing the
16834 first three arguments for @code{defcustom}. The first argument to
16835 @code{defcustom} is the name of the variable. The second argument is
16836 the variable's initial value, if any; and this value is set only if
16837 the value has not already been set. The third argument is the
16838 documentation.
16839
16840 The fourth and subsequent arguments to @code{defcustom} specify types
16841 and options; these are not featured in @code{defvar}. (These
16842 arguments are optional.)
16843
16844 Each of these arguments consists of a keyword followed by a value.
16845 Each keyword starts with the colon character @samp{:}.
16846
16847 @need 1250
16848 For example, the customizable user option variable
16849 @code{text-mode-hook} looks like this:
16850
16851 @smallexample
16852 @group
16853 (defcustom text-mode-hook nil
16854 "Normal hook run when entering Text mode and many related modes."
16855 :type 'hook
16856 :options '(turn-on-auto-fill flyspell-mode)
16857 :group 'wp)
16858 @end group
16859 @end smallexample
16860
16861 @noindent
16862 The name of the variable is @code{text-mode-hook}; it has no default
16863 value; and its documentation string tells you what it does.
16864
16865 The @code{:type} keyword tells Emacs the kind of data to which
16866 @code{text-mode-hook} should be set and how to display the value in a
16867 Customization buffer.
16868
16869 The @code{:options} keyword specifies a suggested list of values for
16870 the variable. Usually, @code{:options} applies to a hook.
16871 The list is only a suggestion; it is not exclusive; a person who sets
16872 the variable may set it to other values; the list shown following the
16873 @code{:options} keyword is intended to offer convenient choices to a
16874 user.
16875
16876 Finally, the @code{:group} keyword tells the Emacs Customization
16877 command in which group the variable is located. This tells where to
16878 find it.
16879
16880 The @code{defcustom} macro recognizes more than a dozen keywords.
16881 For more information, see @ref{Customization, , Writing Customization
16882 Definitions, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
16883
16884 Consider @code{text-mode-hook} as an example.
16885
16886 There are two ways to customize this variable. You can use the
16887 customization command or write the appropriate expressions yourself.
16888
16889 @need 800
16890 Using the customization command, you can type:
16891
16892 @smallexample
16893 M-x customize
16894 @end smallexample
16895
16896 @noindent
16897 and find that the group for editing files of data is called `data'.
16898 Enter that group. Text Mode Hook is the first member. You can click
16899 on its various options, such as @code{turn-on-auto-fill}, to set the
16900 values. After you click on the button to
16901
16902 @smallexample
16903 Save for Future Sessions
16904 @end smallexample
16905
16906 @noindent
16907 Emacs will write an expression into your @file{.emacs} file.
16908 It will look like this:
16909
16910 @smallexample
16911 @group
16912 (custom-set-variables
16913 ;; custom-set-variables was added by Custom.
16914 ;; If you edit it by hand, you could mess it up, so be careful.
16915 ;; Your init file should contain only one such instance.
16916 ;; If there is more than one, they won't work right.
16917 '(text-mode-hook (quote (turn-on-auto-fill text-mode-hook-identify))))
16918 @end group
16919 @end smallexample
16920
16921 @noindent
16922 (The @code{text-mode-hook-identify} function tells
16923 @code{toggle-text-mode-auto-fill} which buffers are in Text mode.
16924 It comes on automatically.)
16925
16926 The @code{custom-set-variables} function works somewhat differently
16927 than a @code{setq}. While I have never learned the differences, I
16928 modify the @code{custom-set-variables} expressions in my @file{.emacs}
16929 file by hand: I make the changes in what appears to me to be a
16930 reasonable manner and have not had any problems. Others prefer to use
16931 the Customization command and let Emacs do the work for them.
16932
16933 Another @code{custom-set-@dots{}} function is @code{custom-set-faces}.
16934 This function sets the various font faces. Over time, I have set a
16935 considerable number of faces. Some of the time, I re-set them using
16936 @code{customize}; other times, I simply edit the
16937 @code{custom-set-faces} expression in my @file{.emacs} file itself.
16938
16939 The second way to customize your @code{text-mode-hook} is to set it
16940 yourself in your @file{.emacs} file using code that has nothing to do
16941 with the @code{custom-set-@dots{}} functions.
16942
16943 @need 800
16944 When you do this, and later use @code{customize}, you will see a
16945 message that says
16946
16947 @smallexample
16948 CHANGED outside Customize; operating on it here may be unreliable.
16949 @end smallexample
16950
16951 @need 800
16952 This message is only a warning. If you click on the button to
16953
16954 @smallexample
16955 Save for Future Sessions
16956 @end smallexample
16957
16958 @noindent
16959 Emacs will write a @code{custom-set-@dots{}} expression near the end
16960 of your @file{.emacs} file that will be evaluated after your
16961 hand-written expression. It will, therefore, overrule your
16962 hand-written expression. No harm will be done. When you do this,
16963 however, be careful to remember which expression is active; if you
16964 forget, you may confuse yourself.
16965
16966 So long as you remember where the values are set, you will have no
16967 trouble. In any event, the values are always set in your
16968 initialization file, which is usually called @file{.emacs}.
16969
16970 I myself use @code{customize} for hardly anything. Mostly, I write
16971 expressions myself.
16972
16973 @findex defsubst
16974 @findex defconst
16975 Incidentally, to be more complete concerning defines: @code{defsubst}
16976 defines an inline function. The syntax is just like that of
16977 @code{defun}. @code{defconst} defines a symbol as a constant. The
16978 intent is that neither programs nor users should ever change a value
16979 set by @code{defconst}. (You can change it; the value set is a
16980 variable; but please do not.)
16981
16982 @node Beginning init File
16983 @section Beginning a @file{.emacs} File
16984 @cindex @file{.emacs} file, beginning of
16985
16986 When you start Emacs, it loads your @file{.emacs} file unless you tell
16987 it not to by specifying @samp{-q} on the command line. (The
16988 @code{emacs -q} command gives you a plain, out-of-the-box Emacs.)
16989
16990 A @file{.emacs} file contains Lisp expressions. Often, these are no
16991 more than expressions to set values; sometimes they are function
16992 definitions.
16993
16994 @xref{Init File, , The Init File @file{~/.emacs}, emacs, The GNU Emacs
16995 Manual}, for a short description of initialization files.
16996
16997 This chapter goes over some of the same ground, but is a walk among
16998 extracts from a complete, long-used @file{.emacs} file---my own.
16999
17000 The first part of the file consists of comments: reminders to myself.
17001 By now, of course, I remember these things, but when I started, I did
17002 not.
17003
17004 @need 1200
17005 @smallexample
17006 @group
17007 ;;;; Bob's .emacs file
17008 ; Robert J. Chassell
17009 ; 26 September 1985
17010 @end group
17011 @end smallexample
17012
17013 @noindent
17014 Look at that date! I started this file a long time ago. I have been
17015 adding to it ever since.
17016
17017 @smallexample
17018 @group
17019 ; Each section in this file is introduced by a
17020 ; line beginning with four semicolons; and each
17021 ; entry is introduced by a line beginning with
17022 ; three semicolons.
17023 @end group
17024 @end smallexample
17025
17026 @noindent
17027 This describes the usual conventions for comments in Emacs Lisp.
17028 Everything on a line that follows a semicolon is a comment. Two,
17029 three, and four semicolons are used as subsection and section markers.
17030 (@xref{Comments, ,, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for
17031 more about comments.)
17032
17033 @smallexample
17034 @group
17035 ;;;; The Help Key
17036 ; Control-h is the help key;
17037 ; after typing control-h, type a letter to
17038 ; indicate the subject about which you want help.
17039 ; For an explanation of the help facility,
17040 ; type control-h two times in a row.
17041 @end group
17042 @end smallexample
17043
17044 @noindent
17045 Just remember: type @kbd{C-h} two times for help.
17046
17047 @smallexample
17048 @group
17049 ; To find out about any mode, type control-h m
17050 ; while in that mode. For example, to find out
17051 ; about mail mode, enter mail mode and then type
17052 ; control-h m.
17053 @end group
17054 @end smallexample
17055
17056 @noindent
17057 `Mode help', as I call this, is very helpful. Usually, it tells you
17058 all you need to know.
17059
17060 Of course, you don't need to include comments like these in your
17061 @file{.emacs} file. I included them in mine because I kept forgetting
17062 about Mode help or the conventions for comments---but I was able to
17063 remember to look here to remind myself.
17064
17065 @node Text and Auto-fill
17066 @section Text and Auto Fill Mode
17067
17068 Now we come to the part that `turns on' Text mode and
17069 Auto Fill mode.
17070
17071 @smallexample
17072 @group
17073 ;;; Text mode and Auto Fill mode
17074 ;; The next two lines put Emacs into Text mode
17075 ;; and Auto Fill mode, and are for writers who
17076 ;; want to start writing prose rather than code.
17077 (setq-default major-mode 'text-mode)
17078 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17079 @end group
17080 @end smallexample
17081
17082 Here is the first part of this @file{.emacs} file that does something
17083 besides remind a forgetful human!
17084
17085 The first of the two lines in parentheses tells Emacs to turn on Text
17086 mode when you find a file, @emph{unless} that file should go into some
17087 other mode, such as C mode.
17088
17089 @cindex Per-buffer, local variables list
17090 @cindex Local variables list, per-buffer,
17091 @cindex Automatic mode selection
17092 @cindex Mode selection, automatic
17093 When Emacs reads a file, it looks at the extension to the file name,
17094 if any. (The extension is the part that comes after a @samp{.}.) If
17095 the file ends with a @samp{.c} or @samp{.h} extension then Emacs turns
17096 on C mode. Also, Emacs looks at first nonblank line of the file; if
17097 the line says @w{@samp{-*- C -*-}}, Emacs turns on C mode. Emacs
17098 possesses a list of extensions and specifications that it uses
17099 automatically. In addition, Emacs looks near the last page for a
17100 per-buffer, ``local variables list'', if any.
17101
17102 @ifinfo
17103 @xref{Choosing Modes, , How Major Modes are Chosen, emacs, The GNU
17104 Emacs Manual}.
17105
17106 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17107 Manual}.
17108 @end ifinfo
17109 @iftex
17110 See sections ``How Major Modes are Chosen'' and ``Local Variables in
17111 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17112 @end iftex
17113
17114 Now, back to the @file{.emacs} file.
17115
17116 @need 800
17117 Here is the line again; how does it work?
17118
17119 @cindex Text Mode turned on
17120 @smallexample
17121 (setq major-mode 'text-mode)
17122 @end smallexample
17123
17124 @noindent
17125 This line is a short, but complete Emacs Lisp expression.
17126
17127 We are already familiar with @code{setq}. It sets the following variable,
17128 @code{major-mode}, to the subsequent value, which is @code{text-mode}.
17129 The single quote mark before @code{text-mode} tells Emacs to deal directly
17130 with the @code{text-mode} symbol, not with whatever it might stand for.
17131 @xref{set & setq, , Setting the Value of a Variable},
17132 for a reminder of how @code{setq} works.
17133 The main point is that there is no difference between the procedure you
17134 use to set a value in your @file{.emacs} file and the procedure you use
17135 anywhere else in Emacs.
17136
17137 @need 800
17138 Here is the next line:
17139
17140 @cindex Auto Fill mode turned on
17141 @findex add-hook
17142 @smallexample
17143 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17144 @end smallexample
17145
17146 @noindent
17147 In this line, the @code{add-hook} command adds
17148 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} to the variable.
17149
17150 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} is the name of a program, that, you guessed
17151 it!, turns on Auto Fill mode.
17152
17153 Every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs runs the commands `hooked'
17154 onto Text mode. So every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs also
17155 turns on Auto Fill mode.
17156
17157 In brief, the first line causes Emacs to enter Text mode when you edit a
17158 file, unless the file name extension, a first non-blank line, or local
17159 variables to tell Emacs otherwise.
17160
17161 Text mode among other actions, sets the syntax table to work
17162 conveniently for writers. In Text mode, Emacs considers an apostrophe
17163 as part of a word like a letter; but Emacs does not consider a period
17164 or a space as part of a word. Thus, @kbd{M-f} moves you over
17165 @samp{it's}. On the other hand, in C mode, @kbd{M-f} stops just after
17166 the @samp{t} of @samp{it's}.
17167
17168 The second line causes Emacs to turn on Auto Fill mode when it turns
17169 on Text mode. In Auto Fill mode, Emacs automatically breaks a line
17170 that is too wide and brings the excessively wide part of the line down
17171 to the next line. Emacs breaks lines between words, not within them.
17172
17173 When Auto Fill mode is turned off, lines continue to the right as you
17174 type them. Depending on how you set the value of
17175 @code{truncate-lines}, the words you type either disappear off the
17176 right side of the screen, or else are shown, in a rather ugly and
17177 unreadable manner, as a continuation line on the screen.
17178
17179 @need 1250
17180 In addition, in this part of my @file{.emacs} file, I tell the Emacs
17181 fill commands to insert two spaces after a colon:
17182
17183 @smallexample
17184 (setq colon-double-space t)
17185 @end smallexample
17186
17187 @node Mail Aliases
17188 @section Mail Aliases
17189
17190 Here is a @code{setq} that `turns on' mail aliases, along with more
17191 reminders.
17192
17193 @smallexample
17194 @group
17195 ;;; Mail mode
17196 ; To enter mail mode, type `C-x m'
17197 ; To enter RMAIL (for reading mail),
17198 ; type `M-x rmail'
17199 (setq mail-aliases t)
17200 @end group
17201 @end smallexample
17202
17203 @cindex Mail aliases
17204 @noindent
17205 This @code{setq} command sets the value of the variable
17206 @code{mail-aliases} to @code{t}. Since @code{t} means true, the line
17207 says, in effect, ``Yes, use mail aliases.''
17208
17209 Mail aliases are convenient short names for long email addresses or
17210 for lists of email addresses. The file where you keep your `aliases'
17211 is @file{~/.mailrc}. You write an alias like this:
17212
17213 @smallexample
17214 alias geo george@@foobar.wiz.edu
17215 @end smallexample
17216
17217 @noindent
17218 When you write a message to George, address it to @samp{geo}; the
17219 mailer will automatically expand @samp{geo} to the full address.
17220
17221 @node Indent Tabs Mode
17222 @section Indent Tabs Mode
17223 @cindex Tabs, preventing
17224 @findex indent-tabs-mode
17225
17226 By default, Emacs inserts tabs in place of multiple spaces when it
17227 formats a region. (For example, you might indent many lines of text
17228 all at once with the @code{indent-region} command.) Tabs look fine on
17229 a terminal or with ordinary printing, but they produce badly indented
17230 output when you use @TeX{} or Texinfo since @TeX{} ignores tabs.
17231
17232 @need 1250
17233 The following turns off Indent Tabs mode:
17234
17235 @smallexample
17236 @group
17237 ;;; Prevent Extraneous Tabs
17238 (setq-default indent-tabs-mode nil)
17239 @end group
17240 @end smallexample
17241
17242 Note that this line uses @code{setq-default} rather than the
17243 @code{setq} command that we have seen before. The @code{setq-default}
17244 command sets values only in buffers that do not have their own local
17245 values for the variable.
17246
17247 @ifinfo
17248 @xref{Just Spaces, , Tabs vs. Spaces, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17249
17250 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17251 Manual}.
17252 @end ifinfo
17253 @iftex
17254 See sections ``Tabs vs.@: Spaces'' and ``Local Variables in
17255 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17256 @end iftex
17257
17258 @need 1700
17259 @node Keybindings
17260 @section Some Keybindings
17261
17262 Now for some personal keybindings:
17263
17264 @smallexample
17265 @group
17266 ;;; Compare windows
17267 (global-set-key "\C-cw" 'compare-windows)
17268 @end group
17269 @end smallexample
17270
17271 @findex compare-windows
17272 @code{compare-windows} is a nifty command that compares the text in
17273 your current window with text in the next window. It makes the
17274 comparison by starting at point in each window, moving over text in
17275 each window as far as they match. I use this command all the time.
17276
17277 This also shows how to set a key globally, for all modes.
17278
17279 @cindex Setting a key globally
17280 @cindex Global set key
17281 @cindex Key setting globally
17282 @findex global-set-key
17283 The command is @code{global-set-key}. It is followed by the
17284 keybinding. In a @file{.emacs} file, the keybinding is written as
17285 shown: @code{\C-c} stands for `control-c', which means `press the
17286 control key and the @key{c} key at the same time'. The @code{w} means
17287 `press the @key{w} key'. The keybinding is surrounded by double
17288 quotation marks. In documentation, you would write this as
17289 @w{@kbd{C-c w}}. (If you were binding a @key{META} key, such as
17290 @kbd{M-c}, rather than a @key{CTRL} key, you would write
17291 @w{@code{\M-c}} in your @file{.emacs} file. @xref{Init Rebinding, ,
17292 Rebinding Keys in Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for
17293 details.)
17294
17295 The command invoked by the keys is @code{compare-windows}. Note that
17296 @code{compare-windows} is preceded by a single quote; otherwise, Emacs
17297 would first try to evaluate the symbol to determine its value.
17298
17299 These three things, the double quotation marks, the backslash before
17300 the @samp{C}, and the single quote mark are necessary parts of
17301 keybinding that I tend to forget. Fortunately, I have come to
17302 remember that I should look at my existing @file{.emacs} file, and
17303 adapt what is there.
17304
17305 As for the keybinding itself: @kbd{C-c w}. This combines the prefix
17306 key, @kbd{C-c}, with a single character, in this case, @kbd{w}. This
17307 set of keys, @kbd{C-c} followed by a single character, is strictly
17308 reserved for individuals' own use. (I call these `own' keys, since
17309 these are for my own use.) You should always be able to create such a
17310 keybinding for your own use without stomping on someone else's
17311 keybinding. If you ever write an extension to Emacs, please avoid
17312 taking any of these keys for public use. Create a key like @kbd{C-c
17313 C-w} instead. Otherwise, we will run out of `own' keys.
17314
17315 @need 1250
17316 Here is another keybinding, with a comment:
17317
17318 @smallexample
17319 @group
17320 ;;; Keybinding for `occur'
17321 ; I use occur a lot, so let's bind it to a key:
17322 (global-set-key "\C-co" 'occur)
17323 @end group
17324 @end smallexample
17325
17326 @findex occur
17327 The @code{occur} command shows all the lines in the current buffer
17328 that contain a match for a regular expression. Matching lines are
17329 shown in a buffer called @file{*Occur*}. That buffer serves as a menu
17330 to jump to occurrences.
17331
17332 @findex global-unset-key
17333 @cindex Unbinding key
17334 @cindex Key unbinding
17335 @need 1250
17336 Here is how to unbind a key, so it does not
17337 work:
17338
17339 @smallexample
17340 @group
17341 ;;; Unbind `C-x f'
17342 (global-unset-key "\C-xf")
17343 @end group
17344 @end smallexample
17345
17346 There is a reason for this unbinding: I found I inadvertently typed
17347 @w{@kbd{C-x f}} when I meant to type @kbd{C-x C-f}. Rather than find a
17348 file, as I intended, I accidentally set the width for filled text,
17349 almost always to a width I did not want. Since I hardly ever reset my
17350 default width, I simply unbound the key.
17351
17352 @findex list-buffers, @r{rebound}
17353 @findex buffer-menu, @r{bound to key}
17354 @need 1250
17355 The following rebinds an existing key:
17356
17357 @smallexample
17358 @group
17359 ;;; Rebind `C-x C-b' for `buffer-menu'
17360 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17361 @end group
17362 @end smallexample
17363
17364 By default, @kbd{C-x C-b} runs the
17365 @code{list-buffers} command. This command lists
17366 your buffers in @emph{another} window. Since I
17367 almost always want to do something in that
17368 window, I prefer the @code{buffer-menu}
17369 command, which not only lists the buffers,
17370 but moves point into that window.
17371
17372 @node Keymaps
17373 @section Keymaps
17374 @cindex Keymaps
17375 @cindex Rebinding keys
17376
17377 Emacs uses @dfn{keymaps} to record which keys call which commands.
17378 When you use @code{global-set-key} to set the keybinding for a single
17379 command in all parts of Emacs, you are specifying the keybinding in
17380 @code{current-global-map}.
17381
17382 Specific modes, such as C mode or Text mode, have their own keymaps;
17383 the mode-specific keymaps override the global map that is shared by
17384 all buffers.
17385
17386 The @code{global-set-key} function binds, or rebinds, the global
17387 keymap. For example, the following binds the key @kbd{C-x C-b} to the
17388 function @code{buffer-menu}:
17389
17390 @smallexample
17391 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17392 @end smallexample
17393
17394 Mode-specific keymaps are bound using the @code{define-key} function,
17395 which takes a specific keymap as an argument, as well as the key and
17396 the command. For example, my @file{.emacs} file contains the
17397 following expression to bind the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} command
17398 to @kbd{C-c C-c g}:
17399
17400 @smallexample
17401 @group
17402 (define-key texinfo-mode-map "\C-c\C-cg" 'texinfo-insert-@@group)
17403 @end group
17404 @end smallexample
17405
17406 @noindent
17407 The @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function itself is a little extension
17408 to Texinfo mode that inserts @samp{@@group} into a Texinfo file. I
17409 use this command all the time and prefer to type the three strokes
17410 @kbd{C-c C-c g} rather than the six strokes @kbd{@@ g r o u p}.
17411 (@samp{@@group} and its matching @samp{@@end group} are commands that
17412 keep all enclosed text together on one page; many multi-line examples
17413 in this book are surrounded by @samp{@@group @dots{} @@end group}.)
17414
17415 @need 1250
17416 Here is the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function definition:
17417
17418 @smallexample
17419 @group
17420 (defun texinfo-insert-@@group ()
17421 "Insert the string @@group in a Texinfo buffer."
17422 (interactive)
17423 (beginning-of-line)
17424 (insert "@@group\n"))
17425 @end group
17426 @end smallexample
17427
17428 (Of course, I could have used Abbrev mode to save typing, rather than
17429 write a function to insert a word; but I prefer key strokes consistent
17430 with other Texinfo mode key bindings.)
17431
17432 You will see numerous @code{define-key} expressions in
17433 @file{loaddefs.el} as well as in the various mode libraries, such as
17434 @file{cc-mode.el} and @file{lisp-mode.el}.
17435
17436 @xref{Key Bindings, , Customizing Key Bindings, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17437 Manual}, and @ref{Keymaps, , Keymaps, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17438 Reference Manual}, for more information about keymaps.
17439
17440 @node Loading Files
17441 @section Loading Files
17442 @cindex Loading files
17443 @c findex load
17444
17445 Many people in the GNU Emacs community have written extensions to
17446 Emacs. As time goes by, these extensions are often included in new
17447 releases. For example, the Calendar and Diary packages are now part
17448 of the standard GNU Emacs, as is Calc.
17449
17450 You can use a @code{load} command to evaluate a complete file and
17451 thereby install all the functions and variables in the file into Emacs.
17452 For example:
17453
17454 @c (auto-compression-mode t)
17455
17456 @smallexample
17457 (load "~/emacs/slowsplit")
17458 @end smallexample
17459
17460 This evaluates, i.e., loads, the @file{slowsplit.el} file or if it
17461 exists, the faster, byte compiled @file{slowsplit.elc} file from the
17462 @file{emacs} sub-directory of your home directory. The file contains
17463 the function @code{split-window-quietly}, which John Robinson wrote in
17464 1989.
17465
17466 The @code{split-window-quietly} function splits a window with the
17467 minimum of redisplay. I installed it in 1989 because it worked well
17468 with the slow 1200 baud terminals I was then using. Nowadays, I only
17469 occasionally come across such a slow connection, but I continue to use
17470 the function because I like the way it leaves the bottom half of a
17471 buffer in the lower of the new windows and the top half in the upper
17472 window.
17473
17474 @need 1250
17475 To replace the key binding for the default
17476 @code{split-window-vertically}, you must also unset that key and bind
17477 the keys to @code{split-window-quietly}, like this:
17478
17479 @smallexample
17480 @group
17481 (global-unset-key "\C-x2")
17482 (global-set-key "\C-x2" 'split-window-quietly)
17483 @end group
17484 @end smallexample
17485
17486 @vindex load-path
17487 If you load many extensions, as I do, then instead of specifying the
17488 exact location of the extension file, as shown above, you can specify
17489 that directory as part of Emacs's @code{load-path}. Then, when Emacs
17490 loads a file, it will search that directory as well as its default
17491 list of directories. (The default list is specified in @file{paths.h}
17492 when Emacs is built.)
17493
17494 @need 1250
17495 The following command adds your @file{~/emacs} directory to the
17496 existing load path:
17497
17498 @smallexample
17499 @group
17500 ;;; Emacs Load Path
17501 (setq load-path (cons "~/emacs" load-path))
17502 @end group
17503 @end smallexample
17504
17505 Incidentally, @code{load-library} is an interactive interface to the
17506 @code{load} function. The complete function looks like this:
17507
17508 @findex load-library
17509 @smallexample
17510 @group
17511 (defun load-library (library)
17512 "Load the library named LIBRARY.
17513 This is an interface to the function `load'."
17514 (interactive
17515 (list (completing-read "Load library: "
17516 (apply-partially 'locate-file-completion-table
17517 load-path
17518 (get-load-suffixes)))))
17519 (load library))
17520 @end group
17521 @end smallexample
17522
17523 The name of the function, @code{load-library}, comes from the use of
17524 `library' as a conventional synonym for `file'. The source for the
17525 @code{load-library} command is in the @file{files.el} library.
17526
17527 Another interactive command that does a slightly different job is
17528 @code{load-file}. @xref{Lisp Libraries, , Libraries of Lisp Code for
17529 Emacs, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for information on the
17530 distinction between @code{load-library} and this command.
17531
17532 @node Autoload
17533 @section Autoloading
17534 @findex autoload
17535
17536 Instead of installing a function by loading the file that contains it,
17537 or by evaluating the function definition, you can make the function
17538 available but not actually install it until it is first called. This
17539 is called @dfn{autoloading}.
17540
17541 When you execute an autoloaded function, Emacs automatically evaluates
17542 the file that contains the definition, and then calls the function.
17543
17544 Emacs starts quicker with autoloaded functions, since their libraries
17545 are not loaded right away; but you need to wait a moment when you
17546 first use such a function, while its containing file is evaluated.
17547
17548 Rarely used functions are frequently autoloaded. The
17549 @file{loaddefs.el} library contains hundreds of autoloaded functions,
17550 from @code{bookmark-set} to @code{wordstar-mode}. Of course, you may
17551 come to use a `rare' function frequently. When you do, you should
17552 load that function's file with a @code{load} expression in your
17553 @file{.emacs} file.
17554
17555 In my @file{.emacs} file, I load 14 libraries that contain functions
17556 that would otherwise be autoloaded. (Actually, it would have been
17557 better to include these files in my `dumped' Emacs, but I forgot.
17558 @xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17559 Reference Manual}, and the @file{INSTALL} file for more about
17560 dumping.)
17561
17562 You may also want to include autoloaded expressions in your @file{.emacs}
17563 file. @code{autoload} is a built-in function that takes up to five
17564 arguments, the final three of which are optional. The first argument
17565 is the name of the function to be autoloaded; the second is the name
17566 of the file to be loaded. The third argument is documentation for the
17567 function, and the fourth tells whether the function can be called
17568 interactively. The fifth argument tells what type of
17569 object---@code{autoload} can handle a keymap or macro as well as a
17570 function (the default is a function).
17571
17572 @need 800
17573 Here is a typical example:
17574
17575 @smallexample
17576 @group
17577 (autoload 'html-helper-mode
17578 "html-helper-mode" "Edit HTML documents" t)
17579 @end group
17580 @end smallexample
17581
17582 @noindent
17583 (@code{html-helper-mode} is an older alternative to @code{html-mode},
17584 which is a standard part of the distribution.)
17585
17586 @noindent
17587 This expression autoloads the @code{html-helper-mode} function. It
17588 takes it from the @file{html-helper-mode.el} file (or from the byte
17589 compiled version @file{html-helper-mode.elc}, if that exists.) The
17590 file must be located in a directory specified by @code{load-path}.
17591 The documentation says that this is a mode to help you edit documents
17592 written in the HyperText Markup Language. You can call this mode
17593 interactively by typing @kbd{M-x html-helper-mode}. (You need to
17594 duplicate the function's regular documentation in the autoload
17595 expression because the regular function is not yet loaded, so its
17596 documentation is not available.)
17597
17598 @xref{Autoload, , Autoload, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
17599 Manual}, for more information.
17600
17601 @node Simple Extension
17602 @section A Simple Extension: @code{line-to-top-of-window}
17603 @findex line-to-top-of-window
17604 @cindex Simple extension in @file{.emacs} file
17605
17606 Here is a simple extension to Emacs that moves the line point is on to
17607 the top of the window. I use this all the time, to make text easier
17608 to read.
17609
17610 You can put the following code into a separate file and then load it
17611 from your @file{.emacs} file, or you can include it within your
17612 @file{.emacs} file.
17613
17614 @need 1250
17615 Here is the definition:
17616
17617 @smallexample
17618 @group
17619 ;;; Line to top of window;
17620 ;;; replace three keystroke sequence C-u 0 C-l
17621 (defun line-to-top-of-window ()
17622 "Move the line point is on to top of window."
17623 (interactive)
17624 (recenter 0))
17625 @end group
17626 @end smallexample
17627
17628 @need 1250
17629 Now for the keybinding.
17630
17631 Nowadays, function keys as well as mouse button events and
17632 non-@sc{ascii} characters are written within square brackets, without
17633 quotation marks. (In Emacs version 18 and before, you had to write
17634 different function key bindings for each different make of terminal.)
17635
17636 I bind @code{line-to-top-of-window} to my @key{F6} function key like
17637 this:
17638
17639 @smallexample
17640 (global-set-key [f6] 'line-to-top-of-window)
17641 @end smallexample
17642
17643 For more information, see @ref{Init Rebinding, , Rebinding Keys in
17644 Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17645
17646 @cindex Conditional 'twixt two versions of Emacs
17647 @cindex Version of Emacs, choosing
17648 @cindex Emacs version, choosing
17649 If you run two versions of GNU Emacs, such as versions 22 and 23, and
17650 use one @file{.emacs} file, you can select which code to evaluate with
17651 the following conditional:
17652
17653 @smallexample
17654 @group
17655 (cond
17656 ((= 22 emacs-major-version)
17657 ;; evaluate version 22 code
17658 ( @dots{} ))
17659 ((= 23 emacs-major-version)
17660 ;; evaluate version 23 code
17661 ( @dots{} )))
17662 @end group
17663 @end smallexample
17664
17665 For example, recent versions blink
17666 their cursors by default. I hate such blinking, as well as other
17667 features, so I placed the following in my @file{.emacs}
17668 file@footnote{When I start instances of Emacs that do not load my
17669 @file{.emacs} file or any site file, I also turn off blinking:
17670
17671 @smallexample
17672 emacs -q --no-site-file -eval '(blink-cursor-mode nil)'
17673
17674 @exdent Or nowadays, using an even more sophisticated set of options,
17675
17676 emacs -Q -D
17677 @end smallexample
17678 }:
17679
17680 @smallexample
17681 @group
17682 (when (>= emacs-major-version 21)
17683 (blink-cursor-mode 0)
17684 ;; Insert newline when you press `C-n' (next-line)
17685 ;; at the end of the buffer
17686 (setq next-line-add-newlines t)
17687 @end group
17688 @group
17689 ;; Turn on image viewing
17690 (auto-image-file-mode t)
17691 @end group
17692 @group
17693 ;; Turn on menu bar (this bar has text)
17694 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17695 (menu-bar-mode 1)
17696 @end group
17697 @group
17698 ;; Turn off tool bar (this bar has icons)
17699 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17700 (tool-bar-mode nil)
17701 @end group
17702 @group
17703 ;; Turn off tooltip mode for tool bar
17704 ;; (This mode causes icon explanations to pop up)
17705 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17706 (tooltip-mode nil)
17707 ;; If tooltips turned on, make tips appear promptly
17708 (setq tooltip-delay 0.1) ; default is 0.7 second
17709 )
17710 @end group
17711 @end smallexample
17712
17713 @node X11 Colors
17714 @section X11 Colors
17715
17716 You can specify colors when you use Emacs with the MIT X Windowing
17717 system.
17718
17719 I dislike the default colors and specify my own.
17720
17721 @need 1250
17722 Here are the expressions in my @file{.emacs}
17723 file that set values:
17724
17725 @smallexample
17726 @group
17727 ;; Set cursor color
17728 (set-cursor-color "white")
17729
17730 ;; Set mouse color
17731 (set-mouse-color "white")
17732
17733 ;; Set foreground and background
17734 (set-foreground-color "white")
17735 (set-background-color "darkblue")
17736 @end group
17737
17738 @group
17739 ;;; Set highlighting colors for isearch and drag
17740 (set-face-foreground 'highlight "white")
17741 (set-face-background 'highlight "blue")
17742 @end group
17743
17744 @group
17745 (set-face-foreground 'region "cyan")
17746 (set-face-background 'region "blue")
17747 @end group
17748
17749 @group
17750 (set-face-foreground 'secondary-selection "skyblue")
17751 (set-face-background 'secondary-selection "darkblue")
17752 @end group
17753
17754 @group
17755 ;; Set calendar highlighting colors
17756 (setq calendar-load-hook
17757 (lambda ()
17758 (set-face-foreground 'diary-face "skyblue")
17759 (set-face-background 'holiday-face "slate blue")
17760 (set-face-foreground 'holiday-face "white")))
17761 @end group
17762 @end smallexample
17763
17764 The various shades of blue soothe my eye and prevent me from seeing
17765 the screen flicker.
17766
17767 Alternatively, I could have set my specifications in various X
17768 initialization files. For example, I could set the foreground,
17769 background, cursor, and pointer (i.e., mouse) colors in my
17770 @file{~/.Xresources} file like this:
17771
17772 @smallexample
17773 @group
17774 Emacs*foreground: white
17775 Emacs*background: darkblue
17776 Emacs*cursorColor: white
17777 Emacs*pointerColor: white
17778 @end group
17779 @end smallexample
17780
17781 In any event, since it is not part of Emacs, I set the root color of
17782 my X window in my @file{~/.xinitrc} file, like this@footnote{I also
17783 run more modern window managers, such as Enlightenment, Gnome, or KDE;
17784 in those cases, I often specify an image rather than a plain color.}:
17785
17786 @smallexample
17787 xsetroot -solid Navy -fg white &
17788 @end smallexample
17789
17790 @need 1700
17791 @node Miscellaneous
17792 @section Miscellaneous Settings for a @file{.emacs} File
17793
17794 @need 1250
17795 Here are a few miscellaneous settings:
17796 @sp 1
17797
17798 @itemize @minus
17799 @item
17800 Set the shape and color of the mouse cursor:
17801
17802 @smallexample
17803 @group
17804 ; Cursor shapes are defined in
17805 ; `/usr/include/X11/cursorfont.h';
17806 ; for example, the `target' cursor is number 128;
17807 ; the `top_left_arrow' cursor is number 132.
17808 @end group
17809
17810 @group
17811 (let ((mpointer (x-get-resource "*mpointer"
17812 "*emacs*mpointer")))
17813 ;; If you have not set your mouse pointer
17814 ;; then set it, otherwise leave as is:
17815 (if (eq mpointer nil)
17816 (setq mpointer "132")) ; top_left_arrow
17817 @end group
17818 @group
17819 (setq x-pointer-shape (string-to-int mpointer))
17820 (set-mouse-color "white"))
17821 @end group
17822 @end smallexample
17823
17824 @item
17825 Or you can set the values of a variety of features in an alist, like
17826 this:
17827
17828 @smallexample
17829 @group
17830 (setq-default
17831 default-frame-alist
17832 '((cursor-color . "white")
17833 (mouse-color . "white")
17834 (foreground-color . "white")
17835 (background-color . "DodgerBlue4")
17836 ;; (cursor-type . bar)
17837 (cursor-type . box)
17838 @end group
17839 @group
17840 (tool-bar-lines . 0)
17841 (menu-bar-lines . 1)
17842 (width . 80)
17843 (height . 58)
17844 (font .
17845 "-Misc-Fixed-Medium-R-Normal--20-200-75-75-C-100-ISO8859-1")
17846 ))
17847 @end group
17848 @end smallexample
17849
17850 @item
17851 Convert @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h} into @key{DEL} and @key{DEL}
17852 into @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h}.@*
17853 (Some older keyboards needed this, although I have not seen the
17854 problem recently.)
17855
17856 @smallexample
17857 @group
17858 ;; Translate `C-h' to <DEL>.
17859 ; (keyboard-translate ?\C-h ?\C-?)
17860
17861 ;; Translate <DEL> to `C-h'.
17862 (keyboard-translate ?\C-? ?\C-h)
17863 @end group
17864 @end smallexample
17865
17866 @item Turn off a blinking cursor!
17867
17868 @smallexample
17869 @group
17870 (if (fboundp 'blink-cursor-mode)
17871 (blink-cursor-mode -1))
17872 @end group
17873 @end smallexample
17874
17875 @noindent
17876 or start GNU Emacs with the command @code{emacs -nbc}.
17877
17878 @need 1250
17879 @item When using `grep'@*
17880 @samp{-i}@w{ } Ignore case distinctions@*
17881 @samp{-n}@w{ } Prefix each line of output with line number@*
17882 @samp{-H}@w{ } Print the filename for each match.@*
17883 @samp{-e}@w{ } Protect patterns beginning with a hyphen character, @samp{-}
17884
17885 @smallexample
17886 (setq grep-command "grep -i -nH -e ")
17887 @end smallexample
17888
17889 @ignore
17890 @c Evidently, no longer needed in GNU Emacs 22
17891
17892 item Automatically uncompress compressed files when visiting them
17893
17894 smallexample
17895 (load "uncompress")
17896 end smallexample
17897
17898 @end ignore
17899
17900 @item Find an existing buffer, even if it has a different name@*
17901 This avoids problems with symbolic links.
17902
17903 @smallexample
17904 (setq find-file-existing-other-name t)
17905 @end smallexample
17906
17907 @item Set your language environment and default input method
17908
17909 @smallexample
17910 @group
17911 (set-language-environment "latin-1")
17912 ;; Remember you can enable or disable multilingual text input
17913 ;; with the @code{toggle-input-method'} (@kbd{C-\}) command
17914 (setq default-input-method "latin-1-prefix")
17915 @end group
17916 @end smallexample
17917
17918 If you want to write with Chinese `GB' characters, set this instead:
17919
17920 @smallexample
17921 @group
17922 (set-language-environment "Chinese-GB")
17923 (setq default-input-method "chinese-tonepy")
17924 @end group
17925 @end smallexample
17926 @end itemize
17927
17928 @subsubheading Fixing Unpleasant Key Bindings
17929 @cindex Key bindings, fixing
17930 @cindex Bindings, key, fixing unpleasant
17931
17932 Some systems bind keys unpleasantly. Sometimes, for example, the
17933 @key{CTRL} key appears in an awkward spot rather than at the far left
17934 of the home row.
17935
17936 Usually, when people fix these sorts of keybindings, they do not
17937 change their @file{~/.emacs} file. Instead, they bind the proper keys
17938 on their consoles with the @code{loadkeys} or @code{install-keymap}
17939 commands in their boot script and then include @code{xmodmap} commands
17940 in their @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file for X Windows.
17941
17942 @need 1250
17943 @noindent
17944 For a boot script:
17945
17946 @smallexample
17947 @group
17948 loadkeys /usr/share/keymaps/i386/qwerty/emacs2.kmap.gz
17949 @exdent or
17950 install-keymap emacs2
17951 @end group
17952 @end smallexample
17953
17954 @need 1250
17955 @noindent
17956 For a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file when the @key{Caps
17957 Lock} key is at the far left of the home row:
17958
17959 @smallexample
17960 @group
17961 # Bind the key labeled `Caps Lock' to `Control'
17962 # (Such a broken user interface suggests that keyboard manufacturers
17963 # think that computers are typewriters from 1885.)
17964
17965 xmodmap -e "clear Lock"
17966 xmodmap -e "add Control = Caps_Lock"
17967 @end group
17968 @end smallexample
17969
17970 @need 1250
17971 @noindent
17972 In a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file, to convert an @key{ALT}
17973 key to a @key{META} key:
17974
17975 @smallexample
17976 @group
17977 # Some ill designed keyboards have a key labeled ALT and no Meta
17978 xmodmap -e "keysym Alt_L = Meta_L Alt_L"
17979 @end group
17980 @end smallexample
17981
17982 @need 1700
17983 @node Mode Line
17984 @section A Modified Mode Line
17985 @vindex mode-line-format
17986 @cindex Mode line format
17987
17988 Finally, a feature I really like: a modified mode line.
17989
17990 When I work over a network, I forget which machine I am using. Also,
17991 I tend to I lose track of where I am, and which line point is on.
17992
17993 So I reset my mode line to look like this:
17994
17995 @smallexample
17996 -:-- foo.texi rattlesnake:/home/bob/ Line 1 (Texinfo Fill) Top
17997 @end smallexample
17998
17999 I am visiting a file called @file{foo.texi}, on my machine
18000 @file{rattlesnake} in my @file{/home/bob} buffer. I am on line 1, in
18001 Texinfo mode, and am at the top of the buffer.
18002
18003 @need 1200
18004 My @file{.emacs} file has a section that looks like this:
18005
18006 @smallexample
18007 @group
18008 ;; Set a Mode Line that tells me which machine, which directory,
18009 ;; and which line I am on, plus the other customary information.
18010 (setq-default mode-line-format
18011 (quote
18012 (#("-" 0 1
18013 (help-echo
18014 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18015 mode-line-mule-info
18016 mode-line-modified
18017 mode-line-frame-identification
18018 " "
18019 @end group
18020 @group
18021 mode-line-buffer-identification
18022 " "
18023 (:eval (substring
18024 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18025 ":"
18026 default-directory
18027 #(" " 0 1
18028 (help-echo
18029 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18030 (line-number-mode " Line %l ")
18031 global-mode-string
18032 @end group
18033 @group
18034 #(" %[(" 0 6
18035 (help-echo
18036 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18037 (:eval (mode-line-mode-name))
18038 mode-line-process
18039 minor-mode-alist
18040 #("%n" 0 2 (help-echo "mouse-2: widen" local-map (keymap ...)))
18041 ")%] "
18042 (-3 . "%P")
18043 ;; "-%-"
18044 )))
18045 @end group
18046 @end smallexample
18047
18048 @noindent
18049 Here, I redefine the default mode line. Most of the parts are from
18050 the original; but I make a few changes. I set the @emph{default} mode
18051 line format so as to permit various modes, such as Info, to override
18052 it.
18053
18054 Many elements in the list are self-explanatory:
18055 @code{mode-line-modified} is a variable that tells whether the buffer
18056 has been modified, @code{mode-name} tells the name of the mode, and so
18057 on. However, the format looks complicated because of two features we
18058 have not discussed.
18059
18060 @cindex Properties, in mode line example
18061 The first string in the mode line is a dash or hyphen, @samp{-}. In
18062 the old days, it would have been specified simply as @code{"-"}. But
18063 nowadays, Emacs can add properties to a string, such as highlighting
18064 or, as in this case, a help feature. If you place your mouse cursor
18065 over the hyphen, some help information appears (By default, you must
18066 wait seven-tenths of a second before the information appears. You can
18067 change that timing by changing the value of @code{tooltip-delay}.)
18068
18069 @need 1000
18070 The new string format has a special syntax:
18071
18072 @smallexample
18073 #("-" 0 1 (help-echo "mouse-1: select window, ..."))
18074 @end smallexample
18075
18076 @noindent
18077 The @code{#(} begins a list. The first element of the list is the
18078 string itself, just one @samp{-}. The second and third
18079 elements specify the range over which the fourth element applies. A
18080 range starts @emph{after} a character, so a zero means the range
18081 starts just before the first character; a 1 means that the range ends
18082 just after the first character. The third element is the property for
18083 the range. It consists of a property list, a
18084 property name, in this case, @samp{help-echo}, followed by a value, in this
18085 case, a string. The second, third, and fourth elements of this new
18086 string format can be repeated.
18087
18088 @xref{Text Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
18089 Reference Manual}, and see @ref{Mode Line Format, , Mode Line Format,
18090 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more information.
18091
18092 @code{mode-line-buffer-identification}
18093 displays the current buffer name. It is a list
18094 beginning @code{(#("%12b" 0 4 @dots{}}.
18095 The @code{#(} begins the list.
18096
18097 The @samp{"%12b"} displays the current buffer name, using the
18098 @code{buffer-name} function with which we are familiar; the `12'
18099 specifies the maximum number of characters that will be displayed.
18100 When a name has fewer characters, whitespace is added to fill out to
18101 this number. (Buffer names can and often should be longer than 12
18102 characters; this length works well in a typical 80 column wide
18103 window.)
18104
18105 @code{:eval} says to evaluate the following form and use the result as
18106 a string to display. In this case, the expression displays the first
18107 component of the full system name. The end of the first component is
18108 a @samp{.} (`period'), so I use the @code{string-match} function to
18109 tell me the length of the first component. The substring from the
18110 zeroth character to that length is the name of the machine.
18111
18112 @need 1250
18113 This is the expression:
18114
18115 @smallexample
18116 @group
18117 (:eval (substring
18118 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18119 @end group
18120 @end smallexample
18121
18122 @samp{%[} and @samp{%]} cause a pair of square brackets
18123 to appear for each recursive editing level. @samp{%n} says `Narrow'
18124 when narrowing is in effect. @samp{%P} tells you the percentage of
18125 the buffer that is above the bottom of the window, or `Top', `Bottom',
18126 or `All'. (A lower case @samp{p} tell you the percentage above the
18127 @emph{top} of the window.) @samp{%-} inserts enough dashes to fill
18128 out the line.
18129
18130 Remember, ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it''---your own
18131 Emacs can have different colors, different commands, and different
18132 keys than a default Emacs.
18133
18134 On the other hand, if you want to bring up a plain `out of the box'
18135 Emacs, with no customization, type:
18136
18137 @smallexample
18138 emacs -q
18139 @end smallexample
18140
18141 @noindent
18142 This will start an Emacs that does @emph{not} load your
18143 @file{~/.emacs} initialization file. A plain, default Emacs. Nothing
18144 more.
18145
18146 @node Debugging
18147 @chapter Debugging
18148 @cindex debugging
18149
18150 GNU Emacs has two debuggers, @code{debug} and @code{edebug}. The
18151 first is built into the internals of Emacs and is always with you;
18152 the second requires that you instrument a function before you can use it.
18153
18154 Both debuggers are described extensively in @ref{Debugging, ,
18155 Debugging Lisp Programs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18156 In this chapter, I will walk through a short example of each.
18157
18158 @menu
18159 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
18160 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
18161 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
18162 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
18163 * Debugging Exercises::
18164 @end menu
18165
18166 @node debug
18167 @section @code{debug}
18168 @findex debug
18169
18170 Suppose you have written a function definition that is intended to
18171 return the sum of the numbers 1 through a given number. (This is the
18172 @code{triangle} function discussed earlier. @xref{Decrementing
18173 Example, , Example with Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18174 @c xref{Decrementing Loop,, Loop with a Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18175
18176 However, your function definition has a bug. You have mistyped
18177 @samp{1=} for @samp{1-}. Here is the broken definition:
18178
18179 @findex triangle-bugged
18180 @smallexample
18181 @group
18182 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18183 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18184 (let ((total 0))
18185 (while (> number 0)
18186 (setq total (+ total number))
18187 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18188 total))
18189 @end group
18190 @end smallexample
18191
18192 If you are reading this in Info, you can evaluate this definition in
18193 the normal fashion. You will see @code{triangle-bugged} appear in the
18194 echo area.
18195
18196 @need 1250
18197 Now evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged} function with an
18198 argument of 4:
18199
18200 @smallexample
18201 (triangle-bugged 4)
18202 @end smallexample
18203
18204 @noindent
18205 In a recent GNU Emacs, you will create and enter a @file{*Backtrace*}
18206 buffer that says:
18207
18208 @noindent
18209 @smallexample
18210 @group
18211 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18212 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18213 (1= number)
18214 (setq number (1= number))
18215 (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18216 (setq number (1= number)))
18217 (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18218 (setq number ...)) total)
18219 triangle-bugged(4)
18220 @end group
18221 @group
18222 eval((triangle-bugged 4))
18223 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18224 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18225 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18226 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18227 @end group
18228 @end smallexample
18229
18230 @noindent
18231 (I have reformatted this example slightly; the debugger does not fold
18232 long lines. As usual, you can quit the debugger by typing @kbd{q} in
18233 the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
18234
18235 In practice, for a bug as simple as this, the `Lisp error' line will
18236 tell you what you need to know to correct the definition. The
18237 function @code{1=} is `void'.
18238
18239 @ignore
18240 @need 800
18241 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will see:
18242
18243 @smallexample
18244 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18245 @end smallexample
18246
18247 @noindent
18248 which has the same meaning as the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer line in
18249 version 21.
18250 @end ignore
18251
18252 However, suppose you are not quite certain what is going on?
18253 You can read the complete backtrace.
18254
18255 In this case, you need to run a recent GNU Emacs, which automatically
18256 starts the debugger that puts you in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer; or
18257 else, you need to start the debugger manually as described below.
18258
18259 Read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells you
18260 what Emacs did that led to the error. Emacs made an interactive call
18261 to @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}), which led to the evaluation
18262 of the @code{triangle-bugged} expression. Each line above tells you
18263 what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
18264
18265 @need 1250
18266 The third line from the top of the buffer is
18267
18268 @smallexample
18269 (setq number (1= number))
18270 @end smallexample
18271
18272 @noindent
18273 Emacs tried to evaluate this expression; in order to do so, it tried
18274 to evaluate the inner expression shown on the second line from the
18275 top:
18276
18277 @smallexample
18278 (1= number)
18279 @end smallexample
18280
18281 @need 1250
18282 @noindent
18283 This is where the error occurred; as the top line says:
18284
18285 @smallexample
18286 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18287 @end smallexample
18288
18289 @noindent
18290 You can correct the mistake, re-evaluate the function definition, and
18291 then run your test again.
18292
18293 @node debug-on-entry
18294 @section @code{debug-on-entry}
18295 @findex debug-on-entry
18296
18297 A recent GNU Emacs starts the debugger automatically when your
18298 function has an error.
18299
18300 @ignore
18301 GNU Emacs version 20 and before did not; it simply
18302 presented you with an error message. You had to start the debugger
18303 manually.
18304 @end ignore
18305
18306 Incidentally, you can start the debugger manually for all versions of
18307 Emacs; the advantage is that the debugger runs even if you do not have
18308 a bug in your code. Sometimes your code will be free of bugs!
18309
18310 You can enter the debugger when you call the function by calling
18311 @code{debug-on-entry}.
18312
18313 @need 1250
18314 @noindent
18315 Type:
18316
18317 @smallexample
18318 M-x debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18319 @end smallexample
18320
18321 @need 1250
18322 @noindent
18323 Now, evaluate the following:
18324
18325 @smallexample
18326 (triangle-bugged 5)
18327 @end smallexample
18328
18329 @noindent
18330 All versions of Emacs will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer and tell
18331 you that it is beginning to evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged}
18332 function:
18333
18334 @smallexample
18335 @group
18336 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18337 Debugger entered--entering a function:
18338 * triangle-bugged(5)
18339 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18340 @end group
18341 @group
18342 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18343 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18344 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18345 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18346 @end group
18347 @end smallexample
18348
18349 In the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, type @kbd{d}. Emacs will evaluate
18350 the first expression in @code{triangle-bugged}; the buffer will look
18351 like this:
18352
18353 @smallexample
18354 @group
18355 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18356 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18357 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18358 (setq number ...)) total)
18359 * triangle-bugged(5)
18360 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18361 @end group
18362 @group
18363 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18364 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18365 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18366 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18367 @end group
18368 @end smallexample
18369
18370 @noindent
18371 Now, type @kbd{d} again, eight times, slowly. Each time you type
18372 @kbd{d}, Emacs will evaluate another expression in the function
18373 definition.
18374
18375 @need 1750
18376 Eventually, the buffer will look like this:
18377
18378 @smallexample
18379 @group
18380 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18381 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18382 * (setq number (1= number))
18383 * (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18384 (setq number (1= number)))
18385 @group
18386 @end group
18387 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18388 (setq number ...)) total)
18389 * triangle-bugged(5)
18390 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18391 @group
18392 @end group
18393 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18394 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18395 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18396 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18397 @end group
18398 @end smallexample
18399
18400 @need 1500
18401 @noindent
18402 Finally, after you type @kbd{d} two more times, Emacs will reach the
18403 error, and the top two lines of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer will look
18404 like this:
18405
18406 @smallexample
18407 @group
18408 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18409 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18410 * (1= number)
18411 @dots{}
18412 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18413 @end group
18414 @end smallexample
18415
18416 By typing @kbd{d}, you were able to step through the function.
18417
18418 You can quit a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer by typing @kbd{q} in it; this
18419 quits the trace, but does not cancel @code{debug-on-entry}.
18420
18421 @findex cancel-debug-on-entry
18422 To cancel the effect of @code{debug-on-entry}, call
18423 @code{cancel-debug-on-entry} and the name of the function, like this:
18424
18425 @smallexample
18426 M-x cancel-debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18427 @end smallexample
18428
18429 @noindent
18430 (If you are reading this in Info, cancel @code{debug-on-entry} now.)
18431
18432 @node debug-on-quit
18433 @section @code{debug-on-quit} and @code{(debug)}
18434
18435 In addition to setting @code{debug-on-error} or calling @code{debug-on-entry},
18436 there are two other ways to start @code{debug}.
18437
18438 @findex debug-on-quit
18439 You can start @code{debug} whenever you type @kbd{C-g}
18440 (@code{keyboard-quit}) by setting the variable @code{debug-on-quit} to
18441 @code{t}. This is useful for debugging infinite loops.
18442
18443 @need 1500
18444 @cindex @code{(debug)} in code
18445 Or, you can insert a line that says @code{(debug)} into your code
18446 where you want the debugger to start, like this:
18447
18448 @smallexample
18449 @group
18450 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18451 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18452 (let ((total 0))
18453 (while (> number 0)
18454 (setq total (+ total number))
18455 (debug) ; @r{Start debugger.}
18456 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18457 total))
18458 @end group
18459 @end smallexample
18460
18461 The @code{debug} function is described in detail in @ref{Debugger, ,
18462 The Lisp Debugger, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18463
18464 @node edebug
18465 @section The @code{edebug} Source Level Debugger
18466 @cindex Source level debugger
18467 @findex edebug
18468
18469 Edebug is a source level debugger. Edebug normally displays the
18470 source of the code you are debugging, with an arrow at the left that
18471 shows which line you are currently executing.
18472
18473 You can walk through the execution of a function, line by line, or run
18474 quickly until reaching a @dfn{breakpoint} where execution stops.
18475
18476 Edebug is described in @ref{Edebug, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs
18477 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18478
18479 @need 1250
18480 Here is a bugged function definition for @code{triangle-recursively}.
18481 @xref{Recursive triangle function, , Recursion in place of a counter},
18482 for a review of it.
18483
18484 @smallexample
18485 @group
18486 (defun triangle-recursively-bugged (number)
18487 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
18488 Uses recursion."
18489 (if (= number 1)
18490 1
18491 (+ number
18492 (triangle-recursively-bugged
18493 (1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18494 @end group
18495 @end smallexample
18496
18497 @noindent
18498 Normally, you would install this definition by positioning your cursor
18499 after the function's closing parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}
18500 (@code{eval-last-sexp}) or else by positioning your cursor within the
18501 definition and typing @kbd{C-M-x} (@code{eval-defun}). (By default,
18502 the @code{eval-defun} command works only in Emacs Lisp mode or in Lisp
18503 Interaction mode.)
18504
18505 @need 1500
18506 However, to prepare this function definition for Edebug, you must
18507 first @dfn{instrument} the code using a different command. You can do
18508 this by positioning your cursor within or just after the definition
18509 and typing
18510
18511 @smallexample
18512 M-x edebug-defun RET
18513 @end smallexample
18514
18515 @noindent
18516 This will cause Emacs to load Edebug automatically if it is not
18517 already loaded, and properly instrument the function.
18518
18519 After instrumenting the function, place your cursor after the
18520 following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}):
18521
18522 @smallexample
18523 (triangle-recursively-bugged 3)
18524 @end smallexample
18525
18526 @noindent
18527 You will be jumped back to the source for
18528 @code{triangle-recursively-bugged} and the cursor positioned at the
18529 beginning of the @code{if} line of the function. Also, you will see
18530 an arrowhead at the left hand side of that line. The arrowhead marks
18531 the line where the function is executing. (In the following examples,
18532 we show the arrowhead with @samp{=>}; in a windowing system, you may
18533 see the arrowhead as a solid triangle in the window `fringe'.)
18534
18535 @smallexample
18536 =>@point{}(if (= number 1)
18537 @end smallexample
18538
18539 @noindent
18540 @iftex
18541 In the example, the location of point is displayed with a star,
18542 @samp{@point{}} (in Info, it is displayed as @samp{-!-}).
18543 @end iftex
18544 @ifnottex
18545 In the example, the location of point is displayed as @samp{@point{}}
18546 (in a printed book, it is displayed with a five pointed star).
18547 @end ifnottex
18548
18549 If you now press @key{SPC}, point will move to the next expression to
18550 be executed; the line will look like this:
18551
18552 @smallexample
18553 =>(if @point{}(= number 1)
18554 @end smallexample
18555
18556 @noindent
18557 As you continue to press @key{SPC}, point will move from expression to
18558 expression. At the same time, whenever an expression returns a value,
18559 that value will be displayed in the echo area. For example, after you
18560 move point past @code{number}, you will see the following:
18561
18562 @smallexample
18563 Result: 3 (#o3, #x3, ?\C-c)
18564 @end smallexample
18565
18566 @noindent
18567 This means the value of @code{number} is 3, which is octal three,
18568 hexadecimal three, and @sc{ascii} `control-c' (the third letter of the
18569 alphabet, in case you need to know this information).
18570
18571 You can continue moving through the code until you reach the line with
18572 the error. Before evaluation, that line looks like this:
18573
18574 @smallexample
18575 => @point{}(1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18576 @end smallexample
18577
18578 @need 1250
18579 @noindent
18580 When you press @key{SPC} once again, you will produce an error message
18581 that says:
18582
18583 @smallexample
18584 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18585 @end smallexample
18586
18587 @noindent
18588 This is the bug.
18589
18590 Press @kbd{q} to quit Edebug.
18591
18592 To remove instrumentation from a function definition, simply
18593 re-evaluate it with a command that does not instrument it.
18594 For example, you could place your cursor after the definition's
18595 closing parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
18596
18597 Edebug does a great deal more than walk with you through a function.
18598 You can set it so it races through on its own, stopping only at an
18599 error or at specified stopping points; you can cause it to display the
18600 changing values of various expressions; you can find out how many
18601 times a function is called, and more.
18602
18603 Edebug is described in @ref{Edebug, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs
18604 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18605
18606 @need 1500
18607 @node Debugging Exercises
18608 @section Debugging Exercises
18609
18610 @itemize @bullet
18611 @item
18612 Install the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function and then cause it to
18613 enter the built-in debugger when you call it. Run the command on a
18614 region containing two words. You will need to press @kbd{d} a
18615 remarkable number of times. On your system, is a `hook' called after
18616 the command finishes? (For information on hooks, see @ref{Command
18617 Overview, , Command Loop Overview, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
18618 Manual}.)
18619
18620 @item
18621 Copy @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} into the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
18622 instrument the function for Edebug, and walk through its execution.
18623 The function does not need to have a bug, although you can introduce
18624 one if you wish. If the function lacks a bug, the walk-through
18625 completes without problems.
18626
18627 @item
18628 While running Edebug, type @kbd{?} to see a list of all the Edebug commands.
18629 (The @code{global-edebug-prefix} is usually @kbd{C-x X}, i.e.,
18630 @kbd{@key{CTRL}-x} followed by an upper case @kbd{X}; use this prefix
18631 for commands made outside of the Edebug debugging buffer.)
18632
18633 @item
18634 In the Edebug debugging buffer, use the @kbd{p}
18635 (@code{edebug-bounce-point}) command to see where in the region the
18636 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} is working.
18637
18638 @item
18639 Move point to some spot further down the function and then type the
18640 @kbd{h} (@code{edebug-goto-here}) command to jump to that location.
18641
18642 @item
18643 Use the @kbd{t} (@code{edebug-trace-mode}) command to cause Edebug to
18644 walk through the function on its own; use an upper case @kbd{T} for
18645 @code{edebug-Trace-fast-mode}.
18646
18647 @item
18648 Set a breakpoint, then run Edebug in Trace mode until it reaches the
18649 stopping point.
18650 @end itemize
18651
18652 @node Conclusion
18653 @chapter Conclusion
18654
18655 We have now reached the end of this Introduction. You have now
18656 learned enough about programming in Emacs Lisp to set values, to write
18657 simple @file{.emacs} files for yourself and your friends, and write
18658 simple customizations and extensions to Emacs.
18659
18660 This is a place to stop. Or, if you wish, you can now go onward, and
18661 teach yourself.
18662
18663 You have learned some of the basic nuts and bolts of programming. But
18664 only some. There are a great many more brackets and hinges that are
18665 easy to use that we have not touched.
18666
18667 A path you can follow right now lies among the sources to GNU Emacs
18668 and in
18669 @ifnotinfo
18670 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18671 @end ifnotinfo
18672 @ifinfo
18673 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
18674 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18675 @end ifinfo
18676
18677 The Emacs Lisp sources are an adventure. When you read the sources and
18678 come across a function or expression that is unfamiliar, you need to
18679 figure out or find out what it does.
18680
18681 Go to the Reference Manual. It is a thorough, complete, and fairly
18682 easy-to-read description of Emacs Lisp. It is written not only for
18683 experts, but for people who know what you know. (The @cite{Reference
18684 Manual} comes with the standard GNU Emacs distribution. Like this
18685 introduction, it comes as a Texinfo source file, so you can read it
18686 on-line and as a typeset, printed book.)
18687
18688 Go to the other on-line help that is part of GNU Emacs: the on-line
18689 documentation for all functions and variables, and @code{find-tag},
18690 the program that takes you to sources.
18691
18692 Here is an example of how I explore the sources. Because of its name,
18693 @file{simple.el} is the file I looked at first, a long time ago. As
18694 it happens some of the functions in @file{simple.el} are complicated,
18695 or at least look complicated at first sight. The @code{open-line}
18696 function, for example, looks complicated.
18697
18698 You may want to walk through this function slowly, as we did with the
18699 @code{forward-sentence} function. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
18700 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Or you may want to skip that
18701 function and look at another, such as @code{split-line}. You don't
18702 need to read all the functions. According to
18703 @code{count-words-in-defun}, the @code{split-line} function contains
18704 102 words and symbols.
18705
18706 Even though it is short, @code{split-line} contains expressions
18707 we have not studied: @code{skip-chars-forward}, @code{indent-to},
18708 @code{current-column} and @code{insert-and-inherit}.
18709
18710 Consider the @code{skip-chars-forward} function. (It is part of the
18711 function definition for @code{back-to-indentation}, which is shown in
18712 @ref{Review, , Review}.)
18713
18714 In GNU Emacs, you can find out more about @code{skip-chars-forward} by
18715 typing @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and the name of the
18716 function. This gives you the function documentation.
18717
18718 You may be able to guess what is done by a well named function such as
18719 @code{indent-to}; or you can look it up, too. Incidentally, the
18720 @code{describe-function} function itself is in @file{help.el}; it is
18721 one of those long, but decipherable functions. You can look up
18722 @code{describe-function} using the @kbd{C-h f} command!
18723
18724 In this instance, since the code is Lisp, the @file{*Help*} buffer
18725 contains the name of the library containing the function's source.
18726 You can put point over the name of the library and press the RET key,
18727 which in this situation is bound to @code{help-follow}, and be taken
18728 directly to the source, in the same way as @kbd{M-.}
18729 (@code{find-tag}).
18730
18731 The definition for @code{describe-function} illustrates how to
18732 customize the @code{interactive} expression without using the standard
18733 character codes; and it shows how to create a temporary buffer.
18734
18735 (The @code{indent-to} function is written in C rather than Emacs Lisp;
18736 it is a `built-in' function. @code{help-follow} takes you to its
18737 source as does @code{find-tag}, when properly set up.)
18738
18739 You can look at a function's source using @code{find-tag}, which is
18740 bound to @kbd{M-.} Finally, you can find out what the Reference
18741 Manual has to say by visiting the manual in Info, and typing @kbd{i}
18742 (@code{Info-index}) and the name of the function, or by looking up the
18743 function in the index to a printed copy of the manual.
18744
18745 Similarly, you can find out what is meant by
18746 @code{insert-and-inherit}.
18747
18748 Other interesting source files include @file{paragraphs.el},
18749 @file{loaddefs.el}, and @file{loadup.el}. The @file{paragraphs.el}
18750 file includes short, easily understood functions as well as longer
18751 ones. The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains the many standard
18752 autoloads and many keymaps. I have never looked at it all; only at
18753 parts. @file{loadup.el} is the file that loads the standard parts of
18754 Emacs; it tells you a great deal about how Emacs is built.
18755 (@xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
18756 Reference Manual}, for more about building.)
18757
18758 As I said, you have learned some nuts and bolts; however, and very
18759 importantly, we have hardly touched major aspects of programming; I
18760 have said nothing about how to sort information, except to use the
18761 predefined @code{sort} function; I have said nothing about how to store
18762 information, except to use variables and lists; I have said nothing
18763 about how to write programs that write programs. These are topics for
18764 another, and different kind of book, a different kind of learning.
18765
18766 What you have done is learn enough for much practical work with GNU
18767 Emacs. What you have done is get started. This is the end of a
18768 beginning.
18769
18770 @c ================ Appendix ================
18771
18772 @node the-the
18773 @appendix The @code{the-the} Function
18774 @findex the-the
18775 @cindex Duplicated words function
18776 @cindex Words, duplicated
18777
18778 Sometimes when you you write text, you duplicate words---as with ``you
18779 you'' near the beginning of this sentence. I find that most
18780 frequently, I duplicate ``the''; hence, I call the function for
18781 detecting duplicated words, @code{the-the}.
18782
18783 @need 1250
18784 As a first step, you could use the following regular expression to
18785 search for duplicates:
18786
18787 @smallexample
18788 \\(\\w+[ \t\n]+\\)\\1
18789 @end smallexample
18790
18791 @noindent
18792 This regexp matches one or more word-constituent characters followed
18793 by one or more spaces, tabs, or newlines. However, it does not detect
18794 duplicated words on different lines, since the ending of the first
18795 word, the end of the line, is different from the ending of the second
18796 word, a space. (For more information about regular expressions, see
18797 @ref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, as well as
18798 @ref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
18799 Manual}, and @ref{Regular Expressions, , Regular Expressions, elisp,
18800 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
18801
18802 You might try searching just for duplicated word-constituent
18803 characters but that does not work since the pattern detects doubles
18804 such as the two occurrences of `th' in `with the'.
18805
18806 Another possible regexp searches for word-constituent characters
18807 followed by non-word-constituent characters, reduplicated. Here,
18808 @w{@samp{\\w+}} matches one or more word-constituent characters and
18809 @w{@samp{\\W*}} matches zero or more non-word-constituent characters.
18810
18811 @smallexample
18812 \\(\\(\\w+\\)\\W*\\)\\1
18813 @end smallexample
18814
18815 @noindent
18816 Again, not useful.
18817
18818 Here is the pattern that I use. It is not perfect, but good enough.
18819 @w{@samp{\\b}} matches the empty string, provided it is at the beginning
18820 or end of a word; @w{@samp{[^@@ \n\t]+}} matches one or more occurrences of
18821 any characters that are @emph{not} an @@-sign, space, newline, or tab.
18822
18823 @smallexample
18824 \\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b
18825 @end smallexample
18826
18827 One can write more complicated expressions, but I found that this
18828 expression is good enough, so I use it.
18829
18830 Here is the @code{the-the} function, as I include it in my
18831 @file{.emacs} file, along with a handy global key binding:
18832
18833 @smallexample
18834 @group
18835 (defun the-the ()
18836 "Search forward for for a duplicated word."
18837 (interactive)
18838 (message "Searching for for duplicated words ...")
18839 (push-mark)
18840 @end group
18841 @group
18842 ;; This regexp is not perfect
18843 ;; but is fairly good over all:
18844 (if (re-search-forward
18845 "\\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b" nil 'move)
18846 (message "Found duplicated word.")
18847 (message "End of buffer")))
18848 @end group
18849
18850 @group
18851 ;; Bind `the-the' to C-c \
18852 (global-set-key "\C-c\\" 'the-the)
18853 @end group
18854 @end smallexample
18855
18856 @sp 1
18857 Here is test text:
18858
18859 @smallexample
18860 @group
18861 one two two three four five
18862 five six seven
18863 @end group
18864 @end smallexample
18865
18866 You can substitute the other regular expressions shown above in the
18867 function definition and try each of them on this list.
18868
18869 @node Kill Ring
18870 @appendix Handling the Kill Ring
18871 @cindex Kill ring handling
18872 @cindex Handling the kill ring
18873 @cindex Ring, making a list like a
18874
18875 The kill ring is a list that is transformed into a ring by the
18876 workings of the @code{current-kill} function. The @code{yank} and
18877 @code{yank-pop} commands use the @code{current-kill} function.
18878
18879 This appendix describes the @code{current-kill} function as well as
18880 both the @code{yank} and the @code{yank-pop} commands, but first,
18881 consider the workings of the kill ring.
18882
18883 @menu
18884 * What the Kill Ring Does::
18885 * current-kill::
18886 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
18887 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
18888 * ring file::
18889 @end menu
18890
18891 @ifnottex
18892 @node What the Kill Ring Does
18893 @unnumberedsec What the Kill Ring Does
18894 @end ifnottex
18895
18896 @need 1250
18897 The kill ring has a default maximum length of sixty items; this number
18898 is too large for an explanation. Instead, set it to four. Please
18899 evaluate the following:
18900
18901 @smallexample
18902 @group
18903 (setq old-kill-ring-max kill-ring-max)
18904 (setq kill-ring-max 4)
18905 @end group
18906 @end smallexample
18907
18908 @noindent
18909 Then, please copy each line of the following indented example into the
18910 kill ring. You may kill each line with @kbd{C-k} or mark it and copy
18911 it with @kbd{M-w}.
18912
18913 @noindent
18914 (In a read-only buffer, such as the @file{*info*} buffer, the kill
18915 command, @kbd{C-k} (@code{kill-line}), will not remove the text,
18916 merely copy it to the kill ring. However, your machine may beep at
18917 you. Alternatively, for silence, you may copy the region of each line
18918 with the @kbd{M-w} (@code{kill-ring-save}) command. You must mark
18919 each line for this command to succeed, but it does not matter at which
18920 end you put point or mark.)
18921
18922 @need 1250
18923 @noindent
18924 Please invoke the calls in order, so that five elements attempt to
18925 fill the kill ring:
18926
18927 @smallexample
18928 @group
18929 first some text
18930 second piece of text
18931 third line
18932 fourth line of text
18933 fifth bit of text
18934 @end group
18935 @end smallexample
18936
18937 @need 1250
18938 @noindent
18939 Then find the value of @code{kill-ring} by evaluating
18940
18941 @smallexample
18942 kill-ring
18943 @end smallexample
18944
18945 @need 800
18946 @noindent
18947 It is:
18948
18949 @smallexample
18950 @group
18951 ("fifth bit of text" "fourth line of text"
18952 "third line" "second piece of text")
18953 @end group
18954 @end smallexample
18955
18956 @noindent
18957 The first element, @samp{first some text}, was dropped.
18958
18959 @need 1250
18960 To return to the old value for the length of the kill ring, evaluate:
18961
18962 @smallexample
18963 (setq kill-ring-max old-kill-ring-max)
18964 @end smallexample
18965
18966 @node current-kill
18967 @appendixsec The @code{current-kill} Function
18968 @findex current-kill
18969
18970 The @code{current-kill} function changes the element in the kill ring
18971 to which @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points. (Also, the
18972 @code{kill-new} function sets @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to point
18973 to the latest element of the kill ring. The @code{kill-new}
18974 function is used directly or indirectly by @code{kill-append},
18975 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line},
18976 and @code{kill-region}.)
18977
18978 @menu
18979 * Code for current-kill::
18980 * Understanding current-kill::
18981 @end menu
18982
18983 @ifnottex
18984 @node Code for current-kill
18985 @unnumberedsubsec The code for @code{current-kill}
18986 @end ifnottex
18987
18988
18989 @need 1500
18990 The @code{current-kill} function is used by @code{yank} and by
18991 @code{yank-pop}. Here is the code for @code{current-kill}:
18992
18993 @smallexample
18994 @group
18995 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
18996 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
18997 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
18998 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
18999 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
19000 @end group
19001 @group
19002 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
19003 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
19004 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
19005 interprogram-paste-function
19006 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
19007 @end group
19008 @group
19009 (if interprogram-paste
19010 (progn
19011 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
19012 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
19013 ;; selection, with identical text.
19014 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
19015 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
19016 interprogram-paste)
19017 @end group
19018 @group
19019 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19020 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19021 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19022 (length kill-ring))
19023 kill-ring)))
19024 (or do-not-move
19025 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19026 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
19027 @end group
19028 @end smallexample
19029
19030 Remember also that the @code{kill-new} function sets
19031 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to the latest element of the kill
19032 ring, which means that all the functions that call it set the value
19033 indirectly: @code{kill-append}, @code{copy-region-as-kill},
19034 @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line}, and @code{kill-region}.
19035
19036 @need 1500
19037 Here is the line in @code{kill-new}, which is explained in
19038 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.
19039
19040 @smallexample
19041 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
19042 @end smallexample
19043
19044 @ifnottex
19045 @node Understanding current-kill
19046 @unnumberedsubsec @code{current-kill} in Outline
19047 @end ifnottex
19048
19049 The @code{current-kill} function looks complex, but as usual, it can
19050 be understood by taking it apart piece by piece. First look at it in
19051 skeletal form:
19052
19053 @smallexample
19054 @group
19055 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19056 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill."
19057 (let @var{varlist}
19058 @var{body}@dots{})
19059 @end group
19060 @end smallexample
19061
19062 This function takes two arguments, one of which is optional. It has a
19063 documentation string. It is @emph{not} interactive.
19064
19065 @menu
19066 * Body of current-kill::
19067 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
19068 * Determining the Element::
19069 @end menu
19070
19071 @ifnottex
19072 @node Body of current-kill
19073 @unnumberedsubsubsec The Body of @code{current-kill}
19074 @end ifnottex
19075
19076 The body of the function definition is a @code{let} expression, which
19077 itself has a body as well as a @var{varlist}.
19078
19079 The @code{let} expression declares a variable that will be only usable
19080 within the bounds of this function. This variable is called
19081 @code{interprogram-paste} and is for copying to another program. It
19082 is not for copying within this instance of GNU Emacs. Most window
19083 systems provide a facility for interprogram pasting. Sadly, that
19084 facility usually provides only for the last element. Most windowing
19085 systems have not adopted a ring of many possibilities, even though
19086 Emacs has provided it for decades.
19087
19088 The @code{if} expression has two parts, one if there exists
19089 @code{interprogram-paste} and one if not.
19090
19091 @need 2000
19092 Let us consider the `if not' or else-part of the @code{current-kill}
19093 function. (The then-part uses the @code{kill-new} function, which
19094 we have already described. @xref{kill-new function, , The
19095 @code{kill-new} function}.)
19096
19097 @smallexample
19098 @group
19099 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19100 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19101 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19102 (length kill-ring))
19103 kill-ring)))
19104 (or do-not-move
19105 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19106 (car ARGth-kill-element))
19107 @end group
19108 @end smallexample
19109
19110 @noindent
19111 The code first checks whether the kill ring has content; otherwise it
19112 signals an error.
19113
19114 @need 1000
19115 Note that the @code{or} expression is very similar to testing length
19116 with an @code{if}:
19117
19118 @findex zerop
19119 @findex error
19120 @smallexample
19121 @group
19122 (if (zerop (length kill-ring)) ; @r{if-part}
19123 (error "Kill ring is empty")) ; @r{then-part}
19124 ;; No else-part
19125 @end group
19126 @end smallexample
19127
19128 @noindent
19129 If there is not anything in the kill ring, its length must be zero and
19130 an error message sent to the user: @samp{Kill ring is empty}. The
19131 @code{current-kill} function uses an @code{or} expression which is
19132 simpler. But an @code{if} expression reminds us what goes on.
19133
19134 This @code{if} expression uses the function @code{zerop} which returns
19135 true if the value it is testing is zero. When @code{zerop} tests
19136 true, the then-part of the @code{if} is evaluated. The then-part is a
19137 list starting with the function @code{error}, which is a function that
19138 is similar to the @code{message} function
19139 (@pxref{message, , The @code{message} Function}) in that
19140 it prints a one-line message in the echo area. However, in addition
19141 to printing a message, @code{error} also stops evaluation of the
19142 function within which it is embedded. This means that the rest of the
19143 function will not be evaluated if the length of the kill ring is zero.
19144
19145 Then the @code{current-kill} function selects the element to return.
19146 The selection depends on the number of places that @code{current-kill}
19147 rotates and on where @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19148
19149 Next, either the optional @code{do-not-move} argument is true or the
19150 current value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is set to point to the
19151 list. Finally, another expression returns the first element of the
19152 list even if the @code{do-not-move} argument is true.
19153
19154 @ifnottex
19155 @node Digression concerning error
19156 @unnumberedsubsubsec Digression about the word `error'
19157 @end ifnottex
19158
19159 In my opinion, it is slightly misleading, at least to humans, to use
19160 the term `error' as the name of the @code{error} function. A better
19161 term would be `cancel'. Strictly speaking, of course, you cannot
19162 point to, much less rotate a pointer to a list that has no length, so
19163 from the point of view of the computer, the word `error' is correct.
19164 But a human expects to attempt this sort of thing, if only to find out
19165 whether the kill ring is full or empty. This is an act of
19166 exploration.
19167
19168 From the human point of view, the act of exploration and discovery is
19169 not necessarily an error, and therefore should not be labeled as one,
19170 even in the bowels of a computer. As it is, the code in Emacs implies
19171 that a human who is acting virtuously, by exploring his or her
19172 environment, is making an error. This is bad. Even though the computer
19173 takes the same steps as it does when there is an `error', a term such as
19174 `cancel' would have a clearer connotation.
19175
19176 @ifnottex
19177 @node Determining the Element
19178 @unnumberedsubsubsec Determining the Element
19179 @end ifnottex
19180
19181 Among other actions, the else-part of the @code{if} expression sets
19182 the value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to
19183 @code{ARGth-kill-element} when the kill ring has something in it and
19184 the value of @code{do-not-move} is @code{nil}.
19185
19186 @need 800
19187 The code looks like this:
19188
19189 @smallexample
19190 @group
19191 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19192 (length kill-ring))
19193 kill-ring)))
19194 @end group
19195 @end smallexample
19196
19197 This needs some examination. Unless it is not supposed to move the
19198 pointer, the @code{current-kill} function changes where
19199 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19200 That is what the
19201 @w{@code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))}}
19202 expression does. Also, clearly, @code{ARGth-kill-element} is being
19203 set to be equal to some @sc{cdr} of the kill ring, using the
19204 @code{nthcdr} function that is described in an earlier section.
19205 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.) How does it do this?
19206
19207 As we have seen before (@pxref{nthcdr}), the @code{nthcdr} function
19208 works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a list---it takes the
19209 @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} @dots{}
19210
19211 @need 800
19212 The two following expressions produce the same result:
19213
19214 @smallexample
19215 @group
19216 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (cdr kill-ring))
19217
19218 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (nthcdr 1 kill-ring))
19219 @end group
19220 @end smallexample
19221
19222 However, the @code{nthcdr} expression is more complicated. It uses
19223 the @code{mod} function to determine which @sc{cdr} to select.
19224
19225 (You will remember to look at inner functions first; indeed, we will
19226 have to go inside the @code{mod}.)
19227
19228 The @code{mod} function returns the value of its first argument modulo
19229 the second; that is to say, it returns the remainder after dividing
19230 the first argument by the second. The value returned has the same
19231 sign as the second argument.
19232
19233 @need 800
19234 Thus,
19235
19236 @smallexample
19237 @group
19238 (mod 12 4)
19239 @result{} 0 ;; @r{because there is no remainder}
19240 (mod 13 4)
19241 @result{} 1
19242 @end group
19243 @end smallexample
19244
19245 @need 1250
19246 In this case, the first argument is often smaller than the second.
19247 That is fine.
19248
19249 @smallexample
19250 @group
19251 (mod 0 4)
19252 @result{} 0
19253 (mod 1 4)
19254 @result{} 1
19255 @end group
19256 @end smallexample
19257
19258 We can guess what the @code{-} function does. It is like @code{+} but
19259 subtracts instead of adds; the @code{-} function subtracts its second
19260 argument from its first. Also, we already know what the @code{length}
19261 function does (@pxref{length}). It returns the length of a list.
19262
19263 And @code{n} is the name of the required argument to the
19264 @code{current-kill} function.
19265
19266 @need 1250
19267 So when the first argument to @code{nthcdr} is zero, the @code{nthcdr}
19268 expression returns the whole list, as you can see by evaluating the
19269 following:
19270
19271 @smallexample
19272 @group
19273 ;; kill-ring-yank-pointer @r{and} kill-ring @r{have a length of four}
19274 ;; @r{and} (mod (- 0 4) 4) @result{} 0
19275 (nthcdr (mod (- 0 4) 4)
19276 '("fourth line of text"
19277 "third line"
19278 "second piece of text"
19279 "first some text"))
19280 @end group
19281 @end smallexample
19282
19283 @need 1250
19284 When the first argument to the @code{current-kill} function is one,
19285 the @code{nthcdr} expression returns the list without its first
19286 element.
19287
19288 @smallexample
19289 @group
19290 (nthcdr (mod (- 1 4) 4)
19291 '("fourth line of text"
19292 "third line"
19293 "second piece of text"
19294 "first some text"))
19295 @end group
19296 @end smallexample
19297
19298 @cindex @samp{global variable} defined
19299 @cindex @samp{variable, global}, defined
19300 Incidentally, both @code{kill-ring} and @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
19301 are @dfn{global variables}. That means that any expression in Emacs
19302 Lisp can access them. They are not like the local variables set by
19303 @code{let} or like the symbols in an argument list.
19304 Local variables can only be accessed
19305 within the @code{let} that defines them or the function that specifies
19306 them in an argument list (and within expressions called by them).
19307
19308 @ignore
19309 @c texi2dvi fails when the name of the section is within ifnottex ...
19310 (@xref{Prevent confusion, , @code{let} Prevents Confusion}, and
19311 @ref{defun, , The @code{defun} Macro}.)
19312 @end ignore
19313
19314 @node yank
19315 @appendixsec @code{yank}
19316 @findex yank
19317
19318 After learning about @code{current-kill}, the code for the
19319 @code{yank} function is almost easy.
19320
19321 The @code{yank} function does not use the
19322 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable directly. It calls
19323 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{current-kill} which sets the
19324 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
19325
19326 @need 1250
19327 The code looks like this:
19328
19329 @c in GNU Emacs 22
19330 @smallexample
19331 @group
19332 (defun yank (&optional arg)
19333 "Reinsert (\"paste\") the last stretch of killed text.
19334 More precisely, reinsert the stretch of killed text most recently
19335 killed OR yanked. Put point at end, and set mark at beginning.
19336 With just \\[universal-argument] as argument, same but put point at
19337 beginning (and mark at end). With argument N, reinsert the Nth most
19338 recently killed stretch of killed text.
19339
19340 When this command inserts killed text into the buffer, it honors
19341 `yank-excluded-properties' and `yank-handler' as described in the
19342 doc string for `insert-for-yank-1', which see.
19343
19344 See also the command \\[yank-pop]."
19345 @end group
19346 @group
19347 (interactive "*P")
19348 (setq yank-window-start (window-start))
19349 ;; If we don't get all the way thru, make last-command indicate that
19350 ;; for the following command.
19351 (setq this-command t)
19352 (push-mark (point))
19353 @end group
19354 @group
19355 (insert-for-yank (current-kill (cond
19356 ((listp arg) 0)
19357 ((eq arg '-) -2)
19358 (t (1- arg)))))
19359 (if (consp arg)
19360 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19361 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19362 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19363 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19364 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19365 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer)))))
19366 @end group
19367 @group
19368 ;; If we do get all the way thru, make this-command indicate that.
19369 (if (eq this-command t)
19370 (setq this-command 'yank))
19371 nil)
19372 @end group
19373 @end smallexample
19374
19375 The key expression is @code{insert-for-yank}, which inserts the string
19376 returned by @code{current-kill}, but removes some text properties from
19377 it.
19378
19379 However, before getting to that expression, the function sets the value
19380 of @code{yank-window-start} to the position returned by the
19381 @code{(window-start)} expression, the position at which the display
19382 currently starts. The @code{yank} function also sets
19383 @code{this-command} and pushes the mark.
19384
19385 After it yanks the appropriate element, if the optional argument is a
19386 @sc{cons} rather than a number or nothing, it puts point at beginning
19387 of the yanked text and mark at its end.
19388
19389 (The @code{prog1} function is like @code{progn} but returns the value
19390 of its first argument rather than the value of its last argument. Its
19391 first argument is forced to return the buffer's mark as an integer.
19392 You can see the documentation for these functions by placing point
19393 over them in this buffer and then typing @kbd{C-h f}
19394 (@code{describe-function}) followed by a @kbd{RET}; the default is the
19395 function.)
19396
19397 The last part of the function tells what to do when it succeeds.
19398
19399 @node yank-pop
19400 @appendixsec @code{yank-pop}
19401 @findex yank-pop
19402
19403 After understanding @code{yank} and @code{current-kill}, you know how
19404 to approach the @code{yank-pop} function. Leaving out the
19405 documentation to save space, it looks like this:
19406
19407 @c GNU Emacs 22
19408 @smallexample
19409 @group
19410 (defun yank-pop (&optional arg)
19411 "@dots{}"
19412 (interactive "*p")
19413 (if (not (eq last-command 'yank))
19414 (error "Previous command was not a yank"))
19415 @end group
19416 @group
19417 (setq this-command 'yank)
19418 (unless arg (setq arg 1))
19419 (let ((inhibit-read-only t)
19420 (before (< (point) (mark t))))
19421 @end group
19422 @group
19423 (if before
19424 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (point) (mark t))
19425 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (mark t) (point)))
19426 (setq yank-undo-function nil)
19427 @end group
19428 @group
19429 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer))
19430 (insert-for-yank (current-kill arg))
19431 ;; Set the window start back where it was in the yank command,
19432 ;; if possible.
19433 (set-window-start (selected-window) yank-window-start t)
19434 @end group
19435 @group
19436 (if before
19437 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19438 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19439 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19440 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19441 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19442 (set-marker (mark-marker)
19443 (point)
19444 (current-buffer))))))
19445 nil)
19446 @end group
19447 @end smallexample
19448
19449 The function is interactive with a small @samp{p} so the prefix
19450 argument is processed and passed to the function. The command can
19451 only be used after a previous yank; otherwise an error message is
19452 sent. This check uses the variable @code{last-command} which is set
19453 by @code{yank} and is discussed elsewhere.
19454 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
19455
19456 The @code{let} clause sets the variable @code{before} to true or false
19457 depending whether point is before or after mark and then the region
19458 between point and mark is deleted. This is the region that was just
19459 inserted by the previous yank and it is this text that will be
19460 replaced.
19461
19462 @code{funcall} calls its first argument as a function, passing
19463 remaining arguments to it. The first argument is whatever the
19464 @code{or} expression returns. The two remaining arguments are the
19465 positions of point and mark set by the preceding @code{yank} command.
19466
19467 There is more, but that is the hardest part.
19468
19469 @node ring file
19470 @appendixsec The @file{ring.el} File
19471 @cindex @file{ring.el} file
19472
19473 Interestingly, GNU Emacs posses a file called @file{ring.el} that
19474 provides many of the features we just discussed. But functions such
19475 as @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} do not use this library, possibly
19476 because they were written earlier.
19477
19478 @node Full Graph
19479 @appendix A Graph with Labeled Axes
19480
19481 Printed axes help you understand a graph. They convey scale. In an
19482 earlier chapter (@pxref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}), we
19483 wrote the code to print the body of a graph. Here we write the code
19484 for printing and labeling vertical and horizontal axes, along with the
19485 body itself.
19486
19487 @menu
19488 * Labeled Example::
19489 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
19490 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
19491 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
19492 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
19493 @end menu
19494
19495 @ifnottex
19496 @node Labeled Example
19497 @unnumberedsec Labeled Example Graph
19498 @end ifnottex
19499
19500 Since insertions fill a buffer to the right and below point, the new
19501 graph printing function should first print the Y or vertical axis,
19502 then the body of the graph, and finally the X or horizontal axis.
19503 This sequence lays out for us the contents of the function:
19504
19505 @enumerate
19506 @item
19507 Set up code.
19508
19509 @item
19510 Print Y axis.
19511
19512 @item
19513 Print body of graph.
19514
19515 @item
19516 Print X axis.
19517 @end enumerate
19518
19519 @need 800
19520 Here is an example of how a finished graph should look:
19521
19522 @smallexample
19523 @group
19524 10 -
19525 *
19526 * *
19527 * **
19528 * ***
19529 5 - * *******
19530 * *** *******
19531 *************
19532 ***************
19533 1 - ****************
19534 | | | |
19535 1 5 10 15
19536 @end group
19537 @end smallexample
19538
19539 @noindent
19540 In this graph, both the vertical and the horizontal axes are labeled
19541 with numbers. However, in some graphs, the horizontal axis is time
19542 and would be better labeled with months, like this:
19543
19544 @smallexample
19545 @group
19546 5 - *
19547 * ** *
19548 *******
19549 ********** **
19550 1 - **************
19551 | ^ |
19552 Jan June Jan
19553 @end group
19554 @end smallexample
19555
19556 Indeed, with a little thought, we can easily come up with a variety of
19557 vertical and horizontal labeling schemes. Our task could become
19558 complicated. But complications breed confusion. Rather than permit
19559 this, it is better choose a simple labeling scheme for our first
19560 effort, and to modify or replace it later.
19561
19562 @need 1200
19563 These considerations suggest the following outline for the
19564 @code{print-graph} function:
19565
19566 @smallexample
19567 @group
19568 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
19569 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
19570 (let ((height @dots{}
19571 @dots{}))
19572 @end group
19573 @group
19574 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
19575 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
19576 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
19577 @end group
19578 @end smallexample
19579
19580 We can work on each part of the @code{print-graph} function definition
19581 in turn.
19582
19583 @node print-graph Varlist
19584 @appendixsec The @code{print-graph} Varlist
19585 @cindex @code{print-graph} varlist
19586
19587 In writing the @code{print-graph} function, the first task is to write
19588 the varlist in the @code{let} expression. (We will leave aside for the
19589 moment any thoughts about making the function interactive or about the
19590 contents of its documentation string.)
19591
19592 The varlist should set several values. Clearly, the top of the label
19593 for the vertical axis must be at least the height of the graph, which
19594 means that we must obtain this information here. Note that the
19595 @code{print-graph-body} function also requires this information. There
19596 is no reason to calculate the height of the graph in two different
19597 places, so we should change @code{print-graph-body} from the way we
19598 defined it earlier to take advantage of the calculation.
19599
19600 Similarly, both the function for printing the X axis labels and the
19601 @code{print-graph-body} function need to learn the value of the width of
19602 each symbol. We can perform the calculation here and change the
19603 definition for @code{print-graph-body} from the way we defined it in the
19604 previous chapter.
19605
19606 The length of the label for the horizontal axis must be at least as long
19607 as the graph. However, this information is used only in the function
19608 that prints the horizontal axis, so it does not need to be calculated here.
19609
19610 These thoughts lead us directly to the following form for the varlist
19611 in the @code{let} for @code{print-graph}:
19612
19613 @smallexample
19614 @group
19615 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list)) ; @r{First version.}
19616 (symbol-width (length graph-blank)))
19617 @end group
19618 @end smallexample
19619
19620 @noindent
19621 As we shall see, this expression is not quite right.
19622
19623 @need 2000
19624 @node print-Y-axis
19625 @appendixsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
19626 @cindex Axis, print vertical
19627 @cindex Y axis printing
19628 @cindex Vertical axis printing
19629 @cindex Print vertical axis
19630
19631 The job of the @code{print-Y-axis} function is to print a label for
19632 the vertical axis that looks like this:
19633
19634 @smallexample
19635 @group
19636 10 -
19637
19638
19639
19640
19641 5 -
19642
19643
19644
19645 1 -
19646 @end group
19647 @end smallexample
19648
19649 @noindent
19650 The function should be passed the height of the graph, and then should
19651 construct and insert the appropriate numbers and marks.
19652
19653 @menu
19654 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
19655 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
19656 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
19657 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
19658 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
19659 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
19660 @end menu
19661
19662 @ifnottex
19663 @node print-Y-axis in Detail
19664 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function in Detail
19665 @end ifnottex
19666
19667 It is easy enough to see in the figure what the Y axis label should
19668 look like; but to say in words, and then to write a function
19669 definition to do the job is another matter. It is not quite true to
19670 say that we want a number and a tic every five lines: there are only
19671 three lines between the @samp{1} and the @samp{5} (lines 2, 3, and 4),
19672 but four lines between the @samp{5} and the @samp{10} (lines 6, 7, 8,
19673 and 9). It is better to say that we want a number and a tic mark on
19674 the base line (number 1) and then that we want a number and a tic on
19675 the fifth line from the bottom and on every line that is a multiple of
19676 five.
19677
19678 @ifnottex
19679 @node Height of label
19680 @unnumberedsubsec What height should the label be?
19681 @end ifnottex
19682
19683 The next issue is what height the label should be? Suppose the maximum
19684 height of tallest column of the graph is seven. Should the highest
19685 label on the Y axis be @samp{5 -}, and should the graph stick up above
19686 the label? Or should the highest label be @samp{7 -}, and mark the peak
19687 of the graph? Or should the highest label be @code{10 -}, which is a
19688 multiple of five, and be higher than the topmost value of the graph?
19689
19690 The latter form is preferred. Most graphs are drawn within rectangles
19691 whose sides are an integral number of steps long---5, 10, 15, and so
19692 on for a step distance of five. But as soon as we decide to use a
19693 step height for the vertical axis, we discover that the simple
19694 expression in the varlist for computing the height is wrong. The
19695 expression is @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)}. This returns the
19696 precise height, not the maximum height plus whatever is necessary to
19697 round up to the nearest multiple of five. A more complex expression
19698 is required.
19699
19700 As usual in cases like this, a complex problem becomes simpler if it is
19701 divided into several smaller problems.
19702
19703 First, consider the case when the highest value of the graph is an
19704 integral multiple of five---when it is 5, 10, 15, or some higher
19705 multiple of five. We can use this value as the Y axis height.
19706
19707 A fairly simply way to determine whether a number is a multiple of
19708 five is to divide it by five and see if the division results in a
19709 remainder. If there is no remainder, the number is a multiple of
19710 five. Thus, seven divided by five has a remainder of two, and seven
19711 is not an integral multiple of five. Put in slightly different
19712 language, more reminiscent of the classroom, five goes into seven
19713 once, with a remainder of two. However, five goes into ten twice,
19714 with no remainder: ten is an integral multiple of five.
19715
19716 @node Compute a Remainder
19717 @appendixsubsec Side Trip: Compute a Remainder
19718
19719 @findex % @r{(remainder function)}
19720 @cindex Remainder function, @code{%}
19721 In Lisp, the function for computing a remainder is @code{%}. The
19722 function returns the remainder of its first argument divided by its
19723 second argument. As it happens, @code{%} is a function in Emacs Lisp
19724 that you cannot discover using @code{apropos}: you find nothing if you
19725 type @kbd{M-x apropos @key{RET} remainder @key{RET}}. The only way to
19726 learn of the existence of @code{%} is to read about it in a book such
19727 as this or in the Emacs Lisp sources.
19728
19729 You can try the @code{%} function by evaluating the following two
19730 expressions:
19731
19732 @smallexample
19733 @group
19734 (% 7 5)
19735
19736 (% 10 5)
19737 @end group
19738 @end smallexample
19739
19740 @noindent
19741 The first expression returns 2 and the second expression returns 0.
19742
19743 To test whether the returned value is zero or some other number, we
19744 can use the @code{zerop} function. This function returns @code{t} if
19745 its argument, which must be a number, is zero.
19746
19747 @smallexample
19748 @group
19749 (zerop (% 7 5))
19750 @result{} nil
19751
19752 (zerop (% 10 5))
19753 @result{} t
19754 @end group
19755 @end smallexample
19756
19757 Thus, the following expression will return @code{t} if the height
19758 of the graph is evenly divisible by five:
19759
19760 @smallexample
19761 (zerop (% height 5))
19762 @end smallexample
19763
19764 @noindent
19765 (The value of @code{height}, of course, can be found from @code{(apply
19766 'max numbers-list)}.)
19767
19768 On the other hand, if the value of @code{height} is not a multiple of
19769 five, we want to reset the value to the next higher multiple of five.
19770 This is straightforward arithmetic using functions with which we are
19771 already familiar. First, we divide the value of @code{height} by five
19772 to determine how many times five goes into the number. Thus, five
19773 goes into twelve twice. If we add one to this quotient and multiply by
19774 five, we will obtain the value of the next multiple of five that is
19775 larger than the height. Five goes into twelve twice. Add one to two,
19776 and multiply by five; the result is fifteen, which is the next multiple
19777 of five that is higher than twelve. The Lisp expression for this is:
19778
19779 @smallexample
19780 (* (1+ (/ height 5)) 5)
19781 @end smallexample
19782
19783 @noindent
19784 For example, if you evaluate the following, the result is 15:
19785
19786 @smallexample
19787 (* (1+ (/ 12 5)) 5)
19788 @end smallexample
19789
19790 All through this discussion, we have been using `five' as the value
19791 for spacing labels on the Y axis; but we may want to use some other
19792 value. For generality, we should replace `five' with a variable to
19793 which we can assign a value. The best name I can think of for this
19794 variable is @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
19795
19796 @need 1250
19797 Using this term, and an @code{if} expression, we produce the
19798 following:
19799
19800 @smallexample
19801 @group
19802 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19803 height
19804 ;; @r{else}
19805 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19806 Y-axis-label-spacing))
19807 @end group
19808 @end smallexample
19809
19810 @noindent
19811 This expression returns the value of @code{height} itself if the height
19812 is an even multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing} or
19813 else it computes and returns a value of @code{height} that is equal to
19814 the next higher multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
19815
19816 We can now include this expression in the @code{let} expression of the
19817 @code{print-graph} function (after first setting the value of
19818 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}):
19819 @vindex Y-axis-label-spacing
19820
19821 @smallexample
19822 @group
19823 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
19824 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
19825 @end group
19826
19827 @group
19828 @dots{}
19829 (let* ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
19830 (height-of-top-line
19831 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19832 height
19833 @end group
19834 @group
19835 ;; @r{else}
19836 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19837 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
19838 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))))
19839 @dots{}
19840 @end group
19841 @end smallexample
19842
19843 @noindent
19844 (Note use of the @code{let*} function: the initial value of height is
19845 computed once by the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression and
19846 then the resulting value of @code{height} is used to compute its
19847 final value. @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}, for
19848 more about @code{let*}.)
19849
19850 @node Y Axis Element
19851 @appendixsubsec Construct a Y Axis Element
19852
19853 When we print the vertical axis, we want to insert strings such as
19854 @w{@samp{5 -}} and @w{@samp{10 - }} every five lines.
19855 Moreover, we want the numbers and dashes to line up, so shorter
19856 numbers must be padded with leading spaces. If some of the strings
19857 use two digit numbers, the strings with single digit numbers must
19858 include a leading blank space before the number.
19859
19860 @findex number-to-string
19861 To figure out the length of the number, the @code{length} function is
19862 used. But the @code{length} function works only with a string, not with
19863 a number. So the number has to be converted from being a number to
19864 being a string. This is done with the @code{number-to-string} function.
19865 For example,
19866
19867 @smallexample
19868 @group
19869 (length (number-to-string 35))
19870 @result{} 2
19871
19872 (length (number-to-string 100))
19873 @result{} 3
19874 @end group
19875 @end smallexample
19876
19877 @noindent
19878 (@code{number-to-string} is also called @code{int-to-string}; you will
19879 see this alternative name in various sources.)
19880
19881 In addition, in each label, each number is followed by a string such
19882 as @w{@samp{ - }}, which we will call the @code{Y-axis-tic} marker.
19883 This variable is defined with @code{defvar}:
19884
19885 @vindex Y-axis-tic
19886 @smallexample
19887 @group
19888 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
19889 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
19890 @end group
19891 @end smallexample
19892
19893 The length of the Y label is the sum of the length of the Y axis tic
19894 mark and the length of the number of the top of the graph.
19895
19896 @smallexample
19897 (length (concat (number-to-string height) Y-axis-tic)))
19898 @end smallexample
19899
19900 This value will be calculated by the @code{print-graph} function in
19901 its varlist as @code{full-Y-label-width} and passed on. (Note that we
19902 did not think to include this in the varlist when we first proposed it.)
19903
19904 To make a complete vertical axis label, a tic mark is concatenated
19905 with a number; and the two together may be preceded by one or more
19906 spaces depending on how long the number is. The label consists of
19907 three parts: the (optional) leading spaces, the number, and the tic
19908 mark. The function is passed the value of the number for the specific
19909 row, and the value of the width of the top line, which is calculated
19910 (just once) by @code{print-graph}.
19911
19912 @smallexample
19913 @group
19914 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
19915 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
19916 A numbered element looks like this ` 5 - ',
19917 and is padded as needed so all line up with
19918 the element for the largest number."
19919 @end group
19920 @group
19921 (let* ((leading-spaces
19922 (- full-Y-label-width
19923 (length
19924 (concat (number-to-string number)
19925 Y-axis-tic)))))
19926 @end group
19927 @group
19928 (concat
19929 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
19930 (number-to-string number)
19931 Y-axis-tic)))
19932 @end group
19933 @end smallexample
19934
19935 The @code{Y-axis-element} function concatenates together the leading
19936 spaces, if any; the number, as a string; and the tic mark.
19937
19938 To figure out how many leading spaces the label will need, the
19939 function subtracts the actual length of the label---the length of the
19940 number plus the length of the tic mark---from the desired label width.
19941
19942 @findex make-string
19943 Blank spaces are inserted using the @code{make-string} function. This
19944 function takes two arguments: the first tells it how long the string
19945 will be and the second is a symbol for the character to insert, in a
19946 special format. The format is a question mark followed by a blank
19947 space, like this, @samp{? }. @xref{Character Type, , Character Type,
19948 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a description of the
19949 syntax for characters. (Of course, you might want to replace the
19950 blank space by some other character @dots{} You know what to do.)
19951
19952 The @code{number-to-string} function is used in the concatenation
19953 expression, to convert the number to a string that is concatenated
19954 with the leading spaces and the tic mark.
19955
19956 @node Y-axis-column
19957 @appendixsubsec Create a Y Axis Column
19958
19959 The preceding functions provide all the tools needed to construct a
19960 function that generates a list of numbered and blank strings to insert
19961 as the label for the vertical axis:
19962
19963 @findex Y-axis-column
19964 @smallexample
19965 @group
19966 (defun Y-axis-column (height width-of-label)
19967 "Construct list of Y axis labels and blank strings.
19968 For HEIGHT of line above base and WIDTH-OF-LABEL."
19969 (let (Y-axis)
19970 @group
19971 @end group
19972 (while (> height 1)
19973 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19974 ;; @r{Insert label.}
19975 (setq Y-axis
19976 (cons
19977 (Y-axis-element height width-of-label)
19978 Y-axis))
19979 @group
19980 @end group
19981 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
19982 (setq Y-axis
19983 (cons
19984 (make-string width-of-label ? )
19985 Y-axis)))
19986 (setq height (1- height)))
19987 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
19988 (setq Y-axis
19989 (cons (Y-axis-element 1 width-of-label) Y-axis))
19990 (nreverse Y-axis)))
19991 @end group
19992 @end smallexample
19993
19994 In this function, we start with the value of @code{height} and
19995 repetitively subtract one from its value. After each subtraction, we
19996 test to see whether the value is an integral multiple of the
19997 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}. If it is, we construct a numbered label
19998 using the @code{Y-axis-element} function; if not, we construct a
19999 blank label using the @code{make-string} function. The base line
20000 consists of the number one followed by a tic mark.
20001
20002 @need 2000
20003 @node print-Y-axis Penultimate
20004 @appendixsubsec The Not Quite Final Version of @code{print-Y-axis}
20005
20006 The list constructed by the @code{Y-axis-column} function is passed to
20007 the @code{print-Y-axis} function, which inserts the list as a column.
20008
20009 @findex print-Y-axis
20010 @smallexample
20011 @group
20012 (defun print-Y-axis (height full-Y-label-width)
20013 "Insert Y axis using HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
20014 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
20015 Full width is the width of the highest label element."
20016 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
20017 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
20018 @end group
20019 @group
20020 (let ((start (point)))
20021 (insert-rectangle
20022 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width))
20023 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
20024 (goto-char start)
20025 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
20026 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
20027 @end group
20028 @end smallexample
20029
20030 The @code{print-Y-axis} uses the @code{insert-rectangle} function to
20031 insert the Y axis labels created by the @code{Y-axis-column} function.
20032 In addition, it places point at the correct position for printing the body of
20033 the graph.
20034
20035 You can test @code{print-Y-axis}:
20036
20037 @enumerate
20038 @item
20039 Install
20040
20041 @smallexample
20042 @group
20043 Y-axis-label-spacing
20044 Y-axis-tic
20045 Y-axis-element
20046 Y-axis-column
20047 print-Y-axis
20048 @end group
20049 @end smallexample
20050
20051 @item
20052 Copy the following expression:
20053
20054 @smallexample
20055 (print-Y-axis 12 5)
20056 @end smallexample
20057
20058 @item
20059 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20060 want the axis labels to start.
20061
20062 @item
20063 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20064
20065 @item
20066 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
20067 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20068
20069 @item
20070 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20071 @end enumerate
20072
20073 Emacs will print labels vertically, the top one being @w{@samp{10 -@w{
20074 }}}. (The @code{print-graph} function will pass the value of
20075 @code{height-of-top-line}, which in this case will end up as 15,
20076 thereby getting rid of what might appear as a bug.)
20077
20078 @need 2000
20079 @node print-X-axis
20080 @appendixsec The @code{print-X-axis} Function
20081 @cindex Axis, print horizontal
20082 @cindex X axis printing
20083 @cindex Print horizontal axis
20084 @cindex Horizontal axis printing
20085
20086 X axis labels are much like Y axis labels, except that the ticks are on a
20087 line above the numbers. Labels should look like this:
20088
20089 @smallexample
20090 @group
20091 | | | |
20092 1 5 10 15
20093 @end group
20094 @end smallexample
20095
20096 The first tic is under the first column of the graph and is preceded by
20097 several blank spaces. These spaces provide room in rows above for the Y
20098 axis labels. The second, third, fourth, and subsequent ticks are all
20099 spaced equally, according to the value of @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20100
20101 The second row of the X axis consists of numbers, preceded by several
20102 blank spaces and also separated according to the value of the variable
20103 @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20104
20105 The value of the variable @code{X-axis-label-spacing} should itself be
20106 measured in units of @code{symbol-width}, since you may want to change
20107 the width of the symbols that you are using to print the body of the
20108 graph without changing the ways the graph is labeled.
20109
20110 @menu
20111 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
20112 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
20113 @end menu
20114
20115 @ifnottex
20116 @node Similarities differences
20117 @unnumberedsubsec Similarities and differences
20118 @end ifnottex
20119
20120 The @code{print-X-axis} function is constructed in more or less the
20121 same fashion as the @code{print-Y-axis} function except that it has
20122 two lines: the line of tic marks and the numbers. We will write a
20123 separate function to print each line and then combine them within the
20124 @code{print-X-axis} function.
20125
20126 This is a three step process:
20127
20128 @enumerate
20129 @item
20130 Write a function to print the X axis tic marks, @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}.
20131
20132 @item
20133 Write a function to print the X numbers, @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20134
20135 @item
20136 Write a function to print both lines, the @code{print-X-axis} function,
20137 using @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20138 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20139 @end enumerate
20140
20141 @node X Axis Tic Marks
20142 @appendixsubsec X Axis Tic Marks
20143
20144 The first function should print the X axis tic marks. We must specify
20145 the tic marks themselves and their spacing:
20146
20147 @smallexample
20148 @group
20149 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
20150 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
20151 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
20152 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
20153 @end group
20154 @end smallexample
20155
20156 @noindent
20157 (Note that the value of @code{graph-blank} is set by another
20158 @code{defvar}. The @code{boundp} predicate checks whether it has
20159 already been set; @code{boundp} returns @code{nil} if it has not. If
20160 @code{graph-blank} were unbound and we did not use this conditional
20161 construction, in a recent GNU Emacs, we would enter the debugger and
20162 see an error message saying @samp{@w{Debugger entered--Lisp error:}
20163 @w{(void-variable graph-blank)}}.)
20164
20165 @need 1200
20166 Here is the @code{defvar} for @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}:
20167
20168 @smallexample
20169 @group
20170 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
20171 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
20172 @end group
20173 @end smallexample
20174
20175 @need 1250
20176 The goal is to make a line that looks like this:
20177
20178 @smallexample
20179 | | | |
20180 @end smallexample
20181
20182 The first tic is indented so that it is under the first column, which is
20183 indented to provide space for the Y axis labels.
20184
20185 A tic element consists of the blank spaces that stretch from one tic to
20186 the next plus a tic symbol. The number of blanks is determined by the
20187 width of the tic symbol and the @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20188
20189 @need 1250
20190 The code looks like this:
20191
20192 @smallexample
20193 @group
20194 ;;; X-axis-tic-element
20195 @dots{}
20196 (concat
20197 (make-string
20198 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20199 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20200 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20201 ? )
20202 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20203 X-axis-tic-symbol)
20204 @dots{}
20205 @end group
20206 @end smallexample
20207
20208 Next, we determine how many blanks are needed to indent the first tic
20209 mark to the first column of the graph. This uses the value of
20210 @code{full-Y-label-width} passed it by the @code{print-graph} function.
20211
20212 @need 1250
20213 The code to make @code{X-axis-leading-spaces}
20214 looks like this:
20215
20216 @smallexample
20217 @group
20218 ;; X-axis-leading-spaces
20219 @dots{}
20220 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? )
20221 @dots{}
20222 @end group
20223 @end smallexample
20224
20225 We also need to determine the length of the horizontal axis, which is
20226 the length of the numbers list, and the number of ticks in the horizontal
20227 axis:
20228
20229 @smallexample
20230 @group
20231 ;; X-length
20232 @dots{}
20233 (length numbers-list)
20234 @end group
20235
20236 @group
20237 ;; tic-width
20238 @dots{}
20239 (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20240 @end group
20241
20242 @group
20243 ;; number-of-X-ticks
20244 (if (zerop (% (X-length tic-width)))
20245 (/ (X-length tic-width))
20246 (1+ (/ (X-length tic-width))))
20247 @end group
20248 @end smallexample
20249
20250 @need 1250
20251 All this leads us directly to the function for printing the X axis tic line:
20252
20253 @findex print-X-axis-tic-line
20254 @smallexample
20255 @group
20256 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
20257 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
20258 "Print ticks for X axis."
20259 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20260 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
20261 @end group
20262 @group
20263 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
20264 (insert (concat
20265 (make-string
20266 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20267 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
20268 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
20269 ? )
20270 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20271 @end group
20272 @group
20273 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
20274 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20275 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
20276 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
20277 @end group
20278 @end smallexample
20279
20280 The line of numbers is equally straightforward:
20281
20282 @need 1250
20283 First, we create a numbered element with blank spaces before each number:
20284
20285 @findex X-axis-element
20286 @smallexample
20287 @group
20288 (defun X-axis-element (number)
20289 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
20290 (let ((leading-spaces
20291 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20292 (length (number-to-string number)))))
20293 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
20294 (number-to-string number))))
20295 @end group
20296 @end smallexample
20297
20298 Next, we create the function to print the numbered line, starting with
20299 the number ``1'' under the first column:
20300
20301 @findex print-X-axis-numbered-line
20302 @smallexample
20303 @group
20304 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
20305 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces)
20306 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
20307 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing))
20308 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20309 (insert "1")
20310 @end group
20311 @group
20312 (insert (concat
20313 (make-string
20314 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
20315 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing) 2)
20316 ? )
20317 (number-to-string number)))
20318 @end group
20319 @group
20320 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
20321 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20322 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20323 (insert (X-axis-element number))
20324 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20325 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
20326 @end group
20327 @end smallexample
20328
20329 Finally, we need to write the @code{print-X-axis} that uses
20330 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20331 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20332
20333 The function must determine the local values of the variables used by both
20334 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and
20335 then it must call them. Also, it must print the carriage return that
20336 separates the two lines.
20337
20338 The function consists of a varlist that specifies five local variables,
20339 and calls to each of the two line printing functions:
20340
20341 @findex print-X-axis
20342 @smallexample
20343 @group
20344 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list)
20345 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST."
20346 (let* ((leading-spaces
20347 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
20348 @end group
20349 @group
20350 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
20351 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
20352 (X-length (length numbers-list))
20353 @end group
20354 @group
20355 (X-tic
20356 (concat
20357 (make-string
20358 @end group
20359 @group
20360 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20361 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20362 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20363 ? )
20364 @end group
20365 @group
20366 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20367 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20368 @end group
20369 @group
20370 (tic-number
20371 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
20372 (/ X-length tic-width)
20373 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
20374 @end group
20375 @group
20376 (print-X-axis-tic-line tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
20377 (insert "\n")
20378 (print-X-axis-numbered-line tic-number leading-spaces)))
20379 @end group
20380 @end smallexample
20381
20382 @need 1250
20383 You can test @code{print-X-axis}:
20384
20385 @enumerate
20386 @item
20387 Install @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}, @code{X-axis-label-spacing},
20388 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}, as well as @code{X-axis-element},
20389 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and @code{print-X-axis}.
20390
20391 @item
20392 Copy the following expression:
20393
20394 @smallexample
20395 @group
20396 (progn
20397 (let ((full-Y-label-width 5)
20398 (symbol-width 1))
20399 (print-X-axis
20400 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16))))
20401 @end group
20402 @end smallexample
20403
20404 @item
20405 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20406 want the axis labels to start.
20407
20408 @item
20409 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20410
20411 @item
20412 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20413 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20414
20415 @item
20416 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20417 @end enumerate
20418
20419 @need 1250
20420 Emacs will print the horizontal axis like this:
20421 @sp 1
20422
20423 @smallexample
20424 @group
20425 | | | | |
20426 1 5 10 15 20
20427 @end group
20428 @end smallexample
20429
20430 @node Print Whole Graph
20431 @appendixsec Printing the Whole Graph
20432 @cindex Printing the whole graph
20433 @cindex Whole graph printing
20434 @cindex Graph, printing all
20435
20436 Now we are nearly ready to print the whole graph.
20437
20438 The function to print the graph with the proper labels follows the
20439 outline we created earlier (@pxref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labeled
20440 Axes}), but with additions.
20441
20442 @need 1250
20443 Here is the outline:
20444
20445 @smallexample
20446 @group
20447 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
20448 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
20449 (let ((height @dots{}
20450 @dots{}))
20451 @end group
20452 @group
20453 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
20454 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
20455 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
20456 @end group
20457 @end smallexample
20458
20459 @menu
20460 * The final version:: A few changes.
20461 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
20462 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
20463 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
20464 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
20465 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
20466 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
20467 @end menu
20468
20469 @ifnottex
20470 @node The final version
20471 @unnumberedsubsec Changes for the Final Version
20472 @end ifnottex
20473
20474 The final version is different from what we planned in two ways:
20475 first, it contains additional values calculated once in the varlist;
20476 second, it carries an option to specify the labels' increment per row.
20477 This latter feature turns out to be essential; otherwise, a graph may
20478 have more rows than fit on a display or on a sheet of paper.
20479
20480 @need 1500
20481 This new feature requires a change to the @code{Y-axis-column}
20482 function, to add @code{vertical-step} to it. The function looks like
20483 this:
20484
20485 @findex Y-axis-column @r{Final version.}
20486 @smallexample
20487 @group
20488 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20489 (defun Y-axis-column
20490 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
20491 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
20492 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20493 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
20494 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
20495 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
20496 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
20497 that each line is five units of the graph."
20498 @end group
20499 @group
20500 (let (Y-axis
20501 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
20502 (while (> height 1)
20503 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20504 @end group
20505 @group
20506 ;; @r{Insert label.}
20507 (setq Y-axis
20508 (cons
20509 (Y-axis-element
20510 (* height number-per-line)
20511 width-of-label)
20512 Y-axis))
20513 @end group
20514 @group
20515 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
20516 (setq Y-axis
20517 (cons
20518 (make-string width-of-label ? )
20519 Y-axis)))
20520 (setq height (1- height)))
20521 @end group
20522 @group
20523 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
20524 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
20525 (or vertical-step 1)
20526 width-of-label)
20527 Y-axis))
20528 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20529 @end group
20530 @end smallexample
20531
20532 The values for the maximum height of graph and the width of a symbol
20533 are computed by @code{print-graph} in its @code{let} expression; so
20534 @code{graph-body-print} must be changed to accept them.
20535
20536 @findex graph-body-print @r{Final version.}
20537 @smallexample
20538 @group
20539 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20540 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
20541 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20542 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20543 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20544 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
20545 @end group
20546 @group
20547 (let (from-position)
20548 (while numbers-list
20549 (setq from-position (point))
20550 (insert-rectangle
20551 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
20552 (goto-char from-position)
20553 (forward-char symbol-width)
20554 @end group
20555 @group
20556 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
20557 (sit-for 0)
20558 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
20559 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
20560 (forward-line height)
20561 (insert "\n")))
20562 @end group
20563 @end smallexample
20564
20565 @need 1250
20566 Finally, the code for the @code{print-graph} function:
20567
20568 @findex print-graph @r{Final version.}
20569 @smallexample
20570 @group
20571 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20572 (defun print-graph
20573 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step)
20574 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20575 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20576 @end group
20577
20578 @group
20579 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
20580 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
20581 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
20582 each row is five units."
20583 @end group
20584 @group
20585 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
20586 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
20587 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
20588 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
20589 @end group
20590 @group
20591 (height-of-top-line
20592 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20593 height
20594 ;; @r{else}
20595 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20596 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
20597 @end group
20598 @group
20599 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
20600 (full-Y-label-width
20601 (length
20602 @end group
20603 @group
20604 (concat
20605 (number-to-string
20606 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
20607 Y-axis-tic))))
20608 @end group
20609
20610 @group
20611 (print-Y-axis
20612 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
20613 @end group
20614 @group
20615 (graph-body-print
20616 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
20617 (print-X-axis numbers-list)))
20618 @end group
20619 @end smallexample
20620
20621 @node Test print-graph
20622 @appendixsubsec Testing @code{print-graph}
20623
20624 @need 1250
20625 We can test the @code{print-graph} function with a short list of numbers:
20626
20627 @enumerate
20628 @item
20629 Install the final versions of @code{Y-axis-column},
20630 @code{graph-body-print}, and @code{print-graph} (in addition to the
20631 rest of the code.)
20632
20633 @item
20634 Copy the following expression:
20635
20636 @smallexample
20637 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
20638 @end smallexample
20639
20640 @item
20641 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20642 want the axis labels to start.
20643
20644 @item
20645 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20646
20647 @item
20648 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20649 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20650
20651 @item
20652 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20653 @end enumerate
20654
20655 @need 1250
20656 Emacs will print a graph that looks like this:
20657
20658 @smallexample
20659 @group
20660 10 -
20661
20662
20663 *
20664 ** *
20665 5 - **** *
20666 **** ***
20667 * *********
20668 ************
20669 1 - *************
20670
20671 | | | |
20672 1 5 10 15
20673 @end group
20674 @end smallexample
20675
20676 @need 1200
20677 On the other hand, if you pass @code{print-graph} a
20678 @code{vertical-step} value of 2, by evaluating this expression:
20679
20680 @smallexample
20681 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1) 2)
20682 @end smallexample
20683
20684 @need 1250
20685 @noindent
20686 The graph looks like this:
20687
20688 @smallexample
20689 @group
20690 20 -
20691
20692
20693 *
20694 ** *
20695 10 - **** *
20696 **** ***
20697 * *********
20698 ************
20699 2 - *************
20700
20701 | | | |
20702 1 5 10 15
20703 @end group
20704 @end smallexample
20705
20706 @noindent
20707 (A question: is the `2' on the bottom of the vertical axis a bug or a
20708 feature? If you think it is a bug, and should be a `1' instead, (or
20709 even a `0'), you can modify the sources.)
20710
20711 @node Graphing words in defuns
20712 @appendixsubsec Graphing Numbers of Words and Symbols
20713
20714 Now for the graph for which all this code was written: a graph that
20715 shows how many function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and
20716 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
20717 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
20718
20719 This is a multi-step process. First make sure you have loaded all the
20720 requisite code.
20721
20722 @need 1500
20723 It is a good idea to reset the value of @code{top-of-ranges} in case
20724 you have set it to some different value. You can evaluate the
20725 following:
20726
20727 @smallexample
20728 @group
20729 (setq top-of-ranges
20730 '(10 20 30 40 50
20731 60 70 80 90 100
20732 110 120 130 140 150
20733 160 170 180 190 200
20734 210 220 230 240 250
20735 260 270 280 290 300)
20736 @end group
20737 @end smallexample
20738
20739 @noindent
20740 Next create a list of the number of words and symbols in each range.
20741
20742 @need 1500
20743 @noindent
20744 Evaluate the following:
20745
20746 @smallexample
20747 @group
20748 (setq list-for-graph
20749 (defuns-per-range
20750 (sort
20751 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
20752 (directory-files "/usr/local/emacs/lisp"
20753 t ".+el$"))
20754 '<)
20755 top-of-ranges))
20756 @end group
20757 @end smallexample
20758
20759 @noindent
20760 On my old machine, this took about an hour. It looked though 303 Lisp
20761 files in my copy of Emacs version 19.23. After all that computing,
20762 the @code{list-for-graph} had this value:
20763
20764 @smallexample
20765 @group
20766 (537 1027 955 785 594 483 349 292 224 199 166 120 116 99
20767 90 80 67 48 52 45 41 33 28 26 25 20 12 28 11 13 220)
20768 @end group
20769 @end smallexample
20770
20771 @noindent
20772 This means that my copy of Emacs had 537 function definitions with
20773 fewer than 10 words or symbols in them, 1,027 function definitions
20774 with 10 to 19 words or symbols in them, 955 function definitions with
20775 20 to 29 words or symbols in them, and so on.
20776
20777 Clearly, just by looking at this list we can see that most function
20778 definitions contain ten to thirty words and symbols.
20779
20780 Now for printing. We do @emph{not} want to print a graph that is
20781 1,030 lines high @dots{} Instead, we should print a graph that is
20782 fewer than twenty-five lines high. A graph that height can be
20783 displayed on almost any monitor, and easily printed on a sheet of paper.
20784
20785 This means that each value in @code{list-for-graph} must be reduced to
20786 one-fiftieth its present value.
20787
20788 Here is a short function to do just that, using two functions we have
20789 not yet seen, @code{mapcar} and @code{lambda}.
20790
20791 @smallexample
20792 @group
20793 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
20794 "Return list, each number one-fiftieth of previous."
20795 (mapcar (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
20796 @end group
20797 @end smallexample
20798
20799 @node lambda
20800 @appendixsubsec A @code{lambda} Expression: Useful Anonymity
20801 @cindex Anonymous function
20802 @findex lambda
20803
20804 @code{lambda} is the symbol for an anonymous function, a function
20805 without a name. Every time you use an anonymous function, you need to
20806 include its whole body.
20807
20808 @need 1250
20809 @noindent
20810 Thus,
20811
20812 @smallexample
20813 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
20814 @end smallexample
20815
20816 @noindent
20817 is a function definition that says `return the value resulting from
20818 dividing whatever is passed to me as @code{arg} by 50'.
20819
20820 @need 1200
20821 Earlier, for example, we had a function @code{multiply-by-seven}; it
20822 multiplied its argument by 7. This function is similar, except it
20823 divides its argument by 50; and, it has no name. The anonymous
20824 equivalent of @code{multiply-by-seven} is:
20825
20826 @smallexample
20827 (lambda (number) (* 7 number))
20828 @end smallexample
20829
20830 @noindent
20831 (@xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Macro}.)
20832
20833 @need 1250
20834 @noindent
20835 If we want to multiply 3 by 7, we can write:
20836
20837 @c clear print-postscript-figures
20838 @c lambda example diagram #1
20839 @ifnottex
20840 @smallexample
20841 @group
20842 (multiply-by-seven 3)
20843 \_______________/ ^
20844 | |
20845 function argument
20846 @end group
20847 @end smallexample
20848 @end ifnottex
20849 @ifset print-postscript-figures
20850 @sp 1
20851 @tex
20852 @center @image{lambda-1}
20853 @end tex
20854 @sp 1
20855 @end ifset
20856 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
20857 @iftex
20858 @smallexample
20859 @group
20860 (multiply-by-seven 3)
20861 \_______________/ ^
20862 | |
20863 function argument
20864 @end group
20865 @end smallexample
20866 @end iftex
20867 @end ifclear
20868
20869 @noindent
20870 This expression returns 21.
20871
20872 @need 1250
20873 @noindent
20874 Similarly, we can write:
20875
20876 @c lambda example diagram #2
20877 @ifnottex
20878 @smallexample
20879 @group
20880 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
20881 \____________________________/ ^
20882 | |
20883 anonymous function argument
20884 @end group
20885 @end smallexample
20886 @end ifnottex
20887 @ifset print-postscript-figures
20888 @sp 1
20889 @tex
20890 @center @image{lambda-2}
20891 @end tex
20892 @sp 1
20893 @end ifset
20894 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
20895 @iftex
20896 @smallexample
20897 @group
20898 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
20899 \____________________________/ ^
20900 | |
20901 anonymous function argument
20902 @end group
20903 @end smallexample
20904 @end iftex
20905 @end ifclear
20906
20907 @need 1250
20908 @noindent
20909 If we want to divide 100 by 50, we can write:
20910
20911 @c lambda example diagram #3
20912 @ifnottex
20913 @smallexample
20914 @group
20915 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
20916 \______________________/ \_/
20917 | |
20918 anonymous function argument
20919 @end group
20920 @end smallexample
20921 @end ifnottex
20922 @ifset print-postscript-figures
20923 @sp 1
20924 @tex
20925 @center @image{lambda-3}
20926 @end tex
20927 @sp 1
20928 @end ifset
20929 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
20930 @iftex
20931 @smallexample
20932 @group
20933 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
20934 \______________________/ \_/
20935 | |
20936 anonymous function argument
20937 @end group
20938 @end smallexample
20939 @end iftex
20940 @end ifclear
20941
20942 @noindent
20943 This expression returns 2. The 100 is passed to the function, which
20944 divides that number by 50.
20945
20946 @xref{Lambda Expressions, , Lambda Expressions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
20947 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{lambda}. Lisp and lambda
20948 expressions derive from the Lambda Calculus.
20949
20950 @node mapcar
20951 @appendixsubsec The @code{mapcar} Function
20952 @findex mapcar
20953
20954 @code{mapcar} is a function that calls its first argument with each
20955 element of its second argument, in turn. The second argument must be
20956 a sequence.
20957
20958 The @samp{map} part of the name comes from the mathematical phrase,
20959 `mapping over a domain', meaning to apply a function to each of the
20960 elements in a domain. The mathematical phrase is based on the
20961 metaphor of a surveyor walking, one step at a time, over an area he is
20962 mapping. And @samp{car}, of course, comes from the Lisp notion of the
20963 first of a list.
20964
20965 @need 1250
20966 @noindent
20967 For example,
20968
20969 @smallexample
20970 @group
20971 (mapcar '1+ '(2 4 6))
20972 @result{} (3 5 7)
20973 @end group
20974 @end smallexample
20975
20976 @noindent
20977 The function @code{1+} which adds one to its argument, is executed on
20978 @emph{each} element of the list, and a new list is returned.
20979
20980 Contrast this with @code{apply}, which applies its first argument to
20981 all the remaining.
20982 (@xref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}, for a explanation of
20983 @code{apply}.)
20984
20985 @need 1250
20986 In the definition of @code{one-fiftieth}, the first argument is the
20987 anonymous function:
20988
20989 @smallexample
20990 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
20991 @end smallexample
20992
20993 @noindent
20994 and the second argument is @code{full-range}, which will be bound to
20995 @code{list-for-graph}.
20996
20997 @need 1250
20998 The whole expression looks like this:
20999
21000 @smallexample
21001 (mapcar (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21002 @end smallexample
21003
21004 @xref{Mapping Functions, , Mapping Functions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
21005 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{mapcar}.
21006
21007 Using the @code{one-fiftieth} function, we can generate a list in
21008 which each element is one-fiftieth the size of the corresponding
21009 element in @code{list-for-graph}.
21010
21011 @smallexample
21012 @group
21013 (setq fiftieth-list-for-graph
21014 (one-fiftieth list-for-graph))
21015 @end group
21016 @end smallexample
21017
21018 @need 1250
21019 The resulting list looks like this:
21020
21021 @smallexample
21022 @group
21023 (10 20 19 15 11 9 6 5 4 3 3 2 2
21024 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4)
21025 @end group
21026 @end smallexample
21027
21028 @noindent
21029 This, we are almost ready to print! (We also notice the loss of
21030 information: many of the higher ranges are 0, meaning that fewer than
21031 50 defuns had that many words or symbols---but not necessarily meaning
21032 that none had that many words or symbols.)
21033
21034 @node Another Bug
21035 @appendixsubsec Another Bug @dots{} Most Insidious
21036 @cindex Bug, most insidious type
21037 @cindex Insidious type of bug
21038
21039 I said `almost ready to print'! Of course, there is a bug in the
21040 @code{print-graph} function @dots{} It has a @code{vertical-step}
21041 option, but not a @code{horizontal-step} option. The
21042 @code{top-of-range} scale goes from 10 to 300 by tens. But the
21043 @code{print-graph} function will print only by ones.
21044
21045 This is a classic example of what some consider the most insidious
21046 type of bug, the bug of omission. This is not the kind of bug you can
21047 find by studying the code, for it is not in the code; it is an omitted
21048 feature. Your best actions are to try your program early and often;
21049 and try to arrange, as much as you can, to write code that is easy to
21050 understand and easy to change. Try to be aware, whenever you can,
21051 that whatever you have written, @emph{will} be rewritten, if not soon,
21052 eventually. A hard maxim to follow.
21053
21054 It is the @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line} function that needs the
21055 work; and then the @code{print-X-axis} and the @code{print-graph}
21056 functions need to be adapted. Not much needs to be done; there is one
21057 nicety: the numbers ought to line up under the tic marks. This takes
21058 a little thought.
21059
21060 @need 1250
21061 Here is the corrected @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}:
21062
21063 @smallexample
21064 @group
21065 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21066 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21067 &optional horizontal-step)
21068 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21069 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21070 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21071 @end group
21072 @group
21073 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21074 ;; @r{Delete extra leading spaces.}
21075 (delete-char
21076 (- (1-
21077 (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21078 (insert (concat
21079 (make-string
21080 @end group
21081 @group
21082 ;; @r{Insert white space.}
21083 (- (* symbol-width
21084 X-axis-label-spacing)
21085 (1-
21086 (length
21087 (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21088 2)
21089 ? )
21090 (number-to-string
21091 (* number horizontal-step))))
21092 @end group
21093 @group
21094 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21095 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21096 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21097 (insert (X-axis-element
21098 (* number horizontal-step)))
21099 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21100 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21101 @end group
21102 @end smallexample
21103
21104 @need 1500
21105 If you are reading this in Info, you can see the new versions of
21106 @code{print-X-axis} @code{print-graph} and evaluate them. If you are
21107 reading this in a printed book, you can see the changed lines here
21108 (the full text is too much to print).
21109
21110 @iftex
21111 @smallexample
21112 @group
21113 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21114 @dots{}
21115 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21116 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step))
21117 @end group
21118 @end smallexample
21119
21120 @smallexample
21121 @group
21122 (defun print-graph
21123 (numbers-list
21124 &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21125 @dots{}
21126 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step))
21127 @end group
21128 @end smallexample
21129 @end iftex
21130
21131 @ifnottex
21132 @smallexample
21133 @group
21134 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21135 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21136 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21137 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21138 each column."
21139 @end group
21140 @group
21141 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21142 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21143 (let* ((leading-spaces
21144 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21145 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21146 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21147 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21148 @end group
21149 @group
21150 (X-tic
21151 (concat
21152 (make-string
21153 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21154 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21155 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21156 ? )
21157 @end group
21158 @group
21159 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21160 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21161 (tic-number
21162 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21163 (/ X-length tic-width)
21164 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21165 @end group
21166
21167 @group
21168 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21169 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21170 (insert "\n")
21171 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21172 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21173 @end group
21174 @end smallexample
21175
21176 @smallexample
21177 @group
21178 (defun print-graph
21179 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21180 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21181 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21182 @end group
21183
21184 @group
21185 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21186 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21187 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21188 each row is five units.
21189 @end group
21190
21191 @group
21192 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21193 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21194 each column."
21195 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
21196 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
21197 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
21198 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
21199 @end group
21200 @group
21201 (height-of-top-line
21202 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21203 height
21204 ;; @r{else}
21205 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21206 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
21207 @end group
21208 @group
21209 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
21210 (full-Y-label-width
21211 (length
21212 (concat
21213 (number-to-string
21214 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
21215 Y-axis-tic))))
21216 @end group
21217 @group
21218 (print-Y-axis
21219 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
21220 (graph-body-print
21221 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
21222 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
21223 @end group
21224 @end smallexample
21225 @end ifnottex
21226
21227 @c qqq
21228 @ignore
21229 Graphing Definitions Re-listed
21230
21231 @need 1250
21232 Here are all the graphing definitions in their final form:
21233
21234 @smallexample
21235 @group
21236 (defvar top-of-ranges
21237 '(10 20 30 40 50
21238 60 70 80 90 100
21239 110 120 130 140 150
21240 160 170 180 190 200
21241 210 220 230 240 250)
21242 "List specifying ranges for `defuns-per-range'.")
21243 @end group
21244
21245 @group
21246 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
21247 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
21248 @end group
21249
21250 @group
21251 (defvar graph-blank " "
21252 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
21253 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
21254 as graph-symbol.")
21255 @end group
21256
21257 @group
21258 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
21259 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
21260 @end group
21261
21262 @group
21263 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
21264 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
21265 @end group
21266
21267 @group
21268 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
21269 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
21270 @end group
21271
21272 @group
21273 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
21274 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
21275 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
21276 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
21277 @end group
21278 @end smallexample
21279
21280 @smallexample
21281 @group
21282 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
21283 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
21284 (beginning-of-defun)
21285 (let ((count 0)
21286 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
21287 @end group
21288
21289 @group
21290 (while
21291 (and (< (point) end)
21292 (re-search-forward
21293 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
21294 end t))
21295 (setq count (1+ count)))
21296 count))
21297 @end group
21298 @end smallexample
21299
21300 @smallexample
21301 @group
21302 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
21303 "Return list of definitions' lengths within FILE.
21304 The returned list is a list of numbers.
21305 Each number is the number of words or
21306 symbols in one function definition."
21307 @end group
21308
21309 @group
21310 (message "Working on `%s' ... " filename)
21311 (save-excursion
21312 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
21313 (lengths-list))
21314 (set-buffer buffer)
21315 (setq buffer-read-only t)
21316 (widen)
21317 (goto-char (point-min))
21318 @end group
21319
21320 @group
21321 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
21322 (setq lengths-list
21323 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
21324 (kill-buffer buffer)
21325 lengths-list)))
21326 @end group
21327 @end smallexample
21328
21329 @smallexample
21330 @group
21331 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
21332 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
21333 (let (lengths-list)
21334 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
21335 (while list-of-files
21336 (setq lengths-list
21337 (append
21338 lengths-list
21339 @end group
21340 @group
21341 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
21342 (lengths-list-file
21343 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
21344 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
21345 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
21346 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
21347 lengths-list))
21348 @end group
21349 @end smallexample
21350
21351 @smallexample
21352 @group
21353 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
21354 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
21355 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
21356 (number-within-range 0)
21357 defuns-per-range-list)
21358 @end group
21359
21360 @group
21361 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
21362 (while top-of-ranges
21363
21364 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
21365 (while (and
21366 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
21367 (car sorted-lengths)
21368 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
21369
21370 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
21371 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
21372 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
21373 @end group
21374
21375 @group
21376 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
21377
21378 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21379 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
21380 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
21381
21382 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
21383 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
21384 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
21385 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
21386 @end group
21387
21388 @group
21389 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
21390 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
21391 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21392 (cons
21393 (length sorted-lengths)
21394 defuns-per-range-list))
21395
21396 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
21397 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
21398 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
21399 @end group
21400 @end smallexample
21401
21402 @smallexample
21403 @group
21404 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
21405 "Return list of MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings;
21406 ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
21407 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
21408 of the list.
21409 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
21410 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
21411 @end group
21412
21413 @group
21414 (let ((insert-list nil)
21415 (number-of-top-blanks
21416 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
21417
21418 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
21419 (while (> actual-height 0)
21420 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
21421 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
21422 @end group
21423
21424 @group
21425 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
21426 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
21427 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
21428 (setq number-of-top-blanks
21429 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
21430
21431 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
21432 insert-list))
21433 @end group
21434 @end smallexample
21435
21436 @smallexample
21437 @group
21438 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
21439 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
21440 A numbered element looks like this ` 5 - ',
21441 and is padded as needed so all line up with
21442 the element for the largest number."
21443 @end group
21444 @group
21445 (let* ((leading-spaces
21446 (- full-Y-label-width
21447 (length
21448 (concat (number-to-string number)
21449 Y-axis-tic)))))
21450 @end group
21451 @group
21452 (concat
21453 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21454 (number-to-string number)
21455 Y-axis-tic)))
21456 @end group
21457 @end smallexample
21458
21459 @smallexample
21460 @group
21461 (defun print-Y-axis
21462 (height full-Y-label-width &optional vertical-step)
21463 "Insert Y axis by HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
21464 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
21465 Full width is the width of the highest label element.
21466 Optionally, print according to VERTICAL-STEP."
21467 @end group
21468 @group
21469 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
21470 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21471 (let ((start (point)))
21472 (insert-rectangle
21473 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width vertical-step))
21474 @end group
21475 @group
21476 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
21477 (goto-char start)
21478 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
21479 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
21480 @end group
21481 @end smallexample
21482
21483 @smallexample
21484 @group
21485 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
21486 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
21487 "Print ticks for X axis."
21488 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21489 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
21490 @end group
21491 @group
21492 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
21493 (insert (concat
21494 (make-string
21495 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21496 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
21497 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
21498 ? )
21499 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21500 @end group
21501 @group
21502 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
21503 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21504 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
21505 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
21506 @end group
21507 @end smallexample
21508
21509 @smallexample
21510 @group
21511 (defun X-axis-element (number)
21512 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
21513 (let ((leading-spaces
21514 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21515 (length (number-to-string number)))))
21516 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21517 (number-to-string number))))
21518 @end group
21519 @end smallexample
21520
21521 @smallexample
21522 @group
21523 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
21524 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21525 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21526 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21527 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
21528 @end group
21529 @group
21530 (let (from-position)
21531 (while numbers-list
21532 (setq from-position (point))
21533 (insert-rectangle
21534 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
21535 (goto-char from-position)
21536 (forward-char symbol-width)
21537 @end group
21538 @group
21539 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
21540 (sit-for 0)
21541 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
21542 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
21543 (forward-line height)
21544 (insert "\n")))
21545 @end group
21546 @end smallexample
21547
21548 @smallexample
21549 @group
21550 (defun Y-axis-column
21551 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
21552 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
21553 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21554 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
21555 @end group
21556 @group
21557 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
21558 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
21559 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
21560 that each line is five units of the graph."
21561 (let (Y-axis
21562 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
21563 @end group
21564 @group
21565 (while (> height 1)
21566 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21567 ;; @r{Insert label.}
21568 (setq Y-axis
21569 (cons
21570 (Y-axis-element
21571 (* height number-per-line)
21572 width-of-label)
21573 Y-axis))
21574 @end group
21575 @group
21576 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
21577 (setq Y-axis
21578 (cons
21579 (make-string width-of-label ? )
21580 Y-axis)))
21581 (setq height (1- height)))
21582 @end group
21583 @group
21584 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
21585 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
21586 (or vertical-step 1)
21587 width-of-label)
21588 Y-axis))
21589 (nreverse Y-axis)))
21590 @end group
21591 @end smallexample
21592
21593 @smallexample
21594 @group
21595 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21596 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21597 &optional horizontal-step)
21598 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21599 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21600 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21601 @end group
21602 @group
21603 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21604 ;; line up number
21605 (delete-char (- (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21606 (insert (concat
21607 (make-string
21608 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
21609 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21610 (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21611 2)
21612 ? )
21613 (number-to-string (* number horizontal-step))))
21614 @end group
21615 @group
21616 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21617 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21618 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21619 (insert (X-axis-element (* number horizontal-step)))
21620 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21621 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21622 @end group
21623 @end smallexample
21624
21625 @smallexample
21626 @group
21627 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21628 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21629 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21630 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21631 each column."
21632 @end group
21633 @group
21634 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21635 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21636 (let* ((leading-spaces
21637 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21638 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21639 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21640 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21641 @end group
21642 @group
21643 (X-tic
21644 (concat
21645 (make-string
21646 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21647 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21648 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21649 ? )
21650 @end group
21651 @group
21652 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21653 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21654 (tic-number
21655 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21656 (/ X-length tic-width)
21657 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21658 @end group
21659
21660 @group
21661 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21662 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21663 (insert "\n")
21664 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21665 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21666 @end group
21667 @end smallexample
21668
21669 @smallexample
21670 @group
21671 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
21672 "Return list, each number of which is 1/50th previous."
21673 (mapcar (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21674 @end group
21675 @end smallexample
21676
21677 @smallexample
21678 @group
21679 (defun print-graph
21680 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21681 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21682 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21683 @end group
21684
21685 @group
21686 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21687 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21688 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21689 each row is five units.
21690 @end group
21691
21692 @group
21693 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21694 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21695 each column."
21696 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
21697 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
21698 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
21699 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
21700 @end group
21701 @group
21702 (height-of-top-line
21703 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21704 height
21705 ;; @r{else}
21706 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21707 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
21708 @end group
21709 @group
21710 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
21711 (full-Y-label-width
21712 (length
21713 (concat
21714 (number-to-string
21715 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
21716 Y-axis-tic))))
21717 @end group
21718 @group
21719
21720 (print-Y-axis
21721 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
21722 (graph-body-print
21723 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
21724 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
21725 @end group
21726 @end smallexample
21727 @c qqq
21728 @end ignore
21729
21730 @page
21731 @node Final printed graph
21732 @appendixsubsec The Printed Graph
21733
21734 When made and installed, you can call the @code{print-graph} command
21735 like this:
21736 @sp 1
21737
21738 @smallexample
21739 @group
21740 (print-graph fiftieth-list-for-graph 50 10)
21741 @end group
21742 @end smallexample
21743 @sp 1
21744
21745 @noindent
21746 Here is the graph:
21747 @sp 2
21748
21749 @smallexample
21750 @group
21751 1000 - *
21752 **
21753 **
21754 **
21755 **
21756 750 - ***
21757 ***
21758 ***
21759 ***
21760 ****
21761 500 - *****
21762 ******
21763 ******
21764 ******
21765 *******
21766 250 - ********
21767 ********* *
21768 *********** *
21769 ************* *
21770 50 - ***************** * *
21771 | | | | | | | |
21772 10 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
21773 @end group
21774 @end smallexample
21775
21776 @sp 2
21777
21778 @noindent
21779 The largest group of functions contain 10--19 words and symbols each.
21780
21781 @node Free Software and Free Manuals
21782 @appendix Free Software and Free Manuals
21783
21784 @strong{by Richard M. Stallman}
21785 @sp 1
21786
21787 The biggest deficiency in free operating systems is not in the
21788 software---it is the lack of good free manuals that we can include in
21789 these systems. Many of our most important programs do not come with
21790 full manuals. Documentation is an essential part of any software
21791 package; when an important free software package does not come with a
21792 free manual, that is a major gap. We have many such gaps today.
21793
21794 Once upon a time, many years ago, I thought I would learn Perl. I got
21795 a copy of a free manual, but I found it hard to read. When I asked
21796 Perl users about alternatives, they told me that there were better
21797 introductory manuals---but those were not free.
21798
21799 Why was this? The authors of the good manuals had written them for
21800 O'Reilly Associates, which published them with restrictive terms---no
21801 copying, no modification, source files not available---which exclude
21802 them from the free software community.
21803
21804 That wasn't the first time this sort of thing has happened, and (to
21805 our community's great loss) it was far from the last. Proprietary
21806 manual publishers have enticed a great many authors to restrict their
21807 manuals since then. Many times I have heard a GNU user eagerly tell me
21808 about a manual that he is writing, with which he expects to help the
21809 GNU project---and then had my hopes dashed, as he proceeded to explain
21810 that he had signed a contract with a publisher that would restrict it
21811 so that we cannot use it.
21812
21813 Given that writing good English is a rare skill among programmers, we
21814 can ill afford to lose manuals this way.
21815
21816 Free documentation, like free software, is a matter of freedom, not
21817 price. The problem with these manuals was not that O'Reilly Associates
21818 charged a price for printed copies---that in itself is fine. The Free
21819 Software Foundation @uref{http://shop.fsf.org, sells printed copies} of
21820 free @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/doc.html, GNU manuals}, too.
21821 But GNU manuals are available in source code form, while these manuals
21822 are available only on paper. GNU manuals come with permission to copy
21823 and modify; the Perl manuals do not. These restrictions are the
21824 problems.
21825
21826 The criterion for a free manual is pretty much the same as for free
21827 software: it is a matter of giving all users certain
21828 freedoms. Redistribution (including commercial redistribution) must be
21829 permitted, so that the manual can accompany every copy of the program,
21830 on-line or on paper. Permission for modification is crucial too.
21831
21832 As a general rule, I don't believe that it is essential for people to
21833 have permission to modify all sorts of articles and books. The issues
21834 for writings are not necessarily the same as those for software. For
21835 example, I don't think you or I are obliged to give permission to
21836 modify articles like this one, which describe our actions and our
21837 views.
21838
21839 But there is a particular reason why the freedom to modify is crucial
21840 for documentation for free software. When people exercise their right
21841 to modify the software, and add or change its features, if they are
21842 conscientious they will change the manual too---so they can provide
21843 accurate and usable documentation with the modified program. A manual
21844 which forbids programmers to be conscientious and finish the job, or
21845 more precisely requires them to write a new manual from scratch if
21846 they change the program, does not fill our community's needs.
21847
21848 While a blanket prohibition on modification is unacceptable, some
21849 kinds of limits on the method of modification pose no problem. For
21850 example, requirements to preserve the original author's copyright
21851 notice, the distribution terms, or the list of authors, are ok. It is
21852 also no problem to require modified versions to include notice that
21853 they were modified, even to have entire sections that may not be
21854 deleted or changed, as long as these sections deal with nontechnical
21855 topics. (Some GNU manuals have them.)
21856
21857 These kinds of restrictions are not a problem because, as a practical
21858 matter, they don't stop the conscientious programmer from adapting the
21859 manual to fit the modified program. In other words, they don't block
21860 the free software community from making full use of the manual.
21861
21862 However, it must be possible to modify all the technical content of
21863 the manual, and then distribute the result in all the usual media,
21864 through all the usual channels; otherwise, the restrictions do block
21865 the community, the manual is not free, and so we need another manual.
21866
21867 Unfortunately, it is often hard to find someone to write another
21868 manual when a proprietary manual exists. The obstacle is that many
21869 users think that a proprietary manual is good enough---so they don't
21870 see the need to write a free manual. They do not see that the free
21871 operating system has a gap that needs filling.
21872
21873 Why do users think that proprietary manuals are good enough? Some have
21874 not considered the issue. I hope this article will do something to
21875 change that.
21876
21877 Other users consider proprietary manuals acceptable for the same
21878 reason so many people consider proprietary software acceptable: they
21879 judge in purely practical terms, not using freedom as a
21880 criterion. These people are entitled to their opinions, but since
21881 those opinions spring from values which do not include freedom, they
21882 are no guide for those of us who do value freedom.
21883
21884 Please spread the word about this issue. We continue to lose manuals
21885 to proprietary publishing. If we spread the word that proprietary
21886 manuals are not sufficient, perhaps the next person who wants to help
21887 GNU by writing documentation will realize, before it is too late, that
21888 he must above all make it free.
21889
21890 We can also encourage commercial publishers to sell free, copylefted
21891 manuals instead of proprietary ones. One way you can help this is to
21892 check the distribution terms of a manual before you buy it, and prefer
21893 copylefted manuals to non-copylefted ones.
21894
21895 @sp 2
21896 @noindent
21897 Note: The Free Software Foundation maintains a page on its Web site
21898 that lists free books available from other publishers:@*
21899 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/other-free-books.html}
21900
21901 @node GNU Free Documentation License
21902 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
21903
21904 @cindex FDL, GNU Free Documentation License
21905 @include doclicense.texi
21906
21907 @node Index
21908 @unnumbered Index
21909
21910 @ignore
21911 MENU ENTRY: NODE NAME.
21912 @end ignore
21913
21914 @printindex cp
21915
21916 @iftex
21917 @c Place biographical information on right-hand (verso) page
21918
21919 @tex
21920 \par\vfill\supereject
21921 \ifodd\pageno
21922 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
21923 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
21924 %\page\hbox{}\page
21925 \else
21926 % \par\vfill\supereject
21927 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
21928 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
21929 %\page\hbox{}%\page
21930 %\page\hbox{}%\page
21931 \fi
21932 @end tex
21933
21934 @c page
21935 @w{ }
21936
21937 @c ================ Biographical information ================
21938
21939 @w{ }
21940 @sp 8
21941 @center About the Author
21942 @sp 1
21943 @end iftex
21944
21945 @ifnottex
21946 @node About the Author
21947 @unnumbered About the Author
21948 @end ifnottex
21949
21950 @quotation
21951 Robert J. Chassell has worked with GNU Emacs since 1985. He writes
21952 and edits, teaches Emacs and Emacs Lisp, and speaks throughout the
21953 world on software freedom. Chassell was a founding Director and
21954 Treasurer of the Free Software Foundation, Inc. He is co-author of
21955 the @cite{Texinfo} manual, and has edited more than a dozen other
21956 books. He graduated from Cambridge University, in England. He has an
21957 abiding interest in social and economic history and flies his own
21958 airplane.
21959 @end quotation
21960
21961 @c @page
21962 @c @w{ }
21963 @c
21964 @c @c Prevent page number on blank verso, so eject it first.
21965 @c @tex
21966 @c \par\vfill\supereject
21967 @c @end tex
21968
21969 @c @iftex
21970 @c @headings off
21971 @c @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thistitle
21972 @c @oddheading @| @| @thispage
21973 @c @end iftex
21974
21975 @bye